Tender Document Warehouse (Financial)

KEWANGAN
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND

CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN
TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE
WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS
AND OPEN STORAGE SHED
TENDER NO.
SITE VISIT
CLOSE TENDER
:
:
:
TBPSB/TBPP/036/2014
22 MAY 2014
16 JUNE 2014
OWNER :
CONSULTANT :
TANJUNG BIN POWER

Tanjung Bin Power Sdn. Bhd.
Lot 1768 & 1770,
82030, Serkat,
Pontian,
Johor Darul Takzim.
No. Tel : 07-6972288
No. Faks : 07-6972200
JURUTERA PERUNDING MADANI SDN. BHD.

55-01,
Jalan Susur Larkin Perdana 1,
Taman Larkin Perdana,
80350 Johor Bahru,
Johor Darul Takzim.
No. Tel : 07-2355103
No. Faks : 07-2344103
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR

CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN
TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE
WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS AND OPEN STORAGE SHED
TABLE OF CONTENTS
THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL

STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP,
JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION
WORKS AND OPEN STORAGE SHED
TABLE OF CONTENT
SECTION I
INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS
FORM OF TENDER JKR 203B (Pind. 5/2008)
LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE JKR 203D (Pind. 8/2008)
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
PART
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO.
INSTRUCTIONS TO TENDERERS
17
FORM OF TENDER JKR 203B (Pind. 5/2008)
1 10
LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER JKR 203D (Pind. 8/2008)
14
1.
i)
1 51
ii)
APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
52 - 54
2. SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

i)
BANK GUARANTEE FORM FOR PERFORMANCE BOND
1-4

TABLE OF CONTENT
SECTION II
SPECIFICATIONS
MEASUREMENT OF AMPLICATION AND PRICING FACTOR
SCHEDULES OF DAYWORK RATES
SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT
PART
A
DESCRIPTION
PAGE NO.
1) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS
A/1 N/19
2) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

3) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
4) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL WORKS
B
C/17 C/18
III/B/1 III/B/18
BH1/1 BH2/5

TABLE OF CONTENT
SECTION III
PART
PRELIMINARIES
SITE CLEARANCE
PILING WORKS
UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
UPGRADING LUBE OIL / CHEMICAL STORAGE
OPEN STORAGE SHED
RECTIFICATION WORKS
ELECTRICAL WORKS
MECHANICAL WORKS
MISCELLANEOUS
PROVISIONAL SUM
LIST OF DRAWINGS USED IN THE PREPARATION OF BILLS OF
QUANTITIES
DESCRIPTION
SUMMARY OF TENDER
PAGE NO.
FS/1
A/1 A/79
PRELIMINARIES
SITE CLEARANCE
B/1/1 - SUMM/B/1
PILING WORKS
C/1/1 - SUMM/C/1
UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
D/1/1 - SUMM/D/1
E/1/1 - SUMM/E/1
OPEN STORAGE SHED
F/1/1 - SUMM/B/1
RECTIFICATION WORKS
G/1/1 - SUMM/G/1
ELECTRICAL WORKS
H/1/1 - SUMM/H/1
MECHANICAL WORKS
J/1/1 - SUMM/J/1
MISCELLANEOUS
K/1/1 - SUMM/K/1
PROVISIONAL SUMS
L/1/1 - SUMM/L/1
LIST OF DRAWINGS
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL
AND CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT,
JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS
SECTION I
A - INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS
B - FORM OF TENDER JKR 203B (PIND.5/2008)
C - LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE JKR 203D (PIND.8/2008)
D - CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION I PART A
INSTRUCTION TO TENDERERS
INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER
1.0
GENERAL
This Instruction to Tenderer, in so far as they may affect the execution of the
Contract, shall be deemed to be part of the Contract.
2.0
TENDER DOCUMENT AND FEES

The following documents will be issued to the Tenderer upon a payment of
the non-refundable documentation fees:a.
One (1) copy of Tender Document comprising of Instruction to

Tenderer, Form of Tender, Letter of Acceptance of Tender, Standard
Form of Contract and addendum thereto, General Specifications
and Addendum thereto, Forms and List of Drawings to be issued to
Tenderer, Summary of Tender, Measurement Amplification and
Pricing Factors, Preliminaries, Bills of Quantities and List of Drawings
used in the Preparation of Bills of Quantities.
b.
One (1) set of Tender Drawings.
The above Tender Documents may be obtained from:JURUTERA PERUNDING MADANI SDN. BHD.
55-01, Jalan Susur Larkin Perdana 1
Taman Larkin Perdana
80350, Johor Bahru,
Johor Darul Takzim.
Tel: 07 235 5103 / Fax: 07 234 4103
as of
upon payment of RM 300.00 ( Malaysian Ringgit :
Three Hundred Only ) as documentation charges and shall be made in the
form of Money Orders, Postal Order or Bankers Draft from a bank establish in
Malaysia and made payable to the JURUTERA PERUNDING MADANI SDN
BHD AND CROSSED Account Payee Only. Personal and Company
cheques shall not be accepted.
INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

3.0
TENDER DEPOSIT/VALIDITY PERIOD

Tender Deposit (Earnest money) for this tender is RM3,000.00 (Malaysian
Ringgit: Three Thousand Only). Tender Deposit shall be made in the form of
Money Orders, Postal Order or Bankers Draft from a bank establish in
Malaysia and made payable to the JURUTERA PERUNDING MADANI AND
CROSSED Account Payee Only. Personal and Company cheques shall not
be accepted.
Tender Deposit will be refunded to unsuccessful tenderers. The Tender
Deposit of the successful tenderer will not be refunded but will be utilised by
the Employer for the cost of preparing the Contract Documents charges,
etc.
Should the Tenderer withdraws his tender within the tender validity period or
refused to sign the Contract after it has been awarded to him then the
following disciplinary action will apply :-
4.0
a.
For the first default his registration as a Contractor will be suspended

for two (2) years and the Tender Deposit will be forfeited.
b.
For the second default his registration will be suspended for five (5)
years.
c.
For third default his registration will be cancelled.
TENDER TABLE DOCUMENTS

Tender Table Documents may be inspected during normal office hours at
the office of:Main Office,
TANJUNG BIN POWER,
Lot 1768 & 1770,
82030, Serkat,
Pontian,
Johor Darul Takzim.
or
55-01, Jalan Susur Larkin Perdana 1
Taman Larkin Perdana
80350, Johor Bahru,
Johor Darul Takzim.
Tel: 07 235 5103 / Fax: 07 234 4103
Tenderers shall be deemed to have made references to all the Tender Table
Documents and no claims for loss or expenses incurred for lack of
information owing to the non-availability of details inherent in the Tender
Drawings will be entertained.

5.0
BILLS OF QUANTITIES
The Bills of Quantities shall be priced in INK and the sums of the amounts of
all items of the Bills of Quantities priced by the Tenderer shall truly represent
the amount shown in his tender.
The rates set down by the Tenderer against each item in the Bills of
Quantities unless otherwise expressly provided to the contrary, shall be held
to include for providing and delivering all materials, unloading, cutting and
waste on materials, storage, packing carriage and cartage, hoisting, setting,
fittings and fixing in position, use of plant, making supervision, establishment
charges, profit and all other labour and everything else necessary for the
due and proper completion of each item.
Where the Tenderer leaves any item blank or insert a dash against any item
in the Bills of Quantities, the value thereof shall be deemed to be included in
the prices or rates or other item there in.
The successful Tenderer (if any) shall, whenever requested to do so by the
Superintending Officer, submit within seven (7) days a detail breakdown of
his unit prices of any item, group of items or all items of work in the Bills of
Quantities. The breakdown shall contain separately prices for labour,
materials, plant and equipment, etc.
No unauthorised alteration, addition or note entered in this Bills of Quantities
to modify the printed text.
6.0
SPECIAL PROVISION FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT

The special Provision for Advanced Payment will be in accordance with the
Special Provision to Conditions of Contract stated in Section 1 - Part D of this
document.
7.0
PERFORMANCE BOND
The successful Tenderer will be required to submit the Performance Bond
before the commencement of any work under the Contract, in either of:i.
Bank/Insurance Guarantee Bond which is equivalent to five percent

(5%) of the Contract Price, or
ii.
Performance Guarantee Sum where the Tenderer shall allow

deductions of ten percent (10%) from interim payment until the total
amount deducted aggregate to a sum equivalent to five percent
(5%) of the original Contract Sum for the due observance and
performance of this contract.
Tenderer will be required to choose which type of Performance Bond will be

use either Bank/Insurance Guarantee Bond or Performance Guarantee Sum.

8.0
INTERPRETATION OF TENDER DOCUMENT

If any Tenderer is in doubt as to the true meaning of the Tender Document or
part of the Tender Documents, he should at once notify the Superintending
Officer in writing a request clarification before submitting his Tender. Such
clarification will be valid if made the Superintending Officer by mean of
formal Tender Memorandum as described in Clause (9.0) hereof.
9.0
TENDER MEMORANDUM
Prior to the date of submission of the Tender, the Superintending Officer may
issue Tender Memorandum to clarify or modify the Tender Document in part
or in total. Every Tender Memorandum issue will be distributed to each
Tenderer and shall become part of the Tender Document. Receipt of each
Tender Memorandum must be acknowledged on the form issued with the
Tender Memorandum. Failure to acknowledge any Tender Memorandum
may render the Tender being rejected.
10.0
ORAL INTERPRETATION
Oral Interpretation of any of the Tender Document requested and received
by the Tenderer shall not be considered to modify any of the provisions of
the Tender Documents. Any clarification or modification to any of the
Documents shall be made in writing in the form Tender Memorandum.
11.0
NO ALTERATION, CONDITION OR QUALIFILICATION ALLOWED

The Tenderer is required to tender strictly in accordance with the Conditions
of Contract, Bills of Quantities, Drawings, specifications and any other
condition and/or documentation which constitutes the Tender Documents
and no alteration, condition or qualification shall be allowed to be made to
them. Any comments, which in the opinion of the Tenderer has to be made
as it may affect his Tender, must be made on a separate letter of statement
to be attached to the Tender Documents upon submission of the Tender.
12.0
MULTILATED OR DETACHED TENDER DOCUMENTS

The Tender Documents are not being detached, altered or mutilated. Any
submitted Tender Documents which is found to be detached, altered
and/or mutilated shall be rejected and the Tender disqualified. To his end, it
shall be the sole responsibility of the Tenderer to check through his Tender
Documents prior to the submission of his Tender.

13.0
COPYRIGHT
The Tenderer is to note that the copyrights of documents including those of
the Tender Documents shall be retained and remain with the respective
Consultants, Authors, Artists and/or the TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN BHD who
shall reserve the rights of legal action should any one of their copyrights be
infringed upon and to this end, the Tenderer shall remain fully responsible to
ensure strict confidentiality of all information, data and/or designs as
appearing in such documents as referred above and that their copyrights
shall in no way be infringed upon failing which the Tenderer shall remain
liable for all consequences arising thereof.
14.0
CONFIDENTIALITY OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

The Tender Documents collected by the Tenderer are meant strictly for the
purpose of submitting the Tender and all information, details and/or
drawings contained therein are to be treated as STRICTLY PRIVATE &
CONFIDENTIAL. All documents collected by the Tenderer must be returned
upon submission of the Tender irrespective of whether the Tenderer decided
to Tenderer not and the Tenderer shall be fully responsible and liable for all
consequences arising from failure to comply with this clause.
15.0
SCRUTINY OF TENDER TABLE DOCUMENTS

Upon collection of Tender Documents, it shall be the sole responsibility of
Tenderer to scrutinise such copies of the issued documents and satisfy himself
that they are exact copies of those included in the Tender Table Documents
and should any discrepancy be found in the copy supplied to the Tenderer,
it shall be the sole responsibility of the Tenderer to apply to the Officer in
charge of issuing and receiving the Tenders to have such discrepancy
rectified before the final date for the submission of the Tenders as stipulated.
No claims what so ever arising from failure to comply with the above shall be
entertained.
16.0
MAXIMUM COMPLETION PERIOD

a) The Maximum Completion Period for this project is 9 MONTHS.
b) Tenderers are advised to offer a suitable and reasonable completion
period but shall not be more than the maximum period fixed for the
project.
c) If the period offered is more than the fixed maximum period, the
tenderers offer SHALL NOT BE CONSIDERED.

17.0
THE TENDER
The Tenderer is required to complete the following which constitute his
tender:a)
The Form of Tenderer, including appendices there to
b)
The Bills of Quantities with every item legibly priced in INK and with
the amounts added up to form the Tender Sum.
Where documents to be signed by the Tenderer extend for more than one
page, each page of the individual forms shall be initialled by the Tenderer.
Failure by the Tenderer to submit any of the documents as stipulated above
shall render the tender liable for rejection.
18.0
SUBMISSION OF TENDER
The Tender Documents shall be dully completed, enclosed and sealed in an
enveloped bearing no identification of the Tenderer on the outside. The
sealed envelope shall be marked on the top right hand corner with the
following title:THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL
and delivered by hand or sent by prepaid registered post to:Main Office,
TANJUNG BIN POWER,
Lot 1768 & 1770,
82030, Serkat,
Pontian,
Johor Darul Takzim.
and to reach not later than 12.00 noon on 16/06/2014. Any tender delivered
after the stipulated date and time for what ever cause or reason shall be
disqualified. Not with standing the above, the TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN.
BHD. shall in no way be held liable for any loss or late tender submitted. Proof
of posting shall not be accepted as evidence for the submission of the
Tender.
19.0
COST OF TENDERING
The TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN. BHD. is not responsible for any cost or
expenses or losses incurred by the Tenderer in the preparation or submission
of his tender.

20.0
ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF TENDER

The TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN BHD reserved the right to accept or reject any
or all tenders. The TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN BHD does not bind itself to
accept the lowest or any tender nor to assign any reason for the rejection of
any tender.
21.0
NOTICE
Every notice to be given to the Tenderer may be posted to the Tenderers
registered address and such posting shall be deemed good service of such
noticed.
22.0
COMPLIANCE WITH CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

Non compliance with any or all of the above conditions including the
additional conditions of tendering appearing here in after shall render the
liable for rejection.
23.0
TENDERERS COMFIRMATION
The Tenderer further confirms that he has read through and understood the
Instruction to Tenderer as appearing on pages 1 to 7 and failure to comply
with any one of the Instructions and/or Conditions of Tendering incorporated
here in shall render his tender liable to be rejected.
Dated this _____________________ day of ____________________________ 2014
_________________________________
Signature of Tenderer
Name in full ______________________________
In the capacity of ___________________________
duly authorised to sign this tender for and on
behalf of:Witness ____________________________________
Name in full _________________________________
Occupation ________________________________
Address ____________________________________
____________________________________
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION I PART B
FORM OF TENDER
- JKR 203B Pin.5/2008
(J.K.R. 203B-Pind. 5/2008)

TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN. BHD.
BORANG TENDER
(FORM OF TENDER)
TENDER BAGI......................................................................................................................... ................
TENDER FOR
CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP,
JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS
mengikut Pelan-Pelan No ..................................................................................................................................

in accordance with Drawings No. AS PER LIST OF DRAWINGS USED IN THE PREPARATION
OF BILLS OF QUANTITIES
.
dan lain-lain pelan terperinci yang diberi untuk menerangkannya.
and any other detail drawings supplied in amplification thereof.
Salinan-salinan Dokumen Meja Tender yang merangkumi Perjanjian Kontrak,. Pelan-Pelan tersebut di
atas, Senarai Kuantiti dan/atau Spesifikasi dan Dokumen Tender yang lain boleh dilihat di tempat yang
dinyatakan dalam Notis Tender dalam masa waktu pejabat pada mana-mana hari bekerja hingga tarikh
akhir yang ditetapkan bagi penyerahan tender.
Copies of the Tender Table Documents comprising the Contract Agreement, the above-mentioned
Drawings, Bills of Quantities and/or Specification and other Tender Documents may be seen at the
place specified in the Tender Notice during office hours on any working day until the final date
fixed for the submission of tenders.
Kepada:
To
Pengurus Projek,
TANJUNG BIN POWER,
Tanjung Bin Power Sdn Bhd,
Lot 1768 & 1770,
82030, Serkat,
Pontian, Johor Darul Takzim.
(Pihak menerima tender)
TUAN,
Di bawah dan tertakluk kepada Syarat-Syarat Membuat Tender yang dilampirkan bersama ini, yang
bertandatangan di bawah ini adalah dengan ini membuat tender dan menawar untuk melaksana dan
menjalankan Kerja-Kerja dan peruntukan-peruntukan dan membekalkan semua buruh, bahan dan loji dan
segala benda dari tiap-tiap jenis yang masing-masing disebut, ditunjuk, diperihal dan dimaksudkan dalam,
atau yang hendaklah ditakrifkan daripada Dokumen Tender, yang hendaklah dilaksana dan dibekalkan olch
pihak Kontraktor, bagi Kerja-Kerja yang diperihalkan di atas, dengan menepati Dokumen Tender tersebut
bagi jumlah wang pukal yang disebutkan di bawah ini.
Under and subject to the Conditions of Tendering annexed hereto, the undersigned does hereby tender
and offer to execute and perform the Works and provisions and supply all labour, materials and plants and
everything of every kind respectively named, shown, described and alluded to in, or to be inferred from the
Tender Documents, to be executed and supplied on the part of the Contractor, for the Works above
described, in conformity with the said Tender Documents for the lump sum named herein below.
* Borang ini hendaklah digunakan jika kuantiti menjadi sebahagian daripada kontrak.
This form is to be used where quantities form part of the contract.
-1-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
2. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju menjadi terikat oleh dan tunduk kepada Syarat-Syarat
Kontrak dan Senarai Kuantiti yang terletak harganya dan/atau Spesifikasi tersebut dan bersetuju bahawa
sebelum Surat Setujuterima Tender dikeluarkan, harga atau kadarharga dalam Senarai Kuantiti hendaklah
diselaraskan oleh Pegawai Penguasa dengan memastikan kemunasabahannya tanpa mengubah amaun yang
dinyatakan di dalam Borang Tender.
The undersigned agrees to be bound by and submit to the Conditions of Contract and priced
Bills of Quantities and/or Specification and agrees that before the issuance of the Letter of
Acceptance, prices or rates in the Bill of Quantities shall be adjusted by the Superintending Officer
as to its reasonableness without altering the amount as stated in the Form of Tender.
Senarai Kuantiti yang terletak harganya tersebut, selepas diperbetulkan atau diselaraskan sebagaimana yang
diperuntukkan dalam Syarat-Syarat Kontrak, hendaklah menjadi asas bagi menilaikan bayaran interim dan
apa-apa perubahan yang mungkin diarahkan oleh Pegawai Penguasa dari semasa ke semasa.
The said priced Bills of Quantities after rectification or adjustment as by the Conditions of
Contract provide, shall form the basis of valuation for interim payment and any variation which
may from time to time be ordered by the Superintending Officer.
3. Dan selanjutnya, yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju menyiapkan Kerja-Kerja itu dalam
masa............................... hari/minggu/bulan * dari tarikh pemilikan tapakbina atau dalam apa-apa
tempoh lanjutan yang diperuntukkan dalam Syarat-Syarat Kontrak
And further, the undersigned agrees to complete the Work within . days/weeks/months * from the
date of possession of site or within such extended time as by the Conditions of Contract provided.
4. Jumlah amaun Tender ini ialah jumlah wang pukal sebanyak Ringgit Malaysia
The total amount of the Tender is the lump sum of Ringgit Malaysia
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
iaitu, RM...
i.e.
5. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini berharap dibenarkan membuat tender, dalam sedikit masa lagi bagi
kerja berikut yang mana dijalankan secara langsung oleh yang bertandatangan di bawah ini dalam
perjalanan biasa perniagaannya dan yang baginya Wang Kos Prima atau Wang Peruntukan Sementara telah
dimasukkan dalam amaun Tender ini:
The undersigned desires to be permitted to tender in due course, for the following work
which the undersigned in the ordinary course of business directly carries out and for which Prime
Cost or Provisional Sums have been included in the amount of this Tender:
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ ................................
................................................................................................................................................................
* Pentender dikehendaki memotong yang tidak berkenaan.
The tenderer to delete whichever is not applicable
-2-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
6. Bahawasanya adalah diketahui bahawa Pemilik sentiasa berhak menyetujuterima atau menolak
Tender ini, sama ada ianya lebih rendah atau lebih tinggi daripada tender-tender yang lain, atau sama
amaunnya. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju yang Tender ini akan berterusan sah dan tidak
akan ditarik balik dalam tempoh seratus lapan puluh (180) hari dari tarikh akhir yang ditetapkan bagi
penyerahan tender dan bersetuju bahawa tiada apa-apa had, syarat atau janjian lain akan dikenakan
oleh kami selepas tarikh tersebut.
Whereas it is understood that the Owner reserves the right to accept or to refuse this Tender,
whether it be lower or higher than any other tender, or of the same amount. The undersigned agrees
that this Tender shall remain valid and shall not be withdrawn within one hundred eighty (180) days
from the final date fixed for the submission of tenders and agrees that no other term, condition or
stipulation shall be imposed by us after the said date.
7. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini berniat, jika Tender ini disetujuterima, memilih salah satu
daripada bentuk Bon Pelaksanaan seperti berikut:
The undersigned intends, in the event of acceptance of this Tender, to choose one of the
following form of Performance Bond:
* (i)
Jaminan Bank/Bank Islam/Bank Pembangunan & Infrastruktur Malaysia Berhad (BPIMB) atau
Bank/Islamic Bank/Bank Pembangunan & Infrastruktur Malaysia Berhad Guarantee or
* (ii) Jaminan Syarikat Kewangan atau
Finance Company Guarantee or
*(iii) Jaminan Insurans/Takaful atau
Insurance/Takaful Guarantee or
*(iv)
Wang Jaminan Pelaksanaan yang dikenakan potongan sebanyak sepuluh peratus (10%)
daripada setiap bayaran interim sehingga mencapai jumlah lima peratus (5%) daripada Jumlah
Harga Kontrak.
Performance Guarantee Sum whereby ten percent (10%) of each interim payment shall be
deducted until the total amount deducted aggregate to a sum equivalent to five percent (5%)
of the Contract Sum.
8. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju, jika Tender ini disetujuterima, mendeposit dengan
seberapa segera yang praktik selepas penerimaan Surat Setujuterima Tender tetapi sebelum
bermulanya Kerja-Kerja, perkara-perkara berikut:
The undersigned agrees, in the event of acceptance of this Tender, to deposit as soon as is
practicable after the receipt of the Letter of Acceptance of Tender but before the commencement of the
Works, the following:
(a) Bon Pelaksanaan (jika pentender memilih kaedah Jaminan Bank/ Bank Islam/BPMB/bank
SME/Insurans/ Takaful atau Syarikat Kewangan sahaja) dan jikalau gagal dikemukakan pada
tarikh milik tapak, Pemilik berhak untuk melaksanakan kaedah Wang Jaminan Pelaksanaan;
Performance Bond (if the tenderer opts for Bank/Islamic Bank/BPMB/SME
Bank/Insurance/Takaful or Finance Company Guarantee) and failure to submit the said bond
by the date of possession of site shall entitle the Owner to implement the Performance
Guarantee Sum option;
* Pentender dikehendaki memotong yang tidak berkenaan.

The tenderer to delete whichever is not applicable
-3-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
(b) Polisi Insurans Tanggungan Awam (iaitu insurans terhadap bencana kepada orang-orang dan
kerosakan kepada harta) atau Nota Liputan berserta dengan resit bagi premium yang telah
dibayar;
Insurance Policy for Public Liability (ie. insurance against injury to persons and damage to
property) or the Cover Note together with receipt of premium paid in respect thereof;
(c) Polisi Insurans Kerja atau Nota Liputan berserta dengan resit bagi premium yang telah
dibayar;
Insurance Policy for Works or the Cover Note together with receipt of premium paid
inrespect thereof;
(d) Nombor pendaftaran di bawah Skim Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja (PERKESO); Registration
number under Employee's Social Security (SOCSO) Scheme;
Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini selanjutnya bersetuju mendeposit Polisi-polisi Insurans yang
berkenaan dalam tempoh tidak lewat daripada tiga puluh (30) hari selepas Nota Liputan diserahkan..
The undersigned further agrees to deposit the relevant Insurance Policies within a period of not
later than thirty (30) days after the Cover Notes has been submitted.
9. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju jika kerja-kerja gagal dimulakan dalam tempoh dua
(2) minggu dari tarikh milik tapak, pengambilan kerja di bawah kontrak akan ditamatkan sejajar
dengan Fasal 51(b)(i) Syarat-Syarat Kontrak.
The undersigned agrees that if the undersigned fails to commence works within two (2) weeks
from the date of possession, his employment under the Contract shall be determined in accordance
with Clause 51(b)(i) of the Conditions of Contract.
10. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini dengan ini juga bersetuju bahawa Borang Tender ini berserta
Surat Setujuterima Tender (jika ada) hendaklah menjadi kontrak yang mengikat antara kita.
The undersigned hereby also agrees that this Form of Tender together with the Letter of
Acceptance of Tender (if any) shall constitute a binding contract between us.
11. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini mengesahkan, selepas menyemak sendiri, bahawa dokumendokumen dan pelan-pelan yang digunakan oleh yang bertandatangan di bawah ini untuk menyusun
Tender ini adalah salinan-salinan yang sebenarnya bagi dokumen-dokumen dan pelan-pelan yang
dimasukkan dalam Dokumen Meja Tender.
The undersigned confirms, after a personal scrutiny, that the documents and drawings used by the
undersigned in compiling this Tender are true copies of the documents and drawings included in the
Tender Table Documents.
12. Yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju bahawa:
The undersigned agrees that:
(a) jika Tender ini ditarik balik sebelum tamatnya Tempoh Sah Tender atau apa-apa tempoh
lanjutan, atau
it this Tender is withdrawn before the expiry of the Tender Validity Period or any extended
period thereof, or
(b) jika yang bertandatangan di bawah ini mengenakan apa-apa had, syarat atau janjian
tambahan kepada Tender ini selepas tarikh akhir yang ditetapkan bagi penyerahan tender
atau
if the undersigned imposes any additional term, condition or stipulation to the Tender
after the final date fixed for the submission of tenders or,
-4-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
(c) jika sekiranya Tender telah disetujuterima, yang bertandatangan di bawah ini enggan dan
tidak melaksanakan Perjanjian Kontrak yang formal atau mendeposit Bon Pelaksanaan (jika
pentender memilih kaedah Jaminan Bank/Bank Islam/BPIMB/Insurans/Takaful atau Syarikat
Kewangan sahaja) sebagaimana dikehendaki oleh Syarat-Syarat Kontrak atau tidak
meneruskan Kerja-Kerja, maka, dalam mana-mana hal itu, tanpa menyentuh apa-apa hak lain
yang ada padanya, Pemilik sentiasa berhak mengambil tindakan tatatertib terhadap yang
bertandatangan di bawah ini atau membatalkan pendaftaran yang bertandatangan di bawah ini
sebagai Kontraktor Pemilik, sebagaimana difikirkan perlu oleh Pemilik.
in the event that the Tender having been accepted, the undersigned refuses and fails to
execute the formal Contract Agreement or to deposit the Performance Bond (if the
tenderer opts for Bank/Islamic Bank/BPIMB/Insurance/Takaful or Finance Company
Guarantee) as required by the Conditions of Contract or fails to proceed with the Works,
then, in any of such event, without prejudice to any other rights it may possess, the
Owner reserves the right to take disciplinary action against the under signed or to cancel
the registration of the undersigned as a Owner contractor, as the Owner deems fit.
Bertarikh pada................ haribulan......... 20....

Dated this day of 20
..................................................................
Tandatangan Pentender
Signature of Tenderer
Nama Penuh : ...........................................
Name in full
Atas sifat : ...............................................
In the capacity of
yang diberikuasa dengan sempurnanya
untuk menandatangani Tender ini untuk
dan bagi pihak:
duly authorised to sign this Tender for and
on behalf of:
.................................................................
Meterai atau cap Pentender
Tenderer's seal or chop
Saksi : ......................................................
Witness
Nama Penuh : ..........................................
Name in full
Pekerjaan : ................................................
Occupation
Alamat : ...................................................
Address
..................................................................
SYARAT-SYARAT MEMBUAT TENDER
-5-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
(CONDITIONS OF TENDERING)
1.
Keseluruhan Kerja-Kerja yang dinyatakan dalam Dokumen Tender yang ditunjukkan di atas Meja
Tender (kemudian dari ini disebut "Dokumen Meja Tender") akan diberi secara Kontrak.
The whole of the Works set forth in the Tender Documents exhibited on the Tender Table
(hereinafter referred to as the "Tender Table Documents") will be let on Contract.
2.
(a) Tiap-tiap pentender mestilah menyerahkan, dalam suatu sampul surat bertutup dan bermeterai
yang dialamatkan sebagaimana ditetapkan dalam Notis Tender, suatu tender yang sah dalam
Borang Tender yang diperuntukkan, bersama dengan salinan Senarai
Kuantiti yang diisi dan ditandatangani dengan sempurnanya. Borang Tender yang tak lengkap
atau tak bertandatangan akan ditolak.
Each tenderer must submit, enclosed and sealed in an envelope addressed as stipulated in the
Tender Notice, a genuine tender on the Form of Tender provided, together with the copy of the
Bills of Quantities duly filled in and signed. Form of Tender which is incomplete or unsigned shall
be disqualified.
(b) Tiap-tiap pentender mestilah mencatitkan, dalam ruang yang diperuntukkan dalam Borang
Tender, masa yang akan dikehendakinya bagi menyiapkan Kerja-Kerja itu. Each tenderer must
enter, in the space provided on. the Form of Tender, the time he will require to complete the
Works.
(c) Pentender hendaklah meletakkan harga dalam Senarai Kuantiti yang hendaklah diisi dengan
dakwat dan ditandatangani dengan sempurnanya oleh pentender. Sebelum Surat Setujuterima
Tender dikeluarkan, harga atau kadarharga dalam Senarai Kuantiti hendaklah diselaraskan oleh
Pegawai Penguasa dengan memastikan kemunasabahannya tanpa mengubah amaun yang
dinyatakan di dalam Borang Tender.
The tenderer shall price the Bills of Quantities which shall be duly filled in ink and signed by the
tenderer. Before the issuance of the Letter of Acceptance, prices or rates in the Bill of Quantities
shall be adjusted by the Superintending Officer as to its reasonableness without altering the
amount as stated in the Form of Tender.
3. Jika mana-mana pentender:

Should any tenderer:
(a) menarik balik tendernya sebelum tamat Tempoh Sah Tender atau apa-apa tempoh lanjutan,
atau
withdraw his tender before the expiry of the Tender Validity Period or any extended period
thereof, or
(b) mengenakan had, syarat atau janjian tambahan selepas tarikh akhir yang ditetapkan bagi
penyerahantender (dan dalam hal yang sedemikian ianya hendaklah disifatkan sebagai
penarikan balik tender ini ), atau
impose additional terms, conditions or stipulations after the final date fixed for theSubmission
of tenders (in which case it shall be deemed to be a withdrawal of this tender), or
-6-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
(c) jika sekiranya tender telah disetujuterima, enggan dan tidak melaksanakan Perjanjian Kontrak
yang formal atau mendeposit Bon Pelaksanaan (jika pentender memilih kaedah Jaminan
Bank/ Bank Islam/BPIMB/Insurans/Takaful atau Syarikat Kewangan sahaja) atau
tidak meneruskan Kerja-Kerja;
whose tender has been accepted, refuse and fail to execute the format Contract Agreement or
to deposit the Performance Bond (if the tenderer opts for Bank/Islamic
Bank/BPIMB/Insurance/Takaful or Finance Company Guarantee) or fails to proceed with
the Works;
maka, dalam mana-mana hal itu, Pemilik hendaklah, tanpa menyentuh apa-apa hak lain yang ada
padanya, sentiasa berhak mengambil tindakan tatatertib terhadap yang bertandatangan di bawah
ini atau membatalkan pendaftaran pentender sebagai Kontraktor Pemilik, sebagaimana difikirkan
perlu oleh Pemilik.
then, in any of such events, the Owner, without prejudice to any other rights it may possess,
reserves the right to take disciplinary action against the undersigned or to cancel the registration
of the tenderer as a Owner contractor, as the Owner deems fit.
4. Tiada apa-apa perubahan atau tambahan yang tidak dibenarkan boleh dibuat kepada Borang
Tender atau mana-mana Dokumen Tender yang lain.
No unauthorised alteration or addition shall be made to the Form of Tender or any other Tender
Documents.
5.
(a)
Tender-tender dan dokumen-dokumen berhubung dengannya yang dinyatakan dalam

Klausa 2 di atas, mestilah diserahkan di tempat dan pada atau sebelum masa yang
ditetapkan dalam Notis Tender bagi penyerahan tender.
Tenders and documents in connection therewith as specified in Clause 2 above, must
be delivered to the place and at or before the time stipulated in the Tender Notice for
the submission of Tenders.
(b)
Jika sesuatu tender tidak diserahkan dengan tangan, pentender mestilah menguruskan
bagi tendernya dan dokumen-dokumennya yang lain dihantar dengan pos supaya
sempat sampai di tempat yang ditetapkan tidak lewat dari masa yang ditetapkan.
In the case of a tender not being delivered by hand, the tenderer must arrange for his
tender and other documents to be posted in time to reach the stipulated place not later
than the stipulated time.
(c)
Mana-mana tender yang diserahkan selepas masa yang ditetapkan, berbangkit dari apa
jua sebab, tidak akan dipertimbangkan.
Any tender delivered after the stipulated time, from whatever cause arising, will not be
considered.
(d)
Tiada apa-apa jua perbelanjaan yang ditanggung oleh pentender bagi menyediakan
tendernya boleh dibayar kepadanya.
In no case will any expenses incurred by a tenderer in the preparation of his tender be
allowed.
-7-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
6. Jika sekiranya atas permintaannya, seseorang pentender diberikan salinan-salinan sesuatu

Dokumen Tender, maka adalah menjadi tanggungjawabnya seorang diri untuk meneliti salinan-salinan
itu dan memuaskan hatinya bahawa salinan-salinan itu adalah sebenarnya salinan-salinan dokumen
yang termasuk dalam Dokumen Meja Tender. Jika sekiranya terdapat apa-apa perbezaan atau
percanggahan antara mana-mana salinan yang diberi kepada pentender dengan salinan dalam
Dokumen Meja Tender atau antara mana-mana dokumen yang termasuk di dalamnya, maka adalah
menjadi tanggungjawabnya seorang diri untuk memohon secara bertulis kepada Pegawai Penguasa
supaya dibetulkan perbezaan atau percanggahan itu tidak lewat dari tujuh (7) hari sebelum tarikh akhir
yang ditetapkan dalam Notis Tender bagi penyerahan tender. Apa-apa jawapan yang hendak dibuat
oleh Pegawai Penguasa atas permohonan itu hendaklah dibuat dengan cara Memorandum Tender yang
hendaklah dihantar kepada semua pentender. Memorandum Tender itu hendaklah menjadi sebahagian
daripada Dokumen Tender dan Tender yang diterima akan disifatkan sebagai berdasarkan pada
huraian, ubahsuaian atau perluasan kepada dokumen asal yang mengandunginya.
In the event of any tenderer being supplied at his request, with copies of any of the Tender
Documents, it shall be the sole responsibility of the tenderer to scrutinize such copies and satisfy
himself that they are exact copies of those included in the Tender Table Documents. In the event of
any difference or discrepancy being found between any such copies supplied to the tenderer and those
in the Tender Table Documents or between any documents included therein, it shall be the sole
responsibility of the tenderer to apply in writing to the Superintending Officer, to have the difference
or discrepancy rectified, not later than seven (7) days before the final date fixed in the Tender Notice
for the submission of tenders. Any reply the Superintending Officer may make to such application
shall be by way of a Tender Memorandum which will be sent to all tenderers. Such Tender
Memorandum shall become part of the Tender Documents and Tenders received will be deemed to
have been based on the explanations, modification or extension to the original document that they
contain.
7. Pentender hendaklah disifatkan telah memeriksa dan meneliti Tapakbina dan sekitarnya dan telah
berpuas hati sebelum menyerahkan tendernya tentang jenis bumi dan lapisan tanah, bentuk dan jenis
Tapakbina, takat dan jenis kerja, bahan dan barang yang perlu bagi menyiapkan Kerja-kerja, cara-cara
perhubungan dengan dan akses ke Tapakbina, tempat tinggal yang mungkin dikehendaki dan pada
amnya hendaklah mendapatkan sendiri segala maklumat yang perlu tentang risiko, luarjangka dan
segala hal keadaan yang mempengaruhi dan menjejaskan tendernya.
The tenderer shall be deemed to have inspected and examined the Site and its surroundings and to
have satisfied himself before submitting his tender as to the nature of the ground and sub-soil, the
form and nature of the Site, the extent and nature of the work, materials and goods necessary for the
completion of the Works, the means of communication with and access to the Site, the accommodation
he may require and in general to have obtained for himself all necessary information as to risks,
contingencies and all circumstances influencing and affecting his tender.
8. Tender-tender hendaklah terus sah selama tempoh seratus lapan puluh (180) hari dari tarikh akhir
bagi penyerahan tender sebagaimana yang ditetapkan dalam Notis Tender (dalam Syarat-Syarat
Membuat Tender ini disebut "Tempoh Sah Tender") dan tempoh ini boleh dengan persetujuan
bersama dilanjutkan jika dan apabila perlu.
Tenders shall remain valid for a period of one hundred and eighty (180) days from the final date
for submission of tenders stipulated in the Tender Notice (herein referred to as the "Tender Validity
Period") and such period may by mutual agreement be extended as and when necessary.
-8-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
9.
Pemilik tidak boleh terikat menyetujuterima tender yang rendah sekali atau sesuatu tender dan
juga tidak terikat untuk memberi apa-apa sebab atas penolakan sesuatu tender.
The Owner shall not be bound to accept the lowest or any tender, nor to assign any reason for the
rejection of any tender.
10. Pentender yang berjaya (jika ada) hendaklah diberitahu tentang tendernya dengan surat (disebut
"Surat Setujuterima Tender") dalam Tempoh Sah Tender atau apa-apa tempuh lanjutan. Pentender
tersebut hendaklah dengan seberapa segera yang praktik tetapi sebelum bermulanya Kerja mendeposit
dengan Pegawai Penguasa, perkara-perkara berikut:
The successful tenderer (if any) shall be notified of his tender by a letter (referred to as "Letter
of Acceptance of Tender") within the Tender Validity Period or any extended period thereof. The said
tenderer shall so soon as is practicable but before the commencement of the Works deposit with the
Superintending Officer the following:
(a)
Bon Pelaksanaan (jika pentender memilih kaedah Jaminan Bank/Bank Islam/BPIMB/Insurans/

Takaful or Syarikat Kewangan sahaja) berjumlah sebanyak 5% daripada Jumlah Harga Kontrak
dan jikalau gagal dikemukakan pada tarikh milik tapak, Kerajaan berhak untuk melaksanakan
kaedah Wang Jaminan Pelaksanaan;
Performance Bond (if the tenderer opts for Bank/Islamic Bank/BPIMB/Insurance/Takaful or
Finance Company Guarantee) amounting to 5% of Contract Sum and failure to submit the said
bond by the date of possession of site, shall entitle the Owner to implement the Performance
Guarantee Sum option;
(b)
Polisi Insurans Tanggungan Awam (iaitu insurans terhadap bencana kepada orang-orang atau
kerosakan kepada harta) atau Nota Liputan berserta dengan resit bagi premium yang telah
dibayar;
Insurance Policy for Public Liability (i.e. insurance against injury to persons or damage to
property) or Cover Note together with receipt of premium paid in respect thereof,
(c)
Polisi Insurans Kerja atau Nota Liputan berserta dengan resit bagi premium yang telah dibayar;
Insurance Policy for Works) or Cover Note together with receipt of premium paid in respect
thereof;
(d)
Nombor pendaftaran di bawah Skim Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja (PERKESO);

Registration numbers under the Employee's Social Security (SOCSO) Scheme.
Pentender tersebut hendaklah selanjutnya mendeposit Polisi-polisi Insurans yang berkenaan dalam
tempoh tidak lewat daripada tiga puluh (30) hari selepas Nota Liputan diserahkan.
The said tenderer shall further deposit the relevant Insurance Policies within a period of not later
than thirty (30) days after the Cover Notes has been submitted.
11. Semua jadual butir-butir yang dilampirkan kepada Dokumen Tender hendaklah diisi dan
diserahkan oleh pentender berserta dengan tendernya.
All schedules of particulars attached to the Tender Documents shall be completed and
submitted by the tenderer together with his tender.
12. Tiap-tiap notis yang hendak diberi kepada pentender bolehlah diposkan ke alamatnya yang
dinyatakan dalam tender itu dan pengeposan itu hendaklah disifatkan sebagai penyampaian yang
sempurna akan notis itu.
Every notice to be given to a tenderer may be posted to the tenderer's address given in the
tender and such posting shall be deemed good service of such notice.
-9-
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
13.
Perkataan-perkataan "pentender yang berjaya" hendaklah bererti bahawa pentender yang mana
tendernya telah diluluskan dan disetujuterima oleh Pemilik.
The words "successful tenderer" shall mean that the tenderer whose tender has been approved
and accepted by the Owner.
14. Perkataan "pentender" dalam Syarat-Syarat ini hendaklah disifatkan sebagai termasuk dua orang
atau lebih.
'The word "tenderer" in these conditions shall be deemed to include two or more persons.
15. Jika pentender tidak mematuhi Syarat-Syarat tersebut di atas mengenai apa-apa jua hal maka
tendernya boleh ditolak.
Non-compliance with the above conditions in any respect shall render the tender liable to
rejection..
16. Syarat-Syarat Membuat Tender ini, setakat mana Syarat-Syarat itu mungkin menyentuh
pelaksanaan Kontrak ini, hendaklah disifatkan menjadi sebahagian daripada Kontrak ini.
These Conditions of Tendering, in so far as they affect the execution of the Contract, shall be
deemed to form part of the Contract.
- 10 -
JKR 203-Pind.5/2008
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION I PART C
LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE
- JKR 203D Pin.8/2008
(J.K.R 203D Pind. 8/2008)
TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN BHD

SURAT SETUJU TERIMA TENDER
Pejabat: .
..
..
..
Tarikh:
Rujukan:
Kepada: ..
..
..
..
(Kontraktor)
(Berdaftar dengan CIDB dalam Kelas "G5 & G6")
Tuan,
Tender untuk

STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL
TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS AND OPEN
STORAGE SHED
Dengan ini adalah diberitahu bahawa Tender tuan bagi kerja-kerja tersebut di atas berharga
Ringgit:....
iaitu RM disetujuterima, tertakluk kepada had, syarat dan perjanjian
dalam Dokumen Tender yang menjadi asas Tender ini dan juga kepada surat ini.
2.
Tuan dikehendaki melaksanakan Perjanjian Kontrak yang formal dalam sedikit masa
lagi. Bagaimanapun, sehinggalah Perjanjian Kontrak yang formal itu dilaksanakan, Tender
tuan berserta Surat Setujuterima Tender ini akan menjadi kontrak yang sah mengikat di
antara tuan dan Kerajaan.
3.
Tuan dikehendaki menyatakan pilihan kaedah Bon Pelaksanaan sama ada :(i)
(ii)
Jaminan Bank / Bank Islam /Bank Pembangunan & Infrastruktur Malaysia

Berhad (BPIMB) atau
Jaminan Syarikat Kewangan atau
* Batalkan yang mana tidak berkenaan.
(iii)
Jaminan Insurans/ Takaful
4.
Tarikh milik tapak bina, seperti yang disebutkan dalam Syarat-syarat Kontrak,
ialah pada............................................... Walau bagaimanapun, tuan hanya boleh memulakan
kerja setelah tuan menyerahkan kepada Pegawai Penguasa perkara-perkara berikut:(a)
Polisi lnsurans Tanggungan Awam (iaitu insurans terhadap bencana kepada

orang-orang dan kerosakan kepada harta) nilai insurans tidak kurang daripada
RM..............................
(b)
Polisi Insurans Kerja: RM.
(c)
Nombor-nombor pendaftaran di bawah Skim Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja

(PERKESO)
Walau bagaimanapun, bagi memulakan kerja-kerja dan bukan maksud lain, tuan boleh
menyerahkan Nota-nota Liputan bagi maksud polisi-polisi insurans tersebut dan resit-resit
premium yang telah dibayar itu kepada Pegawai Penguasa. Tuan dikehendaki menyerahkan
Polisipolisi Insurans yang berkenaan (jika belum diserahkan) menurut perenggan 4 di atas,
dalam tempoh tidak lewat daripada tiga puluh (30) hari selepas Nota-nota Liputan
diserahkan.
5.
Sekiranya tuan memilih kaedah di para 3(i), 3(ii) atau 3(iii), tuan hendaklah
menyerahkan Bon Pelaksanaan bernilai RM .. dan jikalau gagal
dikemukakan pada tarikh milik tapak, Kerajaan berhak untuk melaksanakan kaedah Wang
Jaminan Pelaksanaan.
6.
Kegagalan tuan memulakan kerja dalam tempoh dua (2) minggu dari tarikh milik
tapak akan mengakibatkan pengambilan kerja tuan di bawah kontrak ditamatkan sejajar
dengan Fasal 38.1 Syarat-syarat Kontrak.
7.
Pihak tuan juga dikehendaki untuk mengemukakan senarai nama-nama subkontraktor
berserta pengalamannya dengan menyatakan bahagian-bahagian kerja yang terlibat kepada
Pegawai Penguasa sebelum memulakan kerja di tapak bina untuk kelulusan. Sejajar dengan
klausa 44, Syarat-syarat kontrak tuan tidak boleh mengsub-kontrakkan keseluruhan kerja
ataupun sebahagian tanpa kelulusan Pegawai Penguasa terlebih dahulu. Sekiranya Pegawai
Penguasa meluluskan permohonan tuan untuk mengsub-kontrakkan sebahagian kerja atau
keseluruhan kerja, kelulusan tersebut adalah tertakluk kepada kontraktor mengikat
perjanjian penyerahan hak (Deed Of Assigment) dengan subkontraktor terlebih dahulu.
8.
Berdasarkan kepada Tempoh Siap Kerja yang ditenderkan selama
hari/minggu/bulan *, Tarikh Siap untuk seluruh kerja-kerja di bawah kontrak ini ialah
..
9.
Surat ini dihantar kepada tuan dalam dua (2) salinan. Sila kembalikan salinan asal,
yang telah ditandatangani oleh tuan dan disaksikan dengan sempurna, di ruang yang
berkenaan, ke pejabat ini dalam tempoh tujuh (7) hari dari tarikh surat ini.
..............................................
(Tandatangan Pegawai)
Nama Penuh:..............................
Nama Jawatan:............................
Untuk dan bagi pihak Pemilik.
Dengan ini yang bertandatangan di bawah ini bersetuju dengan syarat-syarat di atas dan
mengaku penerimaan surat di atas dan salinannya telah disimpan.
.........................................
Tandatangan Kontraktor
...................................................
Tandatangan Saksi
Nama Penuh: .....................................
Nama Penuh: ...........................................
Atas Sifat:...........................................
Nama Jawatan: ........................................

Alamat:.....................................................
diberikan dengan sempurna untuk

menandatangani untuk dan bagi pihak:
.................................................................
.................................................................
..................................................
Meterai atau Cop Kontraktor
Tarikh: ...................................................
Tarikh: ....................................................
* Batalkan yang mana tidak berkenaan.
s. k.
1) Ketua Eksekutif,
Lembaga Pembangunan Industri Pembinaan Malaysia,
7th Floor, Grand Season Avenue,
72, Jalan Pahang,
53000 Kuala Lumpur.
2) Pengurus Pejabat Tempatan,
PERKESO Menara Perkeso,
Lot 280, Jalan Ampang,
50538 Kuala Lumpur.
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION I PART D
CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT - SPECIAL PROVISION
THIS FORM OF CONTRACT made this
day of
2014
BETWEEN
TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN. BHD.(Company No.459016-X) a company incorporated under the
laws of Malaysia and having its business address at Level 10, Block 4, Plaza Sentral, Jalan
Stesen Sentral 5, 50470 Kuala Lumpur (hereinafter referred to as Employer ) of the one part;
AND
[**] (Company No. **) a company incorporated under the laws of Malaysia and having its
business address at [**](hereinafter referred to as the Contractor) of the other part.
Both the Employer and the Contractor shall be collectively referred to as the Parties and
individually as the Party.
WHEREAS, the Employer has awarded the Contractor and the Contractor has accepted the
award of the Contract for the [**] (hereinafter referred to as the Project) on a design and
build basis in accordance with the terms and conditions mentioned therein.
WHEREAS, the following documents (collectively hereinafter referred to as Contract
Documents) listed in the order of priority shall be deemed to form one contract and shall be
complimentary to one another:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Terms and Conditions of Contract

Letter of Award
Contractors Tender Submission received on [**]
In the event of there being any conflict between these Contract Documents, the Contract
Documents shall take precedence according to the order in which they are listed above.
In this Contract words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Terms and Conditions of Contract above referred to.
NOW IT IS AGREED AS FOLLOWS:1.
SCOPE OF CONTRACT
For the consideration hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor subject to the terms and
conditions annexed hereto shall carry out the Works consisting of the following:
Contract for the [**].
2.
COVENANT TO COMPLETE WORKS

In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as
hereinafter mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to
construct and complete the Works and make good any defects whatsoever to the
works in conformity in all aspects with the provisions of this Contract.
3.
CONTRACT VALUE
The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
construction and completion of the Works and making good of any defects
whatsoever to the Works the Contract Value being Ringgit Malaysia [**] Only (RM **).
Page 1
TERMS AND CONDITIONS

OF CONTRACT
Page 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
51.
52.
SCOPE AND APPLICATION

INTERPRETATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
EMPLOYERS PROJECT MANAGER AND EMPLOYERS ENGINEER
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
SITE
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
DOCUMENTATION
DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
EMPLOYERS OBLIGATIONS
DATE OF COMPLETION
CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL
SETTING OUT AT SITE AND CLOSED-OUT
QUALITY ASSURANCE
ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS, DANGEROUS GOODS AND OCCUPATIONAL
SAFETY AND HEALTH AND ANTIQUITIES AND FOSSILS
PROGRAMME
PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
PAYMENT TERMS
THE CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS AND WARRANTIES
TECHNICAL ADVICE AND SUPPORT SERVICE CENTRE
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
RIGHT OF USE
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
GUARANTEE AND GUARANTEE PERIOD
TAXES AND DUTIES
SPARE PARTS
INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
INSURANCE
POWER PLANT OPERATION
TEST AND INSPECTION
REJECTION
EXTENSION OF TIME
VARIATION
LOSS AND EXPENSE
AMENDMENT TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
DEDUCTION OF PAYMENT DUE
CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY AND MATERIAL
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT WITHOUT CAUSE
STAMP DUTY AND DOCUMENTATION COST
LANGUAGE
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
FORCE MAJEURE
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND SEVERABILITY
WAIVER
DISPUTE RESOLUTION AND GOVERNING LAW
CONFIDENTIALITY, PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENTS AND PRESS
NOTICES
RELATIONSHIP OF PARTIES
TITLES AND HEADINGS
SUCCESSORS BOUND
4
4
9
11
12
13
14
14
15
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
24
27
27
30
30
31
33
33
34
34
37
38
38
38
39
41
41
42
42
43
44
46
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
49
50
50
51
51
51
Page 3
1.
SCOPE AND APPLICATION

These Terms and Conditions of Contract shall apply to the Works performed by
the Contractor as specified in the Appendix.
2.
INTERPRETATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
2.1
Interpretations
In the interpretation of the Contract, unless the context requires otherwise:
Words importing the singular also include the plural and vice versa where the
context requires.
Any gender includes every gender.
Words importing persons include firms, companies, associations, partnerships,
Government Authorities and other legal entities.
Reference to statutes includes reference to statutes amending, consolidating
and replacing the statutes referred to and all regulation, orders-in-council,
rules, by-laws and ordinances made under those statutes.
Reference to a party to the Contract includes reference to its successors and
permitted assigns.
Reference to sections of statutes or terms defined in statutes includes
reference to corresponding sections or defined terms in amended,
consolidated or replacement statutes.
Where any word or phrase is given a defined meaning, any other
grammatical form of that word or phrase has a corresponding meaning.
No rule of construction applies to the disadvantage of a party because that
party was responsible for the preparation of the Contract or any part of it.
2.2
Definitions
The following expressions shall have the following meanings unless expressly
stated otherwise:
Acceptance means the acceptance of the Works by the Employer by the
issuance of the Provisional Acceptance Certificate.
Appendix means the appendix to these Terms and Conditions of Contract.
Associated Equipment means ancillary equipment not specifically and
separately mentioned in the Contract but which are indispensably necessary
or which may become contingently necessary in order to provide a complete
design, engineering, procurement, supply, delivery, permitting, construction,
Installation, system integration, testing and commissioning of the Equipment
and the provision of training and technical assistance and supply of spare
parts therefor.
Page 4
Contract means the agreement concluded between the Employer and the
Contractor incorporating the Form of Contract, these Terms and Conditions of
Contract and all such documents as are set out in the Form of Contract.
Contract Documents means such documents as are specified in the Form of
Contract.
Contract Value means the sum of money specified in the Form of Contract,
which is the aggregate limit of the total amount of money that may be paid
to the Contractor by the Employer pursuant to the Contract.
Contractor means the person named as Contractor in the Form of
Contract and includes the Contractors successors-in-title and permitted
assigns.
Date of Provisional Acceptance means the date of issuance of the
Provisional Acceptance Certificate by the Employer.
Date of Completion shall have the meanings as stipulated in Clause 10
herein (where applicable).
day means a calendar day and includes public holidays.
Defects means defects, deficiencies, errors or other faults on any part of the
Equipment and/or Works or any part of the Equipment and/or Works not
executed properly or completed in accordance with the Contract including
degradation in performance below that of the requirements specified in the
Contract and any part of the Equipment, material, goods or work
incorporated or used in the Works which does not conform to the relevant
quality standards or pass the tests prescribed in or to be inferred from the
Contract.
Employer or Owner means the person named as Employer in the Form of
Contract and includes the Employers successors-in-title and permitted
assigns.
Employers Project Manager (or the initial E.P.M.) means the officer of the
Employer identified in the Appendix and his successor in office and also such
person or persons who may be deputed by him, to act on his behalf for the
purposes of the Contract.
Employers Engineer or Owners Engineer (or the initial E.E or O.E.) means
the officer of the Employer identified in the Appendix and his successor in
office and also such person or persons who may be deputed by him, to act
on his behalf for the purposes of the Contract.
Equipment or Plant means the Hardware and the Software operating on
the whole as one system in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract.
Final Acceptance Certificate or FAC means a certificate issued to the
Contractor by the Employer at the end of the last Guarantee Period.
Governmental Authority means any Malaysian national, state or local
government, or any quasi-governmental, judicial, public or statutory
Page 5
instrumentality, administrative agency, authority, body or other entity having

jurisdiction over the Works.
Guarantee Period means the period of time referred to in Clause 23 of these
Terms and Conditions of Contract, during which the Contractor shall provide
maintenance free-of-charge to ensure that the Equipment and/or the Works
perform in accordance with the requirements of the Contract, and shall
include such period during which such maintenance is to be provided after
the repair or replacement of the Equipment and/or any part of the Equipment
or the making good of the Works or any part thereof under the Contract.
"Hardware" includes the Associated Equipment and all mechanical, electrical,
electronic, logic components, items, goods, components and parts that
constitute the Equipment and Associated Equipment as may be expressed
herein in the Contract (upon which the Software will operate) including
accessories, test equipment, spare parts, installation tools, maintenance tools
and documentation which the Contractor is required to supply under the
Contract or in connection with which the Contractor is required under the
Contract to carry out any service. For all intents and purposes, this definition of
Hardware excludes the Software.
"Installation" includes the erection and complete assembly of the Equipment
at Site in accordance with the Contract and any other agreed documents.
Instruction means instructions by the Employer to the Contractor given orally
and confirmed in writing within forty eight (48) hours by the Employer or in
writing and instructed shall be construed accordingly.
Intellectual Property Rights means any and all patents and patent rights,
service marks, trade marks, trade names, industrial designs, designs, (whether
such rights have been registered or not), copyrights, moral rights and similar
rights of any type, know-how, trade secrets, confidential information, and any
other industrial or intellectual property rights existing now or in the future.
Letter of Award (or LOA) means the formal award of contract by the
Employer after consideration of the Tender submitted by the Contractor.
Liquidated Damages means those damages that are specified in these
Terms and Conditions of Contract where the Parties recognise the expense
and inconvenience likely to be incurred from any need to prove loss and
damage that will be suffered by the Employer. The Parties acknowledge that
such sums is a reasonable compensation for and genuine estimate of the
losses that the Employer will suffer in the event of any default on the part of
the Contractor, the remedy for which is expressed in the Contract to be
Liquidated Damages.
may means the requirement or condition specified contains a choice by
the Contractor or the Employer, depending on the context.
"month" means a calendar month.
"Parties" means the Employer and the Contractor.
Power Plant means the three (3) coal-fired generating units with an
aggregate net capacity of 2,100MW located at Tanjung Bin, Mukim Sekat,
Johor Darul Takzim.
Page 6
Program means all and any computer program, operating system,

operating software, application, application software, microcode,
programmable read only memory (PROM), firmware, machine code, software
development tools, machine instructions and commercial off the shelf (COTS),
(including any subsequent enhancements, modifications and new versions of
the foregoing), which operate on the Hardware so as to cause the Equipment
to perform in accordance with the requirements of the Contract.
"Project" shall have the meaning ascribed to it in the Form of Contract.
"Provisional Acceptance Certificate or PAC means the certificate issued by
the Employer, subject to sub-sub-Clause 3.6.2 herein, when it is satisfied with
the results of the Provisional Acceptance Test performed and all necessary
documentation had been submitted to the Employer by the Contractor.
"Provisional Acceptance Test" means all tests performed including
commissioning, and including all tests mentioned in the Specifications, by the
Contractor and verified by the Employer, subject to Clause 3.6.2 herein, to
ensure that the Equipment and/or Works performed are in acceptable
condition as regards to the completeness of the supply, specifications, quality,
appearance, performance, workmanship, documentation, supporting
facilities and capability to inter-work with existing equipment.
Prudent Construction Practices means the practices, methods, acts,
techniques and standards generally accepted in the industry of supplying,
construction and installation of building and civil engineering, mechanical
and electrical engineering work and architectural works in accordance to the
current standard practice by-laws from time to time, for use in connection
with the design, engineering, construction, testing, commissioning, operation
and maintenance of ship unloader of the same or similar size and type as the
Equipment, that at the particular time of performance of the Works, in the
exercise of that degree of due skill, diligence, prudence and foresight which
would reasonably be expected from a skilled and experienced contractor
with respect to the performance of the Works hereunder, would have been
expected to accomplish the desired result in a manner consistent with the
laws, Statutory Requirements, reliability, safety, environmental protection,
economy and expediency.
shall means the requirement or condition specified is mandatory.
should means the requirement or condition specified is preferred by the
Employer.
"Site" means the actual place where the Works are carried out or to be
executed and any other places as may be designated by the Employer as
forming part of the Site.
Software means the Program (including any subsequent updates, upgrades,
new releases, enhancements, modifications and new versions of the
foregoing) which operate on the Hardware so as to cause the Equipment to
perform and obtain the features specified in the Contract upon the terms and
conditions hereunder.
Specifications means the specifications of the Employer which forms a part
of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the technical and
Page 7
functional specifications (TFS) and its annexes and appendices, as well as

any other relevant information which has been made available to the
Contractor.
Statutory Requirements shall have the meaning ascribed to it in Clause 42.
"Subcontractor(s)" means persons to whom any part of the Works has been
subcontracted including all vendors, suppliers, consultants and contractors
providing equipment, machinery, materials or services directly or indirectly to
the Contractor in connection with the Works and includes their successors in
title and permitted assigns.
Subsidiary means a subsidiary company of the Employer.
"the Employer" means Tanjung Bin Power Sdn Bhd (Company No.:) and shall
include all its successors in title and assigns.
Tender means the tender submitted by the Contractor to the Employer for
carrying out of the Works.
"Training includes provision of comprehensive training courses and materials
and training on application engineering, maintenance, operation (including
modification and introduction of new functions and facilities), repair, product
and installation supervision in respect of the Equipment and/or Works to be
provided by the Contractor to the Employer's staff, maintenance contractors
and/or users.
Variation means any alteration or modification of the design, nature,
quality, quantity and value of the Equipment and/or Works or Date of
Completion in accordance with Clause 32 herein.
"week" means a period of seven (7) consecutive days.
will means the requirement or condition specified to be at the discretion of
the Employer, depending on the context.
Works means the design, engineering, procurement, supply, delivery,
permitting, construction, Installation, system integration, testing and
commissioning of the Equipment and the provision of training and technical
assistance and supply of spare parts therefor.
writing means any handwritten, type-written or printed communication,
including telex, cable and facsimile transmission.
"year" means a calendar year.
Page 8
3.
EMPLOYERS PROJECT MANAGER AND EMPLOYERS ENGINEER
3.1
EMPLOYERS PROJECT MANAGER AUTHORITY
3.1.1
The powers and authority of the E.P.M. shall be those stated in or necessarily to
be implied from the Contract.
3.1.2
Except where expressly stated in the Contract, the E.P.M shall have no
authority to relieve the Contractor of any of his obligations under the
Contract.
3.2
EMPLOYERS ENGINEER
3.2.1
The E.P.M. may from time to time appoint such number of E.E. as is deemed fit.
The E.E. shall be responsible to the E.P.M. and shall carry out such duties and
exercise such authority as may be delegated to him by the E.P.M. under subClause 3.3.
3.3
Employers Project Managers Authority to Delegate
3.3.1
The E.P.M. may from time to time delegate to the E.E., orally or in writing, any
of the duties, powers and authority vested in the E.P.M. and he may at any
time revoke such delegation.
3.3.2
Subject always to the provisions of sub-Clause 3.4, the E.E. does not have the
power to delegate the duties, powers and authority vested in the E.E.
3.4
Appointment of Assistants
3.4.1
The E.P.M. or the E.E. may appoint such number of persons to assist the E.E. in
carrying out such duties and exercise such authority (if any) as he deems fit.
3.4.2
Such assistants shall have no authority to issue any instructions to the

Contractor except for such instructions as may be necessary to enable them
to carry out their duties and to verify that the quality and workmanship of the
Equipment and/or Works are in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract.
3.4.3
The Contractor agrees that no act, omission, verification, approval, monitoring

or supervision by the E.P.M, E.E. and/or his assistants shall relieve the
Contractor from his obligations and responsibilities under the Contract.
3.5
E.P.M.s Instructions
3.5.1.
The E.P.M. may in his discretion and from time to time issue further details
and/or instructions (all of which are hereafter referred to as "E.P.M.'s
instruction") in respect of:
(i)
any Variation to the Contract;
(ii)
any discrepancy in or between the Contract Documents;
(iii)
the removal from the Site of any materials or goods brought thereto by
the Contractor and/or the substitution of any such materials or goods;
Page 9
(iv)
the removal and/or re-execution of any Works executed by the

Contractor;
(v)
the removal and/or rejection of Equipment or any part thereof

supplied by the Contractor;
(vi)
the dismissal from the Works of any person mentioned in Clause 11

hereof employed thereupon;
(vii)
the opening up for inspection of any work covered up;
(viii)
the amending and making good of any Defects;
(ix)
any matter which is necessary and incidental to the carrying out and
completion of supply of the Equipment and/or execution of Works
under the Contract; and
(x)
any matter in respect of which the E.P.M. is expressly empowered by

the Contract to issue instructions.
3.5.2
The Contractor shall comply with any instruction issued to him by the E.P.M.
3.5.3
If the Contractor fails to comply with an E.P.M.s instruction in writing within five
(5) days from the date of receipt of the said E.P.M.s instruction, then the
E.P.M. may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies available to the
Employer under the Contract and at law, employ and pay other persons to
execute any work whatsoever which may be necessary to give effect to such
instruction and all costs incurred in connection with such employment shall be
recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer as a debt or may be
deducted by the Employer in accordance with Clause 36 herein.
3.5.4
Notwithstanding sub-sub-Clause 3.5.3, if by reason of any accident or failure

or Defects or other event occurring to or in connection with the Equipment
and/or Works, either during the supply of the Equipment or the execution of
the Works or during the Guarantee Period, any remedial or other work shall in
the opinion of the E.P.M. be urgently necessary and the Contractor is unable
or unwilling to do such remedial or other work immediately, the E.P.M. may
instruct the carrying out of such remedial or other work by a person other than
the Contractor. If the remedial or other work so instructed by the E.P.M. is work
which the Contractor was liable to do or for which he is otherwise responsible
under the Contract, the amount of any cost, loss and expense or damage
incurred in carrying out the same shall be recoverable by the Employer from
the Contractor.
3.5.5
If compliance with any E.P.M.s instruction involves expense or loss beyond

that reasonably contemplated by the Contractor or under the Contract or for
which the Contractor would not be reimbursed by any payment made under
any provision in the Contract apart from Clause 33, then unless the E.P.M.s
instruction was issued owing to some breach of the Contract by the
Contractor, the Contractor may make a claim in accordance with the
provisions of Clause 33 hereof. Failure to comply strictly with the provisions of
Clause 33 will disentitle the Contractor from any expense or loss referred to in
this Clause 3.5.5.
3.6
Other Powers of the E.P.M.

Page 10
3.6.1
Failure of the Employer to disapprove or reject any of the Equipment and/or

Works at any time shall not prejudice the power of the E.P.M. thereafter to
disapprove or reject such Equipment and/or Works, whether or not the
Provisional Acceptance Certificate has been issued, and/or to order the
pulling down, removal or breaking up of the same.
3.6.2
The verification by the Employer of all or any tests performed pursuant to the
Provisional Acceptance Test shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his
obligations or responsibilities under the Contract and such verification is
subject to the power of the E.P.M. to reject or require repairs to be done on
the Equipment and/or Works in the event that Defects are discovered in the
Equipment and/or Works.
3.6.3
In the event that the Contractor fails to comply with any requirement of the
provisions of the Contract, which in the opinion of the E.P.M. may affect
public safety, functionality or the quality of the Equipment and/or Works, the
E.P.M. may suspend part of or all the Works, by issuing a notice of suspension,
until such requirement is complied with by the Contractor to the satisfaction of
the E.P.M.
3.6.4
In addition, the E.P.M. in his discretion may require the Contractor to suspend
the performance of the Contract completely or partially for whatever length
of time the E.P.M. may deem fit by issuing a notice of suspension.
3.6.5
Upon receipt of a notice of suspension, the Contractor shall immediately

suspend and procure the suspension of the relevant works under the
Contract. The relevant Dates of Completion under the Contract shall be
extended by each period that the Contractor is delayed by reason of such
suspension, unless such notice of suspension is given due to the Contractors
negligence, default or breach of any provision of the Contract.
3.6.6
The Contractor shall not be entitled to make any claim for costs and expenses
incurred by the Contractor as a result of the suspension and any such costs
and expenses shall be solely borne by the Contractor.
4.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
4.1
Contract Documents
4.1.1
The Contract Documents are to be taken as mutually explanatory of one

another but in the event of any conflict or inconsistency between the
Contract Documents, the priority of the documents shall be as listed in the
Form of Contract.
4.1.2
If the Contractor finds any discrepancy, error, ambiguity or divergence in any

or between any two or more of the Contract Documents, he shall
immediately, and in any case not later than fourteen (14) days thereafter,
give to the E.P.M. a written notice specifying such discrepancy, error,
ambiguity or divergence and the E.P.M. may issue instructions in regard
thereto. Provided always that such discrepancy, error, ambiguity or
divergence shall not vitiate the Contract.
Page 11
5.
SITE
5.1
Access to and Possession of Site

(a)
Unless the Contract otherwise provides, the Contractor shall be

entitled to access to and possession of the Site or such part of the Site
to enable the Contractor to commence performance of the Works
under the Contract subject to satisfaction of the following conditions:.
(i)
the Contractor shall have delivered to the Employer the

Performance Guarantee pursuant to Clause 22; and
(ii)
in relation to insurances to be effected by the Contractor

pursuant to Clause 27
(1)
the E.P.M. shall have sighted the original insurance

policies of the said insurances together with the official
receipts for payment of premium thereof and is satisfied
with its authenticity; and
(2)
the Contractor shall have delivered to the E.P.M. a

certified true copy of each insurance policy together
with the official receipts for payment of premium
thereof.
In any event the Contractor shall comply with the above conditions
precedent for right of access to and possession of the Site within
fourteen (14) days from the date of the Letter of Award and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension of Date of Completion
in respect of any delay caused by the Contractors late delivery of
such documents.
5.2
(b)
The Contractor shall at its own expense be responsible for obtaining

any other right of access that may be required by it for the purposes of
execution and completion of the Works.
(c)
The Contractor shall also provide at its own cost and expense any
accommodation, land or facilities outside the Site required by it or its
workmen for the purpose of the works under the Contract.
Tidying Up
All working areas used by the Contractor shall be kept clean and tidy at all
time by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Employer.
5.3
Safety and Health

The Contractor shall, throughout the execution and completion of the Works
and the remedying of any defects therein comply with the following:
(a)
Safety and Health Program

The Contractor shall be solely responsible for safety precautions and
programmes in connection with the performance of the Works, and
shall implement and administer a safety and health program (as
reviewed and approved by the E.P.M) for the Works to be performed
Page 12
at the Site. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for
the safety of, and shall provide all reasonable protection to prevent
damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons (natural persons, body
corporate or otherwise) employed by the Contractor or
Subcontractors in connection with the Works to be performed and all
other persons who may be affected thereby, (ii) all materials and
equipment utilised in the Works owned by and/or under the care,
custody or control of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, (iii) other
property at the Site or adjacent thereto not designated for removal,
relocation or replacement in the course of the Works, and (iv) marine
life including ocean animals, plants and algae. The Contractor shall
require all Subcontractors working on the Site to comply with all safety
requirements in effect at all such times.
(b)
Safety
The Contractor shall be responsible for public safety and shall erect
and maintain, as required by existing conditions and progress of the
Works or as otherwise required by the Statutory Requirements, all
reasonable safeguards including fencing, demarcation, safety
equipment, signs including warning signs, lighting and such other
safeguards (including such reasonable safeguards established by the
E.P.M. from time to time) for safety and protection of the public and
the Employers personnel and contractors in the vicinity of the Power
Plant.
(c)
Accident and Investigation

In the event of any accident, failure or other unfortunate event due to
any cause whatsoever to or in connection with the execution of the
Works or any part thereof, the Contractor shall immediately report the
accident, failure or event to the E.P.M. and thereafter, unless otherwise
directed by the E.P.M. in any other respect, conduct a full investigation
into the said accident, failure or event in order to determine the cause
or reason for the accident, failure or event and submit a report to the
E.P.M. together with its recommendations for remedial and prevention
measures and works in respect thereof.
6.
EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS
6.1
The Equipment supplied by the Contractor to the Employer in the Contract

shall conform to the requirements of the Contract and conform to the
Specifications, including all the requirements therein. The Contractor
guarantees that the Equipment supplied shall be fit for the purpose of
purchase by the Employer.
6.2
The Equipment and all parts thereof supplied to the Employer shall be new
(that is, not second hand, reconditioned, or used), of good quality, free from
Defect and shall be guaranteed by the Contractor against any Defect in
design, material and workmanship in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract.
6.3
The Equipment shall inter-work with the exchanges and other equipment in
the existing system of the Employer and shall not require the introduction of
additional and/or modification of the equipment of the existing system of the
Employer.
Page 13
7.
DOCUMENTATION
7.1
It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to promptly provide to the

Employer all relevant technical documentation, including but not limited to
the documents required according to the Specifications, as well as
handbooks, manuals and software, technical and troubleshooting reference
manuals, programmers reference manuals, circuit diagrams and functional
drawings of original versions for every Software and Hardware installed as part
of the Equipment.
7.2
The Contractor shall supply to the Employer documentation describing in

detail the components and functions of the Hardware and the procedures to
ensure the continued satisfactory operation of the Equipment.
7.3
In accordance with Clause 20, the Employer shall be allowed and granted
the license to reproduce such documentation supplied by the Contractor
under sub-Clauses 7.1 to 7.2 herein for the Employers own internal use, for
training, operation and maintenance purposes and for any or such other
purpose as may be necessary for the purposes of the Contract.
7.4
All documentation supplied by the Contractor under sub-Clauses 7.1 to 7.2

herein shall be written in the English Language and where applicable shall be
in Malay language and shall follow the practice of data processing standards
acceptable worldwide in order to merit or complement the efficient
operation, testing and maintenance of the Equipment.
7.5
The obligations of the Contractor under the Contract shall not be regarded as
completely performed until all documentation called for either in the
Contract or in any subsequent instruction has been provided to the Employer.
The cost of any such documents or certification shall be solely borne by the
Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Contract.
8.
DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
8.1
The Contractor shall be solely and fully responsible for the execution of the
works shall function in accordance with the Specifications and meets the
requirements of the Employer and is in accordance with the provisions of the
Contract. The Equipment shall be fit for its intended purpose by the Employer.
8.2
The Contractor shall not, without prior approval of the Employer change the
design the Equipment or the Works.
8.3
The Contractor agrees that the functionality and performance of the

Equipment purchased by the Employer pursuant to the Contract shall be in
accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
8.4
In the event that the Equipment or part thereof is to be replaced or modified

due to the need to improve its design, the Contractor shall give the Employer
not less than two (2) months prior notice in writing on the need for such
replacement and modification indicating the technical advantages and the
financial gain for the adoption of the new design.
Page 14
8.5
The Contractor shall inform and provide the Employer in writing with all
information on the latest technical developments and improvements to the
Equipment. The Contractor shall also state the flexibility of the Equipment in
incorporating such new developments and improvements as soon as such
technical information becomes available.
8.6
The Contractor shall replace any operational part of the Equipment with the
latest equivalent product at no charge to the Employer if the operational part
of the Equipment is made obsolete with absence of technical support and
spare parts and the Contractor shall ensure that the replacement product
shall inter-operate seamlessly with any existing equipment.
9.
EMPLOYERS OBLIGATIONS
9.1
The Employer will provide such participation of management and technical

personnel, as it deems fit in its sole discretion, oversee the Contractor in
carrying out the Works under the Contract. However the responsibility to
deliver the Equipment and perform the Works in accordance with the
Contract lies solely with the Contractor.
9.2
The Employer shall give the Contractor right of access to and possession of the
Site as provided for in the Contract. The Contractor acknowledges and
agrees that priority is to be given to the operation of the Power Plant,
including the use of the jetty for the purpose of unloading coal supply from
vessels.
9.3
Without prejudice to its rights and remedies under the Contract and at law,
the Employer shall pay the Contractor the sums due and owing to the
Contractor in accordance with the provisions in the Contract.
10.
DATE OF COMPLETION
10.1
For Equipment and Works
10.1.1
The Date of Completion for the Works shall be as specified in the Appendix or
as extended pursuant to the provisions of the Contract. The Contractor shall
achieve Provisional Acceptance Certificate for the Equipment and Works on
or before the Date of Completion.
10.2
Failure or Delay to achieve Date of Completion
10.2.1
The Date of Completion referred to in this Clause shall be strictly adhered to

by the Contractor.
10.2.2
In the event of failure or delay by the Contractor to achieve Provisional

Acceptance Certificate by the Date of Completion or as extended under
Clause 31, the Employer shall be entitled to, without prejudice to its other
rights and remedies, Liquidated Damages in accordance with Clause 35
herein. The Employer shall also be entitled
Page 15
(a)
to employ and pay other persons to execute the outstanding Works

and recover from the Contractor all costs incurred in connection with
the employment of other persons to complete the Works which the
Contractor shall be liable to pay/compensate the Employer; or
(b)
where the circumstances justifies, to obtain the Equipment from such

other source as it may determine and recover from the Contractor
which the Contractor shall be liable to pay/compensate the Employer,
damages for any loss or expense incurred or that may be incurred in
respect of obtaining any such Equipment from the aforesaid other
source, including but not limited to any increased price in respect
thereof which the Employer is obliged to pay and any administrative
costs incurred by the Employer.
11.
CONTRACTORS PERSONNEL
11.1
The personnel provided by the Contractor shall be of good character,

behaviour and sound health and where applicable have suitable engineering
qualifications and experience for the performance of the obligations of the
Contractor under the Contract.
11.2
The personnel provided by the Contractor to fulfil its obligations under the
Contract shall remain the employees of the Contractor and the Employer has
no liability towards the personnel.
11.3
The Contractors normal working hours shall be the same as that for the
Employer. For Works to be performed or executed outside normal working
hours, prior permission shall be obtained from the E.P.M.
11.4
If, in the opinion of the E.P.M., any person employed by the Contractor
misconducts himself or has caused quarrels, delay or is incompetent, the
Contractor when so directed by the E.P.M. in writing shall at once remove
such person from the worksite and it shall not again be employed on any
Works without the written permission of the E.P.M. All expenses incurred in
replacing any of the Contractors personnel shall be borne by the Contractor.
11.5.
Contractors Representative.
(a)
The Contractor shall appoint a competent person who shall be

authorised to represent it (hereafter referred to as the Contractors
Representative) and shall notify the Employer in writing the name of
such person prior to the commencement of Works under the Contract.
(b)
The Contractors Representative shall be constantly on the Site during

normal working hours and shall give its whole time to the supervision of
the Works including the remedy of Defects after the issuance of the
Provisional Acceptance Certificate.
(c)
Any instructions or notices given to the Contractors Representative by

the E.P.M. shall be deemed to have been given to the Contractor.
(d)
The E.P.M. may object to the appointment or request the removal of

any person appointed or employed as the Contractors
Representative, provided always that the E.P.M. shall not issue such
notice of objection or removal unreasonably. Upon receipt from the
Page 16
E.P.M. of a notice of objection or removal in writing, the Contractor

shall forthwith remove him from the Site and shall not thereafter
employ him again on the Site or for the Works in any capacity and
shall replace him by another Contractors Representative approved
by the E.P.M.
11.6
Access for the E.P.M.

(a)
The E.P.M. and any person authorised by the E.P.M. shall at all
reasonable times have access to the Works and to the factories,
workshops or other places of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor
or of the Contractors principal or manufacturer where any Equipment,
material, goods and work are being manufactured, fabricated,
assembled, prepared or stored for purposes of the Contract.
(b)
Where any such Equipment, material, goods and work are being
manufactured, fabricated, assembled, prepared or stored in the
factories, workshops or other places of a Subcontractor, the
Contractor shall, by a term in the sub-contract, secure similar right of
access to those factories, workshops or other places for the E.P.M. and
any person authorised by the E.P.M., and shall take reasonable steps
required of it by the E.P.M. to enforce or assist in enforcing such right.
11.7
Reassignment of Key Personnel
11.7.1
The Contractor covenants with the Employer to act always in the best interests
of the Employer and to furnish all well qualified skilled key personnel necessary
to handle and expedite work of the character and size contemplated. A list of
the key personnel and their relevant qualifications and experience shall be
furnished to the Employer by the Contractor. The Contractor acknowledges
that the experience and skill of its key personnel, as represented by the
Contractor to the Employer, was and continues to be an important factor in
the Employer's selection of the Contractor to perform the works under the
Contract. The Contractor represents that the key personnel shall be assigned
to perform the Works on a full-time basis so long as such key personnel are
employed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall not remove or reassign key
personnel without:
11.8
(i)
providing the Employer with thirty (30) working days advance written
notice (including identification of the key personnel, explanation of
reassignment or removal, identification of the experience and
qualifications of the individual proposed to replace the departing key
personnel, and a plan and schedule showing how the transfer of
knowledge between the departing and incoming individual will occur,
and how the impact on the Works will be minimized; and
(ii)
receiving the Employer's prior written consent which shall not be

unreasonably withheld.
Labour
The Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract, make its
own arrangements for the engagement of all workmen and labour (local or
otherwise) and for their remuneration, housing, welfare and transport. In cases
where foreign personnel (inclusive of management personnel and skilled and
unskilled workers) are engaged, the Contractor shall be responsible to obtain
Page 17
their visa and work permits in compliance with the relevant laws and
regulations and arrange for these foreign personnel to leave Malaysia upon
completion of their services under the Contract.
11.9
Returns of Labour
The Contractor shall, if required by the E.P.M., deliver to the E.P.M. a detailed
return in such form and at such intervals as the E.P.M. may prescribe, showing
the numbers of the several classes of workmen or labour from time to time
employed by the Contractor.
12.
SETTING OUT AT SITE AND CLOSED-OUT
12.1
The E.P.M. shall determine all levels which may be required for the execution
of the Works, and shall furnish to the Contractor such information, including
reference points, so as to enable the Contractor to set out the Works at
ground level. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the reference points
stated above for setting out but shall be solely responsible for:
(i)
the accurate setting out of the Works;
(ii)
the correctness of the position, levels, dimensions and alignment of all

parts of the Works; and
(iii)
the provision of all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus and

labour in connection with the setting out at Site.
12.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall entirely at its own cost
amend any errors arising from its own inaccurate setting out. Provided always
that the E.P.M. may at his discretion accept the errors without amendment
subject to such deduction in the sums to be paid to the Contractor having
regard to any loss of value suffered by the Employer or any reduced cost to
the Contractor resulting from the error.
12.3
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that, prior to submitting the Tender
the Contractor (a) has made a complete and careful examination of the Site
and the surrounding areas, and the Specifications, (b) has made a complete
and careful survey and analysis of the nature, character and condition of the
jetty, ground, soil, subsoil and terrain of, near and under the Site in order to
determine any difficulties, hazards or conditions on or about or near or under
the Site, (c) has made a complete and careful examination to determine the
difficulties and hazards incident to the performance of the Works, including
(i) the location of the Works, (ii) the condition of the Site and the surrounding
areas, (iii) the proximity of the Site to adjacent facilities and structures, (iv) the
conditions of the roads, waterways, bridges, railroads, airports and other
transportation facilities in the vicinity of the Site, including the conditions
affecting shipping and transportation, access, disposal, handling and storage
of materials, (v) the labour conditions in the region of the Site, (vi) laws and
Statutory Requirements, (vii) the local weather and oceanographic
conditions based upon previous weather and marine data, and (viii) all other
matters that might affect the Contractors performance hereunder or the
construction of the Works, (d) is solely responsible for analysing and
interpreting all information or data arising from its inspections and
examinations referred to in paragraphs (a) through (c) above, and of other
available information (whether provided by the Employer, E.P.M, E.E or their
Page 18
representatives) which the Contractor, on the basis of its own judgment,

believes sufficient and relevant to its performance of the Works in
accordance with the Contract, and (e) has determined to the Contractors
satisfaction the nature and extent of such difficulties, hazards and conditions
as to the nature of the ground and subsoil, the form and nature of the Site,
the extent and nature of the work, materials and goods necessary for the
completion of the Works, the means of communication with and access to
the Site, the accommodation it may require and in general to have obtained
for himself all necessary information as to the risks contingencies and all the
circumstance influencing and affecting its Tender. Any information or
document given or forwarded by the Employer to the Contractor shall not
relieve the Contractor of its obligations under the provisions of this Clause.
The Employer gives no warranty for any information given or document either
as to the accuracy or sufficiency or as to how the same should be interpreted
or otherwise howsoever and the Contractor shall make use of and interpret
the same entirely at its own risk.
12.4
On completion of the works under the Contract, the Contractor shall handover to the Employer all source codes, original documentation, reports, test
certificates, compliance certificates and other records pertaining to quality of
the Works done by the Contractor under the Contract. This documentation
shall be provided in a logical and orderly manner to enable individual items
of engineered materials and Equipment to be identified.
13.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
13.1
Quality in Installation
The Contractor shall implement all quality control activities necessary to
identify and correct deficiencies. It should be noted that although the
installation activity will be under surveillance by the Employer, this surveillance
is not intended to supplement the Contractor's quality control. Nevertheless,
the Employer reserves the right to reject the Equipment and/or Works or
performance deemed by the Employer to be in non-compliance with the
Specifications.
13.2
Quality in Commissioning and Provisional Acceptance Testing

The Contractor shall ensure that commissioning and Provisional Acceptance
Test are effectively implemented so that prior to operation, the Equipment has
been shown to be capable of meeting the requirements of the Contract
including that for safety and reliability.
13.3
Examination and Measurement of Works and/or Equipment before Covering

Up
(a)
No part of the Equipment and/or Works shall be covered up or put out

of view without the approval of the E.P.M. and the Contractor shall
afford full opportunity for the E.P.M. to examine and measure such part
of the Equipment and/or Works which is about to be covered up or
put out of view.
(b)
The Contractor shall give due notice to the E.P.M. whenever any part
of the Works and/or Equipment is ready or about to be ready for
examination and the E.P.M. shall without unreasonable delay, unless
Page 19
he considers it unnecessary and advises the Contractor in writing

accordingly, attend such examination and measurement of such part
of the Works and/or Equipment.
(c)
If the Contractor fails and/or neglects to comply with the provisions of

this sub-Clause 13.3:
(i)
the E.P.M. may require the Contractor to uncover or dismantle

or make opening in or through any part or parts of the
Equipment and/or Works or to do all such things as are
necessary for the E.P.M. to inspect such part or parts of the
Equipment and/or Works; and
(ii)
the costs of such uncovering or making opening or dismantling

and subsequently reinstating and making good or repair of the
same shall be borne by the Contractor whether or not such
part or parts uncovered or dismantled are found to be in
accordance with the Contract; and
(iii)
the Contractor shall not be entitled to any extension of time for

any delay caused by such failure or neglect by the Contractor;
and
(iv)
the additional cost of any measures or requirements carried

out by or directed by the E.P.M. shall be borne by the
Contractor.
14.
ENVIRONMENTAL MATTERS, DANGEROUS GOODS AND OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY

AND HEALTH AND ANTIQUITIES AND FOSSILS
14.1
Environmental Matters
The Contractor shall comply with all relevant laws relating to the protection
and preservation of the environment, in particular the Environmental Quality
Act 1974 including any subsequent amendments to or re-enactment of the
said Act. The Contractor shall give due consideration to the preservation and
social implications of water and air quality, soil, flora and fauna (if any) within
the Site during the execution of the Works. All Equipment supplied shall also
comply with the requirements stated above. All measures taken by the
Contractor in compliance with this Clause shall be deemed included in the
Contractors offered price and shall be borne by the Contractor.
14.2
Dangerous Goods
The use of chemicals, substances or equipment potentially hazardous or
injurious as advised, declared or published by the Malaysian Health Ministry or
any other relevant Malaysian ministry, public company or organisation in any
component or part of the Equipment supplied under the Contract shall be
clearly indicated in writing to the Employer. All such components or parts must
be marked and labelled and any handling or disposal precautions must be
clearly stated.
Page 20
14.3
Occupational Safety and Health

The Contractor shall comply and shall secure compliance by its personnel and
workmen and by the Subcontractors at all times during the execution of the
Works with all of the following:
(a)
Factories and Machinery Act, 1967;
(b)
Occupational Safety and Health Act, 1994;
(c)
all other relevant occupational safety and health requirements

imposed by law including any subsequent amendments to or reenactment of the said law, and
(d)
any directives or order by the Employer or the Government Authorities

and/or E.P.M. relating to occupational safety and health requirements;
(e)
all guides, codes and recommendations issued or made by the

government, professional or trade organization or other official or
responsible organization relating to occupational safety and health.
So far as is practicable, the Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to

protect the environment, property and its own employees and any
employees of the Employer and other persons who are at any time directly or
indirectly affected by the Works or operations of the Contractor. Such
precautions shall include but in no way be limited to the provision of
information on the Equipment and substances to be used, hazards and risks
involved in the performance of the Works.
14.4
Antiquities and Fossils

(a)
All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity and structures and other
remains or things of geological, historical or archaeological interest
discovered on the Site shall, as between the Employer and the
Contractor, be deemed to be the absolute property of the Employer.
(b)
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent its

workmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such
article or thing and shall, immediately upon discovery and before
removal of such article or thing, inform the E.P.M. of such discovery
and carry out the E.P.M.s instructions for dealing with the same.
15.
PROGRAMME
15.1
Submission of programmes
15.1.1
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the E.P.M. for his approval (such
approval not to be unreasonably withheld) a master programme complying
with the Specifications and setting out in such manner as the E.P.M may
reasonably require the sequence in which and date(s) by which the
Contractor proposes to perform its obligations under the Contract and the
date by which the Contractor reasonably requires that the Employer should
have provided any further drawings or information or taken any other action
required under the Contract to permit the Contractor so to perform its
Page 21
obligations. The Contractor shall also submit further programmes and

schedules to the Employer as required by the Specifications.
15.1.2
Unless the E.P.M, within twenty one (21) days after receiving a programme,
gives notice to the Contractor stating the extent to which it does not comply
with the Contract, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the
programme, subject to his other obligations under the Contract.
The
Employer and E.P.M shall be entitled to rely upon the programme when
planning their activities.
15.1.3
The Contractor shall promptly give notice to the E.P.M of specific probable
future events or circumstances which may adversely affect the Works. The
E.P.M. may require the Contractor to submit an estimate of the anticipated
effect of the future event or circumstances, and/or a proposal under Clause
32.
15.2
Revision of programmes
15.2.1
If at any time the Contractor's performance of the Contract falls behind any
programme approved by the Employer pursuant hereto, or it becomes clear
that it will so fall behind, then the E.P.M. may require the Contractor to revise
such programme in the light of the circumstances and provide supporting
report describing the revised methods which the Contractor proposes to
adopt in order to expedite progress and complete on or before the Date of
Completion for the Works, and to resubmit it to him for his approval (such
approval not to be unreasonably withheld).
15.2.2
The Contractor shall also revise the approved master programme and submit
further programmes and analyses of progress in accordance with the
requirements of the Specifications. If the E.P.M. approves any such revised
master programme it shall thereafter be the approved master programme.
15.2.3
Neither the submission of a revised master programme nor its approval by the
Employer shall relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations under the
Contract.
15.2.4
Unless the E.P.M. notifies otherwise, the Contractor shall adopt these revised
methods, at the risk and cost of the Contractor. If these methods cause the
Employer to incur additional costs, the Contractor shall pay the costs to the
Employer in addition to delay damages set out in Clause 35.
15.3
Monthly progress reports
15.3.1
The Contractor shall within seven (7) days of the end of each calendar month
or such interval as the E.P.M. shall request, provide a progress report to the
E.P.M on the progress of the Works. The format and content of the monthly
progress report shall be acceptable to the Employer. The contents shall
include progress with respect to all aspects of the Works (including the
information required by Clause 15.4), the Statutory Requirements, industrial
relations, safety and security, costs, quality assurance, risks mitigation and
management, insurance, public relations and site photographs. The
Contractor shall attend monthly meetings or meetings at such interval as the
E.P.M. shall request, with the Employer to review such reports (at the
Employers premises or elsewhere as the Employer may require) at such times
as the Employer may require. Following such review, the Contractor shall co-
Page 22
operate with the Employer and shall take such steps as may be reasonably
required to expedite performance if performance is unsatisfactory.
15.3.2
Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all work which is
known to be outstanding at the completion date stated in the Provisional
Acceptance Certificate for the Works.
15.4.
Expediting and inspection status reports
15.4.1
The Contractor shall prepare and submit as a part of the monthly progress
report an expediting and inspection status report containing details of
progress under all subcontracts made with Subcontractors for purpose of
monitoring the performance by the Subcontractors of their performance
under their subcontracts.
15.4.2
The monthly expediting and inspection status report shall cover all
subcontracts and will include in a summarised format acceptable to the
E.P.M.: contractual Date of Completion, current forecast Date of Completion,
actual Date of Completion for the Works plus or minus change from previous
report and float in the approved master programme. The Contractor shall also
submit specific expediting reports on critical items as the E.P.M. may require.
16.
PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE TESTING
16.1
The Equipment supplied and/or Works performed shall be subjected to

Provisional Acceptance Test by the Contractor according to those mentioned
in the Specifications. The Provisional Acceptance Test shall be performed in
the presence of and verified by the Employer, subject to Clause 3.6.2 herein.
16.2
The Contractor shall give notice to the Employer within the period specified in
the Specifications that Provisional Acceptance Test is to be carried out. The
notice shall specify the date on which Provisional Acceptance Test is to be
carried out.
16.3
Following successful Provisional Acceptance Test and the submission of the

provisional acceptance test report as well as complete documentation as per
Clause 16.4 herein by the Contractor, the Employer shall issue the Provisional
Acceptance Certificate to the Contractor. Provisional Acceptance Date
shall be deemed to have been achieved for all purposes of the Contract on
the date specified in the Provisional Acceptance Certificate.
16.4
The Provisional Acceptance Certificate (together with defects list, if any) shall
be issued to the Contractor thereafter upon all requisite documentation
having been provided by the Contractor to the Employer, including but not
limited to:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
As-Built Drawings;
Repair Manual (where applicable);
Operation and Maintenance manual;
Documentation provided for under Clause 7 herein;
Other documentation as set out in the Specifications.
Page 23
16.5
The issuance of Provisional Acceptance Certificate shall nevertheless be

without prejudice to any claim of the Employer in respect of any Defects in
the Equipment and/or Works which may subsequently become apparent or
be discovered.
16.6
In the event that the Equipment and/or Works is found to have failed the
Provisional Acceptance Test, the Equipment and/or Works may be rejected in
part or in whole at the discretion of the Employer. The Contractor shall then
remedy such defects at no additional cost to the Employer within a time
period that would not adversely affect the progress of achieving Acceptance
by the Date of Completion, without prejudice to the Employers other rights
and remedies.
17.
PAYMENT TERMS
17.1
All payment made by the Employer to the Contractor shall be in Ringgit

Malaysia (RM).
17.2
Subject to the Employers rights of set-off and/or abatement under the

Contract, common law or any written law, payment for the performance of
the Works shall be made to the Contractor in the manner as specified in the
Appendix.
17.3
Any claim by the Contractor shall be made within one (1) year from the date
of the Provisional Acceptance Certificate. The Contractor acknowledges and
agrees that no claim thereafter from the Contractor will be entertained by the
Employer.
17.4
Without prejudice to its other rights and remedies, the Employer may withhold
the payments due to the Contractor at any time if, in its opinion, the
Contractors work performance fails to comply in any respect with the
provisions of the Contract.
17.5
The Contractor shall submit his invoices accompanied by such documents as

may be necessary or requested for by the Employer when making claims for
payment to the Employer.
18.
THE CONTRACTORS OBLIGATIONS AND WARRANTIES
18.1
The Contractor warrants that he is fully experienced in the design,

engineering, procurement, supply, delivery, construction, installation, system
integration, testing, commissioning and completion of the Works and that it
possesses a high level of skill, experience and expertise that commensurate
with the complexity of the work which he is required to perform. In so doing,
the Contractor recognises and acknowledges that the Employer is relying on
the provision by the Contractor of such skill and expertise in and about the
works to be performed by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract.
18.2
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the successful design, engineering,
procurement, supply, delivery, permitting, installation, system integration,
testing and commissioning of the Equipment within the time frame specified
and in accordance with the agreed functional, technical and performance
specifications of the Contract.
Page 24
18.3
The Contractor shall provide all technical expertise, labour, offices, installation
equipment, storage areas, tools, consumables, materials and equipment and
all other things necessary for the efficient and timely execution of the Works
under the Contract.
18.4
In performing the Works under the Contract, the Contractor shall provide all
necessary services, facilities and personnel as specified herein. The Contractor
shall provide well outlined definitions and procedures for reporting and
coordinating pursuant to the Contract. All procedures shall be reviewed and
approved by the Employer.
18.5
The Contractor shall perform the Works under the Contract with due diligence
and efficiency and in conformity with sound engineering, administrative and
financial practices and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract.
18.6
The Contractor shall at all times perform the works under the Contract in such
manner as will always safeguard and protect the Employers interest and take
all necessary and proper steps to prevent abuse or uneconomical use of
facilities and utiliites, if any, made available by the Employer to the
Contractor.
18.7
The Contractor shall expedite the Works at any time if, in the opinion of the
E.P.M., the rate of progress of the Works or any section of the Works is too slow
to achieve Provisional Acceptance by the Date of Completion and the E.P.M.
shall instruct accordingly in compliance with Clause 15. The Contractor shall
upon the receipt of such instruction take such steps as necessary to expedite
progress and to complete the Works or any section of the Works or the supply
of Equipment in accordance with the said instruction.
18.8
Unless otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, no works shall be carried

out during the night or on public holidays or out of the Employers normal
working hours without the written permission of the E.P.M. except when such
work is rendered unavoidable or necessary for the saving of life and property
or for the safety of the Works or in order to expedite the Works, in which case
the Contractor shall inform the E.P.M. at the earliest possible opportunity of the
same. When any such written permission is granted by the E.P.M., it shall be
the Contractors responsibility to comply with the Employers instruction as well
as all the relevant statutory requirements and shall bear all costs in
compliance with the same.
18.9
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the Site from the date of
possession of Site until the date of issuance of the Provisional Acceptance
Certificate. The Works shall not interfere or disrupt the operation of the Power
Plant, in particular the coal unloading activities, and the operation of the
Power Plant shall take precedence over the Works.
18.10
The Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of any Liquidated

Damages imposed by the Employer.
18.11
The Contractor shall provide Training to the Employers personnel and the
Employers maintenance contractors in all aspects of the Equipment. These
aspects shall include Hardware and Software operation and maintenance.
18.12
The Contractor shall keep comprehensive, accurate, systematic, up-to-date

construction and financial records in respect of the Works in such form and
detail as is customary in the profession and as may be required by the
Page 25
Employer from time to time. Such financial records shall include accounts to
establish accurately the cost and expenditure that have been duly paid by
the Employer.
18.13
The Contractor shall furnish to the Employer such information relating to the
Equipment and/or Works as the Employer may from time to time require.
18.14
The Contractor warrants and undertakes to and with the Employer that:
18.15
(a)
it has all the necessary power and authority to carry on its business as
presently conducted;
(b)
it has all the necessary power and authority to execute, deliver and
perform its obligations under the Contract, and each of the execution,
delivery and performance by it of the Contract has been duly
authorised by all necessary action on its part, and the Contract
constitutes its legal, valid and binding obligation enforceable against it
in accordance with its terms;
(c)
it possesses the necessary capabilities, equipment and suitable place

of business to perform its obligations under the Contract;
(d)
the Equipment and the Works will be designed, specified and

constructed with the skill and care to be expected of appropriately
qualified and experienced professional designers, engineers and
constructors with experience in the design, engineering and
construction of works of a similar type, nature and complexity to the
Works;
(e)
the Equipment will be designed in accordance with the Specifications;
(f)
the Works, including all design and engineering undertaken and

materials supplied, and each part thereof shall be performed in
accordance with the Specifications and other requirements of the
Contract, and the law, the Statutory Requirements, Prudent
Construction Practices, and in a good and workmanlike manner and
shall be free from Defects in design, materials or workmanship;
(g)
all components, and materials and other things comprised or

incorporated in the Equipment and the Works shall be new;
(h)
title to the Works, Equipment and any portions thereof shall be good
and marketable title, free from any and all liens and encumbrances
created by the Contractor or any Subcontractors; and
(i)
the Equipment, all components, materials and goods delivered or

installed pursuant to the Contract and the design thereof and the
Works shall be of the quality and fit for the purpose as described in the
Specifications.
The Contractor hereby warrants that in dealing with any claims or disputes in
relation to or arising out of the Contract, including payment, extension of time,
variations or any other claims or disputes between the parties, the Contractor
shall ensure that:
Page 26
(a)
the Contractor only submits claims to the Employer which it honestly

believes to be true and which can be reasonably substantiated by
accurate written or oral evidence;
(b)
the quantum of claims has been accurately calculated in

accordance with the Contract requirements, or, on a reasonable
price basis;
(c)
the amount claimed has not been artificially marked up to include a

negotiating margin or other illicit gain; and
(d)
evidence contrary to the claim is disclosed to the Employer alongside

evidence in favour of the claim.
18.16
The Contractor hereby acknowledges and understands that the warranties

and representations stated within the Contract are to be strictly adhered to
and therefore further acknowledges that in order to ensure the high standards
of performance and conduct of the Contract, the Employer reserves the right
to request for, or on its own accord, inspect, examine (including but not
limited to) all documents, correspondence, records, paperwork, computer
software or accounts of the Contractor that relates to the Contract at any
time the Employer so wishes throughout the duration of the Contract. In the
event such measures are adopted, the Contractor shall offer its full
cooperation and assistance to the Employer to facilitate such situations.
19.
TECHNICAL ADVICE AND SUPPORT SERVICE CENTRE
19.1
The Contractor shall provide technical support & advice with respect to the
operation and maintenance of the Mechanical and Electrical Equipment in
accordance with the Specifications during the Guarantee Period.
20.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
20.1
The Contractor grants to the Employer and/or (where applicable) procures

and obtains from third party vendors for the benefit of the Employer, a nonexclusive, irrevocable, perpetual, world-wide and fully paid up license to use
(a) the Software (including without limitation the object code, the operating
system, software patches, engineering codes and communication software)];
(b) any modifications, enhancements, corrections or other forms of changes
to the Software developed specifically to enable the Equipment to operate in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract; and (c) any software
embedded in or required to operate the Equipment and any deliverables,
solutions and/or any other works derived from the provision of Works under the
Contract for the purpose of enabling the Employer to use and exploit the
Equipment and any deliverables, solutions and/or any other works derived
from the provision of works under the Contract. At all times the Employer will
retain all rights it possessed prior to or which it shall possess after the date of
the Contract in any software, equipment, concepts, know-how, development
tools, techniques or any other proprietary material or information that may be
used by the Employer in connection with the performance of its obligations
under the Contract. Further, all title, interest and rights (including without
limitation any and all Intellectual Property Rights or other proprietary rights) in
relation to (i) the Hardware and (ii) any deliverables, solutions, documents
(including photographs and colour video) in electronic form, hardcopy and
Page 27
otherwise prepared by the Contractor or the Subcontractor in the

performance of the Works, and/or any other works derived from the provision
of Works under the Contract shall vest with the Employer absolutely.
20.2
The Contractor shall not at anytime question or dispute the Employers title,
interest and rights in the items belonging to the Employer and which are
described in sub-Clause 20.1.
20.3
The Contractor shall do all acts and execute all documents as the Employer
may reasonably require:
(a)
to secure registration or other recognised forms of protection of any of

the rights belonging to the Employer and which are described in subClause 20.1 with the relevant authorities in any part of the world; and
(b)
to assign, vest and/or confirm all title, interest and rights belonging to
the Employer and which are described in sub-Clause 20.1 in the
Employer absolutely in accordance with all and any laws and
regulations. Subject to any third party rights and the Contractors rights
identified in Clause 20.1, the Employers title, right and/or interest
indicated under this Clause 20.3(b) shall in no way be construed as
indicating that any such rights are vested in any party other than the
Employer pursuant to the terms and conditions of the Contract.
20.4
The licenses described in Clause 20.1 survive the termination or expiration of

the Contract for any reason whatsoever.
20.5
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the Employer shall have no
further obligation with regard to royalties, license fees or any other
contractual or financial obligation other than the fees payable for the supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of the Equipment under the Contract.
20.6
In addition to any other warranty expressed or implied in the Contract or by

statute, the Contractor hereby represents and warrants to the Employer that:
20.7
(a)
the use and possession of the items and materials described in Clause
20.1 do not infringe the Intellectual Property Rights of any third party
and further, that the Contractor is not aware of any such infringement
or allegation of infringement;
(b)
the Contractor has full rights and authority to grant, assign and
otherwise transfer to the Employer all the rights, title and interest
described in Clause 20.1;
(c)
use or exploitation of the license(s) granted to and/or obtained for the

benefit of the Employer under Clause 20.1 does not infringe the
Intellectual Property Rights of any third party and further, that the
Contractor is not aware of any such infringement or allegation of
infringement; and
(d)
the Contractor has full rights and authority to grant the Employer the
license(s) described in Clause 20.1.
The Employer shall notify the Contractor as soon as practicable of any breach
of Clause 20.6 or any infringement, suspected infringement or alleged
infringement of the Intellectual Property Rights referred to in Clause 20.6
Page 28
above. Upon such notification, the Contractor shall take immediate steps to
defend any third party claim, demand, suit or action at its expense and will
fully indemnify the Employer from and against any and all costs, damages
and liabilities suffered by or awarded against the Employer as a result of a
breach of Clause 20.6 or any infringement, suspected infringement or alleged
infringement of Intellectual Property Rights of any third party.
20.8
Without prejudice to the Employers right to defend a claim alleging such

infringement where applicable, the Contractor shall if requested by the
Employer but at the Contractors own expense conduct the defence of a
claim alleging such infringement. The Contractor shall observe the Employers
direction relating in any way to that defence or to negotiations for settlement
of the claim.
20.9
Without prejudice to any other right of the Employer in the Contract or at law,
if it is determined by any independent tribunal of fact or law or if it is agreed
between the Parties to the dispute that an infringement of any Intellectual
Property Rights or other proprietary rights of any third party has occurred, the
Contractor shall at its sole expense do any one or more of the following:
20.10
20.11
(a)
modify or replace the Hardware (or part thereof) and/or any

deliverables derived from the provision of works under the Contract (or
parts thereof) in order to achieve non-infringing status, provided that
such modification or replacement does not materially decrease the
functionality of the Equipment (or parts thereof);
(b)
modify, re-write or replace the Program (or part thereof) and/or any
deliverables derived from the provision of works under the Contract (or
parts thereof) in order to achieve non-infringing status provided that
such modification, re-writing or replacement does not materially
decrease the functionality of the Equipment (or parts thereof); and/or
(c)
procure for the Employer the right to continue the use and possession
of the Equipment, Program, Hardware and any deliverables derived
from the provision of works under the Contract.
The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence in choosing the options
under sub-Clause 20.9. Notwithstanding this, in the event the options in subClause 20.9 (a), (b), and/or (c) cannot be achieved after reasonable
attempts have been made with respect to the foregoing options, the
Employer is entitled to:
(a)
claim, and the Contractor shall refund to the Employer the amount
paid (or, if not yet paid, not charge the Employer) for the infringing
Equipment, any infringing deliverables derived from the provision of
works under the Contract and/or any other deliverable or part of the
Equipment that, as a result of such infringing Equipment/deliverable no
longer operate in accordance with the requirements of the Contract;
or
(b)
terminate the Contract forthwith and the Employer may pursue all
remedies available under the Contract or at law for the Contractors
breach of the Contract.
During an infringement claim, action or proceeding, the Contractor shall

provide the Employer with a report every week to update the Employer as to
Page 29
the actions taken by the Contractor to secure the Employers continued right
to use the allegedly infringing Equipment, Hardware, Program and/or any
deliverables derived from the provision of Works under the Contract and
apprise the Employer of the various options available
20.12
The provisions of this Clause 20 shall survive the expiration or termination of the
Contract for any reason whatsoever.
21.
RIGHT OF USE
21.1
Nothing in the Contact shall limit or restrict the Employers right to sell, lease,
transfer or in anyway dispose of the Equipment to any third party and
accordingly the Contractor agrees that the Employer may assign, sub-license
or otherwise transfer to such third party the licences described under subClause 20.1 without any further charge to the Employer or notice to any
person. Where applicable, the Contractor shall procure and obtain all and
any consents or licenses from any relevant third parties for the purpose of
ensuring that the Employer has the unrestricted right of use described in the
preceding sentence. Further, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees that
the Employer has the right to reproduce, modify, develop and/or otherwise
deal with the Hardware and any deliverables arising from the provision of the
Works under the Contract as the Employer deems fit. In no event shall the
Contractor use or deal in any way with the Hardware and any deliverables
arising from the provision of the Works under the Contract unless such use is
required by the Contractor for the purpose of performing its obligations
hereunder.
21.2
22.
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
22.1
The Contractor shall deliver to the Employer a Performance Guarantee in the

form of an on-demand, irrevocable and unconditional Bank Guarantee
issued by a bank or financial institution licensed under the Banking and
Financial Institutions Act 1989, in the form annexed hereto, for a sum as
specified in the Appendix within fourteen (14) days of the date of the Letter of
Award. The Performance Guarantee shall be furnished by the Contractor, at
its own cost, to guarantee the due, faithful and complete performance of the
Contract and the observance by the Contractor of all stipulations, conditions
and obligations on the part of the Contractor herein contained.
22.2
The Performance Guarantee shall be held or shall remain valid from the date
of the Contract until [**].
22.3
The provision by the Contractor of the Performance Guarantee in

accordance with this Clause shall be a condition precedent to payments by
the Employer to the Contractor under the provisions of the Contract.
22.4
If the Contractor fails to execute the Contract or any conditions therein or

commits any breach of its obligations under the Contract, the Employer at its
sole discretion have the right from time to time to call on all or part of the
amount represented by the Performance Guarantee.
Page 30
22.5
The costs of obtaining the Performance Guarantee shall be borne by the

Contractor.
22.6
If the Performance Guarantee is not duly furnished by the Contractor to the

Employer within fourteen (14) days of the date of the Letter of Award, the
Employer may at its option, without prejudice to any rights or claims it may
have against the Contractor, within seven (7) days after the expiry of the said
fourteen-day period, terminate the Contract forthwith by notice in writing to
the Contractor. The Employer shall thereupon not be liable for any claim or
demand from the Contractor in respect of anything then already done or
furnished or in respect of any other matter or thing whatsoever in connection
with the Contract. Without prejudice to its other rights and remedies, the
Employer shall be entitled to be repaid by the Contractor all expenses
incurred by the Employer incidental to the obtaining of new tenders.
23.
GUARANTEE AND GUARANTEE PERIOD
23.1
The Contractor unconditionally guarantees that all Equipment supplied to

and/or Works performed for the Employer shall be free from all Defects
including defects arising out of faulty design (for both Hardware and
Software), and inferior material or inferior workmanship, and that the
Equipment shall be of the highest quality and fit for the purpose which they
are intended in accordance with the Contract. Further, the Equipment shall
strictly comply with each and every requirement of the Contract.
23.2
If the Contractor is not the manufacturer of the Equipment supplied, the

Contractor shall obtain and lodge with the Employer a manufacturers
warranty in relation to the Equipment. Nothing in this Clause 23.2 shall exclude
or limit the liability and responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract.
23.3
The Guarantee Period the Contract shall be for a period as specified in the
Appendix. In the event that any Defect shall appear or be discovered by the
Employer within a period of two (2) years after the expiry of the Guarantee
Period, the Contractor warrants that it shall make good at its own expense by
re-performance, repair, replacement, adjustment and/or modification at the
Contractors option provided that the Defect was caused by the act or
omission of the Contractor during the performance of the Work, and would
not have been disclosed by reasonable examination prior to the expiry of the
Guarantee Period applicable to the relevant part. A Final Acceptance
Certificate will be issued by the Employer to the Contractor at the end of the
last Guarantee Period. The issuance of the Final Acceptance Certificate shall
nevertheless be without prejudice to any claim of the Employer in respect of
any Defects attributable to the Contractor which may subsequently become
apparent or be discovered.
23.4
If the Works or the Equipment or any part thereof develops a Defect or fails to
comply with the provisions of the Contract and requirements of the Employer
during the Guarantee Period, the Contractor shall, without any charge to the
Employer, promptly (i) re-perform the Works at the Contractors expense as
necessary or appropriate in order to correct any Defect and (ii) in the case of
any Defect in the Equipment or any part thereof replace or, at the
Contractors option, repair the same at the Contractors expense such that it
is to the satisfaction of the Employer Provided that where the operation of any
such Defective Equipment or any part thereof has caused damage to or
adversely affected the performance of any other machinery, equipment,
Page 31
materials, systems or other items, such affected machinery, equipment,

materials, systems or other items shall also be replaced or, at the Contractors
option, repaired at the Contractors expense. The Contractor shall bear all
costs and expenses associated with re-performing, repairing or replacing the
Works, including necessary disassembly, transportation, reassembly and retesting, as well as reworking, repair or replacement of such Works or
Equipment, and disassembly and reassembly of adjacent works or parts when
necessary to give access to the Defective Work or Equipment. Such reperformance, repair or replacement shall be completed immediately but in
any event not later than the period specified in the Appendix from the date
and time of notification by the Employer to do so, failing which the Contractor
shall be liable to pay Ringgit Malaysia (RM) per hour for every hours delay
or part thereof and shall continue until the Contractor re-performs, repairs or
replaces such part to the satisfaction of the Employer. The Contractor shall
bear all costs including freight charges, cost of testing, examining, reperforming, repairing and replacing the Defective Works or Equipment or any
part thereof.
23.5
In the event that the Equipment develops any Software Defect or fault, the
Contractor shall ensure that the Software is re-installed and/or a software
patch is applied to resolve the software fault within the period specified in the
Appendix, failing which the Contractor shall be liable to pay Ringgit Malaysia
(RM) per hour of delay for every hours delay or part thereof from the date
and time of notification by the Employer to do so, until the Contractor resolves
the Software Defect or fault to the satisfaction of the Employer.
23.6
In the event that the Equipment or any part thereof is not to the satisfaction of
the Employer after such repair or replacement or in the event of a failure on
the part of the Contractor to complete the repair or replacement within the
stipulated time, the Employer reserves the right to purchase the same from
any other source or to make good any damage or defect in any manner it
deems fit and all costs thereby incurred shall be recoverable from the
Contractor as a debt or by deduction in accordance with Clause 36 herein.
23.7
If during the Guarantee Period, any part or parts of the Equipment are found
or observed to breakdown repeatedly or at least three (3) times despite
repairs, such part or parts shall be replaced immediately but in any event not
later than the period specified in the Appendix by the Contractor at no cost
to the Employer. A full report pertaining to the repeated breakdowns shall be
submitted to the Employer by the Contractor within fourteen (14) days from
the date of notice given by the Employer.
23.8
Any Defective part of the Equipment repaired or replaced during the

Guarantee Period shall itself be subject to a further full Guarantee Period from
the date of such repair or replacement. Further, the machinery, equipment or
system containing such Defective part shall also be subject to a further full
Guarantee Period from the date of such repair or replacement of the
defective part provided that the Guarantee Period for the Equipment had not
yet expired at the date of such repair or replacement. Any Defective part of
the Works re-performed during the Guarantee Period shall itself be subject to
a further full Guarantee Period from the date of such re-performance.
Notwithstanding anything herein, the Guarantee Period shall not continue
beyond forty eight (48) months from date of Acceptance.
23.9
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of spare parts for use in
repair or replacement of the Equipment or part thereof.
Page 32
23.10
In the course of re-performing or repairing or replacing the Works and/or the

Equipment pursuant to this Clause 23, the Contractor shall coordinate its
performance of such work with the Employer so as to minimize any adverse
effect on the operations of the Power Plant.
23.11
The provisions of this Clause 23 shall be without prejudice to the Employer's

other rights and remedies under the Contract and at law and shall survive the
expiration or termination of the Contract for any reason whatsoever.
24.
TAXES AND DUTIES
24.1
The prices quoted for the Equipment shall include all custom duties, dues,
fees, penalties, taxes and charges payable upon export of the Equipment
from the exporting country, importing it into the country of the project, and
transport it to the project sites. Custom duties, dues, fees, taxes and charges
payable upon import of the Equipment into Malaysia and transit of the
Equipment through any country shall be borne by the Contractor.
24.2
The prices quoted for the Works, Training and repair charges, if any, stipulated
in the Contract shall be inclusive of any goods and/or services tax and all
other taxes or charges that may be incurred.
25.
SPARE PARTS
25.1
The Contractor shall guarantee and be responsible for the adequate supply
of all spare parts, including all protective elements and components required
for the satisfactory performance of the Equipment.
25.2
The spare parts supplied shall be the original spare parts or those which are
functionally equivalent, capable of direct substitution and that which will not
cause any direct or indirect side effects whatsoever.
25.3
The Contractor shall maintain an adequate stock of spare parts in Malaysia.

The delivery of spare parts shall be ex-stock and receivable on receipt of
purchase order.
25.4
In the event that there have been changes in the model of the Equipment,
the Contractor shall supply the Employer with such spare parts, the quality of
which shall be equivalent to, or better than the original parts. The prices of
such spare parts shall be equivalent to or lower than the prices of the original
parts.
25.5
If such spares are not available for Equipment which is not manufactured by
the Contractor, the Contractor shall supply the Employer with spares, the
quality of which shall be equivalent to or better than the original parts. The
prices of such spare parts shall not be higher than the prices of the original
parts.
25.6
In the event that the design of any item of the Equipment is to be replaced,
modified or its manufacture is to be ceased, the Contractor shall at its own
costs ensure proper substitute is available in place thereof. The substituted
parts in place thereof shall comply essentially in all aspects with the Contract
Page 33
applicable to the part being replaced and must be identical thereto or

directly compatible therewith.
25.7
In the event where the production of parts of the Equipment is to be ceased

either by the Contractor or by a third party, an official notice shall be made
by the Contractor at least twelve (12) months prior to the discontinuation of
such production to enable the Employer to plan its future requirements.
25.8
Alternatively, if so required by the Employer due to obsolescence of the

Equipment or whatsoever reason, the Contractor may be required to assign
rights to manufacture parts of the Equipment for the Employers own use on
terms and conditions to be mutually agreed by the Parties.
25.9
26.
INJURY TO PERSONS AND DAMAGE TO PROPERTY
26.1
The Contractor shall be liable for and shall indemnify the Employer against
any liability, loss, claims or proceedings whatsoever arising under any statute
or at common law in respect of personal injuries to or the death of any person
arising out of or in the course of or caused by the carrying out of the Contract.
26.2
The Contractor shall be liable for, and shall indemnify the Employer against
any expenses, liability, loss, claim or proceedings in respect of any damage
whatsoever to any property real or personal arising out of or in the course of or
caused by the carrying out of the Contract.
27.
INSURANCE
27.1
General
Without prejudice to the Contractor's liability to indemnify the Employer under
Clause 26 herein and as a condition precedent to the commencement of any
work under the Contract including the supply of Equipment and/or
performance of Works, the Contractor shall procure and maintain at its own
expenses during the performance of the Contract the following insurance
applicable to its work with respect to the Contract:
(a)
Erection/Contractor All Risks
Erection All Risks Insurance against all risks of physical loss or damage to the
Work of the Contractor under the Contract including all plants, Equipment
and materials incidental thereto and which are to be incorporated into the
Work while at Site from the start of the Work until the end of the last Guarantee
Period for the full Contract Value including loss or damage to principal existing
property, bodily injury and property damage to third party with minimum limits
as particularly describe in the policy schedule as follows:
Page 34
(i)
Material Damage
(1)
(2)
(ii)
Third Party Liability

(1)
(2)
(b)
Total/Full Contract Value; and

principal existing property of minimum limit of Ringgit Malaysia
(RM) any one loss.
Bodily Injury; and

Property damage with combination minimum limit liability of
Ringgit Malaysia (RM) any one loss.
All Risks Transit Insurance
All Risks Transit Insurance covering all materials, from the respective warehouse
and/or point of supply and/or place of manufacture until arrival at the Site
which for this purpose shall mean after unloading. The insurance shall be
against loss or damage arising from customary all risks marine perils
(including war, strikes, riots and civil commotion).
(c)
Workmens Compensation
Workmens' Compensation insurance indemnifying the Contractor and the

Employer against all liabilities arising out of claims by any and every workman
employed in and for the performance of the Contract for payment of
compensation under or by virtue of the Workmen's Compensation Legislation
or any other law amending or replacing such Legislation and from all costs
and expenses incidental or consequential thereto.
(d)
Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
Comprehensive General Liability Insurance in the amount of Ringgit Malaysia

(RM) for any one claim or series of claims arising out of an accident or
occurrence in connection with the Works resulting in bodily injury and for
personal injury including death and property damage or destruction to any
property which shall arise out of the Works. This insurance shall be as an
alternative to the insurance coverage as stated in sub-sub-Clause 27.1(a)(ii)(1)
and (2).
(e)
Motor Vehicle Liability
Motor Vehicle Liability Insurance covering owned, non-owned and hired

vehicles, for use in connection with the Works, in an amount of not less than
combined bodily injury and property damage limit of Ringgit Malaysia (RM)
per occurrence, in a comprehensive form.
Page 35
27.2
Duration of Insurance
27.2.1
The insurances required to be provided by the Contractor pursuant to subClause 27.1 above shall be held or shall remain valid from the date of the
Contract until three (3) months after the expiry of the last Guarantee Period.
27.2.2
The provision by the Contractor of the insurance in accordance with this subClause 27.1 shall be a condition precedent to payments by the Employer to
the Contractor under the provisions of the Contract.
27.2.3
If the insurances required to be provided by the Contractor pursuant to subClause 27.1 above are not duly furnished by the Contractor to the Employer
within fourteen (14) days of the date of the Letter of Award or such other
required time, the Employer may at its option, without prejudice to any rights
or claims it may have against the Contractor, within seven (7) days after the
expiry of the said period, terminate the Contract forthwith by notice in writing
to the Contractor. The Employer shall thereupon not be liable for any claim or
demand from the Contractor in respect of anything then already done or
furnished or in respect of any other matter or thing whatsoever in connection
with the Contract. Without prejudice to its other rights and remedies, the
Employer shall be entitled to be repaid by the Contractor all expenses
incurred by the Employer incidental to the obtaining of new tenders.
27.3
Additional Insured and Cross Liability

The Employer shall be named as an additional insured on the policy specified
in sub-Clause 27.1 (a), (b), (d) and (e) and such policy shall further include a
cross liability provision indemnifying each other against claims made on it by
the other jointly insured. The Contractor shall furnish the Employer with copies
of such policy and endorsement thereto.
27.4
Subcontractors
Without prejudice to Clause 44.2 herein, the Contractor shall be responsible to
ensure that its Subcontractors shall take out and maintain at their own costs
similar insurance as specified hereinabove.
27.5
Waiver of Subrogation
The policies of insurance described in this Clause 27 shall contain waivers of
subrogation for the benefit of the Employer and its employees. Evidence
suitable to the Employer of such waiver shall be provided by the Contractor.
27.6
Evidence of Insurance and Cancellation

No later than fourteen (14) days after the date of the Letter of Award, the
Contractor shall furnish to the Employer insurance policies from the
Contractor's insurance carriers evidencing the insurance coverage required in
this Clause 27 inclusive of sub-Clause 27.3 acceptable to the Employer. The
Contractor shall not cancel the insurance without prior written consent of the
Employer. If such insurance is cancelled, the Contractor shall obtain other
insurance in accordance with this Clause 27 and upon such terms and
conditions, which may be stipulated by the Employer.
Page 36
If any default is made by the Contractor in complying with the terms of this
Clause 27, the E.P.M. may without prejudice to any other remedy available to
the Employer for breach of any terms of the Contract:
(a)
withhold all payments which would otherwise be due to the

Contractor under the Contract and out of such monies so withheld
satisfy any claims for compensation that would have been borne by
an insurance company had the Contractor not made default in
maintaining a policy of insurance; and/or
(b)
pay such premiums as have become due and remain unpaid and
deduct the amount of such premiums in accordance with Clause 36
herein.
Nothing in this Clause shall be construed to take away or to waive or in any

manner to modify the rights of the Employer to be indemnified by the
Contractor in respect of all compensation, costs and other expenses
whatsoever which by reason of the Contractors default or otherwise become
payable by the Employer under the Contract and/or at law.
27.7
Generalities Related to Insurance
27.7.1
All deductibles relative to the above insurance coverage are to the account
of the Contractor.
27.7.2
Following a loss or damage, the Contractor shall remedy any such loss or
damage with due diligence and shall not wait for the receipt of any insurance
proceeds to effect the repairs.
27.7.3
All of the above insurance coverage shall provide that prior to any
cancellation or material change thereto initiated by the underwriters, a sixty
(60) day notice thereof shall be forwarded to the Employer.
27.7.4
The Contractor or the Employer, as the case may be, shall promptly give to
the other Party notice in writing of any claim made or proceedings
commenced for which the Contractor or the Employer claims to be entitled
to indemnification under the Contract, shall confer with the other Party
concerning the defence of any such claim or proceedings, shall permit such
other Party to be represented by counsel in defence thereof and shall not
effect settlement of or compromise any such claim or proceedings without
the others prior written agreement.
28.
POWER PLANT OPERATION
28.1
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that priority shall be given to the
operation of the Power Plant, including the use of the jetty for the purpose of
unloading coal supply from vessels. The Contractor shall not do anything that
may interfere with the operation or the maintenance of the Power Plant.
28.2
Not in derogation to the generality of the foregoing, the Contractor shall in

accordance with the requirements of the E.P.M. co-ordinate his own work
under the Contract with that of the operator of the Power Plant in order to
ensure that there shall not be any interruption to the operation or the
maintenance of the Power Plant.
Page 37
29.
TEST AND INSPECTION
29.1
The Contractor shall promptly furnish a factory test certificate of the

Equipment to the Employer certifying that the Contractor or the manufacturer
has tested the Equipment and the test results show that the Equipment has
complied with the Specifications. Only Equipment certified as complying with
the Specifications shall be delivery to the Site.
The Employer and the E.P.M, shall have the right to test and inspect the
Equipment during and/or after manufacture. If the Employer exercises this
right, the Contractor shall ensure that the manufacturer provides or procures
the provision of all such facilities as may be required by the Employer.
Notwithstanding any tests conducted by the Employer, its representatives and
agents pursuant to this sub-Clause 29.1, the Contractor is and shall remain fully
responsible for the functionality and performance of the Equipment in
accordance with the Contract.
29.2
It shall be the duty of the Contractor to promptly forward to the Employer the
results of all tests performed in respect of the Equipment and/or Works for the
information of the Employer, in particular any non-conformance to the
standards set out in the Contract.
30.
REJECTION
30.1
Any Equipment and/or Works found to be not in compliance with the

Specifications may be rejected in part or in whole at the sole discretion of the
Employer.
30.2
No Equipment which has been rejected or any portion thereof shall again be
offered for Acceptance under the Contract or any other contract with the
Employer unless prior written permission and approval is obtained from the
Employer.
30.3
Any action taken under this Clause is without prejudice to the Employers
other rights and remedies under the Contract and at law.
31.
EXTENSION OF TIME
31.1
Any reference to factor or cause of delay in this Clause is limited to the

following:
(a)
Force Majeure which prevents the Contractor from delivering or

performing the Works in accordance with the Contract;
(b)
Variation Order issued by an authorized officer of the Employer;
(c)
any other grounds for extension of time expressly mentioned in the

Contract but not mentioned in this Clause;
Any other factors or causes and expected effects thereof shall not provide
the Contractor with the right to claim for extension of time and neither oblige
the Employer to allow any extension of time.
Page 38
31.2
If and whenever it becomes reasonably apparent that the Equipment and/or

Works will not be or is unlikely to achieve Acceptance by the Date of
Completion, the Contractor shall notify the Employer either orally or in writing
to that effect immediately but in any event not later than twenty-four (24)
hours after the factor or cause of the delays could reasonably have been
known to the Contractor. The Contractor shall identify the factor or cause of
the delay in such notice. If such notice is given orally by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall immediately thereafter but in any event not later than
twenty-four (24) hours after the issuance of the oral notice issue a written
confirmation confirming the oral notice given earlier. Such written
confirmation shall set out, amongst others, the date and time of the oral
notice, the name of the Employers personnel to whom the oral notice is given
and the factor or cause of the delay. The notice and the written confirmation
(where applicable) issued by the Contractor under Clause 31.2 herein shall be
a condition precedent to any grant of extension of time under this Clause 31.
31.3
The Contractor shall identify the cause of the delay in the written notice
required under sub-Clause 31.2 herein and shall, in writing within twenty-four
(24) hours of the date of the notice under sub-Clause 31.2, give particulars of
the factor or cause of the delay, supporting documents if any and the
expected effects thereof and estimate the extent, if any, of the expected
delay in achieving the Date of Completion.
31.4
Within ten (10) days of receipt of the particulars provided by the Contractor
under sub-Clause 31.3 herein, the Employer shall in writing to the Contractor
grant an extension of time as it estimates to be fair and reasonable or reject
the Contractors claim for an extension of time. If such extension of time or
rejection is granted or informed orally by the Employer to the Contractor, the
Employer shall thereafter issue a written confirmation confirming the
Employers decision in respect of the Contractors claim for an extension of
time. The provisions of Clause 47 shall apply in the event that the Contractor is
dissatisfied with the decision of the Employer under this sub-Clause.
31.5
This Clause is always subject to:

(a)
The Contractor using constantly its best endeavours to prevent or

avoid delay or its effects thereof so as to ensure that there will be
continuous and uninterrupted performance of the Works.
(b)
The Contractor providing the requisite notice, written confirmation

(where applicable) and particulars in accordance with the provisions
of this Clause 31. The Contractor agrees and acknowledges that any
failure to provide the notice, written confirmation and/or particulars
within the stipulated period shall strictly invalidate any right to an
extension of time under the Contract..
32.
VARIATION
32.1
A Variation includes but is not restricted to the following:

(a)
an addition to or omission from the Works;
(b)
a change in the character and/or nature of any part of the Works;
Page 39
(c)
the postponement of the Date of Completion of the Works as desired

by the Employer.
32.2
For the avoidance of doubt the term Variation shall include changes which
may be intended to alter the use to which the Equipment and/or Works will be
put to, but shall exclude any instructions, repairs, replacements and changes
in relation to the Equipment and/or Works which have arisen due to or are
necessitated by or intended to cure any default of or breach of contract by
the Contractor.
32.3
The Contractor shall not vary any part of the Works except as authorised in
writing by the E.P.M.
32.4
The E.P.M. may from time to time issue a Variation Order to vary any part of
the Works and the Contractor shall carry out such Variation, and be bound by
the same conditions, so far as applicable, as though the said Variations were
stated in the Contract Documents. In any case in which the Contractor has
received any such instruction from the E.P.M. which either then or later will, in
the opinion of the Contractor, involve an addition to or deduction from the
Contract Value, the Contractor shall, as soon as reasonably possible and in
any event not later than fourteen (14) days from the date of the Variation
Order, advise the E.P.M. in writing to that effect.
32.5
The amount to be added to or deducted from the Contract Value arising

from such Variation Order shall be ascertained and determined by the E.P.M.
in accordance with the rates specified in the Price Schedule, so far as the
same may be applicable, and where the rates are not contained in the said
Price Schedule, such amount shall be such sum as is reasonable in the opinion
of the E.P.M.
32.6
Any such Variation Order issued to the Contractor shall only be valid if signed
by the E.P.M. No Variation Order given under this Clause shall vitiate the
Contract.
32.7
Accelerated Works
32.7.1
The E.P.M. shall have the power to require the Contractor, by the issue of a
Variation Order, to expedite works so as to achieve a date of completion that
is earlier than the Date of Completion.
32.7.2
The Contractor shall, within seven (7) days from the date of receipt of a
Variation Order to accelerate works, submit to the E.P.M. for his approval a
revised programme of works to enable the Contractor to meet the revised
Date of Completion and its estimate of any increase in costs payable to it as a
result of the Variation Order with a breakdown as to how the costs were
calculated in accordance with sub-sub-Clause 32.7.3 herein.
32.7.3
The amount to be added to the Contract Value arising from such Variation
Order to accelerate works shall be ascertained and determined in
accordance with the rates specified in the Price Schedule so far as the same
may be applicable and the quotation of the Contractor in its Tender
submission as to the costs of accelerated works.
32.7.4
The Contractor shall in its Tender submission quote for the cost of accelerated
works which shall include labour and transportation costs. The Contractor
Page 40
shall make provision for two (2) different bases for the calculation of the cost
quotation for accelerated works, being based on man-hours or on a flat rate
basis with reference to the level of acceleration required. The Employer shall
have the right to choose the base for the cost calculation for the accelerated
works.
33.
33.1
33.2
33.3
LOSS AND EXPENSE

Claims
In every case where by virtue of the Contract, any additional or extra cost or
expense to the Contractor is to be paid by the Employer or where the
Contractor considers that owing to the default of the Employer, it has been or
will be put to additional expense in executing the works over and above that
allowed for in the Price Schedule, the Contractor shall if it intends to make any
claim for payment of such additional or extra cost or expense give to the
Employer notice, in writing, of its intention to make such a claim and the
notice shall state the reasons by virtue of which it considers it is entitled to
additional payment and the headings under which the cost or expense is to
be calculated.
Notification
Notice under the Clause 33.1 shall be given by the Contractor immediately or
where this is not practicable at the latest within fourteen (14) days of the time
when the Contractor knows, or ought reasonably to have known that the
instruction of the E.P.M. or the default of the Employer will or is likely to give rise
to additional or extra cost or expense as the case may be.
Details to be Submitted
The Contractor shall submit to the E.P.M., as soon as practicable and in any
case not later than fourteen (14) days after the date of the notice referred to
in Clause 33.2, detailed particulars of the reasons giving rise to the claim and
full particulars showing how the amount of the claim is calculated.
33.4
Condition Precedent to Payment

Notwithstanding anything else in the Contract, the Employer shall not be liable
to make any payment for additional or extra cost or expense as aforesaid in
respect of which the Contractor has failed to make a claim or give notice or
submit particulars as required by Clause 32.
33.5
Limitation of Liability
Notwithstanding anything else in the Contract, the Contractor shall not, in any
case whatsoever, be entitled to claim for any indirect or consequential losses,
including loss of profit, from the Employer.
34.
AMENDMENT TO CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
34.1
No changes, alterations or modifications to the Contract Documents shall be

effective unless in writing, and executed by the authorized officers of the
Employer and the Contractor.
34.2
The Parties agree that any Variation to the terms contained in the Contract
must be effected by the issue of Variation Orders in accordance with Clause
32 herein.
Page 41
35.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
35.1
In the event that the Contractor fails to achieve Acceptance by the Date of
Completion or within any extended period granted under Clause 31 herein,
the Contractor shall pay the Employer as Liquidated Damages, a sum
calculated at the rate as specified in the Appendix.
35.2
The Contractor shall continue to pay the Employer the sum calculated at the
aforesaid rate until Acceptance is achieved subject to the limit of Liquidated
Damages specified in the Appendix. The aforesaid sum shall be paid by
direct remittance within thirty (30) days of written notification by the Employer
of the liability of the Contractor to pay Liquidated Damages and the quantum
of the Liquidated Damages imposed.
35.3
The payment of such Liquidated Damages shall not relieve the Contractor
from its obligation to complete the Works or from any other of its obligations,
duties, responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
35.4
In the event that the Contractor fails to successfully perform repairs or

replacements of the Equipment or any part thereof after being instructed by
the Employer to do so within the stipulated time, the Employer shall have the
right to claim damages from the Contractor for any losses incurred.
35.5
Should the Contractor default in the payment of Liquidated Damages

applied under the terms of this Clause, the Employer shall have the right to
obtain compensation by making deductions in accordance with Clause 36
herein or by forfeiture in part or in whole of the Performance Guarantee.
35.6
In the event that the Employer for whatever reason shall not be entitled to
recover Liquidated Damages, the Employer shall remain entitled to recover
such loss, expense, costs or damages as the Employer are entitled to at law.
36.
DEDUCTION OF PAYMENT DUE
36.1
All losses, costs, charges, expenses and damages which the Employer has or
may have incurred or sustained by reason of any acts or defaults of the
Contractor in the performance of the Contract together with any sum or sums
payable to the Employer as Liquidated Damages under the Contract shall be
paid by the Contractor in accordance with the certificate of the E.P.M.
stating the amount of any such losses, costs, charges, expenses or damages
referencing the relevant Clause supporting the certificate.
36.2
Should the Contractor fail to make the payment within thirty (30) days of
receipt of the certificate of the E.P.M. referred to in sub-Clause 36.1, the
Employer may then deduct the amount stated in the certificate of the E.P.M.
from any monies that are due, or may become due to the Contractor under
the Contract or have been deposited as security or otherwise. If the monies
so due or deposited shall be less than the amount deductible, the difference
shall be treated as a debt by the Contractor to the Employer. The certificate
of the E.P.M. referred to in sub-Clause 36.1 shall be conclusive evidence of the
matters stated therein.
Page 42
36.3
This Clause 36 shall operate without prejudice to the Employer's other rights
and remedies under the Contract or at law.
37.
CONTRACTORS EQUIPMENT, MACHINERY AND MATERIAL
37.1
Contractor's Equipment
All Contractor's equipment and machinery and materials provided by the
Contractor shall, when brought on to the Site, be deemed to be exclusively
intended for the execution of the Works and the Contractor shall not remove
the same or any part thereof, except for the purpose of moving it from one
part of the Site to another, without the consent of the E.P.M.
37.2
Employer not Liable for Damage

The Employer shall not at any time be liable for the loss of or damage to any
of the said Contractor's equipment or machinery or materials provided by the
Contractor.
37.3
Contractors Owned Equipment, Machinery and Materials

All equipment, machinery, materials and goods owned by the Contractor or
by any company in which the Contractor has a controlling interest shall when
on the Site shall be deemed to be property of the Employer.
37.4
Hired Equipment and Machinery

With a view to securing, in the event of termination under Clause 38, the
continued availability, for the purpose of executing the Works, of any
Contractor's equipment and machinery, the Contractor shall not bring on to
the Site any hired equipment and machinery unless there is an agreement for
the hire thereof which contains a provision that the owner thereof will, on
request in writing made by the Employer within seven (7) days after the date
on which any termination has become effective, and on the Employer
undertaking to pay all hire charges in respect thereof from such date, hire
such equipment and machinery to the Employer on the same terms in all
respects as the same was hired to the Contractor save that the Employer shall
be entitled to permit the use thereof by any other contractor employed by
him for the purpose of executing and completing the Works and remedying
any breach of warranties or defects therein, under the terms of the said
Clause 38.
37.5
Costs for the Purpose of Clause 38

In the event of the Employer entering into any agreement for the hire of
Contractor's equipment and machinery pursuant to Clause 37.4, all sums
properly paid by the Employer under the provisions of any such agreement
and all costs incurred by him (including stamp duties) in entering into such
agreement shall be deemed, for the purpose of Clause 38, to be part of the
cost of executing and completing the Works and the remedying of any
breach of warranties or defects therein.
Page 43
37.6
Contractor to certify
The Contractor shall upon request made by the Employer at any time in
relation to any item of the Contractors equipment and machinery forthwith
notify to the E.P.M. in writing the name and address of the owner thereof and
shall in the case of the hired Contractors equipment and machinery certify
that the agreement for the hire thereof contains a provision in accordance
with the requirements of Clause 37.4 and forward to the E.P.M. a certified true
copy of such agreement.
37.7
Sale in default of removal

If the Contractor shall fail to remove any Contractors equipment or
machinery or any material provided by the Contractor within a reasonable
time after completion of the Works then the Employer may:
(a)
sell any which are the property of the Contractor; and
(b)
return any which are not the property of the Contractor to the owner
thereof at the Contractor's expense;
and after deducting from any proceeds of sale the costs, charges and
expenses of and in connection with such sale and of and in connection with
return as aforesaid shall pay the balance (if any) to the Contractor but to the
extent that the proceeds of any sale are insufficient to meet all such costs,
charges and expenses the excess shall be a debt due from the Contractor to
the Employer and shall be deductible or recoverable by the Employer from
any monies due or that may become due to the Contractor under the
Contract or may be recovered by the Employer from the Contractor at law.
37.8
Incorporation of Clause in Subcontracts

The Contractor shall, where entering into any subcontract for the execution of
any part of the Works, incorporate in such subcontract (by reference or
otherwise) the provisions of this Sub-Clause 37 in relation to the equipment,
machinery and materials brought on to the Site by the Subcontractor.
38.
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
38.1
Without prejudice to any other rights or remedies that the Employer may
possess under the Contract or common law, if the Contractor makes default
in any one or more of the following:
(a)
without reasonable cause, wholly or partially fails to achieve

Acceptance for the Equipment and the Works on or before the Date
of Completion or any extended period granted; or
(b)
neglects to execute the Works with due diligence and expedition to

the satisfaction of the E.P.M.; or
(c)
overall non-performance
Contractor; or
or
partial
non-performance
by
the
Page 44
(d)
persistently refuses or neglects, after notice in writing from the

Employer, to remove defective work or improper material; or
(e)
fails to comply with the provisions of Clause 27 herein in respect of the

insurance requirements; or
(f)
fails to comply with the provisions of Clause 5.1 herein in respect of the
Performance Guarantee or insurance requirements; or
(g)
commits a breach of any of the conditions or stipulations in the

Contract; or
then the E.P.M. may give a written notice to the Contractor specifying the
default. If the Contractor shall continue with such default for thirty (30) days
from the date of receipt of such notice, then the E.P.M. may, by an
immediate written notice to the Contractor, terminate the Contract.
38.2
If:
(a)
the Contractor commits an act of bankruptcy or becomes bankrupt;

or
(b)
the Contractor becomes insolvent or compounds with or makes

arrangement with its creditors; or
(c)
the Contractor, being a company, has a winding up order (other than

for the purpose of amalgamation or reconstruction) made against
him; or
(d)
a provisional liquidator, receiver or manager of the Contractors

business or undertaking has been duly appointed, or possession has
been taken by or on behalf of creditors or debenture holders secured
by a floating charge of any property of the Contractor comprised in or
is a subject of the said floating charge; or
(e)
the Employer has any reason to believe that the Contractor or any
one employed by it or acting on its behalf, whether with or without the
Contractor's knowledge, is engaged or has engaged in corrupt
practice in connection with the Contract
then, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies that the Employer may
possess under the Contract or common law, the E.P.M. may by an immediate
written notice to the Contractor terminate the Contract.
38.3
In the event of such termination of the Contract, the Contractor shall

immediately vacate the Site and ensure that the Subcontractors also vacate
the Site. The Employer shall be at liberty to obtain the Equipment from such
other source as it may determine or to employ other workmen or by its own
workers, and forthwith execute such obligations under the Contract as the
Contractor may have neglected to do or not completed. The Employer shall
in any event have the free use of all the Contractor's equipment, machinery
and materials that may be on the Site in connection with the Works.
Page 45
38.4
Unless prohibited by law, the Contractor shall, if so instructed by the E.P.M

within fourteen (14) days of such termination referred to in this Clause 38,
assign to the Employer the benefit of any agreement for the supply of any
equipment, goods or materials or services and/or work executed for any part
of the Works for the purposes of the Contract, which the Contractor may have
entered into. In any case the Employer shall have the right but not the
obligation to pay any Subcontractor for any equipment, goods or materials or
services and/or for work executed for any part of the Works (whether before
or after the date of termination) for which the Contractor has failed to make
payment. The Contractor shall allow or pay to the Employer all such payments
made under this Clause 38.4.
38.5
The Contractor shall as and when required remove from the Site any
equipment, machinery, materials and goods belonging to or hired by the
Contractor within such reasonable time as the E.P.M may specify in a written
notice to him and in default the Employer may (but without being responsible
for any loss or damage) remove and sell any such property belonging to the
Contractor, holding the proceeds less all cost incurred to the credit of the
Contractor.
38.6
Without prejudice to Clause 36 herein, the Employer shall be entitled to retain

and apply any monies which may be otherwise due on the Contract by it to
the Contractor, or such part thereof as may be necessary, to the payment of
the cost of executing or of completing the Works under the Contract and the
expenses, damages and losses incurred by the Employer by reason of the
termination.
38.7
Nothing contained in this Clause shall affect any claim by the Employer under
Clause 35.
38.8
The termination of the Contract pursuant to sub-Clause 38.1, 38.2 and 20.10(b)
herein shall not prejudice the rights of the Employer to sue for damages or to
obtain any other relief in respect of any antecedent breach of the Contract
prior to such termination.
39.
TERMINATION OF CONTRACT WITHOUT CAUSE
39.1
The Employer has the right at any time, for any reason and at its absolute
discretion, terminate the Contract without cause by written notice to the
Contractor. The notice of termination shall specify the date upon which such
termination becomes effective.
39.2
Upon receipt of such notification to terminate the Contract, the Contractor

shall either immediately or upon such other date as is specified in the notice
of termination:
(a)
discontinue its performance of the works under the Contract other

than such part of the work as the E.P.M. may instruct for the purpose of
protecting, making safe or tidying up such part of the works as may
already have been executed or may be in the course of execution;
(b)
enable the Employer or its nominee to take over the Works and/or
Equipment so far installed and completed under the Contract,
including the materials already on the Site;
Page 46
(c)
assign to the Employer, upon the request made and to the extent
required by the E.P.M., all of the Contractors rights under subcontracts then outstanding;
(d)
remove from the Site all construction equipment owned by the

Contractor with the exception of any such construction equipment
that the Employer has advised the Contractor that it may wish to
purchase from the Contractor on terms and conditions to be agreed
upon by the Parties; and
(e)
deliver to the Employer all plans, calculation, drawings and all other
data prepared by the Contractor or the Subcontractors in connection
with the Contract and all documents and drawings supplied to the
Contractor by the Employer in connection with the Contract.
39.3
The Employer shall pay for all works that have been completed in
accordance with the Price Schedule, but not for any loss of profit expected
by the Contractor, within sixty (60) days or as otherwise agreed by both Parties
after the Contractors receipt of notice of termination.
39.4
The Employer shall also pay for:

b)
the cost of goods or materials reasonably ordered for the Contract
which shall have been delivered to the Contractor or of which the
Contractor is legally liable to take delivery (such materials becoming
the property of the Employer upon payment being made by the
Employer);
c)
a sum to be certified by the E.P.M. being the amount of any
expenditure reasonably incurred by the Contractor in the expectation
of completing the whole of the Works in so far as such expenditure
shall not have been covered by the payments in the other sub-Clauses
of this Clause 39;
d)
the reasonable cost of removal from the Site of all the Contractors
equipment; and
e)
the reasonable cost of repatriation of the Contractors staff and
workmen employed in relation to the Contract at the time of such
termination.
40.
STAMP DUTY AND DOCUMENTATION COST

The stamp duty for the Contract shall be borne by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall also bear the cost arising from the copying and binding of
the Contract Documents.
41.
LANGUAGE
All data, documents, descriptions, diagrams, instructions, markings for ready
identification of major items of the Equipment and/or Works and
correspondence shall be in the English Language.
Page 47
42.
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS
42.1
The Contractor shall comply in all respects (including giving of all notices and
the paying of all fees required) with any law, regulation or by-law, or any
order or directive issued by any Government Authority relating to the supply of
the Equipment and performance of the Works (hereinafter referred to as
Statutory Requirements).
42.2
The Contractor shall comply with Part VIII of the Lembaga Pembangunan
Industri Pembinaan Malaysia Act 1994 and the Construction Industry (Levy
Collection) Regulations 1996, and shall submit a notification on Form CIDB
11/96 to the Lembaga not less than fourteen (14) days after the issuance of
the Letter of Award or not less than fourteen (14) days before the
commencement of the works under the Contract, whichever date is earlier.
43.
FORCE MAJEURE
If a state of war or hostilities, whether declared or not, or any state of riots, civil
commotion or general strike or any earthquake, flood, fire, tempest or any
natural disaster or any other cause beyond the reasonable control of either
Party arises or exists which has materially affected the fulfilment of the
Contract, any question respecting the continuance, suspension or termination
of the Contract shall be settled by mutual agreement between the Employer
and the Contractor, or failing such agreement shall be settled as provided in
Clause 47 herein. Force Majeure events do not include (a) strikes, work
stoppages and labor disputes or unrest of any kind that involve only
employees of the Contractor or any Subcontractors, (b) late delivery of
materials, machinery or equipment (except to the extent caused by a Force
Majeure event in Malaysia), and (c) economic hardship.
44.
ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
44.1
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract or any part thereof or any benefit
or interest therein or thereunder without the prior written consent of the
Employer.
44.2
The Contractor shall not sub-contract all or any part of the Contract without
the prior written consent of the Employer, and such consent, if given, shall not
relieve the Contractor from any liability or obligation under the Contract and
it shall be responsible for all the acts, defaults and neglects of any
Subcontractor, its agents, servants or workmen as fully as if they were the acts,
defaults or neglects of the Contractor, its agents, servants or workmen.
Page 48
45.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT AND SEVERABILITY
45.1
The Contract embodies the entire agreement between the Employer and the
Contractor relating to the subject matter hereof and supersedes all prior
agreements and arrangements between the Parties and there are no
promises, terms, conditions or obligations, oral or written, expressed or implied
other than those contained herein.
45.2
In the event that any provision of the Contract is held to be invalid or

otherwise unenforceable, such provision shall be deemed to be deleted from
the Contract, while the remaining provisions of the Contract shall be
unaffected and continue in full force and effect.
46.
WAIVER
46.1
Any delay, neglect or forbearance on the part of the Employer in enforcing

any provision of the Contract against the Contractor shall not be deemed to
be a waiver of that provision or any other provision of the Contract and shall
not prejudice the right of the Employer to enforce the Contract.
46.2
For the avoidance of doubt, no approval, inspection, monitoring, consent,

verification or other like matters shall constitute a waiver by the Employer or
the E.P.M. of any of the terms of the Contract and shall not relieve the
Contractor of any of its liabilities and responsibilities under the Contract.
47.
DISPUTE RESOLUTION AND GOVERNING LAW
47.1
If any dispute or difference shall arise between the Parties to the Contract
from or in connection with the Contract or its performance, construction or
interpretation, the Parties shall endeavour to resolve it by agreement through
negotiations conducted in good faith.
47.2
If the Parties are unable to resolve the dispute or difference through

negotiations, the issues shall in the first instance be dealt with by mediation,
with a mediator to be chosen jointly by them, or, if agreement on a mediator
is not reached within seven (7) days of one Party giving the other notice to do
so, to be appointed by the Chairman of the Malaysian Mediation Centre.
Both Parties reserve all their rights in the event that no agreed resolution shall
be reached in the mediation and neither Party shall be deemed precluded
from taking such interim formal steps as may be considered necessary to
protect such Partys position while the mediation is pending.
47.3
If the dispute or difference has not been resolved by mediation within thirty
(30) days of intimation thereof, or such extended period as the Parties may
agree, the dispute or difference shall be referred to arbitration and any such
reference shall be deemed to be a submission to arbitration within the
meaning of the Arbitration Act 2005.
Page 49
47.4
The Parties agree to the appointment of a sole arbitrator by agreement

between the Parties or in default of such agreement, to be appointed by the
Director of the Kuala Lumpur Regional Centre for Arbitration.
47.5
The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Rules of the Kuala
Lumpur Regional Centre for Arbitration which are in force at the time of the
reference to arbitration.
47.6
Part III of the Arbitration Act 2005 ("the Act") shall apply to this reference to
arbitration.
47.7
The seat and venue of the arbitration shall be Kuala Lumpur.
47.8
The arbitral proceedings shall be conducted in the English language.
47.9
The governing law of this Agreement shall be the law of Malaysia.
47.10
All written communications in respect of the arbitral proceedings may be

delivered or sent by hand, registered post or courier service. For the
avoidance of doubt, the provisions of Section 6(2) of the Act shall not be
applicable in this arbitration.
47.11
In respect of Section 17(2)(a) of the Act, any hearings previously held may be
repeated at the discretion of the substitute arbitrator.
47.12
The award of the arbitrator shall be final and binding on both Parties.
48.
CONFIDENTIALITY, PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENTS AND PRESS
48.1
The Contractor, its employees, agents, Subcontractors and representatives

shall treat the Contract and everything in connection to or arising out of the
Contract as private and confidential. No disclosure shall be made by the
Contractor to any third party without the prior written consent of the
Employer.
48.2
The Contractor shall not make any public announcement or issue any press
statement concerning any aspect of the Contract without the prior written
approval of the Employer. All requests for such approval shall be directed in
writing to the Employer and shall state the subject matter of the
announcement or the text of the press release.
49.
NOTICES
49.1
All notices which are required to be given under the Contract shall be given in
writing and will be deemed to have been given if delivered to the addressee
at its address for service as set out in the Form of Contract by one of the
following means:
(a)
Personal delivery with acknowledgment of receipt;
(b)
Registered mail / AR Registered Mail; or
Page 50
(c)
Courier service.
49.2
A notice delivered personally or by courier shall be deemed to have been

given at the time of delivery. Notice sent by mail shall be deemed to have
been given three (3) days after the date of sending.
49.3
Either Party may change the address set out in the Form of Contract by giving
fourteen (14) days notice in writing to the other Party.
50.
RELATIONSHIP OF PARTIES
50.1
The Contractor is required to declare:

(a)
whether the Contractor is considered to be a "related party" to the

Employer for purposes of Bursa Malaysia Berhad's Listing Requirements;
and/or
(b)
whether the Contractor is considered to have a "related party

relationship" with the Employer for purposes of Financial Reporting
Standard 124 issued by the Malaysian Accounting Standards Board.
50.2
If the Contractor has made an affirmative declaration in relation to either or

both matters in sub-Clause 50.1 above, the Contractor is required to give full
details of the nature of its relationship with the Employer.
50.3
The Contractor shall provide and disclose to the Employer any such
information/particulars as required by the Employer at any time, including the
time of submission of Tender documents and during the duration of the
Contract.
50.4
Failure of the Contractor to comply with Clause 50.1 or any false declaration
made by the Contractor shall be considered as a breach of the Contract by
the Contractor and the Employer shall be entitled to exercise all or any of its
rights and remedies under the Contract or at common law.
50.5
The Contractor shall indemnify and keep the Employer, its officers and
directors indemnified from and against any and all claims, losses, damages
and costs (including but not limited to fines and penalties) arising from such
false declaration and/or breach of this Clause.
50.6
Nothing contained herein shall be constructed to imply a partnership, joint

venture, principal/agent or an employer/employee relationship between the
Parties and neither Party shall have any right, power or authority to create any
obligation, express or implied on behalf of the other.
51.
TITLES AND HEADINGS

Titles and headings to Clauses herein are inserted for convenience of
reference only and shall not have any effect on the interpretation thereof.
52.
SUCCESSORS BOUND
The Contract shall be binding on the Parties, their successors and permitted
assigns.
--- END OF CLAUSES --Page 51
APPENDIX
TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
CLAUSE
DESCRIPTION
1.
Title Of Contract: THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND

CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN,
KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION
2.2
Employers Project Manager :
TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN. BHD.
Employers Engineer or Owners Engineer:
10.1.1
Date of Completion:
The date falling Nine (9) months from the date of Commencement / Site
Possession as stated in the Letter of Award.
17.2
The amortisation rate of the advance payment is:
NOT APPLICABLE
Page 52
CLAUSE
DESCRIPTION
17.3
Method of payment of the Contract Value :
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AMOUNT:

22.1
RINGGIT MALAYSIA (RM) EQUIVALENT TO 5% OF THE CONTRACT VALUE.
23.3
Guarantee Period:
[**] from the date of Acceptance.
23.4
The Works or Equipment develops a Defect or fails to comply with the

Contract:
Re-performance, repair and replacement shall be successfully completed not

later than [**] from the time of receipt by the Contractor of notification by
Employer, or a specific time as may be otherwise mutually agreed by both
parties.
23.5
The Equipment develops a Software Defect or fault:
Re-performance, repair and replacement shall be successfully completed not

later than [**] from the time of receipt by the Contractor of notification by
Employer, or a specific time as may be otherwise mutually agreed by both
parties.
Page 53
CLAUSE
DESCRIPTION
23.7
Replacement for repeated breakdown :
Replacement shall be completed not later than [**] from the time of receipt by
the Contractor of notification by Employer, or a specific time as may be
otherwise mutually agreed by both parties
35.1
Liquidated Damages amount :

Ringgit Malaysia (RM) per day or any part thereof of delay in
achieving Acceptance as from the Date of Completion to be
calculated as follows:
LAD = Contract Price x Current BLR %
365 Days
35.2
Limit of Liquidated Damages:
Amount equivalent to [**] (**%) of the Contract Value [which limit will be
breached in [**] days].
End of Clauses
Page 54
BANK GUARANTEE FORM

PERFORMANCE BOND
BORANG B
(SPP Bil. 5 Tahun 2007)
BORANG JAMINAN BANK/JAMINAN SYARIKAT KEWANGAN/
JAMINAN INSURANS UNTUK BON PELAKSANAAN
(KONTRAK KERJA)
PERJANJIAN ini dibuat pada ................. haribulan ........................................ 20 ........... di

antara ................................................................................ (tuliskan nama Bank/Syarikat
Insurans) yang beralamat di ..................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................. (tuliskan
alamat urusan perniagaan utama Bank/Syarikat tersebut) kemudian daripada ini disebut
sebagai Penjamin) sebagai satu pihak dengan Tanjung Bin Power Sdn. Bhd. (kemudian
daripada ini disebut sebagai Majikan (Employer)) sebagai pihak yang satu lagi.
BAHAWASANYA
Sebagai balasan Majikan (Employer) membenarkan .............................................

.................................................................. (kemudian daripada ini disebut sebagai
Kontraktor) untuk THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF
WAREHOUSE,
LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER

PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM FLOOR UPGRADE WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS AND
OPEN STORAGE SHED untuk harga kontrak
sejumlah
Ringgit Malaysia
........................ . Kami hendaklah membayar kepada Majikan

(Employer)
tanpa
faedah,
jumlah
wang
sebanyak
Ringgit
Malaysia
....................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
(RM .......................................... ). KAMI yang bertandatangan di bawah ini atas
permintaan Kontraktor mengakujanji (iaitu akujanji yang tidak boleh dibatalkan)
satu jaminan kepada Majikan (Employer) bahawa :
Penjamin telah bersetuju untuk menjamin pelaksanaan yang sepatutnya ke atas

Kontrak tersebut mengikut cara sepertimana yang terdapat kemudian daripada ini.
Maka Penjamin dengan ini bersetuju dengan Majikan (Employer) seperti berikut :1.
Apabila sahaja Majikan (Employer) membuat tuntutan bertulis, maka Penjamin

hendaklah dengan serta merta membayar kepada Majikan (Employer) nilai yang
ditentukan di dalam tuntutan tersebut tanpa mengira sama ada terdapat apa-apa
bantahan atau tentangan daripada Kontraktor atau Penjamin atau mana-mana pihak
ketiga yang lain dan tanpa bukti atau bersyarat. Dengan syarat sentiasanya bahawa
jumlah tuntutan yang dibuat tidak melebihi sebanyak Ringgit Malaysia :
...
.. (nyatakan nilai
jaminan dengan perkataan) (RM .) dan bahawa
tanggungan Penjamin untuk membayar kepada Majikan (Employer) di bawah
Perjanjian ini tidak melebihi nilai tersebut di atas.
2.
Majikan (Employer) berhak untuk membuat apa-apa tuntutan separa jika

dikehendakinya dan jumlah tuntutan kesemua tuntutan separa itu hendaklah tidak
melebihi
nilai
Ringgit
Malaysia
(nyatakan nilai jaminan dalam perkataan) (RM ) dan

liability Penjamin untuk membayar kepada Majikan (Employer) jumlah yang
disebutkan terdahulu hendaklah dikurangkan dengan perkadaran yang bersamaan
dengan apa-apa bayaran separa yang telah dibuat oleh Penjamin.
3.
Penjamin tidak akan dilepaskan dari Jaminan ini oleh sebarang perkiraan di antara
Kontraktor dan Majikan (Employer) samada dengan atau tanpa kebenaran Penjamin
atau oleh sebarang perubahan tentang kewajipan yang diakujanji oleh Kontraktor
atau oleh sebarang penangguhan samada dari segi pelaksanaaan, masa, pembayaran
atau sebaliknya.
4.
Jaminan ini adalah jaminan yang berterusan dan tidak boleh dibatalkan dan
berkuatkuasa sehingga (kemudian daripada ini
disebut sebagai Tarikh Mati Asal (Initial Expiry Date) iaitu dua belas (12) bulan
selepas tarikh tamat tempoh tanggungan kecacatan sepertimana yang dinyatakan di
dalam kontrak, atau di dalam keadaan di mana kontrak dibatalkan, satu (1) tahun
selepas tarikh kontrak dibatalkan. Penjamin hendaklah melanjutkan Tarikh Mati
Asal (Initial Expiry Date) jaminan ini untuk tempoh tambahan selama tidak
melebihi satu (1) tahun daripada Tarikh Mati Lanjutan (Extended Expiry Date)
apabila diminta oleh Majikan (Employer) dan Jaminan ini adalah dengan ini
dilanjutkan. Jumlah agregat maksimum yang Majikan (Employer) berhak di bawah
Perjanjian ini mestilah sentiasa dipastikan tidak melebihi jumlah Ringgit Malaysia :
(nyatakan
nilai
jaminan dalam perkataan) (RM .).
5.
Apa-apa tanggungjawab dan tanggungan Penjamin di bawah Perjanjian ini

hendaklah luput apabila Perjanjian ini tamat pada Tarikh Mati Asal (Initial Expiry
Date) atau Tarikh Mati Lanjutan (Extended Expiry Date) melainkan jika
sebelumnya Majikan (Employer) telah meminta secara bertulis kepada Penjamin
untuk membayar sejumlah wang tertentu yang masih belum dijelaskan mengikut
peruntukan kontrak.
6.
SEMUA TUNTUTAN BERKAITAN DENGAN JAMINAN INI, JIKA ADA,

MESTILAH DITERIMA OLEH PIHAK BANK/SYARIKAT INSURANS
DALAM TEMPOH SAHLAKU JAMINAN INI ATAUPUN DALAM MASA
EMPAT (4) MINGGU DARIPADA TAMATNYA TARIKH JAMINAN INI,
MENGIKUT MANA YANG LEBIH KEMUDIAN.
PADA MENYAKSIKAN HAL DI ATAS, pihak-pihak kepada Perjanjian ini telah

menurunkan tandatangan dan meteri mereka pada hari dan tahun yang mula-mula
tertulis di atas.
Ditandatangan untuk dan pihak
Penjamin di hadapan
Nama :
Jawatan :
)
)
Cop Bank/Syarikat Insurans :
(Saksi)
Nama :
Jawatan :
Cop Bank/Syarikat Insurans :
Ditandatangan untuk dan bagi pihak )
Kerajaan Malaysia di hadapan
Nama :
Jawatan :
)
)
Cop Jabatan :
(Saksi)
Nama :
Jawatan :
Cop Jabatan :
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION II
A SPECIFICATIONS
B MEASUREMENT OF AMPLICATION AND PRICING FACTOR
C SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES
D SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION II PART A
SPECIFICATIONS (SOFTCOPY CD)
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS

(2005 Edition)
SECTION
CONTENT
PAGE
Preliminaries and General Conditions
A/1 A/16
Piling Work
B/1 B/19
Excavation and Earthworks
C/1 C/6
Concrete Work
D/1 D/39
Brickwork
E/1 E/6
Soil Drainage
F/1 F/6
Roofing Work
G/1 G/3
Carpentry, Joinery and Ironmongery Works
H/1 H/14
Structural Steel and Metal Works
I/1 I/10
Plastering, Paving and Tiling Works
J/1 J/10
Water Supply Plumbing, Sanitary and Rainwater
K/1 K/18
Goods Installation
Glazing Work
L/1 L/3
Painting Work
M/1 M/8
External Works
N/1 N/19
List of Standards and Codes of Practice Referred To In This Specification
19
SECTION B - PILING WORKS

SECTION B.1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.
General
1.1
2.
Soil Investigation Reports

2.1
3.
Unless otherwise specified, all piling shall conform in all respects to BS 8004. All
materials and workmanship for piling shall be in accordance with the appropriate sections
of this Specification.
Any information and report on soil investigation for the Works made available to tenderers
are intended for guidance only. The S.O. shall not be responsible for the scope,
completeness or accuracy of the information, or for any opinion or conclusion given in the
report.
Tolerances
3.1
Setting out
Setting out shall be carried out from the main grid lines of the proposed structure.
Immediately before installation of the pile, the pile position shall be marked with suitable
identifiable pins, pegs or markers.
3.2
Position
For a pile cut-off at or above ground level, the maximum permitted deviation of the pile
centre from the centre points shown in the Drawings shall not exceed 75mm in any
direction. For a pile cut off below ground level, an increase in this tolerance is permitted in
accordance with clauses 3.3 and 3.4 herein below.
3.3
Verticality
The maximum permitted deviation of the finished pile from the vertical shall be 1 in 75.
3.4
Rake
The piling rig shall be set and maintained to attain the required rake. The maximum
permitted deviation of the finished pile from the specified rake or the rake shown in the
Drawings shall be 1 in 25.
3.5
Forcible correction
Forcible correction to concrete piles shall not be permitted. Forcible corrections may be
permitted to other types of piles only if approved by the S.O. However, no forcible
correction shall be made to piles which have deviated beyond the permissible limits
specified in clauses 3.2, 3.3 and 3.4.
3.6
Piles out of Alignment or Position

The Contractor shall, if ordered by the S.O., extract and reinstall any pile which has
deviated out of position or alignment by more than the specified limit, or alternatively the
substructure shall be modified to the approval of the S.O. The cost of such extraction and
reinstallation, or any extra cost in the design and construction of a modified foundation
B/1
Piling Work
shall be borne by the Contractor, if, in the opinion of the S.O., such extra work has been
made necessary due to the incompetency and/or negligence of the Contractor.
4.
Piling Programme
4.1
5.
6.
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O. his proposed programme for the execution of the
piling work at least seven (7) days before commencement of the Work. In addition, the
Contractor shall inform the S.O. daily of the programme of piling for the following working
day and shall give adequate notice of his intention to work outside working hours, if this
has already been approved by the S.O.
Records
5.1
The Contractor shall keep records of particulars as listed in Table 1 hereof for each pile
installed, and shall submit two (2) signed copies of these records to the S.O. not later
than noon of the next working day after the pile was installed. The signed records shall
form part of the records for the Works.
5.2
Any unexpected driving condition shall be noted in the records.
Nuisance and Damage

6.1
Noise and Disturbance

The Contractor shall take all necessary precaution in carrying out the work so as to
minimise noise and disturbance during driving.
6.2
7.
8.
Damage to Adjacent Structures, Utilities

6.2.1
The Contractor's attention is specially drawn to his responsibilities under the

clause Damage to Property of the Conditions of Contract. The Contractor is
deemed to have familiarised himself with the risks likely to be imposed on
adjacent structures and all utilities by the proposed method of piling.
6.2.2
Before commencing any piling work, the Contractor shall accompany the S.O. on
a site inspection in order to consider any circumstances which may indicate the
presence of underground mains and services at or in the vicinity of the Site. If,
during execution of the Work, damage is or is likely to be caused to any utilities
or adjacent structures, the Contractor shall submit to the S.O. his proposals for
repair or avoidance of such damage.
Damage to Piles
7.1
The Contractor shall execute the Work in such a manner so as to minimise damage to
piles.
7.2
All piles damaged during handling, transporting, pitching, driving or at any other time shall
be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
Safety Precautions
8.1
The Contractor shall take safety precautions throughout the piling operation in
accordance with the requirements of the relevant laws and by-laws.
B/2
Piling Work
9.
Definition
9.1
Preliminary Pile
A preliminary pile is a pile installed before the commencement of the main piling work for
the purpose of establishing the driving criteria for subsequent working piles and for
confirming the adequacy of the design, dimensions and bearing capacity. This pile shall
be treated as a working pile unless otherwise directed by the S.O.
9.2
Working Pile
A working pile is a pile which is installed as part of the permanent foundation work.
9.3
9.4
9.5
Ultimate Load
9.3.1
Where pile test is carried out, the Ultimate Load is defined as the constant load
at which the pile continues to settle at a steady rate, or the load at which the
maximum settlement of the pile during one continuous loading cycle is one tenth
of the pile base diameter or least dimension, whichever is the lesser.
9.3.2
Where a pile test is not carried out, the Ultimate Load is defined as the calculated
Ultimate Load, derived from appropriate static bearing capacity calculations.
Design Load
9.4.1
The Design Load shall be defined in relation to a pile loaded in isolation, without
nearby piles being loaded, except those providing test reaction.
9.4.2
Where the Ultimate Load is measured by means of pile tests, the Design Load is
the Ultimate Load divided by the specified factor of safety.
9.4.3
Where the Ultimate Load is not measured by means of pile tests, the Design
Load is the lesser of the following:(a)
the calculated ultimate load for the pile divided by the specified factor of
safety.
(b)
the calculated ultimate load of the pile base together with the calculated
shaft adhesion, as derived from appropriate static bearing capacity
calculations, divided by a factor of safety of 3.0.
Factor of Safety
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the Factor of Safety shall be taken as not less
than 2.0 for piles in compression, and not less than 3.0 for piles in tension.
9.6
Working Load
The Working Load is the Design Load modified to allow for group effect, pile spacing or
any other factors changing the efficiency of the total foundation from that of a single
isolated pile, and is at least equal to the dead plus imposed loads on the pile together
with downdrag or uplift loads as appropriate.
B/3
Piling Work
TABLE 1 - ( Ref. Cl.5.1- Section B.1)
**
**
(a)
Contract particulars.
(b)
Pile type.
(c)
Pile reference number (location).
(d)
Nominal cross-sectional dimensions or diameter.
(e)
Supplied length of pile.
(f)
Date and time of starting and finishing and redriving.
(g)
Ground level at commencement of installation of pile.
(h)
Cut-off level.
(j)
Type, weight, drop and mechanical condition of hammer and equivalent information for
other equipment.
(k)
Number and type of packings used, and type and condition of dolly used during driving of
the pile.
(l)
Pile driving log.
(m)
Set of pile in mm per blow or number of blows per 25mm of penetration.
(n)
If required, the sets taken at intervals during the driving.
(p)
If required, temporary compression of ground and pile from time of marked increase in
driving resistance until pile reaches its final level.
(q)
All information regarding obstructions, delays and other interruptions to the sequence of
work.
** e.g. Precast concrete; timber; vertical or rake; compression or tension; friction or end-bearing or both.
B/4
Piling Work
SECTION B.2 - PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES
1.
General
1.1
2.
3.
Reinforcement
2.1
The main reinforcing bars in piles not exceeding 12m in length shall be in one continuous
length unless otherwise approved by the S.O.
2.2
In piles exceeding 12m long, joints shall be permitted in main longitudinal bars at 12m
nominal intervals. Joints in adjacent bars shall be staggered at least 1m apart along the
length of the pile. Joints shall be butt-welded as specified in SECTION D: CONCRETE
WORK. Other means of jointing reinforcement, such as by means of mechanical
couplings, shall be to the approval of the S.O.
Pile Shoes
3.1
3.2
4.
The type of pile shoes to be used shall be as shown in the Drawings and shall comply
with the following as relevant:(a)
Chilled-hardened cast iron shoes as used for making grey iron castings to BS
1452 Grade 10; or
(b)
Mild steel to BS 7668, BS EN 10029, BSEN 10155 ;or
(c)
Cast steel to BS 3100, Grade A.
Mild steel straps cast into the shoes shall be as shown in the Drawings. Rock shoes
where required, shall consist of wrought iron shoes and mild steel straps cast into chilledhardened cast iron blocks, as shown in the Drawings.
Supply of Piles
4.1
5.
The materials and the manufacture of precast reinforced concrete piles shall comply with
MS 1314.
The Contractor shall only use precast concrete piles supplied by approved
manufacturers. Before the commencement of piling work, the Contractor shall notify the
S.O the name of the manufacturers.
Production of Piles at Site

5.1
In any area or condition where supply of piles is not practicable, the S.O. may allow the
Contractor to make arrangement and produce the piles of the same or better quality at
the construction site.
5.2
Piles made from Ordinary Portland Cement shall be kept damp for a period of at least ten
(10) days after casting. Side forms shall not be stripped less than three (3) days after
casting. After 14 days, piles may be lifted and removed to a suitable stacking area but
they shall not be driven until they are at least 28 days old.
5.3
For piles made from Rapid Hardening Cement, the above periods may be modified as
approved by the S.O.
B/5
Piling Work
6.
7.
8.
Marking, Handling and Storage of Piles

6.1
After a pile has been cast, the date of casting, reference number, and the length shall be
clearly marked with indeletable marker on the top surface and on the head of the pile. In
addition, each pile shall be marked at intervals of 300mm along its length before being
driven.
6.2
The method and sequence of lifting, handling, transporting and storing piles shall be such
that piles are not damaged. Only the designed lifting and support points shall be used.
During transport and storage, piles shall be placed on adequate supports located under
the lifting points of the piles.
6.3
All piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length. Packings of uniform
thickness shall be provided between piles at the lifting points.
Tolerances in Pile Dimensions

7.1
The cross-sectional dimensions of the pile shall not be less than those shown in the
Drawings, and shall not exceed them by more than 6mm.
7.2
Any face of a pile shall not deviate by more than 6mm from a straight edge 3m long laid
on the face, and the centroid of any cross-section of the pile shall not deviate by more
than 12mm from the straight line connecting the centroids of the end faces of the pile.
Length of Piles
8.1
9.
The length of a pile shall be taken to mean the overall length measured from the tip of the
shoe to the top of the head. The length of piles shall be to the approval of the S.O. Based
on the results of pile driving resistance and/or load tests carried out on piles driven on the
Site, the S.O. may, from time to time, order the lengths of piles to be modified.
Pitching and Driving

9.1
Driving Equipment
The driving equipment to be used shall be of such type and capacity to the approval of
the S.O. If a drop hammer is used, it shall be of a free fall type, and the weight of the
hammer shall be as specified in BS 8004. For driving piles of sizes smaller than 200mm,
diesel hammer shall not be used.
9.2
Pitching of Piles
Piles shall be pitched accurately in the positions as shown in the Drawings. At all stages
during driving and until the pile has set or been driven to the required length, all exposed
piles shall be adequately supported and restrained by means of leaders, trestles,
temporary supports or other guide arrangements to maintain position and alignment, and
to prevent buckling and damage to the piles.
9.3
Driving of Piles
9.3.1
Each pile shall be driven continuously until the specified set and/or depth has
been reached. However, the S.O. may permit the suspension of driving if he is
satisfied that:
a)
the rate of penetration prior to the cessation of driving will be
substantially re-established on its resumption, or
b)
the suspension of driving is beyond the control of the Contractor.

B/6
Piling Work
9.4
9.3.2
A follower (long dolly) shall not be used for driving end bearing piles. It may be
used for driving frictional piles with the prior approval of the S.O.
9.3.3
The Contractor shall inform the S.O. without delay if an unexpected change in
driving characteristics is encountered.
9.3.4
Where required by the S.O., the set shall be taken at approved intervals during
the driving to establish the behaviour of the piles. A set shall be taken only in the
presence of the S.O. unless otherwise approved. The Contractor shall provide all
facilities to enable the S.O. to check driving resistance.
9.3.5
Redrive checks, if required, shall be carried out in accordance with an approved

procedure.
Pile Driving Log

A detailed record of the driving resistance over the full length of each pile shall be kept.
The log shall record the number of blows for every 300mm of pile penetration.
9.5
9.6
Final Set
9.5.1
The final set of a pile other than a friction pile, shall be recorded either as the
penetration in millimetres per 10 blows or as the number of blows required to
produce a penetration of 25mm.
9.5.2
When a final set is being measured, the following requirements shall be met:a)
The exposed part of the pile shall be in good condition, without damage
or distortion;
b)
The dolly and packing shall be in sound condition;
c)
The hammer blow shall be in line with the pile axis, and the impact
surfaces shall be flat and at right angles to the pile and hammer axis;
d)
The hammer shall be in good condition and operating correctly;
e)
The temporary compression of the pile shall be recorded.
Driving Sequence and Risen Piles

Piles shall be driven in an approved sequence to minimise the detrimental effects of
heave and lateral displacement of the ground. When required, levels and measurements
shall be taken to determine the movement of the ground or any pile resulting from the
driving process. If any pile rise occurs as a result of adjacent piles being driven, the
Contractor shall submit to the S.O. his proposals for correcting this and to avoid the same
in subsequent work.
9.7
Preboring
If preboring is specified, the pile shall be pitched into a hole prebored to the depth shown
in the Drawings, unless otherwise instructed by the S.O.
9.8
Jetting
Jetting shall be carried out only when the Contractors detailed proposals have been
approved, and not for the last 3 metre of the required depth of penetration.
B/7
Piling Work
10.
Repair and Lengthening of Pile

10.1
Repair of Damaged Pile Heads

10.1.1 Damaged pile head shall be cut off square at sound concrete, and all loose
particles shall be removed by wire brushing, followed by washing with water. If
the pile is to be subjected to further driving, the head shall be replaced with
concrete of an approved grade. The new head shall be cast truly in line with the
remainder of the pile, and be properly cured and allowed to harden sufficiently to
develop the strength necessary for further driving.
10.1.2 If a pile has been driven to the required set or depth but sound concrete of the
pile is below cut-off level, the pile shall be made good to the cut-off level with
concrete of a grade not inferior than that of the concrete of the pile.
10.2
Lengthening of Piles
Where piles have to be lengthened, other than by means of welding of steel plates as
detailed in the Drawings, the reinforcement shall be stripped of all surrounding concrete
for a distance equal to 40 times the diameter of the main reinforcement measured from
the pile head for spliced joints and 300mm for butt welded joints, and all lateral
reinforcement shall be removed. The lengthening bars shall butt on the exposed bars in
true alignment, and shall be butt welded as specified or shall be spliced with bars of the
same diameters as the main pile bars, 80 times diameter in length and lapping the main
bars for a distance of 40 times diameter above and below the joint, and shall be securely
bound with 1.63mm soft annealed iron wire. New binders of similar size shall be provided
and spaced at half the centres of the binders in the main body of the pile, and shall be
securely bound with 1.63mm diameter soft annealed iron wire, and the pile extended by
concreting in properly constructed mounds to the length required. Steps shall be taken to
ensure that the concrete at the joint between the old and the new concrete is not of
inferior grade and quality than that of the concrete of the pile. The extension shall be truly
in line with the remainder of the pile, and be properly cured and allowed to harden
sufficiently to develop the strength necessary for further driving.
10.3
Driving Repaired/Lengthened Piles

Piles which have been repaired or lengthened by adding cast-insitu concrete as specified
in clauses 10.1 and 10.2 shall not be driven until the added concrete has reached the
specified strength of the concrete for the pile.
11.
Cutting and Stripping of Pile Heads

11.1
When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth, the head of the pile shall be cut
off to the level shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the S.O. The length of
reinforcing bars projecting above this level shall be as shown in the Drawings.
11.2
Care shall be taken to avoid cracking or otherwise damaging the rest of the pile. Cracked
or defective concrete shall be cut away and made good with new concrete properly
bonded to the old.
B/8
Piling Work
SECTION B.3 - STEEL H-BEARING PILES
1.
Pile Sections and Dimensions

1.1
2.
3.
Straightness of Piles
2.1
For standard rolled profiles, the deviation from straightness in millimetres shall not
exceed 1.04(L-4.5) where L is the length of the pile in metres.
2.2
For proprietary sections made up from rolled profiles, the deviation from straightness shall
not exceed 1/1000 of the length of the pile.
Strengthening of Piles
3.1
4.
6.
Each pile shall be clearly marked with white indeletable marking at the flanged head
showing its reference number and overall length. In addition, each pile shall be marked at
intervals of 300mm along its length before being driven.
Handling and Storage of Piles

5.1
All operations such as handling and transporting of piles shall be carried out in such a
manner that damage to piles and their coatings are minimised. Piles that are damaged
during handling and transporting shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
All damaged and rejected piles shall be removed from the Site forthwith.
5.2
Piles within a stack shall be in groups of the same length and on approved supports.
Pitching and Driving of Piles

6.1
7.
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., the strengthening of the toe of the pile in lieu of a
shoe or the strengthening of the head of a pile shall be made from material of the same
grade as the pile and to the details as shown in the Drawings.
Marking of Piles
4.1
5.
All steel H-bearing piles shall comply with JIS A5526 with regards to profile and
tolerances and the steel shall comply with the requirements of BS EN 10025 and BS
4360. The profile and grade to be used are as specified or as shown in the Drawings.
Pitching and driving of piles shall be in accordance with Clauses 9.1 to 9.8 as specified
hereinbefore under PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES.
7.1
Where lengthening of piles are required, the piles shall be jointed by butt-welding,
stiffened with plates fillet-welded on all four sides as detailed in the Drawings. All welding
shall be continuous and complying with BS 5135 and BS 5950. The type and size of
welding shall be as detailed in the Drawings.
B/9
Piling Work
8.
Preparation of Pile Heads

8.1
When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth and before encasing in
concrete, the piles shall be cut to within 20mm of the levels shown in the Drawings, and
protective coatings, if any, shall be removed from the surfaces of the pile heads down to
a level 150mm above the soffit of the concrete. Pile heads shall be constructed to the
details as shown in the Drawings.
B/10
Piling Work
SECTION B.4 - PRESSURE -TREATED TIMBER PILES
1.
Timber
1.1
General
Pressure-treated timber piles to be used for the Works shall be those approved by SIRIM.
1.2
Species of timber
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., only Kempas (Kempassia Malaccensis) shall be
used.
1.3
Definitions
The timber terms used in the Specification shall have the meaning assigned to them in
BS 5268 or the Malayan Grading Rules for Sawn Hardwood Timber (1968) whichever is
applicable.
1.4
Quality
Timber used for the piles shall not be of a lesser quality than the Selected Structural
Grades Specified in Section J (Stress Grading) of Part III of the Malayan Grading Rules
for Sawn Hardwood Timber. The timber shall be free from rot, fungal or pest attack, and
any other defects not permitted for its grade.
1.5
Tolerances in Dimension
The dimension of sawn timber piles shall be within the range of 2mm less and 6mm
greater than their specified cross-sectional dimensions. The centroid of any cross-section
of a sawn timber pile shall not deviate by more than 25mm from the straight line
connecting the centroids of the end faces of the standard length of a 6 metre pile.
2.
Workmanship
2.1
3.
Preservative Treatment
3.1
4.
Where applicable, the standard of workmanship shall conform to BS 5268.
The method for treatment of timber shall be the full-cell process. The full-cell process,
compositions of preservatives, the test methods for determining the depth of penetration
of preservatives, and the weight of net salt retention in the treated timber shall be as
described in MS 1302, MS 1304 and MS 360. The minimum depth of penetration of
preservative shall be 25mm and the minimum weight net dry salt retention in the treated
part of the timber shall not be less than 16 kg/m3.
Marking of Pile
4.1
The treated pile shall be permanently marked with identifications which indicate that they
comply with this Specification, manufacturers trade mark, charge number and date of
treatment and the length of the pile.
B/11
Piling Work
5.
Inspection
5.2
6.
7.
8.
9.
Warranty
6.1
Before commencement of work, the Contractor shall notify the S.O. the name of the
supplier and manufacturer for approval.
6.2
Before the treated timber pile is accepted for the work, the Contractor shall obtain from
the manufacturer of the treated piles, a warranty on an approved form, which provides
that the treated piles shall be free from such fungus and insect attack which may render
the supported building structurally unsound, for a thirty (30) years period.
Delivery and Stacking

7.1
The Contractor shall notify the S.O. of the delivery of timber piles to the Site and provide
the necessary facilities to enable the S.O. to inspect each pile and take random sampling
for determination of depth of penetration and the net dry salt retention.
7.2
Accepted piles shall be marked and stacked in lengths on levelled and well-drained hard
ground. Each pile shall be stacked clear off the ground with an air space around it. The
piles shall be separated by sticks or blocks placed vertically one above the other and
closely spaced horizontally to avoid sagging of the piles. All rejected piles shall be
removed from the Site promptly.
Pile Head
8.1
The pile head shall be adequately protected during driving so that brooming does not
occur.
8.2
The pile head shall be fitted with toothed metal plates as approved by the S.O. for
protection against brooming and splitting during normal driving.
8.3
In the case of hard driving, unless otherwise approved by the S.O., a metal helmet shall
be fitted to the top of the pile. The top of the pile shall first be trimmed to fit closely into
the recess of the underside of the helmet. A hard timber dolly and, if necessary, a packing
piece shall be used above the helmet.
8.4
If during driving, the head of the pile becomes excessively broomed or otherwise
damaged, the damaged part shall be cut off and the helmet refitted.
Pitching and Driving of Piles

9.1
10.
The S.O. may require inspection of the treatment plant to observe and ensure that the
manufacturing process and control testings of the piles are carried out in accordance with
this Specification. Records of the actual treatment schedule shall be kept during the
treatment process, and the Contractor shall furnish such records for the piles supplied
when requested by the S.O.
Pitching and driving of piles shall be in accordance with clauses 9.1 to 9.8 as described
hereinbefore under PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES.
10.1
Piles shall be provided in one single length of 6.0m each, unless otherwise approved.
Any pile driven to the required set at a depth of 6.0m or less shall be in one continuous
B/12
Piling Work
length.
10.2
11.
Defects on Piles while Driving

11.1
12.
If jointing is required, pile joints shall be made by using mild steel welded boxes, 450mm
long, fabricated from 5mm thick plates, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. The
internal dimensions of the box shall be 3mm undersize of the pile cross-sectional
dimensions. The joint and the ends of the piles to be jointed shall be constructed so that
the necessary strength and stiffness are developed at the joint.
When fissures appear in a pile during driving, which, in the opinion of the S.O., will affect
its strength, the pile shall be rejected and replaced at the Contractors expense.
Preparation of Pile Heads

12.1
When a pile has been driven to the required set or depth, the head of the piles shall be
cut off square to sound wood and treated with an approved preservative and a waterproof
coating to the approval of the S.O.
12.2
The pile head shall be embedded for a depth of not less than 150mm in the concrete cap,
with a minimum of 150mm concrete surround.
B/13
Piling Work
SECTION B.5 - PILE TESTING
1.
General
1.1
Type of Tests Necessary

The Maintained Load Test shall be carried out on a test pile. The Contractor shall, if
required by the S.O., carry out the Constant Rate of Penetration Test on completion of
the Maintained Load Test.
1.2
Safety Precautions
When preparing, conducting and dismantling a pile test, the Contractor shall carry out the
work in a safe manner, and shall in addition make such other provisions, as may be
necessary, to safeguard against any likely hazards.
2.
Definitions
2.1
Compression Pile
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to penetrate into
the ground.
2.2
Anchor Pile
A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would tend to cause it to be
extracted from the ground.
2.3
Test Pile
A compression pile to which a load is applied to determine the load versus settlement
characteristics of the pile and the surrounding ground.
2.4
Reaction System
The system of kentledge, piles or anchors that provides resistance against which the pile
is tested.
2.5
Kentledge
The dead weight used in a loading test.
2.6
Maintained Load Test

A loading test in which each increment or decrement of load is held constant either for a
defined period of time or until the rate of settlement or rebound falls to a specified value.
2.7
Constant Rate of Penetration Test (CRP)

A loading test in which the pile is made to penetrate the soil from its position at a constant
speed while the force applied at the top of the pile to maintain the rate of penetration is
continuously measured, until the force versus penetration relationship obtained does not
represent an equilibrium condition between load and settlement.
3.
Supervision
3.1
All tests shall be carried out only under the direction of an experienced and competent
B/14
Piling Work
Contractor's supervisor, with approved test equipment and test procedure as specified
hereinafter.
3.2
4.
All Contractor's personnel operating the test equipment shall have been trained in its use.
Tests shall be carried out only in the presence of the S.O. or the S.Os representative.
Reaction System
4.1
General
Compression test shall be carried out using a kentledge, anchor piles or specially
constructed anchorages as reaction system. The reaction system used shall be designed
to transfer safely to the test pile the maximum load required for testing. Full details of the
reaction system shall be submitted to the S.O. prior to any work related to the testing
process being carried out on the Site.
4.2
Kentledge
Where kentledge is to be used, it shall have adequate weight to resist load up to 1.2
times the maximum test load. The kentledge shall be supported on cribwork, beams or
other supporting structure disposed around the test pile so that its centre of gravity is on
the axis of the pile. Kentledge shall not rest directly on the pile head. The bearing
pressure under the supports shall be such as to ensure stability of the kentledge stack
and shall not impair the efficiency of the testing operations. The distance from the edge of
the test pile to the nearest part of the supports to the kentledge stack in contact with the
ground shall not be less than 1.3m.
4.3
Anchor Pile and Ground Anchor

4.3.1
Where anchor piles or ground anchors are to be used, they shall be of adequate
strength to resist load up to 1.2 times the maximum test load on the ground, in a
safe manner without excessive movement or influence on the test pile. The
method employed in the installation shall be such to prevent damage to any test
pile or working pile.
4.3.2
The Contractor shall ensure that when the test load is applied, the load is
correctly transmitted to all the bolts and tie rods. The extension of rods by
welding shall not be permitted, unless it is known that the steel will not be
reduced in strength by welding. The bond stress of the rods in tension shall not
exceed normal permissible bond stresses of the type of steel and grade of
concrete used.
4.3.3
Where anchor piles are used, the centre to centre spacing of these piles from a
test pile shall be not less than three (3) times the diameter of the test pile, or the
anchor piles, or 2m, whichever is the greater. Under-reamed piles shall not be
used as anchor piles. Where permanent working piles are approved by the S.O.
to be used as anchor piles, their levels shall be observed during application of
the test load to ensure that there is no residual uplift.
4.3.4
Where ground anchors are used, no part of the section of the anchor transferring
load to the ground shall be closer to the test pile than three (3) times the
diameter of the test pile. Furthermore, no part of the ground anchor shall be
closer to a working pile than one-and-a-half times the diameter of the test pile
along the unbonded length of the anchor, and three (3) times the diameter of the
test pile along the bonded length of the anchor. Under-reams on ground anchors
shall not exceed 170mm in diameter.
B/15
Piling Work
5.
6.
Testing Equipment
5.1
The Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device are
mounted on the pile heads, the whole system will be stable up to the maximum load to be
applied.
5.2
The test loads shall be applied by means of a hydraulic jack of adequate capacity, fitted
with a load measuring device.
5.3
The hydraulic jack, pump, hoses, pipes, couplings and other apparatus to be operated
under hydraulic pressure, shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure equivalent to
one and a half (1) times the maximum test load without leakage.
5.4
Where the C.R.P. test is required, the jack pump capacity shall be adequate to maintain
the required rate of penetration. The permissible extension of the jack shall be such that
the pile can be moved continuously and without repacking for a distance of at least
50mm.
5.5
The measuring device shall be of the type approved by the S.O., capable of registering
loads in increments not exceeding 20 KN.
5.6
The hydraulic jack and measuring device shall be calibrated together to the approval of
the S.O. before and after each series of tests, whenever adjustments are made to the
device or at intervals appropriate for the type of equipment used. Certificates of
calibration shall be submitted to the S.O.
5.7
The loading equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a
smooth increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of the
maintained load test.
Preparation of a Working Pile to be Tested

6.1
General
If a test is required on a working pile, the Contractor shall prepare the pile for testing to
the approval of the S.O.
6.2
Driving Records
For each working pile which is to be tested, a detailed record of driving shall be made and
submitted to the S.O. daily, not later than noon on the next working day.
6.3
Cut-off Level
The pile shall terminate at the normal cut-off level or at a level required by the S.O.
However, where necessary, the pile shall be extended above the cut-off level of working
piles so that gauges and other apparatus to be used in the testing process will not be
damaged by water or falling debris. If the cut-off level is below ground level, the pile is not
extended and there is a risk of the borehole collapsing, a sleeve shall be left in place or
inserted above the pile, or other approved action shall be taken. Adequate clearance
shall be given between the top of the pile and the bottom of the sleeves to permit
unrestricted movement of the pile.
6.4
Pile Head for Compression Test

For pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to give a plane
surface which is normal to the axis of the pile. An approved mild steel bearing plate shall
be mounted on top of the pile head or cap to accommodate the loading and settlement
measuring equipment, and to prevent damage from the concentrated application of load
B/16
Piling Work
from the loading equipment.

6.5
Notice of Test
The Contractor shall give the S.O. at least 24 hours notice of the commencement of test.
7.
8.
Settlement Measurement
7.1
An independent reference frame shall be set up to permit measurement of the vertical

movement of the test pile. The support for the frame shall be located not closer than 2
metres from the test pile, and shall be rigidly fixed to the ground to a depth of not less
than 1m with concrete surround. In addition, the elevation of the supports shall be
checked frequently with reference to a fixed benchmark.
7.2
The entire measuring assembly shall be protected against rain, direct sunlight and other
disturbances that might affect its reliability. Temperature readings shall be taken when
requested by the S.O. The measurement of pile movement shall be made by four dial
gauges rigidly mounted on the reference frame that bear on machined metal or glass
surfaces, normal to the pile axis fixed to the pile cap or head. Alternatively, the gauges
may be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on the reference frame. The dial gauges
shall be placed in diametrically opposite positions, and be equidistant from the pile axis.
The dial gauges shall enable readings to be made to within an accuracy of 0.1mm, and
shall have a minimum travel of not less than 50mm.
7.3
The Contractor may submit other methods of measuring the movement of pile heads for
approval.
Test Procedure
8.1
General
Throughout the test period, all equipment for measuring load and movement shall be
protected from the effects of weather. Construction equipment and persons who are not
involved in the testing process shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the test to avoid
disturbance to the measurement apparatus.
8.2
Maintained Load Test

8.2.1
The load shall be applied in increment of 25% of the working load, up to the
working load and appropriately smaller thereafter, until a maximum test load of
twice the working load is reached. Each increment of load shall be applied as
smoothly and as expeditiously as possible. Settlement readings and time
observations shall be taken before and after each new load increment.
8.2.2
A time-settlement graph shall be plotted to indicate when the rate of settlement of

0.05mm in 15 minutes is reached. A further increment of load shall be applied
when this rate of settlement is achieved, or until a minimum time of 2 hours has
elapsed, whichever is later. The process shall be repeated until the maximum
test load is reached.
8.2.3
The maximum test load shall then be maintained for a minimum of 24 hours, and
time-settlement readings shall be taken at regular intervals, as for the earlier load
stages.
8.2.4
The test load shall then be decreased in four equal stages, and time-settlement
readings shall be as specified aforesaid, until the movement ceases. At least 60
B/17
Piling Work
minutes interval shall be allowed between the unloading decrements.

8.3
9.
Constant Rate of Penetration Test

8.3.1
The load shall be applied to achieve a constant rate of penetration value

between 0.75mm per minute to 1.50mm per minute. The rate chosen shall suit
the jacking equipment used.
8.3.2
Both settlement and time readings shall be recorded at every minute period.
Further loading shall be discontinued when the loading varies indirectly as the
penetration in the case of end bearing piles in sand or gravel, or when the rate of
penetration is constant without further increase in the load in the case of friction
piles in clay. Loading shall then be released gradually and rebound readings
taken.
Presentation of Results
9.1
Submission of Results
Results shall be submitted as a signed summary in duplicate to the S.O. immediately on
completion of the test, which shall give:
9.2
i.
for the Maintained Load Test for each stage of loading, the period for which the
load was held, the load and the maximum settlement. These are to be plotted as
time-settlement graphs.
ii.
for the CRP test, the maximum load reached and a graph of load against
penetration.
Schedule of Recorded Data

The Contractor shall provide information about the tested pile in accordance with the
following schedule, where applicable a)
General
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
b)
Site Location
Contract Identification
Proposed Structure
Main Contractor
Piling Sub-contractor (if any)
Site Office
Client's Name
Maintained Load or CRP Test
Date of Test
Test Procedure
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
Weight of Kentledge
Tension of Pile, Group Anchor Details
Plan of Test Arrangement showing position and distance of kentledge
supports, tension piles and reference frame to test pile.
Jack Capacity
Method of Load Measurement
Method (s) of Penetration Measurement
Relevant Dates and Times
B/18
Piling Work
c)
Test Results
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
d)
Site Investigation
i)
ii)
10.
Site Investigation Drawing Number

Borehole Reference nearest to Test Pile.
Interpretation of Test Results

10.1
The S.O.'s interpretation and conclusions on the test results shall be final. The pile so
tested shall be deemed to have failed if:
a)
b)
c)
11.
In Tabular Form
In Graphical Form: Load Plotted against Settlement, with Times
Ground Heave (if any)
Effect on Adjacent Structure (if any)
The residual settlement after removal of the test load exceeds 6.5mm;
or
The total settlement under the Design Load exceeds 12.5mm;
or
The total settlement under twice the Design Load exceeds 38.0mm, or 10% of
pile diameter/width, whichever is the lower value.
Completion of Test
11.1
Measuring Equipment
On completion of a test, all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled,
checked and either stored, so that they are available for use in further tests, or removed
from the Site.
11.2
Kentledge
Kentledge and its supporting structure shall be removed forthwith from the Site on
completion of all tests.
11.3
Ground Anchors and Temporary Piles

On completion of a pile test, tension piles or ground anchors shall be cut off below ground
level and the ground made good with approved material.
B/19
Piling Work
SECTION C - EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORKS
1.
2.
General
1.1
This Work shall consist of all the required excavation within the limits of the Works. It
shall include the removal and proper utilisation and hauling, or disposal of all excavated
materials, and constructing, shaping and finishing of all earthworks over the entire extent
of the Works, in conformity with the Drawings and this Specification.
1.2
The excavation and earthworks shall be executed in such a manner and order as
approved by the S.O. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with by-laws
and regulations relating to earthworks.
1.3
Excavation in rock and/or hard material shall respectively be measured and paid for as
extra over to excavation and earthworks in accordance with the Provisional Bills of
Quantities. The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the S.O to examine, classify
the excavation and to take measurement prior to breaking up. For contract based on
Specifications and Drawings, unless otherwise provided in the Contract, for the purpose
of pricing the excavation and earthworks, the whole excavation shall be assumed to be
without rock and/or hard material as defined hereunder.
1.4
For contract based on Quantities, the pricing shall be in accordance with the Bills of
Quantities.
1.5
Computation of volume of rock excavation for payment shall be based on nett volume
excavated as indicated in the Drawings.
Site Clearing
2.1
3.
Preservation of Existing Trees

3.1
4.
The whole Site shall be cleared to the extent as shown in the relevant Drawings. These
shall include clearing, grubbing and removing all trees, shrubs, vegetation and butts; and
clearing, demolishing, breaking up and removing all structures above ground level such
as buildings, walls, fences and other obstruction within the Site which have been
designated to be demolished or removed. All spoil and debris shall be removed and
disposed off as approved by the S.O. in accordance with Environmental Quality Act 1974
(Act 127) and Regulations.
The Contractor shall take precaution to protect from damage, all existing trees and
shrubs which are designated to be preserved as specified under SECTION N.4:
LANDSCAPING AND TURFING.
Demolition of Existing Structures

4.1
Any existing structures and other obstruction which are designated to be removed shall
be demolished, broken up, removed and disposed as approved by the S.O.
4.2
All salvaged materials arising from the demolition work shall, unless otherwise specified,
become the property of the Contractor, and shall be removed from Site as soon as
possible.
C/1
Excavation and Earthwork
5.
6.0
Relocation of Existing Utilities and Services

5.1
The Contractor's attention is specially drawn to his responsibilities under the Clause
headed Damage to Property' of the Condition of Contract.
5.2
Before commencing on any excavation, the Contractor or his representative shall

accompany the S.O. on a site inspection to identify the presence of underground cables,
water or other service pipes at or in the vicinity of such excavation. Thereafter, the
Contractor shall carry out the excavation work in a manner and sequence as approved by
the S.O.
5.3
If during excavation, the Contractor's workmen uncover any cables, water or other service
pipes, work shall be stopped immediately and shall not be again started until the matter
has been reported to the S.O. who will notify the appropriate local authority, and
subsequently issue whatever directions he deemed appropriate.
General Excavation
Excavation shall be divided into two categories i.e. common excavation and hard material/ rock
excavation. Payment on excavation is to be made based on the method and equipments used.
6.1
Common Excavation
6.1.1
6.2
Common excavation shall mean excavation in any material other than hard
material/ rock excavation.
Hard Material/ Rock Excavation

6.2.1
Hard material/ rock excavation shall mean excavation in any material that cannot
be loosened by an excavator with a minimum mass of 44 tons and a minimum
rating of 321 BHP. The excavator shall be in good condition, and operated by an
experienced personnel skilled in the use of excavator equipment.
Hard material/ rock excavation shall require one or a combination of the following
methods:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Excavation using track excavator exceeding a mass of 44 tons and 321

BHP rating.
Ripping using a tractor unit of minimum weight of 37 tons and 305 BHP
rating and a ripper attached.
Excavation using hydraulic rock breaker.
Excavation using pneumatic tool.
Open blasting
Controlled blasting.
Excavation of boulders of individual mass less than 0.5m shall not be

considered as rock but as common excavation.
6.2.2
Trial Excavation
If it is apparent that common excavation as per clause 6.1.1 cannot be carried
out, than the S.O may instruct the Contractor to submit his method statement to
the S.O., based on his proposed method of excavation for approval. A trial
excavation shall be carried out to verify and confirm the proposed method of
excavation. The trial excavation shall be witnessed by the respective
representatives of the Contractor and S.O. In the case where the method
statement is rejected by the S.O., the Contractor shall submit a new method
statement to the S.O. and the whole process of trial excavation shall be repeated
to enable the S.O. to consider the new method statement for approval.
C/2
6.2.3
Method of Measurement
Levels shall be taken before and after excavation, to calculate the volume for
each method of excavation. Levels taken shall be subject to approval by the S.O.
The levels taken shall be certified by the representatives of the Contractor and
S.O, respectively. For determination of the volume of boulders, diameters in
three orthogonal directions shall be taken at 2m intervals or lesser. The average
of the three diameters shall be used to calculate the volume of boulder. Records
of measurements and photographs shall be taken and kept to support the
calculation of the volume of excavation.
6.2.4
Mechanical Equipment In Good Running Condition

Prior to the execution of trial excavation, the Contractor shall furnish the following
documents to the S.O as evidence that the excavator is in good running
condition:
7.
8.
A copy of the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) performance

handbook or catalogue, with details of the operating weight, BHP and
maximum drawbar pull of the excavator.
ii)
Relevant records showing that the excavator has been appropriately and
routinely up-kept and adequately maintained in accordance with the
recommendations of the OEMs schedule.
Excavation for Foundations, Pits and Trenches

7.1
Foundation trenches, pier holes, etc. shall be excavated to the levels and dimensions as
shown in the Drawings, with sides trimmed and bottoms levelled and stepped as
required.
7.2
All excavation shall be carried down to hard ground. On no account shall foundations rest
on made or filled ground. The depths of foundation shall be decided on the site by the
S.O., but for tendering purposes, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the Contractor
shall assume the uniform overall depth 1.5m below formation level. Any variation to such
depth, together with any variation caused thereby to concrete and brickwork, etc., shall be
measured and valued as variations, as provided for in the Contract, and the Contract
Sum shall be adjusted accordingly. The Contractor shall at his own cost and expense,
make good any over excavation below the required depth with suitable material or
concrete as approved by the S.O.
Sides of Excavation
8.1
9.
i)
The Contractor shall ensure that at all times, the sides of the excavation are maintained
in a safe and stable condition, and shall be responsible for the adequate provision of all
shoring and strutting including sheet piling required for this purpose. All temporary works
shall comply with requirements of BS 5975.
Excavation To Be Kept Dry

9.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping dry all excavations, whether in open cut
or in trench, so as not to interfere with the work in progress. The Contractor shall, without
extra cost to Government, provide, fix, maintain and work, as and when directed by the
S.O., such pumps, wells, drains, dams and other things necessary to effectively deal with
all water which may collect or find its way into the excavation from any cause whatsoever.
Nevertheless, such directive shall not relieve the Contractor from his liability for any
damage to the Works or adjoining land and property or water courses due to his
C/3
operations.
10.
11.
Bottom of Excavation
10.1
Unless otherwise stated, the excavation, whether in open cut or in trench, shall be
proceeded with in such portions at a time as the S.O. may approve, and shall not, in the
first instance, be carried down to a depth nearer than 150mm above the required
excavation level; the last 150mm of depth to the said level shall be carried out by manual
labour immediately in advance of placing concrete.
10.2
Any pockets of soft material or loose rock in the bottom of pits and trenches shall be
removed, and the resulting cavities and any large fissures filled with properly compacted
blinding concrete (1:3:6). The Contractor shall take such steps as and when necessary,
to prevent damage to the bottom of excavation due to exposure to the weather. After the
placing of any blinding concrete, no trimming of the side faces shall be carried out for the
next 24 hours.
Inspection
11.1
12.
13.
The Contractor shall report to the S.O. when the excavation are ready to receive
concrete, and no concrete shall be laid until the excavation have been inspected and
Backfilling
12.1
A portion of the excavated material shall be returned, filled around walls, columns and the
like in 225mm layers and each layer thoroughly compacted using rammers or mechanical
compactors as the S.O. may approve, until compaction is complete. However, only
suitable and approved fill materials shall be returned for backfilling. The surplus
excavated materials shall be deposited, spread and levelled on site or elsewhere as
approved.
12.2
Shoring used for the sides of the excavation shall be withdrawn in stages as the
compaction of backfilling proceeds.
Anti-Termite Treatment
13.1
Termiticide chemicals shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers

recommendation and label instructions prior to the pouring of concrete to construct the
ground slab or for blinding. Notwithstanding the manufacturers recommendation, the
minimum surface application rate shall be five (5) litres per sq. meter on all ground floor
built-up areas including apron areas, and also on all areas extending one (1) meter
beyond the perimeter drain all around the building. In addition, termiticide chemical shall
be sprayed on interfaces between the concrete ground beam and the hardcore at a
minimum rate of one (1) litre per linear meter.
13.2
Treatment shall not be performed just before or after heavy rain, unless the area to be
treated can be physically protected to avoid leaching and runoff before the termiticide
chemical has bound to the soil.
13.3
Immediately after spraying of chemical, all surfaces exposed to direct sunlight or rain
shall be covered with an impervious black PVC sheet of minimum thickness of 0.08mm to
reduce the loss of chemical by UV light, alkaline wet concrete, leaching and runoff
caused by rain on exposed treated soil. In the case of areas receiving blinding, the
coverings shall be removed immediately prior to the placement of the blinding concrete.
C/4
13.4
14.
As soon as practicable after the completion of anti-termite treatment and prior to the
issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall submit to the
S.O., the anti-termite treatment specialists Guarantee against any termite attack to the
Works which may arise during a period of two (2) years from the date of Practical
Completion of Works due to any defect, fault or ineffective anti-termite treatment. The
terms of the Guarantee shall be such as shall be approved by the S.O.
Cut and Fill To Formation Level

14.1
General
Area for buildings, open spaces, fields, roads and footpaths shall be cut and filled to the
required formation levels and grades as shown in the Drawings. Trimming and forming of
banks shall be to the profiles as shown in the Drawings or as directed by the S.O. All
ditches, ponds or wells that are to be filled shall first be excavated to remove all soft spots
if so directed by the S.O. All excavated materials shall be removed from Site and the
depressions including holes resulting from the grubbing of tree roots shall be filled with
approved fill materials and well compacted. Unless otherwise provided in the contract, if
the fill materials obtainable from Site are insufficient, the Contractor shall at his own cost,
obtain such materials from outside source.
14.2
Fill Materials
14.2.1 Only suitable materials such as medium stiff clay, clayey sand or other approved
soils shall be used for filling.
14.2.2 Materials from swamps, peats or top soils and other highly organic clay or silt,
materials containing logs, stumps or boulders, which are susceptible to
combustion, and any other materials which, by virtue of their physical or chemical
composition or at their moisture content will not compact properly, shall not be
used for filling.
14.3
Spreading and Compacting

14.3.1 Prior to placing any fill upon any area, all clearing and grubbing operations shall
have been completed.
14.3.2 All earth filling generally, shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 225mm
thick loose layers. Each filling layer shall be thoroughly compacted by means of
six (6) passes of a smooth wheel 6T roller or other approved compacting
equipment.
14.3.3 Maximum use shall be made of earthmoving plants for initial compaction, and the
Contractor shall be required to vary the routes uniformly to reduce tracking and
to obtain uniform compaction over as wide an area as possible.
14.4
Finish to Formation Level

14.4.1 Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the upper surface of all platform shall
be finished to a cross fall of 1:400 and where practicable, shall, in addition, be
given a longitudinal fall to ensure rapid disposal of surface water.
14.4.2 For areas to be turfed, the formation shall be completed to an appropriate level
below the finished level indicated, to allow for placement of top soil and turf.
14.5
Soft Spots
14.5.1 Where any undue movements due to the presence of soft unstable soil under the
fill occur, or unsuitable material is encountered at the bottom of the fill, it shall be
C/5
excavated to such depth and over such areas as approved by the S.O., and shall
be removed to spoil. The resulting excavation shall be backfilled with suitable
material as specified hereinbefore, and deposited in layers not exceeding
225mm thick and compacted as described above, or with compaction equipment
suitable for working in small excavation.
14.5.2 The Contractor shall allow for settlement or displacement of fill over soft areas,
and shall build up to the required finished level with necessary compaction.
Should any settlement of fill occur during construction or within the Defects
Liability Period, the Contractor shall make good the same at his own cost and
expense.
15.
Filling under Floors, Aprons etc.

15.1
16.
Temporary Drainage Channels and Bunds

16.1
17.
19.
As earthwork progresses, the Contractor shall provide and maintain efficient drainage of
the Site as specified under SECTION A: PRELIMINARIES AND GENERAL
CONDITIONS, until such time as the permanent surface water drainage is installed.
Clearing of Existing Ditches, Drains, Rivers, etc.

17.1
18.
Filling shall be provided and laid under floors, aprons, etc. where required. Filling shall be
of suitable material as specified hereinbefore, deposited in layers not exceeding 155mm
loose thickness, and each layer well watered where necessary, rammed and compacted.
No clay shall be used for filling under floors and aprons.
During the execution of the earthwork, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions
to prevent blockage or obstruction, and to ensure free-flow of existing drains, ditches,
streams and the like.
Protection and Maintenance of Earthworks

18.1
The Contractor shall provide all necessary protection and maintenance of earthwork,
particularly from the damaging effects of water entering the works from rainfall, runoff,
springs, rivers or streams. Damage to finished or partly completed work arising from the
lack of such protection and maintenance work, shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own cost and expense.
18.2
Where turfing is required for slope protection, they shall be planted immediately after the
embankment is formed. The turfing shall be executed as specified hereinafter under
SECTION N.4: LANDSCAPING AND TURFING.
18.3
If due to unforeseen circumstances turfing cannot be carried out immediately, temporary

protection/cover (eg. plastic sheets or equivalent) shall be laid on exposed slopes by the
Contractor.
Hardcore
19.1
Where shown and required, approved hardcore consisting of good, sound broken bricks
or stones shall be provided and laid to the thickness shown in the Drawings, well
rammed, compacted and blinded with sand. All hardcore shall be well watered
immediately prior to the depositing of concrete thereon.
C/6
SECTION D - CONCRETE WORKS

1.0
General
This section shall apply to the construction of all structures or parts of structures to be composed
of concrete with or without steel reinforcement. The Work shall be carried out all in accordance
with this specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown in the
Drawings and as required by the S.O.
2.0
Material
2.1
Cement
The cement to be used throughout the Work shall be Portland cement obtained from an
approved manufacturer. The cement shall be described under the following headings:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Ordinary Portland Cement to comply with MS 522

Rapid Hardening Portland Cement to comply with MS 522
Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement to comply with MS 1037
Portland Pulverized-Fuel Ash Cement to comply with MS 1227
Portland Slag Cement to comply with MS 1389
2.1.1
Certificates of Test
Manufacturers certificates of test shall in general be accepted as proof of
soundness. Additional tests shall be carried out on any cement including those of
imported cement, which appears to have deteriorated through age, damage to
containers, improper storage, or any other reason. The test shall be carried out
at any approved laboratory at the expense of the Contractor. Any batch of
cement that has been sampled and tested and found not to have complied with
the requirements shall be rejected and removed from the Site.
The S.O. may, without tests being made, order that any bag of cement, a portion
of the contents of which has hardened, or which appears to be defective in any
other way, be removed from the Site.
2.1.2
Transportation and Storage

The cement shall be transported to the Site in covered vehicles adequately
protected against water. It shall be stored in a weatherproof cement store to the
approval of the S.O. Cement stored in bags shall not be laid directly on the
ground. It shall be taken for use in the Work in the order of its delivery into the
store. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in silos of an approved design.
2.2
Aggregates
Aggregates shall be naturally occurring sand, granite or limestone, crushed or uncrushed
except as otherwise specified, and shall comply with MS 29. They shall be obtained from a
source approved by the S.O.
Marine aggregates shall not be used unless otherwise specified in the Drawings.
2.2.1
Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates shall comply with MS 29. For work below ground level, only
crushed granite shall be used. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings, tests
shall be carried out according to MS 30. The property limits shall be as specified
in Table 1. The maximum nominal size of aggregate shall be as specified in the
Drawings.
D/1
Concrete Work
2.2.2
Fine Aggregates
Fine aggregates shall comply with MS 29. In the context of MS 29, the term
sand is used to mean fine aggregate. If it is found necessary, the fine
aggregate shall be washed and screened to the approval of the S.O. Unless
otherwise specified in the Drawings, tests shall be carried out in accordance with
MS 30. The property limits shall be as specified in Table 1.
2.2.3
Grading
(a)
Coarse Aggregates
The grading of coarse aggregates shall be analysed as described in MS
30 and shall be within the limits specified in Table 2.
(b)
Fine Aggregates
The grading of fine aggregates shall be analysed as described in MS 30
and shall be within the limits specified in Table 3. However, for
prescribed mixes Grading Limit M shall only be used.
2.2.4
Sampling and Testing of Aggregates

Where site mixing is used, samples of fine and coarse aggregates approved by
the S.O. shall be kept on Site. These samples shall give a fair indication of the
general quality of the aggregates for comparison with the aggregates delivered
during the course of executing the Work. Tests shall be carried out on samples of
the latter, taken at intervals as required by the S.O., or whenever there is a
change of source. The appropriate method of sampling and testing shall be in
accordance with the standards as specified in Table 1. Any batch of aggregate
rejected by the S.O. shall be removed from the Site.
2.2.5
Storage of Aggregates
Separate storage facilities with adequate provision for drainage shall be provided
for each different size of aggregate used.
Aggregate shall be handled and stored so as to minimise segregation and
contamination.
2.3
Water
Water shall comply with the requirements of MS 28. It shall be clean and free from
materials deleterious to concrete in the plastic and hardened state and shall be from a
source approved by the S.O. The S.O. may instruct the Contractor to carry out chemical
tests at any approved laboratory at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor shall
make adequate arrangement to supply and store sufficient water at the Site for use in
mixing and curing of concrete.
2.4
Admixtures
Suitable admixtures may be used in concrete mixes with the prior approval of or as
directed by the S.O.
The admixtures, the sampling and testing of the admixtures and the information to be
provided with the admixture supplied shall comply with MS 922.
All admixtures shall be used strictly in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Before allowing the admixture to be used in the Work, relevant tests based on trial mixes
D/2
Concrete Work
shall be carried out. A control mix shall be made using a conventional trial mix that is
without using the admixture, to determine the free water: cement ratio and mix proportion
required to give the specified strength with the required slump. Using the same mix
proportion as in the control mix but with a modified water: cement ratio whenever
necessary, a test shall be carried out using the recommended dosage of the admixture.
The results of the relevant test obtained from the control mix and test mix shall be
compared. The S.O. may allow the use of the admixture only when the results are found
to be satisfactory and comparable to the effects as claimed by the manufacturer. The
admixture acceptance test shall comply with the requirements specified in Table 4.
The uses of admixtures that are chloride based are not permitted for structural concrete
containing reinforcement, prestressing tendons or other embedded metal. The Contractor
shall submit documentary evidence on the contents of the admixture to be used.
When the Contractor proposes the use of super-plasticiser, special control tests shall be
carried out with prior approval of the S.O. The tests shall be carried out in accordance
with the latest standard and the manufacturers recommendations.
If two or more admixtures are proposed to be used simultaneously in the same concrete
mix, the Contractor shall furnish the S.O. with supporting data on their suitability and
compatibility.
2.5
Additional Materials
Condensed silica fumes (CSF) complying with ASTM C1240 93 or any other equivalent
standards may be used provided that the concrete complies with the same grade as would
be achieved by the Portland cement concrete complying with MS 522 and prior approval of
the S.O is obtained
3.0
Classification of Concrete Mixes

Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the concrete mix shall be designed mix. However,
prescribed mix may be used provided: (a)
(b)
(c)
The work is of minor nature or involving a small quantity of concrete,

Prior approval of the S.O. is given, and
The strength of the concrete is still the responsibility of the Contractor.
When Portland Pulverized-Fuel Ash Cement or Portland Slag Cement is specified to be used, the
concrete mix shall be of designed mix only.
3.1
Prescribed Mix
Prescribed mix shall be as detailed in Table 5. The mix prescribed in the table does not
require the use of admixture.
For small volume concreting work, volume batching is permitted provided prior approval
of the S.O. is obtained. The proportion shall be as specified in Table 5A.
3.2
Designed Mix
Designed mix shall comply with the recommendations of MS1195. The minimum cement
content and maximum free water: cement ratio to be used shall be as shown in Table 6
and this shall supersede Table 14 of BS 5328.
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Notify the S.O. whether the designed mix is to be produced as site mix or ready mix.
b) If the Contractor chooses to use ready mix concrete, he shall notify the S.O. the name of the
D/3
Concrete Work
supplier, location of the ready mix plant, journey time taken to transport the concrete
to the Site and production capacity of the plant.
c) Submit a mix design report covering all concrete mixes to the S.O. for approval. The
designed mix shall comply with the requirements specified in Table 6.
d) The Contractor shall ensure that the S.O. be permitted to visit or station his
representative at the plant at any stage of the concrete production.
e) The sampling, making, curing and testing of the cubes shall be carried out by the
Contractor in accordance with MS 30 or as directed by and in the presence of the
S.O. or his representative. Test cubes shall be stored by the S.O. at a secured place.
The Contractor shall provide all facilities in connection therewith.
When Portland Pulverized-Fuel Ash Cement complying with MS 1227 or Portland
Slag Cement complying with MS 1389 is used, depending on the percentage
combination used as allowed by MS 1226 or MS 1387 respectively, it may be necessary to
increase the total cement content to achieve concrete of equal strength development when
compared with concrete using Portland cement complying with MS 522. Tests on
trial mixes shall be carried out in accordance with 3.2.3 and the results shall be approved by
the S.O.
In all cases, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the designed mix shall
be durable, workable, comply with the strength grade and other requirements as specified in
the Drawings.
3.2.1
Target mean strength

The concrete mix shall be designed to have at least the required minimum cement
content, as specified in Table 6, and to have a target mean strength greater
than the required grade of concrete by at least the current margin.
The current margin for each particular type of concrete shall be determined by the
Contractor and shall be taken as the lesser of:
a)
1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 100 separate
batches of concrete of nominally similar proportion of similar
materials and produced over a period not exceeding 12 months by the
same plant under similar supervision, but not less than 2.5 N/mm2 for
concrete, of grade 15 or 3.75 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 20 or above.
b)
1.64 times the standard deviation of cube tests on at least 40 separate

batches of concrete of nominally similar proportions of similar
materials and produced over a period exceeding 5 days but not
exceeding 6 months by the same plant under similar supervision, but
not less than 5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 15 or 7.5 N/mm2 for
concrete of grade 20 or above.
Where there are insufficient data to satisfy (a) and (b) above, the margin for the initial
mix design shall be taken as 7.5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 15 and 12 N/mm2 for
concrete of grade 20 or above. This margin shall be used as the current margin
only until sufficient data are available to satisfy (a) or (b) above. However,
subjected to the approval of the S.O., when the specified characteristic strength
approaches the designed target mean strength of concrete made with a
particular aggregate, a smaller margin not less than 5 N/mm2 for concrete of
grade 15 or 7.5 N/mm2 for concrete of grade 20 or above may be used for the
initial mix design.
3.2.2
Suitability of Proposed Mix Proportions

The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the S.O., prior to the supply of
any designed mix, the following information:
D/4
Concrete Work
a)
b)
c)
3.2.3
The nature and source of each material,

Appropriate existing data as evidence of acceptable previous
performance for target mean strength, current margin, workability and
water: cement ratio; OR full details of tests on trial mixes carried out in
accordance with 3.2.3, and
The proposed quantities by weight of each material per cubic meter of fully
compacted concrete.
Trial Mixes
Unless otherwise stated and approved by the S.O in writing that the Contractor
has complied with the submission specified in 3.2.2, trial mix shall be carried out.
The Contractor shall give early notice, to enable the S.O. to be present at the
making of trial mixes and preliminary testing of the cubes. The Contractor shall
prepare trial mixes, using samples of approved material typical of those he
proposes to use in the Work, for all grades to the approval of the S.O. prior
to commencement of concreting.
Sampling and testing procedures shall be in accordance with MS 26. Three
separate batches of concrete shall be made. The workability of each of the three trial
batches determined by means of the slump test or compacting factor test
or vebe consistometer test or as specified in accordance with MS 26,
shall be appropriate to the proposed uses and methods of placing and compaction of
the mix and shall be approved by the S.O. Six cubes shall be made from each
batch. Three from each set of six shall be tested at an age of 7 days and three at an age
of 28 days. The average strength of the nine cubes tested at 28 days shall
exceed the specified characteristic strength by the current margin minus 3.5 N/mm2.
The approved trial mixes shall then be designated as the designed mix and
its corresponding workability as the designed workability.
During production, the S.O. may require additional trial mixes to be made before a
substantial change is made in the materials or in the proportion of the material to be
used. Trial mixes need not be carried out when adjustments are made to the mix
proportions in accordance with 3.2.4.
3.2.4
Control Strength of Designed Mixes

a)
Adjustment to Mix Proportions

Adjustment to mix proportions shall be made to the approval of the
S.O. in order to minimise the variability of strength and to maintain the target
mean strength. The specified limits of minimum cement content and
maximum free water: cement ratio shall be maintained. Changes in
cement have to be declared.
An increase or reduction of cement content by greater than 20 kg/ m,
or of fine aggregate by greater than 5%, or any changes in the type or
dosage of admixture, or any changes in the type of cement, or
consistency is considered a change in mix design.
b)
Change in Current Margin

A change in current margin used for judging compliance with specified
characteristic strength becomes appropriate when results of a
sufficiently large number of tests show that the previously established
margin is significantly too large or too small.
Recalculation of the margin shall be carried out in accordance with
3.2.1. Although a recalculated margin is almost certain to differ numerically
D/5
Concrete Work
from the previous value, the adoption of the recalculated value will not
generally be justified if the two values differ by less than 18% when
based on tests on 40 separate batches or less than 11% when
based on tests on 100 separate batches or less than 5% when based on
tests on 500 separate batches.
On the adoption of a recalculated margin, it shall become the current margin
for the judgment of compliance with the specified characteristic strength of
concrete produced subsequent to the change.
3.3
Requirements for Concrete

3.3.1
Workability
The workability of the fresh concrete shall be judged by its suitability for the
condition of handling and placing so that after compaction, it surrounds all
reinforcement, tendons and ducts and completely fills the formwork.
Workability of the concrete shall be within one of the following limits:
3.3.2
i)
Slump
25mm or one third of the designed workability, whichever is greater.
ii)
Compacting Factor
0.03 where the designed workability is 0.9 or more.
0.04 where the designed workability is between 0.8 and 0.9.
0.05 where the designed workability is 0.8 or less.
iii)
Vebe
3 seconds or one fifth of the designed workability whichever is
lesser.
Concrete Grade
The grade of concrete to be used in the work shall be as stated in the Drawings
and /or in the Bill of Quantities.
(Concrete shall be designated as GRADE X/Y where X is the numerical value of
the characteristic strength at 28 days in N/mm2, and Y is the nominal maximum
size of aggregate in mm. For prescribed mix, a suffix P shall be added after X).
3.3.3
Cement Content
Cement content in this specification shall refer to the total quantities of cement as
approved in 2.1, or the total quantities of cementitious materials comprising Portland
cement and p.f.a or g.g.b.s.
3.3.3.1 Minimum Cement Content
The minimum cement content shall be in accordance with Table 6,
unless otherwise shown in the Drawings.
3.3.3.2 Maximum Cement Content
The maximum cement content shall not exceed 550 kg/ m3 unless
otherwise shown in the Drawings or as approved by the S.O.
3.3.4
Total Chloride Content

The total chloride content of the concrete mix arising from the aggregate or any
D/6
Concrete Work
other source shall not in any circumstances exceed the limits in Table 7
expressed as a percentage relationship between chloride ions and weight of
cement in the mix.
When necessary, tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881: Part 124
for each grade of concrete, to demonstrate that these limits are not exceeded.
3.3.5
Maximum Sulphate Content

The total estimated sulphate content of any mix, including that present in the
cement shall not exceed 4% by weight of cement in the mix. Where necessary,
tests shall be carried out in accordance with BS 1881: Part 124 for each grade of
concrete to demonstrate that this limit is not exceeded.
4.0
Concrete Compressive Strength Tests and Compliance

4.1
General
All sampling, curing and testing of concrete, fresh or hardened, shall be carried out in
accordance with MS 26 and the relevant Parts of BS 1881. The compressive strength of
concrete shall be measured by crushing tests on nominal 150mm cubes as specified in
MS 26. Tests shall be carried out in an engineering laboratory approved by the S.O.
4.1.1
Prescribed Mix
A prescribed mix shall be judged on the basis of the specified mix proportions
based on the batches observation. The mix proportion shall be within 5% of the
values specified and the workability shall be chosen to suit the construction
requirements as described in Table 5.
4.1.2
Designed Mix
The characteristic strength of a designed mix concrete is the compressive
strength below which not more than 5% of the test results may be expected to fall.
Compliance with the specified characteristic strength shall be judged by tests made
on cubes at an age of 28 days. The workability shall be as described in 3.3.1.
4.2
Sampling and Testing

Notwithstanding this, compressive strength tests shall be carried out during the progress of
Work. The rate of sampling shall be as specified in 4.3. For each sampling, three cubes
shall be made from a single sample taken from a randomly selected batch of concrete. The
sample shall be taken at the point of discharge from the mixer or, in the case of ready mixed
concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle. All cubes shall be clearly
marked with undeletable paint with the date of casting and serial number. A record
shall be kept to identify each cube by date and by serial number relating to the part of the work
from which they are taken.
One cube from each sample batch shall be tested for the 7-day compressive strength. The
remaining two cubes from the sample batch shall be tested for the 28-day compressive
strength.
4.3
Rate of Sampling for Testing

The indicative sampling rate shall be as follows:
a)
One sample per 10.0 m3 or every group of 10 batches for critical structures e.g.
prestressed concrete, masts, cantilevers, columns, footing, pile caps, shear wall,
retaining wall.
D/7
Concrete Work
b)
One sample per 20.0m3 or every group of 20 batches e.g. slabs, beams.
c)
One sample per 50.0 m3 or every group of 50 batches e.g. raft foundation and
mass concrete.
Notwithstanding the above, a minimum of two samples shall be taken on each concreting
day for a particular grade and source of concrete for prescribed mix.
However, for designed mix, at least four samples (12 cubes) shall be taken of concrete on
the first day of concreting for each grade of concrete to be used in the Work, irrespective of the
volume of concrete produced or the sampling rate. Subsequent rate of sampling shall be at
least one sample from each source of production on each day that concrete of any
particular grade is used.
The actual rate of sampling may be increased in appropriate circumstances e.g. for
critical elements, when required by the S.O.
4.4
Cubes Strength at 7 Days

One cube from each sample batch shall be tested for the 7-day compressive strength.
The cube compressive strength shall not fall below the corresponding values given in Table 8
for prescribed mix, and two-third of the 28-day compressive strength for designed mix.
4.5
Cube Strength at 28 days and Compliance Requirements

The remaining two cubes from the sample batch shall be tested for the 28-day
compressive strength.
4.5.1
Prescribed Mix
The appropriate strength requirement shall be considered complied if at least one of
the following conditions is satisfied with:
a)
b)
4.5.2
None of the two test cubes is below the specified compressive strength
as specified in Table 8
The average strength of the two test cubes is not less than the specified
compressive strength and the difference between the two strengths is
not more than 20% of the average.
Designed Mix
The average strength of the two cubes shall constitute the 28-day compressive
strength of the sample. When the difference between the two results divided by their
mean exceeds 15%, the test results shall be deemed invalid.
For compliance purposes of the specified compressive strength, both of the following
conditions shall be satisfied:
a)
b)
4.6
The mean strength determined from the first two, three or four consecutive
test results, or from any group of four consecutive test results complies
with the appropriate limits in column A of Table 8A. In this respect,
consecutive samples are samples taken at intervals for the day of concreting or
one complete continuous process of concreting.
Any individual test result complies with the appropriate limits in column B of
Table 8A.
Tests for Consistency

While work on concreting is in progress, tests on workability of the mix shall be carried out at
suitable interval and in addition whenever any materials or the proportions of the mix
D/8
Concrete Work
are changed, or when directed by the S.O. The test shall consist of the Slump test, the
Compacting Factor test or Vebe test where applicable as described in MS 26. The workability
shall be as described in 3.3.1.
4.7
Action to be taken in the Event of Non Compliance

In the event that the compressive strength results of the test do not meet the specified
requirements mentioned in 4.4 and 4.5, or otherwise arising from the result of the statistical analysis
carried out in 4.11, the S.O. shall determine the action to be taken.
If the 7-day strength is less than the specified strength requirements, no more concrete
shall be placed on the suspect concrete and no removal of propping on the affected area
shall be allowed until the 28-day strength result compliance is available, or unless
otherwise approved by the S.O in writing.
For non-compliance of 28-day compressive strength, the section of work represented by the
samples which fail the test carried out in accordance with 4.5 shall be removed. However, in the
event of non-compliance arising from the result of the statistical analysis carried out in 4.11 for the
designed mix, the whole of work represented by the samples used in the analysis shall be removed.
The work shall be replaced by concrete meeting with this specification. For the case of designed
mix, the Contractor shall redesign his mix based on an increased target mean strength.
Alternatively, the S.O may direct other measures to be taken to make the works secure. The S.O
may instruct that additional tests be carried out on the hardened concrete to determine the quality
of the suspected concrete. The test may include non-destructive methods (MS 26), taking
cored samples (MS 26), load test or combination of several methods. The results shall
be assessed in accordance with BS 6089. The results of any such tests shall not nullify
the establishment of non-compliance with 4.5.
All works instructed under this clause shall be at the Contractors expense and no extension
of time shall be granted for such works.
4.8
Other Failures
All defective concrete works such as badly constructed concrete members with poor
alignment and plumb, honeycombing, badly formed surfaces, and failure during
construction such as sagging of beams and slabs shall be removed and made good or
otherwise rectified in accordance with the S.O.s instruction at the Contractors expense.
4.9
Additional Cubes
Additional cubes may be required for various purposes. These shall be made and tested
in accordance with MS26 but the methods of sampling and the conditions under which
the cubes are stored shall be varied according to the purpose for which they are required.
For determining the cube strength of prestressed concrete before transfer or of concrete
in a member before striking formwork, sampling shall be at the point of placing and the
cubes shall be stored under the same conditions as the concrete in the members.
The extra cubes shall be identified at the time of marking and shall not be used for normal
quality control or compliance procedures.
4.10
Recording of Test Results

All concrete cube test results and summary shall be recorded using appropriate forms in
a manner and format approved by the S.O. The 7-day and 28-day strength results shall
be recorded separately with its corresponding cement content obtained from the batching
record submitted during delivery (if ready mix concrete is used) of fresh concrete. The
corresponding workability shall also be recorded.
D/9
Concrete Work
Changes to sources of materials, concrete supplier, current margin, target mean strength,
cement content or any other such changes to the parameters of the concrete mix, shall
also be recorded separately. All records shall be duly verified jointly between the S.O or
his Representative and the Contractor.
The records shall be analysed to meet the following compliance requirements as
stipulated in 4.5:
4.11
a.
The individual test result and the average values obtained from the samples
noting the validity values and to comply with column A of Table 8A.
b.
The group test results and analyse the mean values to comply with column B of
Table 8A.
Statistical Analysis
Statistical analysis shall be carried out based on the test results recorded in 4.10. The
Contractor shall submit to the S.O, the following analysis:
5.0
a)
Running analysis of group test results and the mean values plotted for normal
distribution graph. Standard deviation (S.D) is then calculated. The value of S.D
obtained, when multiplying with 1.64 (statistical constant complying with MS
1195) will give the value of the current margin.
b)
The current margin value should not fall below the designed current margin
specified when performing the earlier trial mix. If the current margin falls below
the designed value, the S.O may inspect the plant supplying the concrete,
instruct the Contractor to redesign his mix and to take appropriate action as per
4.7
Production of Concrete
5.1
Supervision
The Contractor shall ensure the required standard of control over materials and
workmanship. The S.O. shall be afforded all reasonable opportunities and facilities to
inspect the constituent materials and the production of concrete and to take samples for
testing.
5.2
Batching and Mixing

The quantities of cement, fine aggregate and various sizes of coarse aggregate shall be
measured by weight unless otherwise approved by the S.O. A separate weighing
machine shall be provided for weighing the cement. Alternatively, the cement may be
measured by using a whole number of bags in each batch. The quantity of water shall be
measured by volume or by weight. Any solid admixtures to be added shall be measured
by weight; liquid or paste admixtures shall be measured by volume or weight.
The batch weight of aggregate shall be adjusted to allow for the moisture content of the
aggregate being used. All measuring equipment shall be calibrated on site or their
calibration status established by certificates from accredited laboratories.
The mixer shall comply with the requirements of BS 1305 where applicable. The mixing
time shall be not less than two minutes and not more than five minutes or any other time
recommended by the mixer manufacturer after all the ingredients have been placed in the
mixer.
Mixers that have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned
before any fresh concrete is mixed. Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O., the first batch
D/10
Concrete Work
of concrete through the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the normal quantity of
coarse aggregate. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type
of cement to another.
The water content of each batch of concrete may be adjusted so as to produce concrete
of the workability required. However care shall be taken to ensure the free water: cement
ratio is maintained. The total amount of water added to the mix shall be recorded.
5.3
Ready Mixed Concrete

Ready mixed concrete is concrete produced by a third party supplier for delivery to a
Contractor in a plastic state. The materials of the concrete are batched, either dry or wet,
at a control plant and transported in purpose-made agitators operating continuously or
truck mixers to the Site.
Ready mixed concrete shall comply with the requirements of designed mix as in clause
3.2 and MS 523. All concrete materials, including water and admixtures shall be mixed in the
plant and delivered to Site in purpose made truck mixers. No extra water or admixtures are allowed
to be added after the concrete has left the plant.
Ready mixed concrete delivered to the Site shall be accompanied by delivery ticket and
manufacturer's batching record stating the details of mix proportions by weight, the grade of
concrete, type and size of aggregate, date and time of loading at plant, type and dosage
of chemical admixtures and other relevant production details in suitable format, failing
which the S.O, or his representative, shall immediately reject the total load of the concrete.
The S.O, or his representative, and the contractor shall ensure the information provided in the
delivery tickets and the manufacturers batching record complies with the details of the
approved designed mix and its corresponding designed workability as in 3.2.3 before
discharging the concrete.
Rejected concrete shall be removed from the Site. The delivery ticket shall be marked
REJECTED.
5.4
Transporting
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as rapidly as practicable by
methods, which will prevent segregation or loss of any constituents or ingress of foreign
matter or water and maintain the required workability. It shall be deposited as near as
practicable in its final position to avoid rehandling or moving the concrete horizontally by
vibration. The concrete shall be conveyed by chutes or concrete pumps only with
permission from the S.O.
5.5
Placing
5.5.1
Placing of Concrete in Dry Condition

For all concrete whether mixed on or off the site of the Work, each batch shall be
placed and compacted within two (2) hours of adding the cement to the dry
aggregates and within 45 minutes (or any other period of time based on the trial
mix as per 2.4, 3.2.3 and approved by the S.O. if an admixture is used) of adding
water to the cement and aggregate. Concrete shall not be placed in any part of
the structure until the approval of the S.O. has been obtained. If concreting is
not started within 24 hours of approval given, approval shall again be obtained
from the S.O.
All formwork and reinforcement contained in it shall be clean and free from
standing water immediately before the placing of concrete. Concreting shall be
carried out continuously between and up to predetermined construction joints in
one sequence of operation. It shall be thoroughly compacted by either hand
tamping or mechanical vibration or both and shall be thoroughly worked into the
D/11
Concrete Work
corners. After tamping into place the concrete shall not be subjected to
disturbance other than such as incidental to compaction by vibration. In the event
of unavoidable stoppage in positions not predetermined, the concreting shall be
terminated on a horizontal plane and against vertical surfaces by the use of stop
boards. The location for termination shall be subjected to the approval of the
S.O.
Fresh concrete shall not be placed against in-situ concrete which has been in
position for more than 45 minutes (or any other period of time based on the trial
mix as per 2.4, 3.2.3 and approved by the S.O. if an admixture is used) unless a
construction joint is formed in accordance with sub-section 6.1. When in-situ
concrete has been in place for four hours, no further concrete shall be placed
against it for a further 20 hours. Where retarding admixture has been used, the
S.O. may approve variation to this limit.
Except where otherwise approved by the S.O., concrete shall be deposited in
horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding 450 mm when internal
vibrators are used or 300 mm in all other cases. The surface of the concrete shall
be maintained reasonably level during placing.
Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 1.5 meters.
However, higher drops may be allowed provided the mix has been well designed
and proportioned. When trunking or chutes are used, they shall be kept clean
and used in such a manner as to avoid segregation.
The Contractor shall maintain an experienced steel fixer at the site of reinforced
concrete works during the placing of concrete to reposition any reinforcement
which may be displaced.
5.5.2
Placing of Concrete Under Water

No concrete shall be placed in flowing water. Underwater concrete if deemed
unavoidable, shall be placed in position by Tremie pipes from the mixer.
Concrete to be placed under water shall be of an approved mix with the amount
of cement increased by 20%. During and after concreting under water, pumping
or dewatering operations in the immediate vicinity shall be suspended until the
S.O. permits them to continue. Where the concrete is placed by a Tremie pipe,
the following requirements shall be applicable: i)
The hopper and tremie pipe shall be a closed system. The bottom of the
Tremie pipe shall be kept as far as practicable beneath the surface of
the placed concrete.
ii)
The tremie pipe shall be large enough with due regard to the size of
aggregate. For 20 mm aggregates, the Tremie pipe shall be of a
diameter not less than 150 mm and for larger aggregates, a bigger
diameter Tremie pipe approved by the S.O. shall be used.
iii)
Unless otherwise agreed by the S.O., the first charge of concrete shall
be placed with a sliding plug pushed down the Tremie pipe ahead of it to
prevent mixing of concrete and water.
iv)
The Tremie pipe shall always penetrate well into the concrete with an
adequate margin of safety against accidental withdrawal if the pipe is
surged to discharge the concrete.
v)
The concrete shall be deposited wholly by Tremie pipe and the method
of deposition shall not be changed part way up to prevent the laitance
from being entrapped within the structure.
D/12
Concrete Work
vi)
5.6
All Tremie pipes shall be properly cleaned after use.
Placement Temperature
Placement temperature shall comply with MS 1195 to prevent premature setting and loss of
water during placing of concrete in the formwork and the following precautions shall be taken:
a) At the time of placing, no part of the concrete shall have a temperature
exceeding 36oC. This may be achieved by cooling the water and aggregate prior to mixing.
b) Concrete shall not be placed in forms or around reinforcement whose temperature
exceeds 36oC. This can be achieved by providing shading or other means to
protect from direct sunlight.
c) Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from direct sunlight and from loss of moisture by
covering, shading or other means.
d) No concrete shall be placed when the air temperature at the point of deposition
exceeds 36oC
However, higher temperatures may be allowed provided it can be proven that it shall not
result in any detrimental effect to the concrete work.
5.7
Compaction
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., concrete shall be thoroughly compacted by
vibration and thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, tendons or duct formers,
around embedded fixtures and into corners of the formwork to form a dense,
homogenous mass, free from voids and which will have the required surface finish when
the formwork is removed. Vibration shall be applied continuously during the placing of
each batch of concrete until the expulsion of air has practically ceased and in a manner
which does not promote segregation of the ingredients.
The concrete maintained between the two walls of formwork shall be compacted by
internal or external vibrators. Concrete in slabs with no formwork on its upper surface
shall be compacted either by vibrators of the pan type or by a vibrating screen.
The internal vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn slowly and at a uniform pace of
approximately 100 mm per second. Compaction shall be deemed to be completed when
cement mortar appears in an annulus around the vibrator. Over vibration leading to
segregation of the mix must be avoided. The internal vibrators shall be inserted at points
judged by the area of mortar showing after compaction, with a certain allowance made for
overlapping and they shall not be allowed to come into contact with the formwork or the
reinforcement and shall be inserted at a distance of not less than 75 mm from the
formwork.
The pan vibrator shall be placed on the surface of the concrete, which shall have
previously been tamped and leveled leaving an allowance in height for compaction until
the cement mortar appears under the pan. The vibrator shall then be lifted and placed on
the adjoining surface and this operation shall be repeated until the whole surface has
been compacted. Alternatively, a vibrating screen spanning the full width of the surface
may also be used.
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the design of formwork and disposition
of vibration shall receive special consideration to ensure efficient compaction and to avoid
surface blemishes. The vibration shall be such that there will be no excess water on the
top surface on completion of compaction.
External vibrators shall be firmly secured to the formwork which must be sufficiently rigid
to transmit the vibration and strong enough not to be damaged by it.
D/13
Concrete Work
Internal vibrators shall be capable of operating at not less than 10,000 cycles per minute
and external vibrators at not less than 3,000 cycles per minute. Sufficient vibrators in
serviceable condition shall be on Site so that spare equipment is always available in the
event of breakdowns. Vibrators shall be operated by workmen skilled in their use.
Concrete shall not be subjected to any disturbance within 24 hours after compaction. No
standing or flowing water shall be allowed to come into contact with exposed concrete
surfaces during the first two (2) hours after placing and compaction of the concrete.
In the event where inadequate or improper compaction is suspected, the S.O. has the
right to inspect and to carry out further tests. The tests may include non-destructive and
destructive methods. All expenses incurred in carrying out such sampling, testing and
remedial works shall be borne by the Contractor irrespective of whether the tests prove
the structure to be sound or otherwise.
5.8
Curing and Protection

All concrete work shall be cured for the full period of curing which shall not be less than five (5)
days for F1, F2, F3 and F4 surfaces, but not less than three (3) days for F11, F12, F13,
F14 and F15 surfaces.
Curing and protection shall start immediately after compaction of the concrete to
protect it from:
a)
Impact damage such as shock, overloading or falling earth which may disrupt the
concrete and interface with its bond to reinforcements.
b)
Premature drying out from direct sunlight and wind.
c)
Leaching out by rain and flowing water.
d)
High internal thermal gradients.
5.8.1
Normal Curing And Protection

Concrete, after it is placed and until the expiration of the curing duration, shall not be
allowed to dry out. Provision shall be made for adequate protection against direct sunlight
and wind to allow the process of curing to complete within the specified period.
Curing and protection shall be accomplished by covering the exposed
concrete surface with an impermeable material such as polyethylene sheet,
which should be well sealed and fastened and if required, this treatment can
be continued efficiently throughout the whole period of curing.
When the concrete has attained its final set, one of the following curing methods shall
be adopted:
a)
Water curing shall be accomplished by keeping the surface of the

concrete continuously wet by ponding with water.
b)
Curing may be accomplished by sealing in the water as specified

above by covering with an approved waterproofed curing paper or
plastic sheeting laid with airtight joints. It must be securely positioned to prevent
displacement by wind and protected from tearing or other injury.
The use of other methods of curing may be deemed necessary when the concrete is
subjected to high internal thermal gradient, or with large exposed surface area. The
Contractor shall submit a method statement to the approval of the S.O.
In the event where the Contractor does not do proper curing, the S.O. has the
D/14
Concrete Work
right to inspect and to carry out further tests which may include destructive
methods. All expenses incurred in carrying out such sampling, testing and
remedial works shall be borne by the Contractor irrespective of whether the tests
proved the structure to be sound or otherwise.
5.8.2
Accelerated Curing
Elevated temperature curing may be used only with Ordinary Portland Cement.
After the completion of the placing of concrete, four (4) hours shall elapse before
its temperature is raised, unless the Contractor is able to prove that curing can
start earlier by furnishing all the relevant supporting data to the S.O. The rise in
temperature within any period of 30 minutes shall not exceed 10oC and
maximum temperature attained shall not exceed 70oC unless it can be proven
that any deviation from this provision shall not result in any detrimental effect to
the concrete work. The rate of subsequent cooling shall not exceed the rate of
heating. The use of accelerated curing methods for concrete containing other
types of cement or any admixture or any additional materials shall be to the
approval of the S.O.
6.0
Construction with Concrete

6.1
Construction Joints
The position and detail of any construction joints not described in the Drawings shall be to
the approval of the S.O. and shall be so arranged as to minimise the possibility of the
occurrence of shrinkage cracks.
If for any reason the Contractor has to interrupt a planned pour for more than 45 minutes
(or any other period of time based on the trial mix as per 2.4, 3.2.3 and approved by the S.O.
if an admixture is used), additional construction joints shall be positioned and constructed
as directed by the S.O.
The number of construction joints shall be kept as few as possible consistent with
reasonable precautions against shrinkage. Concreting shall be carried out continuously
up to construction joints. The joints shall be at right angles to the general direction of the
member and shall take due account of shear and other stresses.
Concrete shall not be allowed to run to a feather edge and vertical joints shall be formed
against a stop board. The top surface of a layer of concrete shall be level and flat unless
design considerations make this undesirable. Joint lines shall be so arranged that they
coincide with features of the finished work, wherever possible.
At horizontal construction joints, gauge strips about 25 mm width shall be placed inside
the forms along all exposed surfaces to ensure a straight joint on those surfaces.
Where a kicker (i.e., a starter stub) is used for the construction of walls and columns, it
shall be at least 50 mm high, to be constructed monolithically with the base concrete.
Where vertical construction joints are necessary in mass concrete structures, reinforcing
bars shall be placed across the joints so as to make the structure monolithic, all to the
Prior to recommencement of concreting on a joint, the surface of the concrete against
which new concrete will be cast shall be free from laitance and shall be roughened to the
extent that the coarse aggregate is exposed but not disturbed. Care shall be taken to
avoid damaging the lines of the joint. Care shall also be taken that the joint surface is
clean and damp but not wet and the exposed adjoining surfaces shall be of consistent colour.
Immediately before the fresh concrete is placed against the joint, fresh rich cement mortar
(1:2) shall be applied to the exposed surface.
D/15
Concrete Work
Where the S.O. considers that special preparation is necessary, e.g. for an in-situ
structural connection, preparation shall be carried out, preferably when the concrete has
set but not hardened, by spraying with a fine spray of air and water or brushing with a stiff
brush sufficiently to remove the outer mortar skin and expose the larger aggregates
without disturbing them. Where this treatment is impracticable, sand blasting or a needle
gun shall be used to remove the surface skin and laitance. Hardened surfaces shall be
chipped manually or mechanically to be free from laitance and properly roughened to the
extent that the coarse aggregates are being exposed.
6.2
Fixing Blocks, Brackets, Built In Bolts, Holes, Chases, etc.

All fixing blocks, brackets, built in bolts, holes, chases, etc. shall be accurately set out and
formed and carefully sealed prior to the concrete being placed. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to obtain all such information for these items of work and obtain the
permission of the S.O. before incorporating such work prior to the concrete being placed.
Bolts and other inserts to be cast into the concrete shall be securely fixed to the formwork
in such a way that they are not displaced during the concreting operations and that there
is no loss of materials from the wet concrete through holes in the formwork.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or instructed by the S.O., reinforcement shall be
locally moved so that the minimum specified cover is maintained at the locations of
inserts, holes, chases, etc. In the event where the minimum cover cannot be maintained,
the Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect the reinforcements against
corrosion by applying an approved coating materials to the reinforcements and the
concrete cover.
Temporary plugs shall be removed and the threads of built in bolts shall be cleaned and
greased before handing over any part of the Work.
6.3
Precast Concrete Construction

6.3.1
Manufacture off Site

After the method of manufacture has been approved, no changes shall be made
without the approval of the S.O.
The Contractor shall inform the S.O. in advance of the date of commencement of
manufacture and casting of each type of precast concrete component.
When the S.O. requires tests to be carried out, none of the precast concrete
components to which the tests relate shall be dispatched to the site until the tests
have been completed and the results approved by the S.O.
All precast concrete components shall be indelibly marked to show the
identification marking as specified in the Drawings, the production batch on
which they were manufactured and the date on which the concrete was cast. If
the components are symmetrical, the face that will be uppermost when the
member is in its correct position in the work shall be clearly identified.
6.3.2
Storage
When the precast concrete components are stored, they shall be firmly
supported only at the points specified in the Drawings. No accumulation of
trapped water and deleterious matter shall be allowed in the components. Care
shall be taken to avoid rust staining and efflorescence.
The precast concrete components shall be stacked in such a manner that their
removal in correct order of age is facilitated.
D/16
Concrete Work
6.3.3
Handling and Transport

The precast concrete components shall be lifted only at points specified in the
Drawings or otherwise approved by the S.O. and shall be handled and placed
without impact. The method of lifting, the type of equipment and transport to be
used, and the minimum age of the components to be handled shall be to the
6.3.4
Assembly and Erection

The method of assembly and erection specified in the Drawings shall be strictly
adhered to on site.
Immediately a unit of precast concrete component is in position, and before the
lifting equipment is removed, temporary supports or connections between
components as necessary, shall be provided. The final structural connections
shall be completed as soon as is practicable.
6.3.5
Forming Structural Connections

For structural purposes, cement mortar shall compose of one (1) part of cement
to one (1) part of sand (1:1), mixed with water so that the free water: cement ratio
does not exceed 0.4 by weight and cement grout shall have a water: cement
ratio between 0.4 and 0.6, or such other proportions as shall be directed by the
S.O.
No structural connections shall be made until approval has been given by the
S.O.
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O., the composition and the free water:
cement ratio of the in-situ concrete or mortar used in any connection and the
packing of joints shall be in accordance with the assembly instructions.
Levelling devices shall be released or removed only with the approval of the S.O.
Non load bearing joints between precast concrete components and adjoining
structures shall be filled with appropriate grout and/or mortar protected by
proprietary sealants and backing rod. They shall be waterproof.
Load bearing joints and connection shall be grouted, mortar packed or
concreted. The respective mix design shall be free of lime and chloride. They
shall be durable, waterproof, non-shrink and possess a strength higher than that
of precast concrete. Curing for at least three (3) days shall be provided.
Designed mixes shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval.
The method of sampling and testing of grout and mortar shall be carried out
according to MS 26. The compressive strength shall be determined by crushing
test on 100 mm cubes. For each casting day and for each grade of grout and
mortar, three samples shall be taken from three (3) separate batches. Two (2)
cubes shall be cast from each sample for testing at seven (7) and 28 days. The
appropriate strength requirement shall be considered to be satisfied if the
average strength is greater than the specified characteristic strength.
6.3.6
Protection
At all stages of construction, precast concrete components and other concrete
associated therewith shall be properly protected to prevent damage to
permanently exposed surfaces, especially arrises and other decorative features.
D/17
Concrete Work
6.4
6.5
Permanent Structure Joints.

6.4.1
Expansion joints, contraction joints or other permanent structure joints shall be

provided in the positions and constructed and sealed with waterproofing
materials as detailed in the Drawings.
6.4.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all exposed expansion joints shall be
covered with 0.7 mm thick aluminium cover strips fixed with masonry nails at
300mm centers.
Sealants and Special Materials

6.5.1
General
The installation method and the selection, mixing, application and curing of all
joint waterproofing materials shall be in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. The Contractor may propose to use alternative joint
waterproofing materials by submitting supporting technical information, test
reports and samples of the proposed waterproofing materials to the S.O. for
approval.
6.5.2
Waterproofing Materials
All waterproofing materials used at public access areas shall be protected with
non shrink grout covering.
6.5.3
Waterstops
Waterstops shall be as specified in the Drawings and shall be installed and butt
jointed according to BS 8007 and the manufacturers recommendations.
Waterstops shall be securely positioned in the formwork to prevent displacement
during concreting.
6.5.4
Two-part Polysulphide or Two-part Polyurethane Sealant

Two-part Polysulphide or two-part polyurethane sealant for external use shall
comply with the following requirements:
(a)
Conformance to BS 4254
(b)
Minimum joint movement capacity of 27.5% of joint width at 27.5oC;
(c)
Shore A Hardness of 25 at 27.5oC;
(d)
Resistance to dilute acids, alkali and all kind of fuel.
6.5.5
Preformed Flexible Strip Sealant

Preformed flexible strip sealant shall comply with the following requirements: a)
Shall only be used in horizontal joints and be subjected to pressure
throughout its length;
b)
Good adhesion;
c)
Water resistant;
d)
Non-staining.
6.5.6
Bitumen/Rubber Cold Applied Membrane

Bitumen/rubber cold applied membrane shall comply with the following
requirements: a)
Minimum joint movement capacity of 10% of joint width at 27.5oC;
b)
90% solid content;
c)
Resistant to dilute acid and alkali.
D/18
Concrete Work
6.5.7
Hot-Poured Rubber/Bitumen Sealing Compound

Hot-poured rubber/bitumen sealing compound shall comply with BS 2499.
6.5.8
Bituminous Sheeting
Bituminous sheeting with non asbestos fibre shall comply with the following
requirements:
a)
Resistant to lime water (no visual effect after two weeks immersion);
b)
Maximum water absorption of 10% of dry weight;
c)
Minimum tensile strength of 50 kg/cm;
d)
Ozone and ultraviolet resistant.
6.5.9
Neoprene Bearing Pads

Neoprene bearing pads shall comply with the following requirements:
a)
Shore A Hardness of 60 5 at 27.5oC;
b)
Minimum rupture strength of 105 kg/cm;
c)
Minimum rupture elongation of 300%.
6.5.10 Polyurethane Foam Backing Rods

Polyurethane foam backing rods used as sealant stops in panel joints shall have
the following properties: a)
Minimum compressibility of 75% of original volume at 27.5oC;
b)
Excellent resilient properties;
c)
Density between 35 kg/cm and 45 kg/cm;
d)
Total resistance to common acids, lubricants and detergents;
e)
Total resistance to water infiltration by capillary action;
f)
Suitability for up to 70oC.
7.0
Steel Reinforcement
7.1
General
The Work shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel in accordance with this
specification and in conformity with the Drawings or as directed by the S.O.
7.2
Materials
Hot rolled mild steel and high yield bars shall comply with the requirements of MS 146.
Cold worked steel bars shall comply with the requirements of BS 4461. Hard drawn mild
steel wire shall comply with the requirements of MS 144.
Steel fabric reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of MS 145 and shall be
delivered to the Site in flat sheets, unless otherwise specified.
Dowel bars shall be plain, round bars conforming to the requirements of MS 146. They
shall be free from burring or other deformations restricting slippage in the concrete. Dowel
bar sleeves used for debonding shall be of approved synthetic material. The closed end
of the sleeve shall be filled with 25 mm thick compressible foam fillers and the sleeve
shall fit tightly over the length of the bar to be debonded.
Before any reinforcement steel is brought to Site, the Contractor shall furnish the mill
certificates of tests and these shall be submitted for acceptance by the S.O. In addition the
Contractor shall on request, furnish the S.O. with a test sheet from approved laboratories
for any batch of bars, giving the results of each of the mechanical tests and/or chemical
composition analysis required under the Malaysian Standards or any equivalent
international standards approved by the S.O. The specified characteristic strength of steel
D/19
Concrete Work
reinforcement shall be as given in Table 9.

During the course of the work, any reinforcement found to be not in accordance with the
Malaysian Standards or British Standards may be rejected by the S.O. notwithstanding
any previous acceptance on the strength of the test certificates. The S.O. may call for
additional tests to be made at the Contractors expense on samples taken from the batch
of the defective reinforcement. If the samples do not comply with the Malaysian
Standards or British Standards, then the S.O. may reject the whole batch and instruct its
removal from the Site.
Steel reinforcement shall be stored in clean and dry conditions. When placed in the work
it shall be clean and free from loose rust, mill scale, oil, grease, paint, dirt or anything
which may reduce its bond with concrete. If directed by the S.O., the steel bars shall be
brushed or otherwise cleaned before use, at the Contractors expense.
Binding wire shall be 1.6 mm diameter soft annealed steel wire complying with the
requirements of BS 1052.
7.3
Construction Methods
7.3.1
Cutting and Bending of Reinforcement

Bars shall be of their correct lengths and bent to the exact shapes required
before being fixed in the work.
Bars shall be cut and bent cold by the application of slow, steady pressure or in
an approved bar-bending machine. Bending at temperatures in excess of 100 oC
may only be carried out with the S.O.s approval and under his supervision.
Except where otherwise indicated in the Drawings, bars shall be bent and
measured in accordance with BS 4449.
Cold worked and hot rolled bars shall not be straightened or bent again once
having been bent. Where it is necessary to bend the free end of mild steel
reinforcement already cast in the concrete, the internal radius of the bend shall
not be less than twice the diameter of the bar.
Special care shall be taken that the overall length of bars with multiple bends is
accurate and that after bending and fixing in position the bars remain in place
without wrap or twist.
7.3.2
Fixing of Reinforcement
The number, size, length, shape, type and position of all reinforcing bars, links,
spacer bars and other parts of the steel reinforcement, shall be in accordance
with the Drawings.
Reinforcements shall be secured against displacement. Unless specified
otherwise, the actual concrete cover shall be taken as the distance between face
of concrete and the nearest steel surface. All intersecting bars shall be tied
together with binding wire and the ends of the wire shall be turned into the main
body of the concrete.
Reinforcement temporarily left projecting from the concrete at construction or
other joints shall not be bent out of position during the periods in which
concreting is suspended except with the approval of the S.O.
The Contractor shall take particular care that the reinforcement is laid out
correctly in every aspect and temporarily suspended by annealed wire or
supported on concrete blocks or other approved spacers in the forms to prevent
displacement during the placing and compacting of concrete. Links shall tightly
D/20
Concrete Work
embrace the longitudinal reinforcement to which they shall be securely wired or

spot welded. The top reinforcement in slabs shall be rigidly supported on mild
steel chairs or equivalent spaced in each direction to prevent sagging during
concreting.
No concrete shall be placed until the reinforcement has been inspected and
7.3.3
Splicing
Joints to reinforcement bars shall be effected by lapping of bars at positions
shown in the Drawings. Where other types of joints are to be used, prior approval
of the S.O shall be obtained and their use shall be strictly in accordance with
manufacturers instructions, at the positions approved by the S.O.
7.3.4
Supporting and Spacer Blocks

Supporting and spacer blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is
correctly positioned shall be as small as possible, consistent with their purpose,
of a shape approved by the S.O., and designed so that they will not overturn
when the concrete is placed.
The nominal size of aggregates used shall be 10mm. The concrete spacers shall
be of at least the same strength and materials source as the concrete to be
poured. Wires cast in these blocks for the purpose of tying them to the
reinforcement shall be as described in clause 7.2.
Spacers left in situ shall not impair the desired appearance or durability of the
structure by causing spalling, rust staining or allowing the passage of moisture.
Other types of spacers may be used only with the approval of the S.O.
7.3.5
Welding of Reinforcement
Reinforcement in structures shall not be welded except where detailed in the
Drawings or permitted in this specification.
Welding shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5135 and BS 638. Butt welds
shall be of the double V type and two butt weld bond tests shall be carried out on
a specimen prepared to represent each form of the butt welded joint used in
welding the reinforcement and for each position of welding. The method of
making butt weld tests shall be as laid down in BS 709. The specimen shall pass
the test to the approval of the S.O. before using the joint, which the specimen
represents.
Welded joints shall not be made at bends in reinforcement. Unless otherwise
approved by the S.O., joints in parallel bars of the principal tensile reinforcement
shall be staggered in the longitudinal direction at a distance not less than the end
anchorage length for the bar.
All welding shall be performed by a competent welder approved by the S.O.
The S.O. shall be informed in advance of when welding is to be carried out so
that he may supervise and inspect the work. Welding shall not be performed in
the field during rain or other adverse conditions.
D/21
Concrete Work
8.0
Formwork and Surface Finish For Structure

8.1
Design and Construction

8.1.1
Description
Formwork shall include all temporary or permanent forms required for forming
the concrete, together with all temporary construction required for their support.
The Contractor is deemed to have made a study of the Drawings at tender stage
and is aware of all areas of construction, requiring heavy and specially designed
propping to provide the support and the necessary bracing for the stability of
such propping.
The design and construction of formwork shall be carried out by a competent
person. The Contractor shall identify all critical formwork design and submit the
strength and deflection calculations and Drawings or the proposed design,
certified by a Professional Engineer to the S.O. for prior approval.
Notwithstanding any approval by the S.O. with respect to the design submitted
by the Contractor, the responsibility or the adequacy and safety of the design
shall remain with the Contractor. The Contractor shall also appoint a competent
formwork coordinator whose duties would be similar to those outlined in BS
5975.
When the use of proprietary type of formwork is proposed by the Contractor, the
design shall be certified by a Professional Engineer.
The formwork shall be sufficiently rigid and tight to prevent loss of grout or mortar
from the concrete at all stages of construction and shall be appropriate for the
methods of placing and compacting.
Formwork (including supports) shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the forms in
their correct position, shape, profile and dimensions. The supports shall be
designed to withstand the worst combination of forces due to self weight,
formwork weight, formwork forces, reinforcement weight, wet concrete weight,
construction and wind loads, together with all incidental dynamic effects caused
by placing, vibrating and compacting the concrete. Guidance on these loadings is
given in The Concrete Society Manual Formwork Guide to good practice, and
in CIRIA Report 108, Concrete Pressure in Formwork, and in BS 5975. Vertical
propping to formwork shall be carried down sufficiently far to provide the
necessary support without overstressing the completed concrete structure.
Metal ties may only be used with the prior approval of the S.O. Where metal ties
are permitted, the use of storey height steel soldiers shall be used to reduce the
number of tie bolts required. Tie bolts with rubber or plastic cone against the form
face are to be used to prevent unsightly grout loss. No metal part of any device
for maintaining formwork in the correct location shall remain permanently within
the specified concrete cover to the reinforcement. Except for ties used for
anchoring void formers, all ties shall be at least 1.2 meters apart and through
bolts will not be permitted on exposed form finished faces. All holes left by ties
shall be made good within one day of the removal of the formwork using a mortar
of the same strength as the cast concrete. Metal ties which allow for holes
through the concrete being cast shall not be permitted to be used in concrete for
water-retaining structure, roof slabs and walls.
The formwork shall be so arranged as to be readily dismantled and removed
from the cast concrete without shock, disturbance or damage. Where necessary,
the formwork shall be so arranged that the soffit form, properly supported, can be
retained in position for such period as may be required by the condition of the
maturing concrete or the specification. If a component is to be prestressed whilst
still resting on the soffit form, provision shall be made to allow for elastic
D/22
Concrete Work
deformation and any variation in weight distribution. As far as practicable,

formwork joints shall coincide with construction joints.
8.1.2
Form Lining
The type and treatment of any lining (plywood, metal, plastic, Controlled
Permeability Formwork liner etc.) of the forms shall be appropriate to the
concrete finish required.
The Controlled Permeability Formwork (CPF) liner shall have the following
requirements:
i.
The requirement for a special finish shall be as for traditional formwork
finishes except that the formwork shall be covered by a CPF liner.
8.1.3
ii.
CPF liner shall be used on all surfaces as detailed on the Drawings.
iii.
The CPF liner shall be a Water Bylaws Scheme Approved Product for
use with potable water in accordance with BS 6920.
iv.
The CPF liner shall have the following properties:

a)
Compression of less than 10% under a pressure 200kPa.
b)
Maximum pore size of less than 0.030mm.
c)
Minimum water retention capacity of 0.35 litres per square
metre.
d)
Result in bleed water from the liner which is free from cement
and fine aggregate particles.
v.
The concrete cast against the CPF liner shall have an even uniformly
textured matt finish and shall be free of blowholes and other surface
blemishes. The use of the CPF liner shall meet the following
performance requirements which should be demonstrated by the supply
of test certificate:
a) The mean surface strength for the CPF cast face shall exceed that
for the control face by at least 70%.
b) The mean 10 minute ISAT result for the CPF cast face shall be not
more than 15% of that for the control face.
c) The mean depth of carbonation for the CPF cast face shall be not
more than 15% of that for the control face.
d) The mean concentration of chlorides at a depth of 11mm from the
CPF cast face shall be not more than 15% of that for the control
face.
vi.
The CPF liner shall be used once only. Release agents shall not be
used with the liner and any residual release agent remaining on forms
from previous use shall be removed.
vii.
To ensure conformity with the performance requirements, the CPF liner

is to be used in accordance with the manufacturers technical guidelines.
viii.
The CPF liner shall unless otherwise directed, be left in place on the
concrete after formwork removal for the curing period specified by the
S.O. It shall be kept wet and covered with plastic sheeting to promote
efficient curing.
Projecting Reinforcement, Fixing Devices

Where holes are needed in form to accommodate projecting reinforcement or
fixing devices, care shall be taken to prevent loss of grout when concreting or
damage when removing forms.
D/23
Concrete Work
8.2
Surface Finishes for Concrete

8.2.1
Control of Colour
When specified in the Drawings, the Contractor shall obtain each constituent
material from a single consistent source. The aggregates shall be free of any
impurities that may cause staining. The mix proportions and the grading,
particularly of the fine aggregate, shall be maintained constant. The same type of
plywood or timber shall be used in formwork throughout similar exposed areas.
8.2.2
Formed Surfaces
Formed concrete surfaces shall have one of the following classes of finish.
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed concrete surfaces shall be of Class F12,
all unexposed surfaces shall be of Class F1. Other classes of finishes shall be
used only where shown in the Drawings:
(a)
Class F1
This finish shall be obtained by the use of properly designed forms of
closely joined sawn timber or other approved material. Small blemishes
caused by entrapped air or water may be expected but the surface shall
be free from voids and honeycombing.
(b)
Class F2
This finish shall be obtained by the use of properly designed forms of
closely jointed wrought boards, approved plywood or other approved
material. Only very minor surface blemishes shall occur, with no staining
or discolouration.
(c)
Class F3
This finish shall be obtained by the use of properly designed steel forms
or plastic coated plywood or wrought boards or other approved material.
The surface shall be improved by carefully removing all fins and other
projections, thoroughly washing down and then filling the most
noticeable surface blemishes with a cement and fine aggregate paste to
match the colour of the original concrete. Form release agents shall be
carefully chosen to ensure that the surface shall not be stained or
discoloured.
After the concrete has been properly cured, the surface shall be rubbed
down where necessary, to produce a smooth and even surface.
(d)
Class F4
The requirements for Class F4 are as for Class F3 except that internal
ties and embedded metal parts will be permitted. The ties shall be
positioned only in rebates, or in other positions as shown in the
Drawings or as agreed by the S.O.
(e)
Class F11
The requirements for Class F11 surface finish are identical to those for
Class F1 except that it shall be achieved using Controlled Permeability
Formliners.
D/24
Concrete Work
(f)
Class F12
Formliners.
(g)
Class F13
Formliners.
(h)
Class F14
Formliners.
(i)
Class F15
The requirements for Class F15 are as for Class F4 except that plywood
shutters lined with an approved patterned formliner shall be used to
produce a patterned profile finish. Where possible, full height formliners
shall be employed so that no horizontal joints in the liners are required.
Tie holes shall be spaced so that they occur at overlap joints in the lining
sheet.
8.2.3
Unformed surfaces
(a)
Class U1
The concrete shall be uniformly levelled and screeded to produce a
plain, ridged or broom roughened surface. No further work shall be
applied to the surface unless it is used as the first stage for a Class U2
or Class U3 finish.
(b)
Class U2
After the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the concrete Class U1
surface shall be floated by hand or machine to produce a uniform
surface free from screed marks.
(c)
Class U3
When the moisture film has disappeared and the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to prevent laitance from being worked to the surface, a Class
U1 surface shall be steel-trowelled under firm pressure to produce a
dense, smooth uniform surface free from trowel marks.
(d)
Class U4
This finish is for surfaces that are to receive waterproofing systems.
The concrete shall be levelled and floated to produce a uniform surface
and immediately before the waterproofing operation this surface shall be
water jetted or grit blasted to provide a lightly textured finish.
The finished surface shall not deviate from the required profile by more
than 5mm over a 3m gauge length or have any abrupt irregularities of
more than 3mm.
D/25
Concrete Work
8.2.4
Trial Panels for Exposed Form Finished Surfaces

In order to ensure that the specified formed finishes can be obtained by the
method of construction proposed and to provide a standard by which the finishes
in the Works can be assessed, trial panels shall be cast on Site. These panels
shall be subjected to the S.O.s approval before similar casting is permitted in the
Works.
The trial panels shall employ the materials, plant and concrete mix proposed for
the Works. They shall be at least a storey height and 1m wide. They shall be of
similar thickness and similarly reinforced as the elements they represent and
shall incorporate all features which contribute to the final appearance of the
Works.
8.3
Preparation of Forms Before Concreting

Before concreting, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned out, free from sawdust shavings,
dust, mud or other debris.
The inside surfaces of forms shall, unless otherwise approved by the S.O., be coated with
an approved non-staining form oil or other approved material to prevent adhesion of the
concrete. Such release agents shall be applied strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions and shall not come into contact with the reinforcement or
prestressing tendons and anchorages. For any exposed surface only one release agent
shall be used throughout the entire area.
All formwork shall be inspected by the S.O. after preparation and immediately prior to
depositing concrete and no concrete shall be deposited until approval of the formwork
has been obtained.
8.4
Removal of Forms
The Contractor shall inform the S.O. and obtain his approval before striking any
formwork, but such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities for the
safety of the work.
Formwork shall be removed without such shock or vibration as would damage the
concrete. A period of time shall elapse between the placing of the concrete and the
removal of the formwork for various parts of the structure so as to suit the requirements
for its curing.
The minimum periods between concreting and the removal of forms are given in Table
10. The periods stated in this table are based on the use of Ordinary Portland Cement.
They may be changed with the approval of the S.O., if other types of cement as described in
2.1, admixtures or additional material as described in 2.4 and 2.5 are used. The result of the
compressive strength obtained from the additional cubes taken as described in 4.9 may also
be used for early removal of forms provided always the Contractor provide proof of
calculation to the S.O for approval.
For prestressed in-situ components, temporary supports shall not be removed until the
components is stressed to the approval of the S.O.
Where it is intended that forms are to be reused, they shall be cleaned and made good to
the approval of the S.O.
Following the removal of forms, no further loads shall be imposed upon the concrete until
at least after the completion of the curing period or until such later time as in the opinion
of the S.O. the concrete shall have attained sufficient strength to safely withstand such
loads. Full design loads shall not be applied to any structure until all load bearing
concrete is at least 28 days old.
D/26
Concrete Work
8.5
Inspection and Making Good

The surface of the concrete shall be inspected for defects and for conformity to the
surface finish specified and where appropriate, with approved sample finishes.
Subject to the strength and durability of the concrete being unimpaired, the making good
of surface defects may be permitted but the level of acceptance shall be appropriate to
the type and quality of the finish specified and ensure satisfactory permanence and
durability.
Any remedial treatment of surfaces shall be approved by the S.O. following inspection
immediately after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay.
9.0
Mass and Lean Concrete

Mass and lean concrete shall consist of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate in the
nominal ratio by volume of 1:3:6 and 1:4:8 respectively. However where a denser and more
workable concrete can be produced by a variation in the ratio of the fine aggregate to that of
coarse aggregate, this ratio may be varied within the limits (1:1) and (1:3), provided that the
volumes of fine and coarse aggregate, each measured separately, shall nevertheless equal the
sum of the volumes of fine and coarse aggregate appropriate to the nominal mix. The concrete
shall be mixed as described for reinforced concrete.
10.0
Building Accuracy
After removal of formwork, the Contractor shall take measurements as directed by the S.O. to
check the deviation of the reinforced concrete works from specified dimensions shown in the
Drawings. All measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the S.O. Any deviation in
building accuracy shall comply with BS 5606.
11.0
Apparatus
The Contractor shall provide the following apparatus for use on the Site at all times: (a)
Concrete slump test apparatus or flow test apparatus complying with MS 26. One set of
the apparatus shall be provided for each concreting location.
(b)
At least twelve (12) numbers of steel or cast iron moulds for casting 150mm concrete test
cubes and six (6) numbers of 100mm mortar or grout test cube moulds complete with
tamping bars and base plates in accordance with MS 26. A minimum number shall be
provided such that no stripping of cubes is required prior to 24 hours setting and
hardening period.
(c)
Three (3) measuring cylinders of 250 ml capacity, graduated to measure to the nearest
2.0 ml., for determination of silt content (field setting method).
(d)
An approved apparatus for measuring moisture content in fine aggregate.
(e)
One electronic calculator with statistical functions.
(f)
One 300 mm steel rule.
(g)
One set of sieves in compliance with BS 410.
(h)
Scale or balance 25 kg maximum capacity and weights.
(i)
Trowel, shovel, spanner and other tools.

D/27
Concrete Work
12.0
Other Requirements for Building Works.

Other requirements for building works shall be as in Appendix D/1.
D/28
Concrete Work
Tables
TABLE 1 - TESTING OF AGGREGATES

Properties
Type of
Aggregate
Test Methods
Limits
Grading
Both
MS30
Table 2 & Table 3
Elongation Index
Coarse
MS30
Not exceeding 30%
Flakiness Index
Coarse
MS30
Not exceeding 35%
Water Absorption
Both
MS30
Not exceeding 8%
Clay Lumps
Coarse
MS30
Not exceeding 1% by weight
Clay, Silt and Dust
Fine
MS30
Not exceeding 3% by weight or

8% by vol.
Organic Impurities
Fine
MS30
Not exceeding 0.4%
Aggregate Crushing
Value
Coarse
MS30
Not exceeding 40%
Soundness Test
Coarse
MS30
Loss in mass after 5 cycles shall

not be more than 12% for sodium
sulphate or 18% for magnesium
sulphate.
Chloride Content
Both
MS30
Not exceeding 0.06% by weight of

chloride ions
Sulphate Content
Both
MS30
Not exceeding 0.44% by weight of

SO3
D/29
Concrete Work
TABLE 2 - GRADING FOR COARSE AGGREGATE

Percentage by mass passing BS 410 sieve for nominal sizes
Sieve size
(BS410)
Graded Aggregates
Single-sized Aggregate
40 mm
to
5 mm
20 mm
to
5 mm
14 mm
to
5 mm
40 mm
20 mm
10 mm
50.0 mm
100
100
37.5 mm
90 to 100
100
85 to 100
100
20.0 mm
35 to 70
90 to 100
100
0 to 25
85 to 100
14.0 mm
25 to 55
40 to 80
90 to 100
0 to 70
100
10.0 mm
10 to 40
30 to 60
50 to 85
0 to 5
0 to 25
85 to 100
5.0 mm
0 to 5
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 5
0 to 25
2.36 mm
0 to 5
TABLE 3 - GRADING FOR FINE AGGREGATE

Percentage by mass passing BS 410 sieve
Sieve size
(BS 410)
Overall
limits
Additional limits for grading

C
*M
10.0 mm
100
5.0 mm
80 to 100
2.36 mm
60 to 100
60 to 100
65 to 100
80 to 100
1.18 mm
30 to 100
30 to 90
45 to 100
70 to 100
600 m
15 to 100
15 to 45
25 to 80
55 to 100
300 m
5 to 70
5 to 40
5 to 48
5 to 70
150 m
0 to 15#
#
*
NOTE:
Increase to 20% for crushed rock fines, except when they are used for heavy-duty floors.
For prescribed mix only Grading Limit M is applicable. See also clause 2.2.3(b).
Individual sands may comply with the requirements of more than one grading. Alternatively some sands which
satisfy the overall limits but may not fall within any one of the additional limit C, M or F may also be used provided
that the supplier can satisfy the S.O that such materials can produce concrete of the required quality.
D/30
Concrete Work
TABLE 4 - ADMIXTURE ACCEPTANCE TEST REQUIREMENTS
Stiffening Time
Categories
of Admixture
Minimum
Strength as a
percentage of
the control
mix
Water
Reduction
Length change,
maximum
shrinkage
Age
Time from completion of mixing to reach a

resistance to penetration of:-
Type 1:
Accelerator
Type 2:
Retarder
27.5 N/mm
% of
control
Increase
135
0.010
0.5 N/mm
3.5N/mm
Compressive
More than
1hr.
Within
1hr.and 3hrs.
earlier than
control mix
At least 1hr.
earlier than
control mix
125
125
100
100
24 hrs.
3 days
7 days
28 days
At least
1hr.later
than control
mix
Within 1hr.
and 3hrs.
later than
control mix
Not more
than 3hrs.
later than
control mix
90
90
95
3 days
7 days
28 days
135
0.010
135
0.010
135
0.010
135
0.010
Type 3:
Normal
waterreducing
At least
5%
Within + 1hr.
and - 1hr.of
control mix
Within + 1hr.
and - 1hr. of
control mix
Within + 1hr.
and - 1hr. of
control mix
110
110
110
3 days
7 days
28 days
Type 4:
Accelerating
waterreducing
At least
5%
More than
1hr.
Within 1hr.
and 3hrs.
earlier than
control mix
At least 1hr.
earlier than
control mix
125
125
100
100
24 hrs.
3 days
7 days
28 days
Type 5:
Retarding
waterreducing
At least
5%
At least 1hr.
later than
control mix
Within 1hr.
and 3hrs.
earlier than
control mix
Not more
than
3hrs.later
than control
mix
110
110
110
3 days
7 days
28 days
D/31
Concrete Work
TABLE 5 - PRESCRIBED MIXES FOR GENERAL USE PER CUBIC

METER OF CONCRETE BY WEIGHT BATCHING
Grades of
Concrete
28-day
Strength of
Concrete
(N/mm2)
15P
15
20P
20
25P
25
30P
30
Nominal Max.Size of Aggregate (mm) 20
Max free
water:
cement ratios
Workability
Medium
High
Slump limits(mm)
25 - 75
75 - 125
Cement (kg)
Total aggregate(kg)
*Fine aggregate (%)
280
1800
35 - 50
310
1750
35 - 50
0.6
Cement (kg)
Total aggregate(kg)
*Fine aggregate (%)
320
1800
25 - 40
350
1750
20 - 45
0.55
Cement (kg)
Total aggregate(kg)
*Fine aggregate (%)
360
1750
25 - 40
390
1700
30 - 45
0.5
Cement (kg)
Total aggregate(kg)
*Fine aggregate (%)
400
1700
25 - 40
430
1650
30 - 45
0.45
* Fine aggregate is expressed as a percentage by weight to the total weight of the dry aggregate.
TABLE 5A - PROPORTIONS AND STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS FOR

PRESCRIBED MIXES BY VOLUME BATCHING
Mix Proportion
(Grade)
Slump
Limits
(mm)
Cubic Meters of
Aggregate Per 50 kg
of cement
Fine
Coarse
(20mm)
Max.
Free
Water:
Cement
Ratio
Quantity
of
Water
(Liters)
At 7 Days
(N/mm2)
At 28
Days
(N/mm2)
Strength
of Concrete
1:1:2(30P)
25-50
0.035
0.07
0.45
22.5
20
30
1:1.5:3(25P)
25-50
0.05
0.1
0.5
25
17
25
1:2:4(20P)
25-50
0.07
0.14
0.55-0.6
27.5-30
14
20
1:3:6(15P)
25-50
0.10
0.20
0.6
30#
11
15
or as approved by S.O.
D/32
Concrete Work
TABLE 6 - MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT AND MAXIMUM FREE

WATER: CEMENT RATIO FOR DESIGNED MIX
Prestressed
Concrete
Reinforced
Concrete
Plain
Concrete
Exposure
Nominal max.size of
aggregate
(in mm)
40
20
10
Nominal max.size
of aggregate
(in mm)
40
20
10
Nominal max.
size of aggregate
(in mm)
40
20
a)Surface sheltered
from severe rain:1) surface protected
by a waterproof
membrane;
(kg/m)
(kg/m)
(kg/m)
2) internal surfaces,
whether or not
subject to
condensation;
300
320
360
300
320
360
250
280
Max.
Free
Water:
Cement
Ratio
0.55
3) surfaces
continuously
buried and/or
submerged under
water.
b) soffits;
c) surfaces exposed
to driving rain,
alternate wetting
and drying, e.g.,
in contact with
backfill.
d) surfaces exposed
to the action of
sea water with
abrasion having
a pH of 4.5 or
less.
e) surfaces exposed
to sulphate
attack.
330
350
390
330
350
390
270
300
0.50
360
380
420
360
380
420
320
350
0.45
References shall be made to Table 6.1 - MS1195 Part 1:1991
D/33
Concrete Work
TABLE 7 - MAXIMUM TOTAL CHLORIDE

Type or Use of Concrete
Maximum Total Percentage of

Chloride Ions by Mass of Cement
Concrete containing embedded metal and made with

cement complying with MS522
0.4
Prestressed Concrete and Heat-Cured Concrete

containing embedded metal
0.1
Plain, non-structural concrete
No limit
Notes on Table 7:(1)% Chloride ions x 1.648 = % equivalent sodium chlorides.

(2)% Chloride ions x 1.56 = % equivalent anhydrous calcium chlorides.
TABLE 8 - COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS FOR PRESCRIBED MIX
Grades of
Concrete
20P
25P
30P
40P
28-day Strength of Concrete
Cube Strength at 7
Days*
Average Cube Strength

at 28 Days*
N/mm2
N/mm2
N/mm2
20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
14
17
20
27
20.0
25.0
30.0
40.0
*Only for Portland Cement
D/34
Concrete Work
TABLE 8A - 28 DAY STRENGTH COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR DESIGNED MIX

Specified Grade
of Concrete
20 and above
Below 20
Group of Test Results:
A
The mean of the group
of test results exceeds
the specified
characteristic
compressive strength
by at least:
B
Any individual test result
is not less than the
characteristic
compressive strength
less:
First 2
First 3
Any consecutive 4
N/mm2
1
2
3
N/mm2
3
3
3
First 2
First 3
Any consecutive 4
N/mm2
0
1
2
N/mm2
2
2
2
TABLE 9 - CHARACTERISTIC STRENGTH

OF STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Type
Nominal Sizes (mm)
Specified Characteristic
Strength, fy (N/mm2)
Hot rolled grade 250

(MS 146)
All sizes
250
Hot rolled grade 460

(MS 146)
All sizes
460
Cold worked
(BS 4461)
All sizes
460
Hard drawn steel wire

(MS 144)
Up to and
including 12
485
D/35
Concrete Work
TABLE 10 - MINIMUM PERIODS BETWEEN CONCRETING

AND REMOVAL OF FORMS
Vertical faces of beams, wall, columns, piles, foundation plinths
and precast components
3 days
Slabs (props left under)
4 days
Removal of props to slab
10 days
Beam soffits (props left under)
8 days
Removal of props to beams
21 days
Note:
This table is applicable only for Ordinary Portland Cement. Where other types of cement, admixtures or
additional material are to be used, the minimum periods between concreting and removal of forms shall be as
D/36
Concrete Work
APPENDIX D/1
1.0
Foundation
All reinforced concrete footings and pile caps shall be constructed according to the Drawings and
to the exact depths required. The Contractor shall supply, maintain and remove any necessary
planking and strutting, sheet piling and coffer dams, and shall by pumping or other approved
means keep the excavation free from water.
The bottom of excavation shall be cleaned or if in loose or disturbed ground shall be well rammed,
and the whole shall be approved before it is covered with a blinding layer of lean concrete not
less than 50 mm thick. The required cover of concrete under the reinforcement shall be entirely
above the blinding layer.
2.0
Pile Caps
Before commencing to construct pile caps, the Contractor shall check and verify the eccentricities
and the cut-off levels of all piling works in the ground are as provided in the Drawings, and shall
notify the S.O. in the event of any discrepancy.
The Contractor shall straighten the steel reinforcement projecting above the piles for anchoring
pile caps, carry out excavation, erect formwork and temporary timbering for the construction of
pile caps and ground beams.
3.0
Lift Pits
For lift pits below ground level, the concrete in the base slab and walls shall be of reinforced
concrete with minimum cement content and maximum free water: cement ratio in accordance with
the exposure C in table 6 and shall be constructed in operations which shall ensure water
tightness in the structure below the ground level.
All external or internal wall surfaces of lift pits shall be waterproofed with three (3) coats of
bitumen solution complying with BS 3416 or any other type of waterproofing material as approved
by the S.O. The concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried before application of the
waterproofing material.
4.0
Floors
After initial set, the upper surface of cast-in-situ reinforced concrete floors shall be trowelled
smooth with a steel float to true level and even surface. No screeding of any kind shall be applied
to the floor slabs except where specified. Care shall be taken to ensure that the steel
reinforcement is not displaced or lowered during trowelling.
For areas, which are to receive rendering or other finishes, the fresh concrete shall be trowelled to
true level or as required using a long timber trowel. Before it hardens it shall be brushed with a
stiff broom in one direction to give a rough and tidy surface.
The reinforced concrete ground floor slab shall not be laid directly onto earth surfaces. A blinding
layer of 50mm minimum thick of lean concrete as specified in clause 9.0 shall be laid on well
prepared firm ground. Plastic sheeting or other suitable material with sufficient overlaps at joints,
shall be laid on the blinding layer before any reinforcement is placed in position.
5.0
Toilet Floors
The Contractor shall ensure that all suspended floor for toilet areas are constructed to be
watertight and leak proof. All construction method or alternative details proposed by the
Contractor must be based on his acceptance of and compliance with the requirements for
watertightness. The Contractor shall ensure that holes and fixings are properly constructed. The
floor must be concreted in one sequence of operation. No construction joints for toilet floor are to
be allowed. All pipes and fittings encased in the concrete floor shall be provided with sleeves to
D/37
Concrete Work
the approval of the S.O and shall be build in situ. No holes shall be left for later incorporation of
fittings and no subsequent hacking of floor shall be made. Not withstanding whatever shown in the
Drawings, all toilet floor slabs shall have a minimum thickness of 150mm.
5.1
Testing for watertightness

The toilet floor areas should be ponded with water continuously over a period of 7 days.
During this period the exposed soffit shall show no signs of leakage and remain dry. If
any area is found not to be watertight, the Contractor must repair at his own expense.
6.0
7.0
Roofs
6.1
Reinforced concrete roofs shall be constructed to fall as shown in the Drawings and finished with
steel trowelling, leaving the surface smooth and free from mortar droppings.
6.2
The base slab shall be concreted as described for concrete generally, ensuring thorough
compactions by the use of a pan vibrator or a vibrating screen. Concrete shall be
poured continuously between pre-determined construction joints as decided by the S.O., or as
shown in the Drawings. Expansion joints, where applicable, shall be allowed and constructed
exactly as indicated in the Drawings.
6.3
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings, waterproofing screed to reinforced

concrete flat roof shall consist of a 32 mm thick screed reinforced with temperature steel.
6.4
The waterproofing screed shall consist of one (1) part of cement and three (3) parts of
clean well-graded sand (1:3), and shall be mixed with an approved waterproofing agent
and approved plasticiser in the proportion recommended by the manufacturer.
6.5
The temperature steel shall consist of a mesh 6 mm diameter mild steel bars at 150 mm
centers each way, or alternatively steel fabric of MS 145. The temperature steel shall be
placed directly on top of the base slab, and a minimum cover of 19 mm to top bars of the
temperature steel shall be maintained.
6.6
The screed shall be laid after the base slab concrete has sufficiently hardened but not
later than 36 hours after the concreting of the base slab, to obtain a thorough bond
between the screed and the base slab. The surface shall be finished with a wood float,
and followed by a steel trowel to a smooth finish.
6.7
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings, joints in the screed shall be allowed
and located over the main roof beams and shall be filled with approved bituminous
compound as soon as possible.
6.8
After the screed has been placed, the full area shall be properly protected and cured for a
period of at least seven (7) days. Alternatively as soon as the screed has sufficiently
hardened to withstand a mans weight without marking, an approved plastic sealing agent
shall be sprayed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Drips
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or directed by the S.O., a 15mm wide drip shall be
formed along edges of soffits to concrete roof slabs, hoods, undersides of balconies, cantilevered
beams and slabs and other parts of building where rain water is likely to adhere in drops.
8.0
Refuse Chutes
Where shown in the Drawings, all cast-in-situ reinforced concrete refuse chutes shall be
constructed without bolt holes made through the chute walls. If such holes are unavoidable then
they shall be completely grouted with cement mortar as specified in clause 6.3.5 or sealed and
waterproofed by other means to prevent leakage to the approval of the S.O.
D/38
Concrete Work
Frames which shall not be of asbestos cement, shall be cast into refuse chute walls for fixing
chute hoppers. Such frames shall be obtained from the same supplier of chute hoppers.
D/39
Concrete Work
SECTION E - BRICKWORKS
1.
Cement
1.1
2.
Sand
2.1
3.
4.
The cement, unless otherwise described, shall be Ordinary Portland Cement complying
with MS 522 and as specified under SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK.
Sand for mortar shall comply with MS 29 and as specified in SECTION D: CONCRETE
WORK.
Mortar
3.1
Mortar shall consist of one (1) part of cement to six (6) parts of sand, with the addition of
an approved mortar plasticiser used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The ingredients for mortar shall be measured in proper gauge boxes and
shall be mixed on a clean boarded platform or in an approved mechanical batch mixer.
3.2
All mortar shall be used within 45 minutes of mixing and no remaking up of mortar shall
be permitted thereafter.
3.3
Mortar for brickwork below damp proof course or ground floor level shall be in the
proportion of one part of cement and three parts of sand.
Bricks and Blocks

4.1
Samples
Separate samples of each type of bricks and blocks taken at random from the load, shall
be submitted to the S.O. for approval before the bricks and blocks are used. All
subsequent deliveries shall generally be up to the standard of the samples approved. No
soft, broken, twisted or otherwise defective bricks and blocks will be permitted to be used.
4.2
Clay Bricks
All ordinary clay bricks shall be machine-made and wire cut complying with MS 76 and
shall be hard, well burnt, sound, square and clean.
4.3
Cement Sand Bricks and Hollow Blocks

4.3.1
All cement sand bricks and hollow blocks shall comply with MS 27.
4.3.2
Size
Cement sand bricks shall be of a nominal size as given below:
Length(mm)
Width(mm)
Depth(mm)
225 3.2
113 1.6
75 1.6
Dimensional tolerances for hollow blocks shall be 3mm on all faces. The shell
of each hollow block shall be 38mm thick minimum on all sides.
E/1
Brickwork
4.3.3
Composition
Cement sand bricks and hollow blocks shall consist of an intimate and uniform
mixture of sand and cement. The sand and cement shall be mixed in the ratio of
six (6) parts of sand to one (1) part of cement by volume in a mechanical mixer
capable of taking one (1) bag of cement (50kg of cement shall be taken as 0.035
cube). The sand used shall be as described hereinbefore and the maximum size
shall pass through a 4.8mm mesh BS sieve. The cement used shall be Ordinary
Portland Cement as described under SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK.
4.3.4
Supply
The Contractor shall only use cement sand bricks and hollow blocks supplied by
approved manufacturers.
4.3.5
Compressive Strength
The minimum permissible average compressive strength shall be 5.2N/mm sq.
for bricks and 2.8 N/mm sq. for hollow blocks per 10 samples taken at random
from the Contractors stock pile of 1000 or part thereof. All rejected or
condemned bricks shall be removed from the Site at the Contractor's expense.
4.4
Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Block

4.4.1
Autoclaved aerated concrete blocks shall be high pressure steam cured

consisting of a mixture of ordinary cement, sand and lime. The mix shall be free
of asbestos or toxic substances.
4.4.2
Where autoclaved aerated concrete blocks are used in lieu of clay bricks, the
equivalent thickness shall be as below: -
4.4.3
Thickness of Brickwall
Thickness of Autoclaved Aerated

Concrete Blockwall
Half Brickwall
100mm thick
One Brickwall
200mm thick
The autoclaved aerated concrete blocks shall have the following performance
criteria: (a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
4.5
dry density of between 500kg/m3 and 700kg/m3;

dimensional accuracy of 1.5mm on all faces;
the minimum permissible compressive strength shall be 2.5 N/mm sq.
per 10 samples taken at random from the Contractors stock pile of 1000
or part thereof.
minimum fire rating of two (2) hours.
Patented Block
Patented blocks shall comply with MS 27 and shall be used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.
E/2
Brickwork
5.
Walling
5.1
5.2
Brick Walling
5.1.1
The whole of the brickwork shown in the Drawings, unless otherwise specified,
shall be constructed with standard size clay bricks in mortar as described and
leave the surface ready for plastering.
5.1.2
Notwithstanding paragraph 5.1.1 above and anything else to the contrary

elsewhere contained in the Drawings and/ or Bills of Quantities, the Contractor
may with approval of the S.O. construct all non load bearing brickwork above
damp proof course or ground floor level and which will be plastered on both
sides, with cement sand bricks thereinbefore specified. Provided always that in
the event of the S.O. allowing the substitution of clay bricks with cement sand
bricks, a deduction shall be made from the Contract Sum for such substitution at
rates to be derived from the prices to Site of clay bricks and cement sand bricks,
and the average size of the clay bricks and cement sand bricks concerned, using
the formulas shown in APPENDIX E1.
5.1.3
All clay bricks shall be soaked in a suitable tank or pit to be provided by the
Contractor for at least half an hour before being laid and shall be kept wet whilst
being laid. The top of walls left off shall be thoroughly wet before work is
resumed. All constructed walling must be left wet and properly protected from the
direct sunlight during the following day. The Contractor shall provide sufficient
means to ensure that this is done.
5.1.4
Cement sand bricks shall not be soaked but dipped in water before being laid
and all constructed brickwork shall be protected from direct sunlight during the
day on which it is laid and also during the following day and the Contractor shall
provide sufficient means to ensure that this is done.
5.1.5
All bricks shall be properly bedded in mortar and all joints shall be thoroughly
flushed up and raked out to a depth of 13mm as the work proceeds. No joint
shall exceed 10mm in thickness.
5.1.6
Brickwork shall be carried up perfectly true and plumb in a uniform manner. No

one portion being raised more than 1m above another at one time. No overhand
work shall be permitted and scaffolding shall be carried up as the work proceeds.
The vertical points of every alternate course shall be kept perpendicular over one
another, and all perpends, quoins, etc. shall be kept strictly true and square.
5.1.7
All intersections and angles of walls shall be properly bonded together, and all
walls and piers of lengths and widths not multiples of brick sizes shall be cut and
bonded in the best approved manner. No broken bricks shall be used except
where required to form bonds.
5.1.8
All half brick (113mm) walls and partitions shall be reinforced at every fourth
course with approved brick reinforcement commencing two courses above floor
level. For block walling, reinforcement shall be at every second course
commencing one course above floor level.
Hollow Block Walling

5.2.1
The cement sand block wall shall be laid in the manner specified for brickwall.
The hollow block shall not be soaked but dipped in water before laying. The
hollow block wall shall be reinforced at every second course with reinforcement
commencing one course above floor level.
E/3
Brickwork
5.3
6.
7.
Autoclaved Aerated Concrete Block Walling

5.3.1
Where shown in the Drawings and/ or described in the Bills of Quantities or as

alternative to clay bricks, the Contractor may use autoclaved aerated concrete
blocks for non load bearing walls and partitions. The autoclaved aerated
concrete block work shall be constructed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Any extra cost in connection therewith shall be
borne by the Contractor.
5.3.2
The autoclaved aerated concrete block work shall be installed using an approved
thin layer of adhesive mortar to all horizontals and perpends. The first course
must be made true and level using a normal layer of mortar with thin layer of
adhesive to fully seal the perpends. The thin layer of adhesive shall be applied
using a notched trowel to obtain an even distribution of adhesive to achieve joint
thickness of 2-3mm.
5.3.3
A damp-proof course slip-joint membrane shall be laid on top of floor slab or

beams before receiving the mortar bedding to allow for differential movement
between the blocks and the supporting structure.
5.3.4
The autoclaved aerated concrete block work shall be laid in a manner that the
vertical joint of the lower course shall be staggered at least 100mm relative to the
vertical joint of the overlaying course.
5.3.5
Unless otherwise directed and/or shown, where concrete block walls abut
concrete faces, the face shall be flushed.
5.3.6
Control joints should be built into walls at spacing not greater than 8.0 meter
centres, and at locations in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendation.
5.3.7
Care must be taken to keep the walls clean, strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendation. Excess adhesive must be removed
progressively.
5.3.8
In lieu of cement sand plastering, the wall surfaces may be finished with suitable
surface coating that has the dual properties of being waterproof and water
vapour permeable and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendation.
Bond
6.1
All half brick walls shall be built in Stretcher Bond.
6.2
All other brickwork shall be built in English Bond or as shown in the Drawings.
Damp Proof Course

7.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, bituminous sheet damp proof courses shall
comply with BS 8215 laid in brickwork on a level bed of cement mortar (1:1) and coated
on the upper surface with hot bitumen and lapped at least 150mm at angles and joints.
7.2
In all cases of doubt as to the exact location of the damp-proof course the Contractor
shall refer to the S.O. before laying the damp-proof course.
E/4
Brickwork
8.
Building in Cramps
8.1
9.
Scaffolding
9.1
10.
11.
All scaffolding shall be carried up as the work proceeds and shall be safe for use.
Facing Brickwork
10.1
All facing brickwork shall be executed in first quality approved facing bricks in Stretcher or
Flemish Bond as shown in the Drawings, properly bonded into any backing walls, piers,
etc. Joints shall be raked out to a depth of 13mm and point up in coloured cement mortar
to approved tints, finished with a neat struck weathered joint.
10.2
Facing brickwork shall be kept perfectly clean and no rubbing down of brickwork will be
allowed.
Cutting
11.1
12.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, cramps for frames, metal windows and precast
units shall be built in at 1m centres on the vertical side of the frame. Mild steel cramps
shall be 25mm x 3mm x 225mm long for fixing wooden frames, etc. One end of the cramp
shall be turned up and screwed to back of the frame and the other end shall be split and
fish-tailed for building in. Cramps which are to be fixed to concrete shall be embedded in
concrete and built into brickwork as the work proceeds.
All arches, cuttings, sinks, setbacks, and projections shall be properly formed. Chases
and holes through walls and slabs for the passage of pipes, wiring and the like shall be
neatly cut or formed.
Stonework
12.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or described in the Bills of Quantities, all stone
blocks used shall be of limestone or granite whichever is more readily available within the
locality of the Site and shall be free from cracks, fissures or other defects to the approval
of the S.O. The stone blocks shall in general, have their largest faces parallel. Unless
otherwise required, the maximum thickness of the stone blocks shall in no case exceed
the thickness of the wall or portion of the structure into which it is being built.
12.2
Stone walling shall be laid random uncoursed or random coursed as shown in the
Drawings. Through or bonded stones shall be used at one stone per metre square for
random uncoursed work, and two stones per metre square for random coursed. Where
backing brickwall is shown, the through stone shall be properly bonded in such brickwall.
12.3
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all stonework shall be bedded in cement and
sand mortar (1:3) mix and finished with a flushed joint rubbed down with sacking. All
interstices between individual stone shall be filled with mortar. Finish to exposed surfaces
or random walling shall be hammer-dressed.
E/5
Brickwork
APPENDIX E 1
FORMULA FOR SUBSTITUTION OF CLAY BRICKS WITH CEMENT SAND BRICKS
Description of
Brickworks
Rate of Deduction Per Sq. M
1.
Half Brickwall
1,000,000
2.
One Brickwall
2,000,000
Where,
Ht1
Pt1
Tt1
Hsp
Psp
Tsp
(1.025Ht1)
________________
(Pt1 + 10)(Tt1 + 10)
(1.100Hsp)
________________
(Psp +10)(Tsp + 10)
(1.025Ht1)
________________
(Pt1 + 10)(Tt1 + 10)
(1.100Hsp)
________________
(Psp + 10)(Tsp + 10)
The price to Site of clay to be agreed

The average length of the clay bricks concerned in millimeters
The average thickness of the clay bricks concerned in millimeters
The price to Site of cement sand bricks to be agreed
The average length of the cement sand bricks concerned
The average thickness of the cement sand bricks concerned in
millimeters
E/6
Brickwork
SECTION F -SOIL DRAINAGE

1.
General
1.1
2.
Cement, Sand, Aggregates and Bricks

2.1
3.
Cement, sand and aggregates shall be as previously specified in SECTION D:

CONCRETE WORK. All bricks used unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or
described in the Bills of Quantities shall be clay bricks as previously specified in
SECTION E: BRICKWORK.
Layout
3.1
4.
The work to be done under this section unless otherwise shown or described in the Bills
of Quantities shall consist of the supply, delivery, construction and testing of all soil
drainage and ancillary works, connecting the vertical stack to and including the septic
tank or imhoff tank and all necessary works up to the point of final discharge of the
effluent. In the case of discharge into the public sewer or the package sewage treatment
plant, the work shall terminate up to and including the last manhole or intercepting trap of
the system. This section of the work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
appropriate by-laws and to the approval of the S.O.
The whole of the drainage work shall be carried out to the layout as shown in the
Drawings.
Excavation
4.1
Generally, all excavation works in this section unless otherwise specified hereunder shall
be as previously specified in SECTION C: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK.
4.2
The depth of excavation for manholes, septic tank/or filter bed shall be as shown in or
inferred from the Drawings.
4.3
The trench shall be excavated to the depths intended or as shown in the Drawings and
shall be finished and trimmed to the correct level and grade. Unless indicated otherwise,
the bottom of the trench shall be graded so that the pipe invert slopes evenly between the
appropriate outlet invert of the proceeding manhole and the inlet invert of the next
manhole.
4.4
The trench shall be excavated to such width so as to ensure that a working space of
150mm will be available on either side of the pipe when properly aligned. At all joints, the
trench shall be so excavated to give a minimum working space of not less than 300mm
all round the joint.
4.5
The sides of all excavation unless otherwise approved by the S.O. shall be cut vertical
and where necessary shall be protected against caving in by timbering to the approval of
the S.O.
4.6
Should the ground be so wet or soft that does not form a firm base for the pipe, if it is
necessary in the opinion of the S.O. then the trench shall be excavated 225mm below the
level intended or shown in the Drawings and then brought to the correct level with good
selected earth, quarry dust or sand well rammed into place. Such deepening of pipe
trench and filling back shall be treated as a variation under the terms of the Contract.
Should the bottom of the trench be inadvertently excavated below the specified level, it
shall be brought back at the Contractor's expense to the correct level with good selected
earth, quarry dust or sand carefully rammed into place.
F/1
Soil Drainage
5.
6.
7.
4.7
When excavating pipe trenches in roadway or other paved surfaces, the Contractor shall
first remove all metal, slabs or bricks forming the existing pavement to the width of the
trenches and reinstate to the approval of the S.O. after the trenches have been backfilled.
4.8
Generally where rock is encountered in the trench excavation, it shall be removed to the
approval of the S.O. Where layer of rock is encountered along the bottom of the
excavation, it shall be cut and trimmed to the required level of the trench. All voids formed
at the bottom of the trench by the removal of rocks shall be back filled to the required
level with 1:3:6-20mm concrete or other suitable materials well rammed and compacted
all to the approval of the S.O. Jaggered surfaces of rocks at the bottom of the excavation
due to the trimming shall be levelled and smoothened with sand blinding to the approval
of the S.O.
Pipes and Fittings

5.1
Generally, all soil drains unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, shall be vitrified clay
pipes and fittings complying with MS1061.
5.2
All drains shown passing under buildings up to the immediate manhole outside the
buildings, roads, pavements and the like and exposed pipes above ground shall be
coated cast iron pipes and fittings complying with BS 437 or complying with BS 416 and
BS 78 respectively whichever is appropriate.
5.3
Where pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings are shown in the Drawings, they shall be
to the approval of the S.O. Where unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) pipes and
fittings are shown, they shall be manufactured according to MS 979 for under ground
installation and MS 1063 for above ground installation. For pumping application, pipes
and fittings shall be manufactured to MS 628 and to the approval of the S.O. All pipes
and fittings shall be of an approved manufacture.
Joint for Drain Pipes

6.1
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O, joints of flexible and watertight type shall be used
on all vitrified clay pipes. The spigot and socket of each pipe shall be cleaned and
lubricated before the running of each joint.
6.2
Cast iron pipe shall be jointed with a gasket of hemp or yarn and malleable lead wellcaulked home to the approval of the S.O. The internal side of each pipe shall be carefully
cleaned after jointing to leave a clear and unobstructed water way.
6.3
Where pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings are shown in the Drawings, they shall be
jointed by means of tapered coupling joint. Couplings shall be made either of the same
materials as the pipe or of a plastic material to the approval of the S.O. The pipes and
coupling shall have accurately machined or moulded tapered ends, the internal taper of
the couplings matching the external taper of the pipes.
6.4
Where uPVC pipes and fittings are shown in the Drawings, they shall be jointed by using
solvent weld joints.
Pipe Laying
7.1
All pipes shall be laid in compliance with MS 1228 and in accordance with the sizes,
locations, dimensions, grades and other particulars as shown in the Drawings. Each pipe
shall be carefully examined on arrival at the site. Sound pipes shall be carefully stored.
Defective pipes shall be marked and removed from the site forthwith.
F/2
Soil Drainage
8.
7.2
Prior to fixing or laying all pipes and fittings shall again be carefully examined for damage
and only those found to be sound in every aspect shall be fixed or laid. Any pipes,
specials, etc. found to be damaged in any way shall be clearly marked, set aside and
removed from the site.
7.3
No pipe shall be laid until the trench has been inspected and approved by the S.O.
7.4
The pipes shall be gently lowered into the trench by means approved by the S.O. No
pipes shall be rolled or dropped onto the trench. The pipe shall be laid true to alignment
as shown in the Drawings or as instructed by the S.O. Interior and exterior of each pipe at
the joint shall be thoroughly cleaned before the joint is made.
7.5
To prevent the entry of earth and other foreign matter into the pipes, the Contractor shall
provide and fix suitable stops for efficiently closing all open ends of pipes in the trench
while work is not actually being carried out at such open ends.
7.6
Socketed pipes shall be laid with the sockets laid against the direction of flow. At every
position of pipe joints, the foundation shall be recessed sufficiently to allow the workman
room to work right round the pipes.
7.7
Where drains are to be laid on concrete bed, haunched or encased in concrete

surrounds, these shall be as shown in the Drawings and as specified hereinafter.
7.8
The soil pipes shall be laid to the gradients as shown or inferred in the Drawings. Where
the gradients are not shown or cannot be inferred, the drain shall be laid to the following
gradients: Gradient
100
150
225
250
300
375
450
1 : 60
1 : 80
1 : 110
1 : 120
1 : 140
1 : 170
1 : 200
7.9
Where drain pipes are laid above ground, they shall be supported at intervals to the
details as shown in the Drawings or to the approval of the S.O.
7.10
All external underground soil drainage shall have a minimum cover of 450mm unless
otherwise shown in the Drawings.
Concrete Bed, Haunching and Surround

8.1
9.
Size diameter (mm)
Concrete bed, haunching and surround shall be of concrete (1:3:6-20mm aggregate).
Connections
9.1
The Contractor is to allow and provide for all bends, junctions, traps, gullies as shown in
the Drawings or where necessary. If a gully is used, it shall be of the inlet type, and shall
be set level on a concrete base, with a riser to finish 50mm above the surrounding
surface level, complete with concrete surrounds rendered on all sides and galvanized iron
grating. Bends turned up to receive various stacks shall be set on concrete bases to the
approval of the S.O. The bends at the foot of vertical stacks shall be of gentle radius
type.
F/3
Soil Drainage
9.2
10.
11.
All underground fittings shall be completely surrounded in concrete and the Contractor
shall allow for any additional excavation and jointing of pipes.
Manholes and Inspection Chambers

10.1
Manholes and inspection chambers shall be constructed to the sizes shown in the
Drawings. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all dimensions on the plan shall be the
inside measurement.
10.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, manholes and chambers shall be constructed
in brickwork in cement mortar (1:2) and the brickwork shall be of clay bricks and
constructed on (1:3:6-20mm) concrete foundation. The thicknesses and sizes shall be as
shown in the Drawings. Each manhole and chamber shall have channels and open
channel junctions of sizes stated in the Drawings. Concrete benching shall be to a
gradient of 1:6 and shall be of (1:3:6-20mm) concrete finished with 19mm steel trowelled
water proofed cement and sand (1:3) rendering. The internal sides of the manholes and
chambers shall be lined with 20mm thick water proof cement render (1:2). Externally, the
exposed concrete or brick surfaces shall be rendered with 12mm cement and sand
mortar (1:3) and terminated 150mm below the finished ground level. All internal angles
shall be rounded off. Manholes and chambers shall be provided with covers and unless
specified or as shown in the Drawings, covers shall be medium duty 450mm x 600mm
cast iron covers with air tight frames. Approved type wrought iron steps shall be built into
the brick wall of all manholes and chambers of depth 1m or more and they shall be
spaced not more than 300mm apart, projecting 100mm over the face of the wall.
Septic Tank, Filter Bed & Sewage Treatment System

11.1
Septic tank and filter bed shall be constructed as shown in the Drawings and to the
11.2
Sewage Treatment System

11.2.1 All sewage treatment system shall be manufactured only by government
approved sewage treatment system providers producing quality assured
products and services, to the approval of the S.O. The limit for sewage effluent at
the discharge point shall comply with Standard A of Environmental Quality Act as
in APPENDIX F/1
11.2.2 Prior to the installation of the sewage treatment system, the Contractor shall
submit to the S.O two (2) copies of design calculations, Drawings and method
statements certified by an independent Professional Engineer to be used in the
construction and installation of the sewage treatment system.
11.2.3 As soon as practicable after the completion of the installation of the sewage
treatment system and prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Practical
Completion, the Contractor shall submit the following documents to the S.O for
information and record:
i)
System Providers Guarantee against any defects or damages which

may arise during a period of five (5) years from the Date of Practical
Completion of Works due to any defect, fault or insufficiency in design,
material or workmanship or against any other failure which an
experienced Contractor may reasonably contemplate but shall not
include normal replacement and maintenance The terms of the
Guarantee shall be such as approved by the S.O.
F/4
Soil Drainage
ii)
12.
Connections with Public Sewer

12.1
13.
14.
Two (2) sets of as built Drawings of the sewage treatment system

signed by the system provider and certified by a Professional Engineer.
Connections to the public sewer, if any, shall be strictly carried out in accordance with
requirements of the Local Authority and to the approval of the S.O.
Testing for Soil Drainage Installation

13.1
The Contractor shall carry out tests to the soil drainage installation in accordance with the
method and requirements as described hereinafter. The Contractor shall give reasonable
notice in writing to the S.O. before such tests are carried out.
13.2
Testing of pipework shall be carried out before backfilling and wherever possible, such
testing shall be carried out from manhole to manhole. Short branch pipes connected to a
main sewer between manholes shall be tested as one system with the main sewer. Long
branches and manholes, shall be separately tested.
13.3
All pipework shall be subjected to water tests or any other test required by the Local
Authority and to the approval of the S.O.
13.4
For the water test, the pipe shall be subjected to an internal test pressure of 1.2metre
head of water above the crown of the pipe at the higher end but not more than 6 metres
at the lower end. Steeply graded pipe shall be tested in such a manner that the above
maximum heads is not exceeded.
13.5
The test shall be carried out by inserting suitably strutted plugs in the lower end of the
pipe and in connections if necessary and by filling the system with water. The test section
shall stand full of water for at least 15 minutes prior to testing and such testing shall be
applied for a testing period of not less than 30 minutes.
13.6
The loss of water over a period of 30 minutes shall be measured by adding water from a
measuring vessel at regular intervals of 10 minutes and noting the quantity required to
maintain the original water level. For the purpose of the test, the average quantity added
for pipes up to 460mm diameter shall not exceed 0.12 litres per hour per linear metre per
100mm of nominal internal diameter of pipe.
13.7
Any leakage, including excessive sweating which causes a drop in the test level, and the
defective part of the work shall be removed, made good and subsequently retested as
above.
13.8
The pipework may also be subjected to mirror test to ascertain the straightness of the
alignment between manholes as and when required by the S.O. The test shall be carried
out by inserting a light source at one end and viewing its image on a mirror placed at the
other end of the pipe.
Backfilling
14.1
After the pipes have been tested and approved, the trench shall be backfilled with
approved fill material, free from rock and other hard material, well compacted around the
pipes up to a level of at least 75mm above the top of the pipes. After this has been
approved, the remaining excavation shall be backfilled in 300mm layers, each layer being
well compacted.
F/5
Soil Drainage
APPENDIX F/1
PARAMETER LIMITS FOR SEWAGE AND INDUSTRIAL EFFLUENTS
PARAMETER
UNIT
(1)
(2)
A
(3)
B
(4)
STANDARD*
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
Temperature
pH Value
BOD5 at 20C
COD
Suspended Solids
C
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
40
6.0 9.0
20
50
50
40
5.5 9.0
50
100
100
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
Mercury
Cadmium
Chromium Hexvalent
Arsenic
Cyanide
Lead
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
0.005
0.01
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.10
0.05
0.02
0.05
0.10
0.10
0.5
(xii)
(xiii)
(xiv)
(xv)
(xvi)
Chromium, Trivalent
Copper
Manganese
Nickel
Tin
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
0.20
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
(xvii)
(xviii)
(xix)
Zinc
Boron
Iron(Fe)
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
4.0
5.0
(xx)
(xxi)
(xxii)
(xxiii)
Phenol
Free Chlorine
Sulphide
Oil and Grease
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
mg/l
0.001
1.0
0.5
Not detectable
1.0
2.0
0.50
10.0
A
B
: Discharge upstream of water supply sources

: Discharge downstream of water supply sources
Source: Environmental Quality (Sewage & Industrial Effluent) Regulations 1979
F/6
Soil Drainage
SECTION G - ROOFING WORKS

1.
2.
3.
4.
General
1.1
Unless otherwise stated, the pitch and laps for each type of roof covering shall be strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.2
Unless otherwise approved, all roof covering accessories such as eaves piece, hips,
ridges and valley pieces, shall be of the same material as the general covering.
Interlocking Concrete Tiles

2.1
Interlocking concrete tiles shall be of approved type and colour and shall conform to MS
797. The tiles shall be free from all defects.
2.2
Interlocking concrete tiles shall be laid on timber or steel battens approved for roofing at
spacings and tightly screwed as recommended by the manufacturer.
2.3
Tiling fillers consisting of 1:3 cement mortar as specified under SECTION E:

BRICKWORKS, shall be provided at the feet of the rafters.
2.4
Verges, ridges, hips and valley tiles shall be provided and laid to bond with the general
tiling in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Clay Tiles
3.1
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, clay tiles shall be of Marseilles pattern
conforming to BS 402. The tiles shall be 400mm to 425mm in length by 225mm to
263mm in width and shall be free from cracks, chips and warps.
3.2
Clay tiles shall be laid on timber or steel battens approved for roofing at spacings and
tightly screwed as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3
Ridge capping, hip and valley tiles shall be provided to match the general tiling and these
shall be bedded in matching 1:3 coloured cement mortar.
Corrugated Aluminium Roofing Sheets

4.1
5.
Concrete Flat Roofs

5.1
6.
Where aluminium roofing sheets are to be used, unless otherwise stated, they shall be of
the type, gauge and finish as shown in the Drawings and to be fixed strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
Concrete flat roofs shall be as specified under SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK.
Galvanized Steel Prepainted Steel Roofing and Wall Cladding

6.1
Where metal roof decks or wall claddings are to be used, unless otherwise stated, they
shall be of prepainted hot-dipped zinc-coated roof decking of standard nominal thickness,
width and length prior to corrugation and shall comply with JKR Standard No.2-95(BN)
JKR 20709-0347-95.
6.2
Surfaces of galvanized steel roof decking or wall cladding shall be uniformly produced by
coating and baking durable synthetic resin paint over either one or both surfaces of hotG/1
Roofing Work
dipped zinc-coated steel sheets and coils using cold rolled steel sheet base metal as
specified in JKR Standard No.2-95(BN) JKR 20709-0347-95. Where quality is guaranteed
for one side only, the reverse side shall be coloured beige.
7.
6.3
All fixing accessories shall be rust-resistant and of suitable design and construction as
recommended by the manufacturer for the roofing system and shall conform to every
aspect of JKR Standard No.2-95(BN)JKR 20709-0347-95 or other equivalent standards
as approved by the S.O.. All connectors such as fasteners and screws shall be of the self
drilling type either concealed or screwed fixing, complete with preassembled neoprene
bonded washers. For non self drilling fasteners, holes through the sheets must be drilled
and not punched.
6.4
Identification, storage and packaging of galvanized steel roof decking or wall cladding
shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instruction and comply with JKR
Standard requirements.
6.5
All roof decking sheets, capping, flashing etc. or wall cladding shall be new, clean,
regular, straight and true to shape with sharp defined profiles, free from cracks, chips,
bends and defects detrimental to practical use or from other surface imperfections.
6.6
On arrival at the Site, the sheets should be lifted from the transport carrier by a crane and
properly stacked clear of the ground, ready to be lifted up to the roof structure for laying.
Where sheets are to be manually lifted, care should be taken not to drag the sheets to
avoid scraping away the surface coating. The sheets shall arrive just-in-time for
installation. Where storage is necessary, stack heights shall be kept to a minimum and
the sheets shall be stacked in a sloping position. Sheets shall be stacked off a dry firm
ground, under cover by tarpaulin or polythene sheets but ventilated and away from
building operations. Should the stacked sheets become wet, they shall be immediately
dried to prevent staining and degradation of the surface coatings.
6.7
If it is necessary to cut sheets, care should be taken to ensure that sheets are cleanly and
squarely cut using preferably a power driven saw or electric nipper. If power tools are not
available, fine-toothed sheet metal saws or hand shears could be used.
6.8
The Contractor shall be responsible for the absolute watertightness of the roof and must
ensure that the method of installation, fixing and fastening decking sheets, caps,
flashings etc. including acoustical, insulation and expansion joints, whenever required
shall conform strictly to the manufacturers instructions.
6.9
The completed portions of the roof should be clear of all metallic particles such as blind
rivet shanks, screw, nuts, nails, etc. and dirty foot prints should be wiped off to avoid early
deterioration/corrosion and discolouration. Damages to the coating shall be repaired with
touch-up paint as recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the S.O.
Heat Insulation
7.1
General
Heat Insulation System shall comply with MS1020. Samples of the insulation material
shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval before they are used and subsequent delivery
shall be up to the standard of samples approved.
7.2
Reflective Insulation
7.2.1
Reflective insulation material may be used on its own with all types of roofs
except with metal decking roof. Where roof is of metal decking, the reflective
insulation material shall be laminated on rockwool or fibreglass quilt.
G/2
Roofing Work
7.2.2
7.3
7.4
The insulation material shall be installed strictly in accordance with the

manufacturers instruction. A uniform air space of 20mm between the roof
covering and the insulation material shall be provided to ensure the effectiveness
of the reflective surface. All punctures shall be effectively sealed with similar
reflective material to prevent air leakage and moisture transfer. The reflective
surface shall be free from any thin film of oil, plastic or lacquer coatings. All dust
and/or moisture, if any, shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installation. Printings
and/or trademarks shall be limited to a maximum of 5% of the total reflective
areas. The insulation shall be fitted closely around electrical outlet boxes,
plumbing etc., and taped securely to eliminate gaps or voids through which air or
water vapour might pass into the cooler space.
Fibreglass Quilt Insulation

7.3.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, fibreglass insulation quilts shall be

50mm thick with a nominal weight of 9.6kg per cubic metre. It shall have a
thermal conductivity of 0.032-0.035 Kcal /mh degree centigrade at normal
building temperature.
7.3.2
Where a fibreglass insulation quilt is to be used, it shall be laid over 13mm

chicken wire mesh unless otherwise specified.
Rockwool Insulation
7.4.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, rockwool insulation shall be 50mm

thick of sheet size 1200mm x 600mm with a nominal weight of 60kg/m, a
maximum service temperature of 350oC and thermal conductivity of 0.29 Kcal/mh
degree centigrade at 20oC.
7.4.2
Where rockwool is to be used, it shall be fixed in accordance with the

manufacturer's instruction and to the approval of the S.O.
G/3
Roofing Work
SECTION H - CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY WORKS
1.
2.
General
1.1
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings, the timber species used for the
Works shall be as stated hereinafter in the Schedule of Timber Species /Grouping and
Usage. The strength grouping for timber shall be in accordance with Malaysian Standard
MS 544-Table 2.3 as shown hereinafter in the Schedule of Strength Grouping.
1.2
All carpentry and joinery work shall include all necessary notching, halving, morticing and
tenoning, wedging, scarfing, dovetailing, sinking for heads of bolts and nuts and trimming
for opening.
1.3
All carpentry work shall be left with a sawn surface except where particularly described to
be wrot. All joinery shall be wrot and finished with sand paper as required and all sizes
stated are the finished sizes. Sizes for carpentry shall be within the tolerances stated in
clause 3.1 and sizes for joinery shall be within the tolerances stated in clause 3.2.
Treatment of timber
2.1
All timber except the heartwood of the naturally durable timbers as schedule hereinafter
and timber for formwork, scaffolding, and other temporary works shall be impregnated by
means of vacuum pressure processes in accordance with MS 360 using
copper/chrome/arsenic (CCA) wood preservatives conforming to MS 733 in the treatment
plant registered with the Malaysian Timber Industry Board. The minimum nett dry salt
retention for CCA shall be as follows:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
3.
Use
Minimum nett dry salt

retention for CCA
Interior and above the ground

Exterior and above the ground
Exterior and in contact with the
ground (other than foundation piles)
Foundation piles
5.6 kg/m3
8.0 kg/m3
12.0 kg/m3
16.0 kg/m3
2.2
The timber shall, as far as is practicable, be cut to its final dimensions before treatment,
and timber for joinery shall be wrot and fully worked and ready for framing before
treatment. Where crosscutting cannot be avoided or where further dressing is necessary,
all surfaces exposed by such work shall be liberally swabbed with the approved
preservatives.
2.3
The Contractor, when required by the S.O. shall produce a certificate from a preservative
treatment plant which certifies that timber required to be impregnated by means of
vacuum pressure processes has been impregnated and has achieved the necessary nett
dry salt retention. Notwithstanding the certificate, the S.O. reserves the right to carry out
independent tests to determine the nett dry salt retention and the result so obtained shall
be conclusive.
2.4
All sapwood shall be fully penetrated by the preservative and for heartwood, the depth of
penetration shall be 12mm for uses in clause 2.1 (i), (ii) and (iii).
Timber Grades and Size Tolerances

3.1
Unless otherwise specified, sawn timber for carpentry work shall be as stated hereunder:
(i)
Select Grade for roof truss

H/1
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
Standard Structural Grade - for structural work

Sound Grade - for General Market Specification (GMS) and strips
Serviceable Grade - for scantling.
Grading shall be carried in accordance with the Malaysian Grading Rules (MGR) by
timber graders registered with the Malaysian Timber Industry Board. Every timber
consignment shall be accompanied by the Grading Summary certified by the registered
timber grader. The sizes of sawn timber, except where otherwise specified, shall be
within the margin of permissible variations stated hereunder:
(i)
(ii)
For widths, depths or thicknesses not exceeding 75mm - within 3mm of the
specified size
For widths, depths or thicknesses exceeding 75mm - within 5mm of the specified
size.
The Contractor shall provide any necessary blocks, wedges or battens to compensate for
irregular surfaces caused by any variations in size of timbers hereby permitted.
3.2
Unless otherwise specified, sawn timber for joinery work shall be of Sound Grade
(General Market Specification (GMS) and Strips) and Serviceable Grade (Scantlings).
The finished size for joinery, unless otherwise specified, shall be within the margin of
permissible variation stated hereunder:
(i)
(ii)
4.
5.
For widths, within 3mm of the specified finished size.

For thicknesses, within 2mm of the specified finished size.
Moisture Content & Storage

4.1
On delivery to the site, all timber other than timber for foundation piles, formworks and
temporary works shall be properly open-stacked, under cover. Kiln dried timber shall be
properly wrapped and stored under cover if it is not used immediately. At the time of
installation, the moisture content of the timber for the various applications shall not
exceed that as specified in the Schedule of Moisture Content as shown hereafter.
4.2
Moisture content for foundation piles, formworks and temporary works is not critical for
these applications and therefore is not specified.
4.3
Moisture content of timber shall be determined in accordance with MS 837.
Prefabricated Timber Roof Truss System

5.1
All prefabricated components shall be manufactured only by reputable licensed truss

fabricators producing quality assured products and services, to the approval of the S.O.
The design, supply, delivery and erection of the trusses shall be in accordance with JKRs
Standard Specifications for Timber Roof Trusses No.JKR 20600-0020-99.
5.2
Prior to the fabrication of the roof truss system, the Contractor shall submit to the S.O.
two (2) copies of the Drawings, certified by an independent Professional Engineer as
required in clause 2 of the JKR Standard Specification for Timber Roof Trusses, to be
used in the construction and installation of the roof truss system.
5.3
As soon as practicable after the completion of the installation of the roof truss system and
prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall submit
the following documents to the S.O. for information and record:
i)
System Providers Guarantee against any defects or damages which may arise
during a period of five(5) years from the Date of Practical Completion of Works
due to any defect, fault or insufficiency in design, materials or workmanship or
H/2
against any other failure which an experienced Contractor may reasonably

contemplate but shall not include normal replacement and maintenance. The
terms of the Guarantee shall be such as shall be approved by the S.O.
6.
7.
Certification that the connector plates conform to the relevant standards and are
protected against corrosion, together with proof that such certification have been
verified by tests carried out by SIRIM for the current year or the previous year.
iii)
Certification that the correct timber grades were used in the fabrication of the
trusses and roof structure by including of a copy of the grading summary for the
timber used in the truss system, certified by a timber grader registered with the
Malaysian Timber Industry Board.
iv)
Certification that the timber used in the fabrication of the trusses and roof
structure has been adequately treated by including a copy of the treatment
certificate for preservation on the batch of timber that was treated in the
preservation process.
v)
Two (2) sets of as built Drawings of the roof truss system signed by the system
provider and certified by a Professional Engineer.
Plywoods
6.1
Unless otherwise specified, plywood used for interior and exterior purposes other than for
formworks and temporary works shall be manufactured with Moisture Resistant (MR)
bond and Weather and Boil Proof (WBP) bond respectively in compliance with MS 228.
Boards which are to be painted or varnished shall be properly sanded down and holes
and crevices filled with approved wood putty or filler.
6.2
Plywood intended for use as shuttering board shall be of the Weather and Boil Proof
(WBP) type.
6.3
Plywood intended for structural use, shall be of Malaysian Basic Structural Grade
(MBSG) rated or equivalent or better and shall comply with MS 544:Part4:Section1.
6.4
Plywood to be used in marine or severe wet conditions shall be in accordance with MS

544: Part 4: Section 2.
Blockboard
7.1
8.
ii)
Blockboard shall comply with MS 1123. Fixing of blockboards shall generally be in

accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Boards which are to be painted or
varnished shall be properly sanded down and holes and crevices filled with approved
wood putty or filler to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Chipboards
8.1
Chipboards shall be of the type manufactured from wood chips or shavings combined
with a thermosetting synthetic resin glue binder bonded and hot-pressed together and
complying with MS 1036 for medium density chipboard. The type and quality of boards
shall be as approved by the S.O. The boards shall be fixed as detailed in the Drawings
with a minimum edge distance for nailing of 12mm. Boards which are to be painted or
varnished shall be properly sanded down and holes and crevices filled with approved
wood putty or filler.
H/3
9.
10.
Fibre Building Boards

9.1
All fibre building boards namely, Hard Board, Medium Board and Medium Density Fibre
Board (MDF) shall comply with BS 1142. The type and quality of fibre building boards
shall be as approved by the S.O. Perforated hardboards shall be not less than 3.2mm
thick with maximum of 4.8mm perforation at 19mm centers unless otherwise stated in the
Drawings.
9.2
All fibre building boards shall be fixed strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
instruction. Unless otherwise detailed in the Drawings, the ceiling boards shall be butt
and v jointed.
Gypsum Plasterboards
10.1
11.
Composite Boards
11.1
12.
Woodwool slabs shall comply with MS 1036 and shall be of the type and quality as
approved by the S.O. Unless otherwise detailed in the Drawings, the slab shall be laid
with its length at right angles to support, fixed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instruction.
Wood Cement Boards

13.1
14.
The type and quality of composite boards shall be as approved by the S.O. and shall be
fixed strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Woodwool Slabs
12.1
13.
Gypsum plasterboards shall comply with BS 1230 Pt.1 and shall be of the type and
quality approved by the S.O. They shall be fixed/ installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers instruction.
Wood cement boards shall be manufactured from wood fibres chemically treated and
mixed with Portland Cement, compressed and cured in temperature controlled conditions.
These boards shall complying with the requirement of MS 934 or MS 544: Part 4: Section
3. In fixing, the board must be supported on all four edges and at intermediate positions
at centres not exceeding 610mm. Joints between boards shall occur on centers of
supports. Minimum edge distance shall be 20mm. Boards which are to be painted shall
be lightly sanded and any dust shall be removed from the surface with a piece of clean
coarse cloth. Any filling compounds used shall be alkali-resistant. Fixing of the board
shall be in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Structural Assemblies of Timber

14.1
The workmanship and method of assembly of structural timber shall generally be in

accordance with MS 544 and in particular, the following requirements.
14.1.1 The quality of the surface, as finished, shall be appropriate to the position and
use of the timber.
When grade or other necessary marks are removed, provisions shall be made for
remarking in accordance with Malaysian Grading Rules. Surfaces at any joint in
an assembly shall be such that the parts may be brought into contact over the
whole area of the joint before connectors are inserted or any pressure or restraint
H/4
from the fastening is applied. These surfaces shall have a good sawn or planed
finish.
Bearing surfaces of notches and other cuttings shall be true and smooth and in
appropriate relation to the other surfaces of the piece.
14.1.2 Notches other than at the ends of beams shall be U-shaped formed by parallel
cuts to previously drilled holes. The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the
width of the required notch.
14.1.3 Where splitting is likely to have a deleterious effect, end sealing is
recommended. For timbers known to split and check especially after installation,
the ends of the boards and scantlings shall be protected with a coating designed
to minimise end checking and checking and splitting. In severe cases where the
ends and sides of heavy joists of timbers are liable to excessive split and check
due to exposure to windward slanting sunlight, appropriate skirting or cover with
a thin timber board shall be necessary.
14.1.4 Where necessary to avoid splitting, nails shall be driven into pre-drilled holes or
diameter not greater than four-fifths of the diameter of the nails. Care shall be
taken to avoid placing nails in any end split.
14.1.5 Lead holes shall be used to ensure good workmanship in making screwed joints.
The diameter of the hole for the shank shall be equal to the diameter of the
shank, and for the threaded portion, the diameter of the hole shall not be greater
than seven-eights of the diameter of the root diameter of the screw thread
adjacent to the shank. Care shall be taken to avoid placing screws in any end
split.
14.1.6 Bolt holes shall be drilled to diameters as close as possible to the nominal
diameter of the bolt and in no case more than 2mm larger than the bolt diameter.
Care shall be taken to avoid placing a bolt in any end split. A minimum of one
complete thread shall protrude from the nut.
A washer shall be fitted under the head of each bolt and under each nut. The
minimum sizes of washers are as given in Part 6 of MS 544. Where joints using
split-rings are to be used, as shown in the Drawings, the members of the joints
shall be fitted together in their appropriate positions and clamped or spiked
together before drilling. Alternatively, drilling jigs or multiple head boring
machines may be used, or individual members may be marked out from the
setting-out or by use of prepared templates.
If either of the latter methods is employed, sample members (usually the first
ones produced) shall be carefully checked against the setting-out.
In all instances bolt hole positions shall be accurately determined by reference to
the point intersection of the center lines of the member. Great care is necessary
if the first set members marked out is to be used subsequently as drilling
templates. Greater accuracy can usually be obtained by the use of special
marking or drilling templates located by a pin at the intersection of the center
lines.
Bolts holes shall be drilled at right angles to the surface of the joint. The contact
surfaces of the members should be grooved to the appropriate dimensions as
given in Part 6 of MS 544.
Drilling and grooving may be done in a single operation; alternatively, if the hole
is predrilled the pilot of the grooving tool shall fit in the bolt hole, thus centering
the groove about the hole.
Care shall be taken to ensure that all chips and shavings are removed, and rings
H/5
shall be expanded before being placed in the grooves.

The joint shall be finally assembled and bolts inserted. Washers of the correct
dimension shall be placed under the head of the bolt and the nut, and the nut
tightened to hold the members together.
14.1.7 Recess for shear-plate connectors shall be accurately cut by means of a suitable
tool to be appropriate dimensions as given in Part 6 of MS 544.
14.1.8 Assembly of units shall be done on a level bed and in such a way as to avoid
damage to any of the members and so that the finished structural units conform
to detailed Drawings and specification supplied.
When assembly is to be performed on the site, one set of component parts shall
be fitted together and dismantled prior to dispatch to the site, in order to ensure
that the assembled structural units conform to the detailed Drawings and
Specifications. Twisted or damaged members shall be replaced before erection
on the site.
Before proceeding with bulk production, a complete assembly of one of each
framed truss or other structural unit shall be checked to prove the accuracy of the
templates, etc. A similar check shall be carried out from time to time to control
the wear and tear on templates and gauges.
Timber members and built-up units shall be marked in accordance with a
marking diagram.
15.
16.
Carpentry Works
15.1
All carpentry shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the Drawings and shall
be framed together and securely fixed to the satisfaction of the S.O. Timber framing shall
be properly braced and checked, halved, screwed or bolted together as required.
Longitudinal joints in plates, ridge, fascias, etc. shall be formed over supports. Those
timber members with lapped joints shall lap at least 150mm or twice the depth of the
timber whichever is the greater. The brads, nails, screws, spikes, plugs, bolts, framing
anchors and timber connectors shall be provided wherever necessary and as detailed.
Other than those detailed, no joints are permitted in structural work unless prior
permission is obtained from the S.O. No structural member shall be notched unless
instructed by the S.O.
15.2
For other carpentry works, timbers shall, as far as possible be in one piece between
continuing lengths. At corners, timbers shall be halved for materials of the same
thickness, and sufficiently lapped for materials of different thicknesses.
Joinery Works
16.1
All doors, windows, louvres, screens and the like shall be constructed as shown in the
Drawings. Frames shall be assembled at the commencement of the work and all
members shall be carefully morticed and tenoned together but no wedging, pinning or
gluing shall be done until the framing is prepared in readiness for immediate fixing. All
doors, windows, louvres, screens and the like shall be properly stored on site.
Immediately before fixing in its final position, joinery shall be wedged and pinned by
drawn hole pinning with 10mm diameter Strength Group 1 and 2 timber dowels pins. The
pins shall be left projecting until permission is given for flushing off. The methods of
framing and putting together of all Works shall be approved by the S.O. before being
executed. Any portions that warp, twist or develop any other defects shall be replaced
before wedging up. All framed work shall be pinned before being framed together.
H/6
17.
18.
Flooring
17.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, timber floors shall be constructed using 100mm
x 38mm wrot, tongued and grooved boardings, well cramped up and secret nailed to
each joist or batten with 62mm wire nails. Floor boardings shall be in long lengths with
splayed heading joints and no two adjacent joints shall occur over the same joist. On
completion, the flooring shall be planed, sanded and all gaps sealed with an approved
sealer. The floor shall then be cleaned off and unless otherwise specified, it shall be
finished with three coats of approved polyurethane paint applied strictly in accordance
17.2
Wrot timber skirtings shall be provided where shown and as detailed in Drawings.
Skirtings shall be in long lengths with splayed heading joints and with mitres, returns and
ends neatly cut and fitted and fixed to grounds.
Ceilings
18.1
19.
20.
Partitions
19.1
Partitions, screens and vent panels, shall be constructed as detailed in the Drawings.
Where shown, galvanised welded wire mesh or expanded metal of the required sizes and
patterns shall be fixed to vent panels and window openings. The mesh shall be secured
in position using rebated and mitred timber battens and screws.
19.2
Where proprietary partitions are used, they shall be constructed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Fascia and Barge Boards

20.1
21.
Chipboard for ceilings shall be fixed to the frames with butt `V' joint using nails or screws
as described hereinbefore. Asbestos-free cement flat sheets for ceiling shall be 5mm
thick fixed to frames using mitred timber cover battens and brass screws. Ceiling panels
shall be set out symmetrically from the centre line of the ceiling.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, fascia and barge boards shall be 25mm thick
wrot timber and supplied in long lengths. The boards shall be fixed in whole lengths and
where joints are necessary, they shall be scarfed jointed and the joints shall occur only
over the ends of roof framing members and mitred corners. Boards, 250mm wide and
less shall be in one width and those deeper shall be formed by multiple of boards jointed
together by tongue and groove and `V' joint.
Doors
21.1
All fire doors to be provided shall be of the appropriate Fire Resistance Period (FRP) in
accordance with the Ninth Schedule of the Uniform Building By-Laws.
21.2
All fire doors including frames shall be constructed to a specification of the relevant FRP
in accordance with MS1073 Pt.1 and shall be tested by a laboratory, approved and
certified by Jabatan Bomba dan Penyelamat and have obtained a Product Certification
Scheme from an accredited certification body.
21.3
All double leaf fire doors with rebated meeting stiles shall be provided with coordinating
device so as to fit fully within the door openings with a gap of not more than 3mm
between the frame and the edge of the door when closed.
H/7
21.4
21.5
22.
Where shown in the Drawings, vision panel of size not exceeding 25mm x 25mm per leaf
shall be incorporated in the Fire Rated Door.
Flush doors shall generally comply with MS 1506 with plywood facing and strength group
1 and strength group 2 timber lipping, mitred around all edges. The plywood and strength
group 1-4 timber shall comply in all respects with the Specifications mentioned
hereinbefore.
PVC Toilet Doors

PVC toilet doors shall be of full single panel of flush type. It shall be 100% waterproof, strong
impact resistance and not be discoloured easily. Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the
door shall be 38mm thick. PVC door shall be delivered to Site complete with ironmongery as listed
in SCHEDULE OF IRONMONGERY.
23.
Built-in Fittings
23.1
24.
Staircase and Balustrades

24.1
25.
Staircases and balustrades shall be constructed as detailed in the Drawings.
External Boarding
25.1
26.
Built-in fittings shall be constructed and properly framed in wrot timber as detailed in the
Drawings. Where fittings are not to be painted, unless otherwise specified, they shall be
stained and varnished as hereinafter described under SECTION M: PAINTING WORK.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all external boarding shall be formed with
150mm x 19mm horizontal, vertical or diagonal boarding in wrot pressure-treated timber
in long lengths and to the sectional profile as detailed in the Drawings. Unless otherwise
shown, lapping for plain weather boarding shall be 38mm. Boardings shall be secured to
the frames using 75mm galvanised steel nails and in the case of plain weather boarding,
nails shall not be driven through the lapped portions. The exposed bottom ends of all
external vertical boarding shall be splayed inward at an angle of 30 degrees and treated
with preservatives.
Ironmongery
26.1
Unless otherwise shown and/or scheduled in the Drawings, the Contractor shall supply
and fix all ironmongery as listed in the Schedule of Ironmongery attached hereinafter,
complete with fixing screws of the same material and finish.
26.2
Proper sockets shall be provided for all bolts to fix flush in floors, cills and door and
window frames. Each lock shall be provided with two keys and no two locks shall have
identical keys, unless specifically required by the S.O.
H/8
SCHEDULE OF STRENGTH GROUPING

(Ref.cl.1.1)
Schedule Of Timber Species In Accordance With Strength Grouping
(MS 544- Table 2.3)
S.G 1
S.G 2
A) Naturally Durable
S.G 3
S.G 4
S.G 5
Balau
Belian
Bekak
Giam
Jati
Bitis
Mata Ulat
Delek
Malabera
Tembusu
Cengal
Kekatong
Keranji
Merbau
Penaga
B) Requiring Treatment
S.G 6
S.G 7
Resak
Dedaru
Agoho
Berangan
Alan Bunga
Bayur
Ara
Kempas
Balau Merah
Dedali
Babai
Damar Minyak
Batai
Merbatu
Kelat
Derum
Balik Angin Bopeng
Durian
Geronggang
Mertas
Kembang Semangkuk
Kapur
Bintangor
Jelutung
Laran
Kulim
Kasai
Brazil Nut
Jenitri
Pelajau
Pauh Kijang
Keruntum
Gerutu
Jongkong
Pulai
Penyau
Mempening
Kundur
Kasah
Sesenduk
Perah
Meransi
Kedondong
Macang
Terentang
Petaling
Meranti Bakau
Keledang
Medang
Ranggu
Merawan
Keruing
Melantai/ Kawang
Ru
Merpauh
Ketapang
Meranti Merah Muda
Surian Batu
Nyalin
Kungkur
Meranti kuning
Tualang
Perupuk
Melunak
Mersawa
Punah
Mempisang
Sengkurat
Rengas
Mengkulang
Terap
Simpoh
Meranti Merah Tua

Meranti Putih
Nyatuh
Penarahan
Petai
Ramin
Kayu Getah
Sengkuang
Sepetir
Tetebu
Notes :
1. For naturally durable timbers, sapwood should be excluded. If sapwood is included, preservative treatment is necessary.
(Source: MS 360:1986)
2. For timber requiring treatment, they should be amenable to preservative treatment.
H/9
SCHEDULE OF TIMBER SPECIES / GROUPING AND USAGE ( Ref.cl.1.1 )
AP P L I C AT I O N
Foundation Piles
STRENGTH GROUP
SG 1 Balau, Bitis, Chengal
SG 2 Belian, Mata ulat, Kempas, Merbatu, Mertas
SG 3 Keranji, Kulim, Pauh kijang, Petaling
SG 4 Giam, Merbau, Resak, Merpauh, Punah, Simpoh
SG 5 Keruing, Mengkulang
Structural Components
Columns, beams, bearer, studs, joists, ties and

struts
SG 1, SG 2, SG 3 and SG 4
SG 1, SG 2, SG 3, SG 4 and SG 5
Formwork
Roofing
Rafters, ties, struts, purlins and bracing
battens
Staircase
stringers, treads, trimmer beam and handrail
balustrades
SG 1, SG 2, SG 3, SG 4, SG 5 and SG 6
Flooring
floor boarding and parquetry
skirtings
Walling
wall, partition framing and external wall

boardings
internal wall boardings
SG 1, SG 2, SG 3, SG 4, SG 5, SG 6 and SG 7
fascia boards
Ceiling Frames
cover battens to joints of ceiling sheets
ceiling strips and soffit battens
Door & Window Frames
door, window and vent frames including their

stops and grounds
door leaves, window and vent sashes
Furniture
built in fittings, furniture generally and workshop

furniture
science laboratory tops
Beading fillets and edgings generally
H/10
SCHEDULE OF MOISTURE CONTENTS (M.C) OF TIMBER FOR VARIOUS POSITIONS IN BUILDING

(MS 544) (Ref. Cl. 4.1)
APPLICATION
Structural Components
columns, beams, bearer, studs,

joists, ties and struts
MAXIMUM M.C. AT TIME

OF INSTALLATION FOR
NON AIR-CONDITIONED
APPLICATION
30%
(Thickness >100mm)
25%
(Thickness <100mm)
Not applicable
25%
Not applicable
25%
Not applicable
19%
12%
19%
12%
19%
12%
19%
12%
19%
12%
Roofing
rafters, ties, struts, purlins and bracing
battens
Staircase
stringers, treads, trimmer beam and

handrail
balustrades
Flooring
floor boarding and parquetry
MAXIMUM M.C. AT TIME OF

INSTALLATION FOR AIRCONDITIONED APPLICATION
(KILN-DRIED TIMBER)
skirtings
Walling
wall, partition framing
Not applicable
external wall boardings
19%
Not applicable
internal wall boardings
19%
12%
fascia boards
19%
Not applicable
25%
Not applicable
19%
12%
19%
12%
19%
12%
19%
12%
Ceiling Frames
cover battens to joints of ceiling sheets
ceiling strips and soffit battens
Door & Window Frames
door, window and vent frames

including their stops and grounds
door leaves, window and vent sashes
Furniture
built in fittings, furniture generally
workshop furniture
19%
12%
science laboratory tops
19%
12%
19%
12%
Beading fillets and edgings generally
H/11
SCHEDULE OF IRONMONGERY
(Ref. Cl. 24.1)
No
1.
Type of Doors, Windows etc.
Ironmongery for each type of doors, windows etc.
Single Leaf Door

1.1 Plywood Flush Door
a.
b.
c.
1.2 Timber Panelled Door
a.
b.
c.
2.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2 Timber Panelled Door
a.
b.
c.
d.
PVC Door To Toilet/Bathroom
Cubicles
a.
b.
c.
4.
3 nos. of 100mm x 69mm stainless steel butt hinges with nylon

ring.
1 no.medium duty cylindrical lockset, 5 pin tumbler with knob and
rose of stainless steel with hairline finish complete with 2 nos.
nickle-plated brass keys of different serial number for each
building.
1 no. rubber door stopper.
Double Leaf Door

2.1 Plywood Flush Door
3.
3 nos.of 100mm x 69mm galvanised steel butt hinges with nylon

ring.
1 no.upright 3 lever mortice lockset with satin chrome lever
handle furniture of approved manufacture with 2 nos chrome
plated keys of different serial number for each building.
6 nos. of 100mm x 69mm galvanised steel butt hinges with nylon

rings.
1 no. upright 3 lever rebated mortice lockset with satin chrome
lever handle furniture of approved manufacture with 2 nos.
chrome plated keys of different serial number for each building.
1 set of 150mm anodised aluminium barrel and 250mm anodised
aluminium bolt.
2 nos. rubber door stopper.
6 nos. of 100mm x 69mm stainless steel butt hinges with nylon
rings.
1 no.medium duty cylindrical lockset, 5 pin tumbler with knob and
rose of stainless steel with hairline finish complete with 2 nos.
nickle-plated brass keys of different serial number for each
building.
1 set of 150mm anodised aluminium barrel and 250mm anodised
aluminium bolt
3 Nos. 100mm x 69mm galvanised steel butt hinges with nylon
ring.
(i) For residential Quarters
1 no. cylindrical mortice bathroom lockset complete with
locking device operated by turn from inside and knob handle
furniture in satin chrome finish.
(ii) For non-residential buildings
1 no. indicating bolt
Anodised aluminium hook with rubber buffer.
Single Leaf Fire Rated Door

4.1
For standard size of

800mm x 2100mm hr &
1 hr fire rated door
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3 nos of 125mm x 87mm x 2mm thick heavy duty stainless steel

butt hinges.
1 no upright 3 lever mortice lockset with satin chrome lever
handle furniture of approved manufacture with 2 nos. Chrome
plated keys of different serial no. for each building.
1 no rubber door stop.
1 no hydraulic floor springs for double swing door.
1 no automatic door closer of hydraulically spring operated type
(for swing doors) or of wire rope and weight type (for sliding
doors).
H/12
SCHEDULE OF IRONMONGERY (cont.)
No
5.
Type of Doors, Windows etc
4.2

900mm x 2100mm hr &
1 hr fire rated door
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
As per item 4.1a

As per item 4.1b
As per item 4.1c
As per item 4.1d
As per item 4.1e
4.3

900mm x 2100mm 2 hr
fire rated door
a.
4 nos. of 125mm x 87mm x 2mm thick heavy duty stainless

steel butt hinges.
As per item 4.1b
As per item 4.1c
As per item 4.1d
As per item 4.1e
2 nos. of ball bearings
1 no of heavy duty stainless steel latch with 75mm long
backset
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Double Leaf Fire Rated Door

5.1

1200mm x 2100mm
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.2

1800mm x 2100mm
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
5.3

2400mm x 2100mm
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
6.
Single Leaf Fire Escape Door
a.
b.
7.
Double Leaf Fire Escape Door
a.
b.

steel butt hinges.
1 no. 3 lever rebated mortice lockset with satin chrome lever
handle furniture of approved manufacture with 2 nos. chrome
plated keys of different serial number for each building.
1 no. 150mm stainless steel barrel bolt.
1 no. 200mm ditto.
2 nos. rubber door stop
2 nos. hydraulic floor springs for double swing door.
2 nos. automatic door closer of the hydraulically spring
operated type (for swing doors) or of wire rope and weight type
(for sliding doors).
steel butt hinges.
As per item 5.1b
As per item 5.1c
As per item 5.1d
As per item 5.1e
As per item 5.1f
As per item 5.1g
steel butt hinges.
As per item 5.1b
As per item 5.1c
As per item 5.1d
As per item 5.1e
As per item 5.1f
As per item 5.1g
3 nos. of 125mm x 87mm x2mm thick heavy duty stainless
steel butt hinges.
1 complete set of approved make fire rated panic bolts.
steel butt hinges.
1 complete set of approved make fire rated panic bolts.
H/13
SCHEDULE OF IRONMONGERY (cont.)
No.
Type of Doors, Windows etc
8.
Kitchen Cabinet Door/ Workbench
a.
b.
c.
d.
Galvanised steel continuous piano butt hinges.

1 no 100mm aluminium D handle.
1 no.bales catch.
1 no galvanised steel cupboard lock in satin chrome finish.
9.
Wardrobe
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3 nos. of 75mm brass butt hinges (per door leaf).

2 nos.100mm anodised aluminium barrel bolt (for double
leaf doors)
1 no 100mm aluminium D handle.
Chromium plated steel clothes hanger rail.
Steel cylinder cupboard lock in satin chrome finish.
10.
Drawer
a.
b.
1 no. steel cylinder drawer lock in satin chrome finish.

1 no.100mm aluminium D handle.
11.
Sliding and Folding Door/ Partition
a.
Top or bottom running set sliding and folding door gear,

complete with tracks, channel, brackets, roller guides, hangers
and all necessary butt hinges, flush bolts and flush door pulls,
etc. as recommended by the manufacturer.
1 no.upright 3 lever rebated mortice lockset for sliding and
folding door with satin chrome lever handle furniture with 2 nos.
keys of different serial number for each building.
b.
12.
Straight Sliding Door
a.
b.
13.
Timber Casement Window
a.
b.
14.
Top Hung Casement Timber

Window.
a.
b.
15.
Top Hung Vent/Sashes
a.
b.
Top or bottom running set straight sliding door gear complete

with tracks, brackets, hangers, roller guides, channels, door
stops, flush brass bolts, brass flush pull etc. as recommended
by the manufacturer.
1 no. upright 3 lever mortice lockset with satin chrome finish for
straight sliding door with 2 nos. keys of different serial number
for each building.
2 nos. 400mm long approved electro-galvanised steel friction
hinges.
1 no. approved brass with satin chrome finish combination
handle and fastener.
hinges.
1 no. approved brass with satin chrome finish automatic locking
fastener.
hinges.
1 no. approved brass with satin chrome finish automatic locking
fastener
H/14
SECTION I STRUCTURAL STEEL AND METAL WORKS

1.
General
All materials shall conform to the relevant Malaysian or British Standards. Other equivalent standard
may be accepted with the approval of the S.O.
2.
Hot Rolled Structural Steel Works

2.1
All hot rolled structural steelwork design, materials and workmanship shall comply with the
JKR Standard Specification For Structural Steelwork No. 20600-0019-99 and shall be in
accordance with the latest version of BS 5950.
2.2
Materials
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O, all structural steel components shall conform to the
standard as shown in Table A.
The Contractor may with the approval of the S.O propose other equivalent structural steel
components at no extra cost. The Contractor shall submit with his proposal his design
calculations, sketches, detailings and Specifications which shall be certified by a Professional
Engineer. In addition, the Contractor shall submit documents and details as listed in Clause
2.3 hereof, if required by the S.O.
Proprietary products may only be used with the approval of the S.O and shall be installed in
accordance with the manufacturers specification and recommendation.
TABLE A - MATERIAL & DIMENSION STANDARDS
Form
Material Quality
Dimension
H - Sections
Dimension
Tolerances
JIS G3192
JIS G3192
JIS G3192
JIS G3192
Channels
JIS G3192
JIS G3192
Angles
JIS G3192
JIS G3192
Plates & Flats
Not Applicable
BS EN 10029
Joists
BS EN 10025
Structural Hollow Sections Hot Finished
BS EN 10210-1
BS 4848:Pt.2
BS 4848:Part 2
Hollow Sections Cold Formed
BS 6363
BS 6363
BS 6363
Galvanised Open Sections & Strips
BS EN 10147
Not Applicable
BS 2989
Notes: 1 Material quality requirements for Fine Grain Steels are given in EN 10113
Material quality requirements for Weather Resistant Grades are given in EN10155
2 BS EN 10210 -1 contains material quality requirements for non alloy and fine grain steels
3 Tolerances for plates cut from wide strip produced on continuous mill are given in BS EN 10051
I/1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the equivalent steel grades are as in Table B
below:
TABLE B - STEEL GRADE

BS 5950: Part 1
BS 4360
BS ENs
Design Grade 43
43
S275
Design Grade 50
50
S355
All materials testing and verification shall comply with BS 4360 and not limited to the
requirements as specified in the JKR Standard Specification for Structural Steelwork.
The manufacturers mill certificates shall be produced to the S.O before any structural steel
can be accepted. All test certificates shall contain embossed seal and/or watermarked logo of
the manufacturer.
2.3
Contractors Design
Unless connections and other details are provided or where the Contractor is required to
design any structural member/ truss or temporary support system, the Contractor shall
engage an approved structural steelwork fabricator to design such details and prepare
fabrication Drawings in accordance with Section 2.4 hereof.
Prior to fabrication, the Contractor shall submit the following documents and details for the
S.Os approval:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.4
The design plan defining the principal design activities in a logical sequence, type of
design output, target dates to meet the programmed requirements and allocation of
design responsibilities.
Design documentation, production and checking procedures (verification).
Fabricators certification that the software used has been validated.
Method Statement for handling and transportation requirements for unusually shaped
or large components to ensure stability during movement.
A report of the design review before the issuance of detailed Drawings.
Drawings
The Contractor shall prepare Drawings with details in accordance with BS 5950 or other
relevant standards. The Drawings shall be certified by a Professional Engineer. He shall also
prepare Drawings and arrangements of temporary steelworks for the different stages of
construction in compliance with the requirements specified in the JKR Standard Specification
for Structural Steelwork.
2.5
Workmanship
The workmanship for all aspects of fabrication and erection shall comply with the JKR
Standard Specification for Structural Steelwork. All permissible deviations and tolerances for
accuracy of erection work shall strictly adhere to the values specified therein.
All welding shall be of metal arc process in accordance with BS 5135 and BS 4570.
I/2
All welding works shall be executed by qualified welders with valid certificate issued by
approved Authorities such as Pusat Latihan Pengajar & Kemahiran Lanjutan (CIAST) and
Malaysian Oxygen Bhd. MOX).
Visual inspection of welds shall be carried out by a suitably qualified welding supervisor or
welder who can provide evidence of having been trained and competent in visual inspection
of the relevant types of welds.
Prior to erection work, the Contractor shall submit for the S.Os approval, the Method
Statement for erection which among others shall include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Pre- erection survey and formal acceptance of foundations.

Phased component delivery.
Safety and environmental controls.
Operative certification.
Plant and equipment certification.
Inspection of each phase of construction.
Whenever bolts and nuts are tightened by part turn method as in accordance with BS 4604
part 1, each nut shall be tightened, preferably with power operated wrench, by the amount
given in Table C below:
TABLE C - ROTATION OF BOLT AND NUT
Nominal size & thread
dia.of bolt
Grip of bolt for rotation of the nut (relative to the bolt shank)
Not less than turn
Not less than turn
M 16
M 20
M 22
Up to 115 mm
Up to 115 mm
Up to 115 mm
Over 115 to 225 mm

Over 115 to 275 mm
M 24
M 27
M 30
M 36
Up to 160 mm
Up to 160 mm
Up to 160 mm
Up to 160 mm
Over 160
Over 160
Over 160
Over 160
to 350 mm
to 350 mm
to 350 mm
to 350 mm
If after final tightening, a bolt or nut is slackened off for any reason, the bolt, nut and washer
or washers shall be discarded and not re-used.
Whenever bolts and nuts are tightened by the torque control method, in accordance with
BS 4604 part 1, such tightening shall be carried out with a calibrated tightening device, either
a power-operated or a hand-operated torque wrench. The wrench shall be calibrated
regularly at least once per shift or more frequently as instructed by the S.O. The equipment
shall be re-calibrated if there is a change in the diameter of bolt used or a change in grip
length exceeding one fifth of that used for calibration.
For inspection purposes, a sample of at least 32 bolts, shall be selected at random from a
batch such as that comprised in the daily work of one gang. If the torque for any bolt is less
than that found in the calibration required to induce the correct shank tension, every bolt in
the batch shall then be examined and tightened further.
Bolts and nuts found to be in any way defective shall be discarded and replaced by new
ones.
I/3
2.6
Surface Preparation And Protective Treatment

All procedures and precautions mentioned in JKR Standard Structural Steelwork
Specification Section 10 shall be adhered to strictly for the cleaning and coating process of
structural elements.
The Contractor shall submit the Method Statement for the surface preparation and protective
treatment to the S.O for his approval before commencement of fabrication works, giving
details of the protective treatment specification and shall indicate quality control and
inspection to ensure conformity with the JKR Standard Specification for Structural Steelwork.
2.7
Welding Inspection And Testing By Independent Authority

The Contractor shall appoint an independent Inspection Authority to endorse the welders
certification and also to approve the welding procedures and test procedures for welding
works.
Welding inspection and testing shall be carried out by an independent Welding Inspector who
holds a valid certificate of competence from a nationally recognised body such as SIRIM and
CIDB or other established recognised private organisation. Not withstanding such inspection
by the independent Welding Inspector, the S.O may at his absolute discretion carry out any
test to verify the integrity of the weld.
2.8
Fire Protection
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all fire protection materials and systems, shall show
evidence that they have been subjected to the fire resistance test in accordance with BS 476
and shall be endorsed by the local Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat Malaysia. The
Contractor shall provide the manufacturers Data Sheet of the material proposed which shall
contain important information such as the characteristic and application techniques of the
proposed material as formatted in Appendix I/1.
The materials proposed shall be suitable and appropriate for the protection of the structural
steel element, wherever they are located whether internally or externally.
The materials supplied shall be free from defect and of equivalent quality to that supplied for
testing and approval purposes. The materials shall be designed specifically for the fire
protection of structural elements and shall be suitable for this purpose when applied/installed
in accordance with the manufacturers comprehensive instructions. The materials shall be
handled and stored as directed by the manufacturer and shall be applied/installed by a
recognised trained applicator/installer.
All fire protection works in progress shall be regularly monitored in order to eliminate the risk
of defective workmanship or failures.
The use of intumescent coating systems to metallic substrates for providing fire resistance
shall comprise a primer, an intumescent coating, a top sealer coat and/or a decorative coat.
The minimum thickness of any sprayed mineral coating type of fire protection materials
applied shall be as in Table D below:
I/4
TABLE D - MINIMUM SPRAY THICKNESS

Hp / A
Thickness in mm to provide fire resistance of : hour
1 hour
1 hour
2 hour
3 hour
4 hour
150
10
12
25
36
57
79
170
10
13
26
38
60
83
190
10
13
27
40
63
87
210
10
14
28
41
65
90
Note : Hp - Perimeter of section exposed to fire (m)

A - Cross sectional area of the steel member (m)
However, for any type of fire protection applied, the minimum thickness of protection to be
applied and the minimum dry film thickness required shall strictly adhere to the requirement
stated in the Data Sheet of the relevant proposed material.
2.9
Records
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O, document and records which shall include but not
limited to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.10
Document register
Drawings and design calculations and documentation registers.
Certificates for materials and consumables.
Calibration of equipment.
Weld procedures, concessions etc.
Inspection and test reports.
Delivery schedules and method statements.
Surveys and final inspection results.
Completion of erection and hand over certification.
Quality Assurance
The Contractor shall submit a Quality Assurance program as specified in the JKR Standard
Specification for Structural Steelwork.
3.
Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Roof Trusses

3.1
All prefabricated cold formed structural steel roof truss components shall be manufactured
and assembled only by truss fabricators accredited by system provider. The design, supply,
delivery and erection of the trusses shall be in accordance with JKRs Standard
Specifications for Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Roof Trusses No.JKR 20600-0022-2001.
3.2
Prior to any work on a roof structure, the Contractor shall seek the S.Os approval by filling in
the application form to use the intended proprietary prefabricated cold formed steel roof truss
system for the roofing works. The roof truss system shall be selected from the most current
I/5
list of approved Cold Formed Roof Truss System Providers issued by Pengarah Cawangan
Pakar dan Kejuruteraan Awam, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia.
4.
3.3
The Contractor shall enclose with his application all other documentation as mentioned in the
JKR Standard Specifications for Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Roof Trusses No.JKR
20600-0022-2001.
3.4
The S.O shall have the absolute discretion to reject any system provider or their accredited
truss fabricators regardless of their status in the approved list, if in the opinion the S.O their
track record has been unsatisfactory.
3.5
Notwithstanding the requirement above, the Contractor shall be held responsible to supervise
the supply, fabrication and installation work carried out by the system provider or their
accredited fabricator. In addition the Contractor shall ensure that all works are carried out with
due regards to public safety.
3.6
As soon as practicable after the completion of the installation of the roof truss system and
prior to the issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion, the Contractor shall submit to
the S.O all relevant documents as mentioned in the JKR Standard Specifications for
Prefabricated Cold Formed Steel Roof Trusses No.JKR 20600-0022-2001 for information and
record.
Metal Frames For Doors And Windows

4.1
4.2
Steel Frames
4.1.1
The Contractor shall supply, assemble and fix steel frames for doors and windows as
shown in the Drawings. The steel frames shall comply with BS 6510, and shall be
from an approved source and shop-primed with two coats of red lead oxide or other
approved rust resisting primer.
4.1.2
The steel frames shall be manufactured from sections rolled from good commercial
grade galvanised mild steel in single sections, mechanically straightened with all
corners pre-cut with a 45 degrees mitre joint giving a snug and accurate fit, fully
electrically welded, and carefully ground and cleaned, or shall be mechanically
jointed by an approved method.
4.1.3
All screws, nuts, bolts and washers shall be of stainless steel.
4.1.4
Steel frames shall be painted as specified in SECTION M - PAINTING WORK.
Aluminium Frames
4.2.1
The Contractor shall supply, assemble and fix aluminium frames for doors and
windows as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, all aluminium
frames shall be fabricated from sections extruded from aluminium alloy conforming to
MS 832.
4.2.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or described in the Bills of Quantities,

aluminium surfaces shall be natural anodised finish, free from alloy defects, dye
marks, scratches and other surface blemishes in accordance with BS 3987 with an
anodic coating of 25 microns average thickness.
4.2.3
All coloured anodised finish to aluminium exposed surfaces shall be subject to the
I/6
S.O.s approval.
4.3
4.4
4.2.4
All aluminium extrusion or sheet exposed surfaces after anodising and after
colouring, if required by the S.O., shall be sealed, and the adequacy of the sealing
shall be determined by method specified in BS 1615.
4.2.5
All screws, nuts, bolts, rivets, washers and other fastenings shall be of stainless steel
or aluminium.
4.2.6
Ancillary members such as sills, couplings and the like formed from sheet materials,
shall be fabricated from designated aluminium alloys complying with BS 1470 or
equivalent.
Frames For Adjustable Louvre Windows

4.3.1
The Contractor shall supply, assemble and fix frames for adjustable louvre windows
as shown in the Drawings.
4.3.2
Unless otherwise specified, the frames shall be of approved manufacture.The frames

shall be supplied complete with weather seal and non-ferrous bearings, spring clips,
locking device and weather stripping with all necessary spacing pieces. The frames,
coupling mullions and spacer brackets shall be minimum 1.219 mm thick (18 SWG)
or otherwise specified cold-rolled steel strip galvanised with hot-dipped process. The
clips to receive the louvres shall be minimum 0.711 mm thick (22 SWG) rolled steel
strip galvanised with hot dipped process.
4.3.3
The operating rods shall be 2.132 mm thick (14 SWG). The handle and lock shall be
2.642 mm thick (12 SWG) steel.
4.3.4
Bolts, nuts and screws shall be of stainless steel.
4.3.5
Unless otherwise specified, the finish shall be of aluminium lacquer.
Accessories
Each steel or aluminium frame for doors and windows shall be supplied complete with:-
4.5
i.
Sufficient number of built-in stainless steel hinges as per Schedule of Ironmongery

under SECTION H - CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY WORKS;
ii.
Two (2) rubber buffers per closing jamb, to reduce noise and vibration;
iii.
Welded mortar guard;
iv.
Adjustable stainless steel striker plate with a gently curved lead-in edge;
v.
Removable spreader bars, to ensure a perfect square during transportation and

installation; and
vi.
Minimum of eight (8) pieces of 4mm brick ties, to ensure a tight permanent fit.
Samples
Samples of steel or aluminium sections for the doors and windows frames, together with
completed shop Drawings of all works shall be submitted for the S.Os approval prior to the
I/7
commencement of any work.

4.6
5.
Installation
4.6.1
Unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings, fixing and installation of all
types of frames shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions
and procedures.
4.6.2
Frames for adjustable louvre windows to be fixed to brick or concrete jambs shall be
screwed to patent wall plugs in accordance with the manufacturers instructions;
otherwise the frame shall be screwed to timber surround.
Ceiling Suspension System

5.1
5.2
5.3
General
5.1.1
Where shown in the Drawings, ceiling suspension system shall consist of metal
members comprising main tees, cross tees, wall angles and hanger wires
complete with hanger jackets and clips, designed to support the suspended ceiling,
light fixtures and/or air diffusers with a maximum deflection of 1/360 span.
5.1.2
Unless otherwise specified, all exposed members of the suspension system shall be
of colour to match that of ceiling tiles, to the approval of the S.O.
Design Considerations
5.2.1
The width of all main tees and cross tees with double-web design shall be 24mm.
Wall angles shall be of the same width as the exposed tees.
5.2.2
Hanger wires shall be galvanised carbon steel, soft tempered, pre-stretched with
a yield stress load of at least three (3) times the design load, but in any case shall
not be less than 12 gauge (12.6 mm) diameter. Thicker gauge wire shall be used for
heavier load carrying installation or in situations where the hanger wires spacing
exceeds 1200mm centre to centre.
5.2.3
The system shall be designed with double locking system to ensure safety, as well
as to allow easy and speedy installation.
5.2.4
Stainless steel wire or nickle-copper alloy wire shall be used in corrosive

environment.
5.2.5
Supplementary bracing or substantial hanger devices such as metal straps,

rods, or structural angles shall be installed for installations subject to wind uplift.
Installation
5.3.1
Installation shall not be carried out until all wet work such as concreting, laying of
floor finish, plastering or painting has been completed and thoroughly dried.
5.3.2
All suspension systems shall be installed strictly in accordance with the

manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
I/8
5.4
Warranty
5.4.1
6.
Collapsible Gates, Roller Shutters etc.

6.1
7.
The Contractor shall submit to the S.O., a manufacturers warranty against any
defect or damage which may arise during the period of 10 years from the date of the
issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion. Terms of the warranty shall be
such as shall be approved by the S. O.
The Contractor shall provide and fix approved collapsible steel gates, folding shutters, roller
shutters, etc. complete with all necessary accessories as approved by the S.O. to the sizes
and positions as shown in the Drawings. Unless otherwise specified, they shall be galvanised
and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Sundries
7.1
Mild steel balustrading to staircases, verandahs, balconies, etc. shall be fixed as shown in the
Drawings.
7.2
All iron and steel for the sundries shall be of the quality approved by the S.O. Screws and
bolts shall have washers where appropriate. Hooks for carrying ceiling fans shall be formed
from 13mm diameter mild steel rods bolted to timber ceiling members or ragged into
concrete.
7.3
Welded mesh, expanded metal, aluminium sheets etc. shall be provided and fixed as shown
in the Drawings.
7.4
Mild steel grilles, drain cover gratings shall be provided and fixed as shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise stated, all steelwork shall be jointed by continuous welding.
7.5
Ant caps shall be of 16 gauge galvanised iron sheets formed to shape as shown in the
drawing. The caps shall be fixed between concrete stumps/brick piers or walls and timber
posts or plates as required. The caps shall project 60mm and inclined at 45 degrees from the
surface.
I/9
APPENDIX I/1
Data Sheet of Proposed Fire Protection Material
PRODUCT NAME :
1.
Product Description
2.
Name of Manufacturer
3.
Name of Supplier
4.
Protection Technique
5.
Application Technique
6.
Steel Preparation Requirements
7.
Additional Mechanical Fixing or Reinforcement
8.
Nominal Density
9.
Thickness Range
10.
Fire Resistance Range
11.
Constraints For Fire Resistance
12.
Appearance
13.
On Site Use
14.
Durability
15.
Other Application
I/10
SECTION J - PLASTERING, PAVING AND TILING WORKS

1.
General
1.1
1.2
Cement
1.1.1
The cement, unless otherwise described shall be Ordinary Portland Cement,

complying with MS 522 as specified in SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK or Masonry
Cement complying with MS 794.
1.1.2
White and coloured cement shall be of approved manufacture.
Plasticiser
1.2.1
1.3
Plasterlime
1.3.1
1.4
1.7
The sand for external rendering, internal plastering and floor screeding shall comply
with MS 29 for fine aggregates. Sand for plastering using gypsum shall comply with
MS 701.
Water
1.5.l
1.6
The plasterlime shall be of approved manufacture and shall comply with BS 890 and
shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Sand
1.4.1
1.5
The plasticiser shall be of approved manufacture and used strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
Water for mixing shall be clear and free from harmful matter as specified in
SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK.
Mixing
1.6.1
All mixing of mortar for plaster and screed shall be done by machine. Hand mixing
shall only be allowed for small quantities and with the approval of the S.O. Hand
mixing shall be done on a clean platform. The water content of the mix shall be only
the minimum required to give a workable mix.
1.6.2
Mortar for plaster and screed shall be used up within 45 minutes after mixing.
1.6.3
For gypsum plaster, mixes shall be used up within one hour after mixing.
1.6.4
No remaking of the mix shall be permitted thereafter.
Surface Preparation
1.7.1
Where possible cement paving, screeding and rendering on concrete surface shall
be laid while the concrete is still green i.e. after the final set but not later than 24
hours of laying concrete. The concrete surfaces shall be brushed with a stiff broom
before it has hardened to remove laitance and give a roughened surface. Hardened
concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly hacked to form key to the approval of the S.O.
J/1
1.8
1.7.2
Before any paving, screeding or rendering is applied, all surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned and wetted and be in damp state at the time the paving, screeding or
rendering is applied.
1.7.3
Where plastering and rendering are to be applied in several coats, the surface of
each preceding coat shall be scratched while still green to form key for the
subsequent coat.
Bay
1.8.1
1.9
Curing and Protection

1.9.1
1.10
Paving and screeding shall be laid in alternate bays. On hardened concrete bases,
each bay shall not exceed 15 sq. metres. On the surfaces where the concrete is still
green, each bay shall not exceed 30 sq. metres. Where bays are not square, the
ratio of the length between adjacent sides of each bay shall be approximately 1:1.
The joints in paving screed shall coincide as nearly as possible with joints in the
base.
Unless otherwise specified hereinafter, the screeds shall be cured for 3 to 7 days
after laying, and protected from rapid drying by covering with polyethylene sheets or
tarpaulins and shall also be protected from any damage.
Making Good
1.10.1 Defective screeds shall be cut out and made good with fresh screed and sufficient
time shall be allowed for the screed to dry prior to the laying of the floor finish.
1.10.2 Defective plastering and rendering shall be made good by cutting out the defective
part to a rectangular shape, and the edges shall be undercut to form dovetail-key
and finished flush with the surrounding work.
1.11
Samples
1.11.1 The Contractor shall supply the S.O. with samples of materials and/or sample of
finished work for approval. Approved samples shall be kept at site for reference.
1.12
Tools
1.12.1 Proper tools shall be used for all scribing, scoring, splicing, smoothing edges, making
angles etc. of tiles, bricks and others so as to produce neat and fit joints.
1.13
Types of Finishes
1.13.1 The appropriate type of finishes to be used in the various locations of the works shall
be as shown in the Drawings or as tabulated in the schedule of finishes. Unless
otherwise shown in the Drawings or described in the Bills of Quantities, the finishes
and their dimensions shall be as specified hereinafter.
1.14
Cornices and Angles

1.14.1 All cornices and moulded work shall be run clean and accurately formed to the
section shown in the Drawings. All mitres, stops and enrichments and moulding shall
follow the details as shown in the Drawings, all to the approval of the S.O.
J/2
1.14.2 All arrises, rounded and moulded angles shall be of the same material mix as the
adjacent finish. For narrow reveal, splays and returns under 30mm wide, Class D
plaster to BS 1191 may be used.
2.
Plaster Work
2.1
2.2
Plain Plaster
2.1.1
Plain plaster shall consist of one part masonry cement to six parts sand by volume.
Where Ordinary Portland Cement is used, plasticiser or plasterlime shall be added to
the mix in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.1.2
The plaster shall be applied in two coats generally to a total thickness of 16mm to
brickwall and 12mm to soffits, beams, columns, block-walls and other smooth
surfaces. The first coat shall consist of rough plastering to a thickness of 10mm for
the 16mm plainface, and 6mm for 12mm plainface. The second coat of 6mm thick
shall be finished with a steel trowel for internal surfaces and with a straight-edged
wood float for external surfaces.
Granolithic Plaster
2.2.1
2.3
Shanghai Plaster
2.3.1
2.4
Granolithic plaster shall consist of by volume, two parts cement, one part sand, five
parts granite chipping passing 6mm mesh and retaining upon 3mm mesh, applied in
two coats to a total thickness of 10mm to a backing coat, finished smooth with wood
float. The backing coat shall consist of 12mm thick plain plaster as described
hereinbefore. The finished surface shall be brushed lightly to achieve the required
texture after it has reached initial set.
Shanghai plaster shall consist of two parts approved coloured cement, one part sand
and five parts of selected lime-stone chipping passing 6mm mesh and retaining upon
3mm mesh by volume applied in two coats to a total thickness of 10mm to the
backing coat, finished smooth with wood float. The backing coat shall consist of
12mm thick plain plaster as described hereinbefore. The surface shall be brushed
lightly to achieve the required texture after it has reached initial set.
Textured Finish Plaster

2.4.1
Textured finish plaster shall consist of a 20mm thick backing coat of plain plaster as
described hereinbefore ruled into a plain and even surface and a finishing coat as
shown in the Drawings and described hereinafter.
2.4.2
For rough cast finish, the mix shall consist of selected cement, sand and aggregate
in the proportion to give the required finish to the approval of the S.O.
2.4.3
For Tyrolean finish, the mix shall consist of one part selected coloured cement and
two parts sand by volume applied to the backing coat by means of a Tyrolean
machine in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The finish shall be built
up in three layers to a total thickness of not exceeding 6mm. Each coat shall be
allowed to dry before the application of a subsequent coat.
2.4.4
For pebble-dash finish, the dry pebble for the finish shall be thrown onto the backing
J/3
coat while the latter is still wet. The pebbles to be used shall be clean and of size and
quality approved by the S.O.
2.5
2.6
Lath Plaster
2.5.1
Lath plaster shall consist of metal lathing and plaster. Metal lathing shall be
galvanised expanded metal sheets having a minimum weight of 1.5 kg/m sq. and
complying with BS 1369. The expanded metal sheets shall be fixed with the longer
side of the mesh spanning across the supports. All sheets shall be lapped not less
than 25mm at the sides and ends. The lapping shall not occur within 150mm along
the axis of angles or curves and end laps shall occur only at supports. Sides of
sheets between supports shall be wired together at every 75mm spacings with
galvanised wire of not less than 1.22mm diameter. Cut ends of wire used for fastening, etc. shall be bent inwards and not towards the plaster finishing coat. The
expanded metal shall be secured to timber supports by means of galvanised nails or
staples at intervals of not more than 100mm. Where expanded metal sheet is to be
fixed to steelwork, it shall be secured by wire or clips at interval of not greater than
350mm apart. Proprietary types of metal lathing, where used, shall be fixed strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2.5.2
The plastering to metal lathing shall be applied in three coats. The first and second
coat shall consist of cement and sand in the proportion of 1:6 by volume with an
approved mortar plasticiser applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instruction. Approved fibre shall be incorporated in the mix in the proportion of 5 kg of
fibre to one meter cube of sand, well beaten and evenly distributed. The final coat
shall consist of cement and fine sand in the proportion of 1:3 with an approved
mortar plasticiser applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The
total thickness of the first and second coat shall be 10mm measured from the outer
surface of the metal lathing. The thickness of the final coat shall be 3mm. Each coat
shall be scratched for key after an appropriate time interval and be allowed to dry
thoroughly before the subsequent coat is applied.
Barium Plaster
2.6.1
2.7
Plaster to Sides of Manholes, Inspection Chambers and Septic Tanks

2.7.1
3.
The plastering for internal surfaces of X-Ray room walls shall be of barium plaster
consisting of one part cement, one part barytes (barium sulphate) fines and three
parts barytes sand by volume.
Plastering to sides of manholes, inspection chambers and septic tanks shall be as

specified under SECTION F: SOIL DRAINAGE.
Paving Work
3.1
Cement Paving
3.1.1

cement paving shall be 20mm thick consisting of one part cement to three parts sand
by volume. The paving shall be thoroughly rammed within 30 minutes of laying and
trowelled smooth after it has stiffened sufficiently to prevent laitance being brought to
the surface. Paving to apron shall finish to a slight fall towards surface drains.
3.1.2

J/4
skirtings shall be formed to a height of 150mm and thickness of 20mm, coved at

bottom and rounded at top.
3.1.3
3.2
3.3
3.4
Granolithic Paving
3.2.1
Granolithic paving shall be 20mm thick, consisting of two parts cement and five parts
granite chipping passing 6mm mesh and retained upon 3mm mesh by volume. The
chipping shall be washed and free from dust. The paving shall be trowelled smooth
to proper level or fall where appropriate. After initial set the surface shall be brushed
lightly to achieve the required textured finish. Unless otherwise shown in the
Drawings, granolithic skirtings shall be 100mm high and 20mm thick, coved at
bottom and slightly rounded at top.
3.2.2
The edge of threshold and treads of concrete stairs shall be finished with 150mm x
75mm x 12mm thick vitreous non-slip nosing tiles laid lengthwise bedded and
pointed in 1:3 cement and sand mortar. The sides of open stringers shall be finished
with granolithic plaster worked to profile of treads and risers to the approval of the
S.O.
In-Situ Terrazzo
3.3.1
In-situ terrazzo shall consist of one part approved coloured cement and three parts
selected limestone chipping passing through 12mm mesh and retained upon 3mm
mesh by volume. The terrazzo topping shall be 20mm thick laid on 20mm thick
cement and sand (1:3) screed. The concrete base to receive the screed shall be
thoroughly cleaned and wetted. While laying the screed, aluminium or brass strips of
size 32mm wide x 3mm thick shall be set in vertically on edge into the screed to form
panels. Each panel shall not exceed 4 sq. metres with top edges of the strips
standing sufficiently high to finish flush with the finished terrazzo floor level. The
terrazzo shall be trowelled to a dense even finish. When sufficiently hard but not
less than two days after being laid it shall be rubbed down to a smooth surface by
means of Carborundum stone. Tile impregnator then shall be applied strictly in
accordance to the manufacturers instructions onto the terrazzo surface to prevent
future staining.
3.3.2

terrazzo skirtings and girths shall be of 100mm high x 20mm thick rounded at top
and coved at bottom.
3.3.3
The edge of the threshold and treads of concrete stairs shall be finished with 150mm
x 76mm x 12mm vitreous non-slip nosing tiles of approved colour laid lengthwise
bedded and pointed. The sides of open stringers shall be finished with in-situ
terrazzo working to profile of treads and risers to the approval of the S.O.
Waterproof Paving to Roof Slabs

3.4.1
3.5
The paving forming the nosing edge of concrete stair treads shall be slightly rounded
and shall have four rows of 6mm half round grooves set at 12mm apart as non-slip
nosing edge.
Waterpoofed paving to roof slabs shall be as specified under SECTION D:

CONCRETE WORK.
Precast Concrete Paving

3.5.1
Precast concrete paving slabs shall be of size 600mm x 600mm x 50mm thick each
J/5
and made of 1:2:4-20mm concrete reinforced with `A6' fabric reinforcement to MS

145. The top surfaces of slab shall be brushed with stiff broom or wire brush after
the initial set to give a rough finish. Paving slabs shall be laid to the pattern as
shown in the Drawings or approved by the S O. The slabs shall be bedded on 25mm
thick semi-dry cement and sand (1:3) screed laid on 100mm properly compacted and
blinded hardcore. The joints shall be 20mm wide filled with cement mortar (1:3) and
raked to a depth of 6mm.
3.6
Interlocking Concrete Paving

3.6.1
3.7
In-Situ Concrete Paving Footpath

3.7.1
3.8
In-situ concrete paving shall consist of 75mm thick concrete of 1:3:6-20mm mix by
volume as specified in SECTION D: CONCRETE WORK, laid on 100mm thick
properly compacted and blinded hardcore to panels as shown in the Drawings or as
approved by the S.O. The concrete shall be well compacted and floated with a
wooden float to a smooth and even finish. After the concrete has achieved the initial
set, the surface shall be brushed with stiff broom or wire brush to give a rough finish.
The joints between the panels shall be filled with approved cold-poured polyurethane
joint filler.
Brick Pavings
3.8.1
4.
Interlocking concrete paving shall comprise of segmental interlocking concrete

paving units laid on minimum 30mm thick sand bedding course. The grade of the
concrete and the thickness of the paving unit shall be as detailed in the Drawings.
Concrete edge restraints shall be provided at the perimeter of the pavement to
ensure the paving units are tightly abutted and to separate areas of different laying
pattern. The gap between paving units shall be filled with fine sand of different
grading to that required for the bedding sand. The pavement which has been laid
shall be compacted by vibrator.
Bricks for paving shall be of semi-vitreous bricks 225mm x 75mm x 50mm thick of
approved quality and colour. The bricks shall be soaked as specified in SECTION E:
BRICKWORKS before laying and shall be laid flat on 25mm semi-dry cement and
sand (1:3) screed with 6mm spacing to the pattern as shown in the Drawings or as
approved by the S.O. The screed shall be laid on 75mm thick concrete (1:3:6-19mm)
base founded on properly compacted and blinded 100mm thick hardcore. The joints
shall be filled with cement mortar (1:2) and finished flush.
Tiling Work
4.1
Precast Terrazzo Tiles

4.1.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, precast terrazzo tiles of an approved

manufacture shall be 300mm x 300mm x 20mm thick machine-pressed tiles
comprising of 6mm limestone aggregate and coloured cement. The tiles shall be
soaked prior to laying and shall be laid butt jointed on 20mm thick semi-dry cement
and sand screed. The laying shall be done while the screed is still green. All joints
between the tiles shall be grouted with coloured cement to match. The tiles shall be
rubbed down to a smooth surface after a minimum of two days or laying by means of
Carborundum stone. Tile impregnator shall then be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturers instructions on to the terrazzo surface to prevent future
staining.
J/6
4.1.2
4.2
4.3
4.4
All skirtings, girths, edges of threshold and treads etc. shall be as described for insitu terrazzo.
Mosaic
4.2.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, mosaic tiling to floors shall be semi-glazed
tiles and shall be of an approved colour and manufacture.
4.2.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, mosaic tiling to walls shall be fully glazed
tile and shall be of approved colour and manufacture.
4.2.3
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings or described in the Bills of Quantities, all
skirtings shall be 100mm high to match floor tiling. The tiles at the bottom of the
skirting shall be set at 45 degrees to the horizontal and the top finished with cove
tiles. The tiles required to form angles to skirting shall be neatly cut and fit to all
abutments.
4.2.4
Mosaic tiling to floors shall be bedded on 20mm thick semi-dry cement and sand
(1:3) screed, laid on the concrete base which has been thoroughly cleaned and
wetted.
4.2.5
Mosaic tiling to walls shall be evenly buttered with cement paste before bedding on
20mm thick cement and sand (1:3) screed which has sufficiently hardened.
Alternatively the tiling shall be bedded with 6mm thick approved adhesive onto the
screed.
4.2.6
During bedding, the surface of the mosaic shall be checked and any unevenness
shall be made good. Any misaligned or defective tiles shall be adjusted or replaced.
All joints shall be grouted with approved adhesive or cement grout to match. The
tiling shall be allowed to mature under damp condition for at least four (4) days
before cleaning down.
Quarry Tiles
4.3.1
Quarry tiles shall be of non-slip type 150mm x 150mm x 12mm thick complying with
MS 1088, 1089, 1090 and 1091. The tiles shall be bedded on 20mm thick semi-dry
cement and sand (1:3) screed with joints about 2mm wide, laid on the concrete base
which has been thoroughly cleaned and wetted. All tiles shall be soaked overnight
before laying.
4.3.2
All skirtings shall be 100mm high with rounded top edge to match the tiles flooring.
The tiles required to form angles to skirting shall be neatly cut and fit to all
abutments.
Glazed Wall Tiles

4.4.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, glazed wall tiles shall be 200mm x 200mm
x 6mm thick cushion-edged glazed tiles complying with MS 858.
4.4.2
The tiles shall be bedded with cement paste or alternatively with 6mm approved tile
adhesive on 20mm thick cement and sand (1:3) screed which has sufficiently
hardened. The surface of the screed shall be properly roughened to form key to the
tiling. The tiles shall be laid closed-butt and all joints shall be filled with adhesive or
approved white cement. Exposed edges of tiling shall be finished with rounded on
edge tiles.
J/7
4.5
4.6
4.7
Ceramic Tiles
4.5.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, ceramic tiles for floor shall be vitreous hard
wearing non-slip glazed tiles 200mm x 100mm x 12mm thick complying with BS
6431.
4.5.2
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings or described in the Bills of Quantities,

ceramic tile skirtings shall match flooring and shall be 200mm x 100mm x 12mm
thick laid lengthwise on cement and sand (1:3) screed as described. All angles to
skirting shall be neatly cut to fit all abutments.
4.5.3
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, nosing and edging tiles to edges of flooring
and treads of concrete stairs shall be of an approved type and to match with the
flooring.
4.5.4
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, ceramic tiles for walls shall be scruffresistant glazed tiles 200mm x 100mm x 6.5mm thick complying with MS 858.
4.5.5
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, all ceramic tiles shall be of approved colour
and manufacture.
4.5.6
Ceramic tiles shall be bedded with cement paste or alternatively with 6mm thick
approved tile adhesive on 20mm thick cement and sand (1:3) screed as described.
The tiles shall be laid close-butt and all joints shall be filled with tile adhesive or
coloured cement to match.
PVC Tiles/Sheets
4.6.1
PVC tiles or sheets shall be of approved pattern and colour. PVC tiles or sheets are
to be of non-slip type and shall comply with MS 602. Tiles shall be 250mm x 250mm
x 2mm thick. Sheets shall be 1.5m wide x 2mm thick.
4.6.2
The tiles or sheet shall be laid and jointed on 20mm thick cement and sand (1:3)
screed with an approved waterproof adhesive strictly in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. The screed shall be finished smooth with a steel trowel
to an even surface and shall be dry, clean and free from dust and sand before laying
the tiles and sheets.
4.6.3
Accessories such as skirting, stair nosing, edging strips etc. shall be of the same
manufacture from similar material to match flooring. Unless otherwise described
skirting shall be 100mm high; stair nosing shall be 60mm wide laid full length of the
treads and of bullnose profiles; and edging strips shall be 25mm wide.
4.6.4
On completion, the flooring shall be well-cleaned and treated or polished in

Timber Strip Flooring

4.7.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, timber strip flooring shall be ready-made,
laminated three ply timber strip or floor board of approved manufacture. The timber
species for use in timber strip flooring shall be as specified in SECTION H:
CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY WORKS.
4.7.2
The flooring shall be laid to the pattern as approved by the S.O, on 20mm thick
cement and sand (1:3) screed with an approved waterproof adhesive applied in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The screed shall be finished smooth
J/8
with a steel trowel to an even surface and it shall be dry, clean and dust free before
laying the timber strip flooring. After the adhesive has set, the timber strip flooring
shall be sanded to a true smooth and even surface using suitable sanding machine.
Any misaligned or defective timber strip shall be adjusted or replaced.
4.8
4.9
4.7.3

skirting to timber strip flooring shall consist of 100mm x 12mm thick wrot timber
skirting rounded at the top, and fixed to the wall or column using 38mm masonry
nails spaced approximately at 600mm centres in two rows 26mm away from the top
and bottom edges. The nails shall be punched below the surface and the holes filled
with approved putty. Any jointing of the skirting shall use splayed butt joints.
4.7.4
The face edges of the flooring shall be lined with wrot timber edging to match. The
edging strips shall be 38mm wide approximately x 12mm thick fixed to the base
using adhesive as specified hereinbefore, projecting 12mm from the finished sides of
floor slabs. Edging strips shall be jointed using glued splayed butt joints.
4.7.5
After sanding the flooring shall be cleaned, any gap sealed with approved sealer,
stained and finished with three coats of approved polyurethane paint. Each coat
shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Parquet Flooring
4.8.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, parquet tiles shall be ready-made 120mm
x 120mm x 10mm thick consisting of 120mm x 25mm x 10mm pressure treated
kempas, keruing or other approved medium hardwood timber battens. The timber
species for use in parquet flooring shall be as specified in SECTION H:
CARPENTRY, JOINERY AND IRONMONGERY WORKS.
4.8.2
The flooring shall be laid to the pattern as approved by the S.O, on 20mm thick
cement and sand (1:3) screed with an approved waterproof adhesive applied in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The screed shall be finished smooth
with a steel trowel to an even surface and it shall be dry, clean and dust free before
laying the parquet flooring. After the adhesive has set, the parquet flooring shall be
sanded to a true smooth and even surface using suitable sanding machine. Any
misaligned or defective parquet shall be adjusted or replaced.
4.8.3

skirting to parquet flooring shall consist of 100mm x 12mm thick wrot timber skirting
rounded at the top, and fixed to the wall or column using 38mm masonry nails
spaced approximately at 600mm centres in two rows 26mm away from the top and
bottom edges. The nails shall be punched below the surface and the holes filled with
approved putty. Any jointing of the skirting shall use splayed butt joints.
4.8.4
The face edges of the flooring shall be lined with wrot timber edging to match. The
edging strips shall be 38mm wide approximately x 12mm thick fixed to the base
using adhesive as specified hereinbefore, projecting 12mm from the finished sides of
floor slabs. Any edging strips shall be jointed using glued splayed butt joints.
4.8.5
After sanding the flooring shall be cleaned, any gap sealed with approved sealer,
stained and finished with three coats of approved polyurethane paint. Each coat
shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Homogenous Tiles
4.9.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, homogenous tiles for flooring shall be of
J/9
Gred A 300mm x 300mm x 8.5mm thick (interior flooring) and 100mm x 100mm x
11mm thick (exterior flooring) fully-vitrified hard-wearing, non-slip unglazed porcelain
tiles of approved colour and manufacture.
4.10
4.9.2
The tiles shall be bedded with cement paste or alternatively with approved tile
adhesive 6mm thick complying with ANSIA 118.1-1992 on to 20mm thick cement
and sand (1:3) screed as described hereinbefore.
4.9.3
Accessories such as skirting (bull nose or cove base), step tiles, step nosings,
edging strips, angle tiles (internal and external), etc, shall be of standard
manufacture from the same material to match flooring. Unless otherwise shown in
the Drawings, skirtings shall be 77mm high, stair nosing 20mm wide laid full length of
the treads and of bull nose profile, and edging strips 25mm wide.
4.9.4
The tiles shall be laid closed-butt with joints not exceeding 3 mm wide and shall be
filled with coloured grout mixed with grout admix. For polished tiles, tile impregnator
solution shall be applied before grouting to prevent grout haze. On completion, the
tiles shall be well-cleaned with tile cleaning solution.
Granite Slabs
4.10.1 Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, granite slabs shall be 600mm x 600mm x
25mm thick shall be bedded with cement paste or alternatively with 9mm thick
approved tile adhesive onto 25mm thick cement and sand (1:3) screed as described
hereinbefore. The slabs shall be laid butt-jointed. Any gap shall be filled with
approved grout powder mixed with grout adhesive. After grouting, the surface then
shall be polished, buffered and finished with a layer of impregnator.
4.10.2 If used in wet or exposed areas, or on ground floor, waterproofing system shall be
installed prior to laying of granite slabs.
4.11
Marble Slab
4.11.1 Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, marble slabs shall be 600mm x 600mm x
25mm thick shall be bedded with cement paste or alternatively with 9mm thick
approved tile adhesive onto 25mm thick cement and sand (1:3) screed. The slabs
shall be laid butt-jointed. Any gap shall be filled with approved mixture of the
adhesive and grout powder. After grouting, the surface then shall be polished,
buffered and finished with a layer of impregnator.
4.11.2 If used in wet or exposed areas, or ground floor, waterproofing system shall be
installed prior to laying of marble slabs.
J/10
SECTION K - WATER SUPPLY PLUMBING, SANITARY AND RAINWATER GOODS

INSTALLATION
____________________________________________________________________
1.
Water Supply Plumbing

1.1
1.2
General
1.1.1
The whole of the water supply plumbing and installation shall be executed by a
licensed plumber having valid and relevant license issued by the relevant state
water authority. The Contractor shall at his own cost be responsible for
employing the licensed plumber, and shall be responsible for all the work
performed by the licensed plumber.
1.1.2
All water supply plumbing and installation shall be executed in accordance with
the relevant state water supply rules and to the approval of the state water
authority, notwithstanding any approval given by the S.O.
1.1.3
All pipes, fittings and equipment used for water supply plumbing and installation
shall be of the type and make approved by the relevant state water authority.
Pipework
1.2.1
Pipework for water supply plumbing shall be to the dimensions shown or as

specified hereinafter and shall be complete with all bends, tees, sockets, plugs,
reducers, brackets, supports and everything else necessary to complete the
installation.
1.2.2
Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, the unplasticed polyvinyl

chloride (uPVC) pipes and fittings used in cold water supply pipework in
distribution pipes above ground, below ground or concealed, shall be executed in
approved Class 7 of MS 762 for sizes 50mm and below. For sizes greater than
50mm, a minimum pressure rating of approved Class E of MS 628 (PN 15)
(equivalent to 12 bar derated at 30oC) shall be used. Both Class 7 of MS 762 and
Class E of MS 628 uPVC pipes and fittings shall comply with BS 6920 or MS
1583 on their effects on drinking water quality. Solvent cement used for both
types of pipes and fittings shall be approved in accordance with MS 628. All
uPVC pipes, fittings and solvent cement shall be supplied by the same
manufacturers.
1.2.3
Where polyethylene (PE) pipe is shown or stated in the Drawings, the PE pipes
and fittings used in cold water supply pipework in distribution pipes above
ground, below ground or concealed, unless otherwise stated or shown in the
Drawings, shall have a minimum wall thickness and pressure rating of PN 12.5 at
20oC (equivalent to 10 Bar derated working pressure at 30oC) and manufactured
to MS 1058 or EN 12201. All PE pipes used shall be marked with SIRIM
certification numbers. All metal fittings moulded integrally shall be dezincified
brass with BSP threads to CZ132 of BS 2872 or BS 2874 and Nickel &
Chromium plated to BS 1224, service condition No. 2, classification number
Cu/Ni 10b Crr.
1.2.4
Where Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) pipe (for cold water applications
only) is stated or shown, ABS pipes and fittings used in the water supply
pipework in distribution pipes above ground, below ground or concealed, unless
otherwise stated or shown in the drawing, shall have a minimum wall thickness
and pressure rating of class 9 to MS 1419 or PN 10 to EN 15493.
1.2.5
Where polybutylene (PB) pipe (for cold and hot water applications) is stated or
shown, PB pipes and fittings used in the water supply pipework in distribution
K/1
Water Supply Plumbing, Sanitary Installation and Rain Water Goods Installation
pipes above ground, below ground or concealed, unless otherwise shown or

stated in the Drawings, shall have a minimum wall thickness and pressure rating
of PN 12.5 at 20oC (equivalent to 10 Bar derated working pressure at 30oC) and
manufactured to EN 12319 or AS/NZS 2642. All metal fittings (in contact with
water) moulded integrally shall be dezincified brass with BSP threads to CZ132
of BS 2872 or BS 2874 and Nickel & Chromium plated to BS 1224, service
condition No.2, classification number Cu/Ni 10b Crr.
1.2.6
Where polypropylene random co-polymer (PP-R) Type 3 pipe and fitting (for cold
and hot water applications) is stated or shown, PP-R Type 3 pipes and fittings
used in the water supply pipework in distribution pipes above ground, below
ground or concealed, unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, shall
have a minimum wall thickness and pressure rating of PN 16 or SDR 7.4 at
20oC, designed for 10 Bar working pressure at 60oC for a minimum operational
life of 50 years and manufactured to DIN 8077, DIN 8078 and DIN 16962 Part 58. All metal fittings moulded integrally shall be dezincified brass with BSP threads
to CZ132 of BS 2872 or BS 2874 and Nickel & Chromium plated to BS 1224,
service condition No. 2, classification number Cu/Ni 10b Crr. The minimum wall
thickness and pressure rating for cold water system, unless otherwise stated or
shown in the Drawings is PN 10 or SDR 11 according to DIN 8077.
1.2.7
Where stainless steel pipe (suitable for cold and hot water) is stated or shown, all
service pipes, pump delivery pipe works, plumbing works below and above
ground level shall be welded austenitic stainless steel pipes ( using Schedule
40S pipes for sizes ranging " to 2" diameter and threaded, and Schedule 10S
pipes for 2" to 8" Diameter pipes by way of welding ) manufactured according to
ASTM A312/A312M together with stainless steel butt-welding fittings
manufactured according to ASTM A403/A403M or stainless steel screwed fittings
manufactured according to ASTM A351/A351M.
However for pipe work in plumbing above ground level (which include service
pipes, pump delivery pipe works), as an option, stainless steel tubes
manufactured according to BS4127 specification for light gauge stainless steel
tube, primarily for water application, may be used. It shall be made of stainless
steel material grade 304 S15 of BS 1449 Part 2. Compression fittings and
capillary fittings made in accordance with the following standards shall be used
with stainless steel tubes conforming to BS 4127:
(i)
(ii)
Copper alloy to BS 864

Stainless steel to BS 4368 or ISO 8434
1.2.8
Where copper pipe is shown, it shall be to BS EN 1057. Fittings to be used for

joining copper pipe shall be to BS 864.
1.2.9
Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, service pipes and distribution
pipes except those buried under ground level, shall be concealed. The
Contractor shall execute the work in such a manner so as to avoid cutting into
finished work in walls, aprons, beams, etc. where practicable as the work
proceeds. Pipework to be buried or concealed shall not be covered or plastered
before they are examined, tested and approved by the state water authority,
notwithstanding any approval given by the S.O.
1.2.10 Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, final branches to fittings shall
be 12mm diameters and the sizes of feeders from which these branches are
taken shall be as follows: -
K/2
No. of Fittings Served
Diameter of Feeders
1
2
3, 4
5, 6, 7
8, 9,10,11,12
13, 14, 15,16,17,18
12mm
20mm
25mm
30mm
40mm
50mm
1.2.11 The installation and construction of all pipework to storage tanks shall be carried
in such a manner that where necessary, flexible rubber joints of approved
standards shall be used for connection next to the panel to avoid stress.
Mechanical joints shall also be used for connection between the flexible rubber
joints and the pipework.
1.2.12 Flange joints (nozzles) used for the inlet, outlet and scour of storage tanks shall
be made of hot dipped galvanised mild steel externally and stainless steel grade
304 or polymeric coated hot-dipped galvanised mild steel internally. Joint gaskets
shall be of 5mm thick, medium rubber reinforced with two-ply flexible fabric and
complying with BS 5292, or approved silica sealant used in the Glass Reinforced
Polyester Panel (GRP) tanks. All bolts, nuts and washers used for flange nozzles
shall be made of stainless steel grade 304 or polymeric coated hot-dipped
galvanised mild steel.
1.2.13 The Contractor shall provide all the necessary flexible rubber joints and
mechanical joints for the proper installation and construction of the pipework to
the tank.
1.3
Storage Tank
1.3.1
Storage tank for water supply shall be of the type and capacity shown or stated
in the Drawings. The storage tank shall be watertight and properly supported.
The storage tank shall be provided with dust and mosquito-proof cover. The
cover shall be so constructed that it shall not be airtight. The storage tank shall
be provided with a high pressure ball valve to BS 1212 on the inlet and of the
same size as inlet pipe. Overflow/ warning pipe, scour pipe and outlet tapping
shall be in accordance with the relevant state water supply rules. The scour and
overflow/warning pipe shall discharge outside the building or to a point shown or
stated in the Drawings.
1.3.2
Storage tanks of pressed steel sections shall be of approved type and shall
comply with BS 1564 and shall be hot-dipped galvanised to MS 740.
Either one of the following liner systems is acceptable:
(A)
Hot-dipped Galvanised Pressed Steel Tank With HDPE Liner

The internal surfaces of the storage tank shall be lined with an approved
non-toxic potable water quality grade high density polyethylene (HDPE)
liner of minimum thickness of 2 mm. All internal cleats and bracings to
tank plates, bolts, nuts, washers and internal ladders shall be of
stainless steel grade 304 or polymeric coated (cold-applied epoxy
AWWA C210 or equivalent) hot-dipped galvanised mild steel. Roof
covers and trusses to tank shall be fully hot-dipped galvanised mild steel
and polymeric coated internally.
(B)
Hot-dipped Galvanised Pressed Steel Tank With Epoxy Resin Liner

The internal surfaces of the storage tank together with the roof covers
and trusses shall be treated with a suitable etch primer before applying
K/3
2 coats of solvent free, high solid epoxy resin with an approved nontoxic potable water certificate. The overall film thickness shall be not less
than 500 microns. All internal cleats and bracings to tank plates, bolts,
nuts, washers and internal ladders shall be of stainless steel grade 304.
Application requirement for Epoxy Resin Liner:
i)
The new galvanised pressed steel shall be cleaned with a

suitable degreaser to remove grease and other contaminates.
The Etch Primer shall be applied by airless spray at a dry film
thickness of 15-20 microns. The 2 part epoxy resin liner must be
thoroughly mixed at the prescribed ratio with each coat giving a
dry film of average 250 microns. Precaution must be taken to
prevent contamination between coats.
ii)
The minimum bond strength of the coating shall be 1.5 N/mm2

to be determined by using an Elcometer adhesion testing
machine. The testing requirement is one (1) pull-off test per
every 100 m2 of tank lining and one (1) pull-off test for tank
lining less than 100 m2. Any damage to the coating shall be
rectified by following the original method statement.
For both the liner systems, beads of non-toxic elastomeric sealant shall
be applied to cover all gasket joints. All external bolts, nuts and washers
to tank plates, tank support, steel I beams and external ladders shall be
hot-dipped galvanised mild steel.
The Contractor shall provide the tank manufacturers guarantee for the
new hot-dipped galvanised pressed steel water tank with any one of the
above liner systems for a period of ten (10) years from the date of
completion against leakages and all manufacturing, installation and
liners defects.
1.4
1.3.3
Storage tanks of stainless steel shall be of approved type and shall be made of
stainless steel grade 304 and manufactured to JKR Standard Specification for
Stainless Steel Water Tanks No.20200-0041-99.
1.3.4
Storage tanks of fibre glass (FRP) shall be of approved type and shall comply
with MS 1241.
1.3.5
Storage tanks of high density polyethylene (HDPE) shall be of approved type and
shall comply with MS 1225.
1.3.6
Storage tanks of glass reinforced polyester (GRP) panels shall be of approved

type and shall comply with MS 1390.
Tank Components and Accessories

Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, the installation of storage tanks shall
include the provision and installation of the following accessories and fittings to the tanks:
i)
Openings for piping connection for inlet, outlet, overflow and drainage pipe
connections with positions approved by the S.O.
ii)
Access manholes with cover, the number, locations and details of which shall be
approved by S.O.
iii)
Air vents to the tank cover at the positions and as per details approved by the
S.O.
K/4
1.5
1.6
iv)
Water tanks of two metres depth or more shall be provided with internal and
external ladders. The internal ladder shall be made of aluminium or of stainless
steel grade 304 or polymeric coated (cold-applied epoxy AWWA C210: 1994 or
equivalent) hot-dipped galvanised mild steel. The external ladder shall be made
of hot dipped galvanised mild steel in accordance with MS 740. The ladder width
shall not be less than 300 mm and the length shall be suitable for the tank
specified.
v)
Suitable type water level indicators and scales graduated in metres to suit the
depth of the panel tank.
vi )
All internal cleats and bracings to tank plates, bolts, nuts, washers in contact with
water shall be of stainless steel grade 304 or polymeric coated (cold-applied
epoxy AWWA C210 or equivalent) hot-dipped galvanised mild steel. All external
bolts, nuts and washers shall be of hot dipped galvanised steel. The diameter of
all bolts in accordance with BS 4190, shall not be less than 10 mm.
vii)
Sealing material shall be nontoxic and chemically resistant to the water stored.
The sealants shall also be able to withstand the prevailing environmental
conditions during service.
viii)
The internal supports and reinforcement members for the panels shall be
chemically resistant to the water stored. They shall be made of stainless steel.
The exterior reinforcement metal parts shall be fabricated from hot dipped
galvanised mild steel.
ix)
The exterior of the water storage tanks for the purpose of firefighting shall be
painted as required by Jabatan Bomba dan Penyelamat.
Storage Tank Foundation

i)
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the Contractor shall construct

foundations to provide continuous support to all base panel joints in one direction
at 1000 mm nominal centres according to panel size. The concrete foundation
shall have a width of at least 300 mm and height of at least 500 mm.
ii)
If continuous foundations are used, dwarf walls or steel beams shall be placed
between the tank and the base level to allow a minimum clearance of 500 mm to
enable ease of tank installation and subsequent bolts tightening and adjustments
after installation.
iii}
Whenever recommended by the tank manufacturer, the steel skid base shall be
designed and constructed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
details and BS 5950 or equivalent. In such cases, the continuous support can be
spaced at greater than 1000mm nominal centres as recommended by the
manufacturer.
iv)
The steel skid base shall be joined by welding neatly and uniformly flushed with
each other to enable the base of tank plate to be placed and sit properly on the
skid base. Uneven surfaces of the skid base will be rejected. The skid base shall
be rust free.
Stop Valves
1.6.1
High pressure full way brass screw-down stop valves of the same diameter as
the pipe shall be provided and fixed for control in the following positions:
i)
ii)
iii)
On the service pipe before it enters the building.

On each branch of the service pipe.
On the inlet to each storage or feed cistern.
K/5
iv)
v)
vi)
1.6.2
1.7
On the inlet to each flushing cistern.

On the outlet of each storage or feed cistern.
In other positions on the pipe as shown or indicated, other than on
overflow/warning pipe.
All stop valves shall be of the type approved and complied with MS 1022.
Examination, Test and Approval of Water Supply Plumbing

1.7.1
On completion of all the water supply plumbing and fittings installation, the
Contractor shall notify the relevant state water authority that they are ready for
examination and test and the Contractor shall carry out the test as required by
the state water authority.
1.7.2
Test for water tightness and chlorination of storage tank

i)
After completion, the tank shall be filled with water to the maximum
operating capacity level and the level of water surfaces shall be fully
recorded. The tank shall be accepted as satisfactory if after a period of
48 hours there is:
a)
b)
c)
1.7.3
No measurable reduction in water level, due allowance being

made for evaporation.
No visible signs of leakage from any parts of the tank and
No deformation of any part of the structure.
ii)
If the test results do not satisfy the above conditions of tests, the
Contractor shall proceed to locate and rectify all defects and leakages
and the test shall be repeated as often as necessary until the structure
satisfies the stipulated conditions. The Contractor shall bear all costs
and expenses for all tests and remedial works.
iii)
On completion of the water tightness test, the Contractor is required to

chlorinate the water in the tank to the satisfaction of the S.O.
Testing of Pipework
i)
The testing of pipework shall be carried out before the pipework are
covered up or plastered.
ii)
The Contractor shall at his own cost provide complete plant, including
portable hydraulic pumps, blank flanges, "test-end" units fitted with caps
or plugs, pressure gauges, all pipe connections and other fittings
necessary for the testing of the pipework. All pipes attached to the tank
shall be tested to the maximum head which they will attain under normal
operating conditions. Only a closed end test shall be required for the
valves.
iii)
Pressure Testing
When a pressure test is carried out, it may be necessary to disconnect
and cap the water service to isolate it from the water main, fixtures and
appliances which may be damaged by the test pressure.
a)
For Plastic Pipes ( uPVC pipes, PE pipes, ABS pipes, PB pipes,

PPR-R Type 3 pipes etc), the pipework shall be filled with
water and the system shall be charged to a hydrostatic pressure
of 15 bar at embient temperature 27 2oC.
For accurate testing, the installation must be filled slowly and be
fully ventilated. Calibrated measurement devices, which show
K/6
pressure changes in steps of 0.1 bar, shall be used for the test.
It shall be noted that a temperature change of 10oC causes a
pressure change of up to 2 bar, depending on the size of the
system.
The pressure test shall be carried out in two stages: i.e. a
preliminary test and a main test.
Pressure Testing may take place
for compression joint, immediately after the last joint

has been made.
for fusion joint, no earlier than 1 hour after the last

fusion joint.
for solvent weld joint, no earlier than 24 hours after the

last joint made.
Preliminary test:
The duration of the preliminary test depends on the size of the
system, but usually requires about one hour and includes the
following activities.
1)
Measurement devices shall be installed at the lowest
point of the piping system, if possible.
2)
The piping system shall be filled with potable water,
thoroughly ventilated and separated from the mains
supply.
3)
Increase pressure with a pressure pump to 15 bar (a)
(refer to Pressure Test Diagram in Appendix K/2-1 and
Log Sheet in Appendix K/2-2.)
4)
Repeat pumping back up to 15 bar, 2 more times over
the next 30 minutes (b) at an interval of 10 minutes.
5)
After a testing period of another 30 minutes, the test
pressure shall not have decreased by more than 0.6
bar (c).
The preliminary test is considered successfully completed when
there are no leaks and the pressure drop in the last half hour of
the preliminary test does not exceed 0.6 bar.
Main test:
6)
The main test shall be carried out immediately following

the preliminary test. Its duration is two (2) hours. The
test pressure after the preliminary test at point (c) shall
be recorded.
7)
The main test is considered successfully completed, if

the test pressure does not drop more than 0.2 bar (d)
from the beginning of the main test and if no leakage is
detected.
If the pressure drop is more than 0.2 bar during the main test,
then the whole test must be repeated. There must not be any
leakage in the system.
The results of the pressure test shall be recorded on a log sheet
(see Appendix K/2-2). The test shall be accepted as satisfactory
if there are no signs of leakage and pressure drops within the
acceptable tolerances in the system. The Contractor shall make
good all leakages, replace any defective parts and retest the
K/7
whole system all at his own expense to the approval of the state
water authority.
b)
1.7.4
1.8
For Metal Pipes (stainless steel pipes, copper pipes etc), the
pipework shall be filled with water and the system shall be
charged to a hydrostatic pressure of 15 bar and maintained for
a period of not less than 30 minutes. The results of the pressure
test shall be recorded on a log sheet (see Appendix K/2-2). The
test shall be accepted as satisfactory if there are no signs of
leakage and pressure drop in the system. The Contractor shall
make good all leakages, replace any defective parts and retest
the whole system to the approval of the state water authority all
at his own expense.
The Contractor shall obtain a written certification from the relevant state water
authority to prove that the examination and test have been satisfactorily
concluded. Where the installation is proven to be unsatisfactory, the Contractor
shall rectify the works in accordance with written notice of the state water
authority all at his own expense. The repair or replacement of a faulty pipe or
fitting shall be reported by the Contractor to the relevant state water authority
within one week.
Meter Chamber
Where meter chambers are required, these shall be to the details shown in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, connection to the meter, supply of
meters and all communication pipes up to the meter point shall be done by the relevant
state water authority.
2.
Sanitary Installation
2.1
Fittings
2.1.1
Unless otherwise shown or specified in the Drawings, all fittings including all
necessary brackets and accessories shall be as scheduled in Appendix K/1
hereinafter. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the type of trap
required for each fitting. All necessary concrete backing shall be provided to
fittings secured to floors.
2.1.2
Vanity Top
Where shown in the Drawings, vanity tops of approved manufacture and colour
shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. It shall be
moulded as one solid piece with its top sloping gently towards the wash hand
basin and having a slight upturn or kerb as its outer edges. It shall be
manufactured from non-porous composite product composed of polyester
resin and calcium carbonate marble dust with the permanence of stone and
an aesthetic appeal of natural marble or granite. The slab surface shall have a
glossy finish, and protected by suitable polymer to ensure durability and
impermeability. It shall be stain and chemical resistant, and UV stabilised.
2.2
Water Supply Plumbing for Low Pressure W/C Flush Valve and Low Pressure W/C
Flushing Cistern
2.2.1
Plumbing for Low Pressure W/C Flush Valve

A separate internal plumbing system shall be provided for low pressure w/c flush
valves to have adequate dynamic pressure and flow, to ensure effective
operation of each flush valve, i.e. for hydraulics of water closet to function
K/8
properly, as shown in Appendix K/3.

Alternatively water supply to flush valves for w/c pan shall be derived from a
feeder tank which is isolated from the potable water supply main and is not
connected in any way with all other fittings serving to basins, sinks, heaters etc.
in the building.
The following requirement for each low pressure w/c flush valve as in Table A1
shall be followed in the design of internal plumbing for flush valve system.
Table A1 Low Pressure W/C Flush Valve

Requirement
W/C Flush Valve
a) Dynamic/ operating head at the inlet of

flush valve
b) Flow rate
2.2.2
3.25 m
1.8 litres/ sec
Plumbing for Low Pressure W/C Flushing Cistern

An internal plumbing system shall be provided for low pressure w/c flushing
cistern, w/c taps, taps for toilet wash hand basins and urinal flush valves as
shown in Appendix K/4.
The following requirement for each low pressure w/c cistern, urinal cistern and
urinal flush valve as in Table A2 shall be followed in the design of internal
plumbing.
Table A2: Low Pressure W/C Cistern, Urinal Cistern and Urinal Flush Valve
Requirement
2.2.3
Low Pressure
W/C Cistern
Urinal Cistern
Urinal Flush
Valve
a) Dynamic/ operating
head at the inlet of
cistern/ valve
3.2 m
2.0m
2.0m
b) Flow rate
0.1 litres/ sec
0.1 litres/ sec
0.1 litres/ sec
Materials for Pipes, Fittings and Isolating Valves In Pipeworks

a)
Pipes and Fittings For Internal Plumbing, Concealed and Buried

Pipework
Pipework for water supply plumbing shall be to the dimensions shown or
as specified in the Drawings and shall be complete with all bends, tees,
sockets, plugs, reducers, brackets, supports and everything else
necessary to complete the installation. All the pipes and fittings
mentioned in clause 1.2 are suitable for internal plumbing. Galvanised
iron pipes and fittings shall not be used for internal plumbing.
b)
Pipes and Fittings for Exposed External Pipework

ASTM A312 Schedule 40S stainless steel pipes and ASTM A351
K/9
stainless steel pipe fittings or BS 143 & 1256 brass threaded fittings for
external pipework shall be used. High strength composite plastic/ metal
pipes and fittings may be allowed with the S.Os approval. Galvanised
iron pipes and fittings shall not be used for external pipework.
c)
Isolation Valves for Internal Plumbing and External Pipework

Valves used for isolating the water supply system shall be of approved
full bore brass gate valves (BS5154) or Type B ductile iron gate valves
(JKR Standard Specification 20200-0083-00), brass ball valves (BS
6675:1986 or BS 1552:1995) shall be used. All fittings used shall be
made of brass, stainless steel or other approved non-corrodible material.
Stop valves (stop cocks with reduced flow areas) shall not be used for
external pipework and internal plumbing systems for w/c flush valves
and flushing cistern.
2.2.4
Operating/ Dynamic Pressure More Than 30 Metres

Unless otherwise instructed by the S.O, air vents and pressure reducing valves
of approved type (JKR Standard Specification 20200-0114-01), shall be installed
at 30 meters intervals along downpipes in order to restrict the pressure sustained
by the fittings to prevent water hammer and other effects.
2.3
uPVC Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes

2.3.1
Unless otherwise shown or specified in the Drawings, approved uPVC soil,

waste and vent pipes shall be provided.
2.3.2
uPVC pipes shall conform to MS 978 and MS 1063. The pipes shall be provided,
fixed and connected to fittings and sanitary installation complete with all
necessary bends, tees, sockets, branches, offsets, inspection pieces, hopper
heads, holder bats etc. Pipes shall be joined with approved solvent cement in
2.3.3
Expansion joints (expansion couplings for uPVC pipes)

Where pipework is constructed using solvent welded joints, expansion joints shall
be provided to compensate for the linear thermal expansion of uPVC pipes which
have a coefficient of linear expansion of 7x10-5 mm/mmoC(e.g. for a difference of
10 oC, linear expansion of 3 m length uPVC pipe =10 x 3000x 7x 10-5 =2.1mm).
Expansion joints must not be placed below ground level. All expansion joints
shall be installed with the proper fittings in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
2.3.3.1 Expansion joints shall be provided at a maximum spacing of 6 meters for
cold water pipelines and 4 meters for hot water pipelines (e.g. kitchen or
etc.) or wherever specified
2.3.3.2 The permissible maximum length of pipelines between fixed points
without an expansion joint or provision for movement is 2 meters for cold
water pipelines and 1 meter for hot water pipelines. A fixed point is one
at which longitudinal movement of the pipe or fitting is restrained.
2.3.3.3 An expansion joint shall be constructed with a device or a definite
means to ensure the provision of the desired gap for thermal expansion
between the two pipes during installation.
2.3.3.4 Any expansion joint provided shall incorporate a permanent shield to
provide protection to the sliding surfaces and rubber ring seal from
ingression of dust particles.
K/10
2.3.3.5 Rubber ring seal used in the expansion joint shall be made of natural
rubber or mixture of natural and synthetic rubber or synthetic rubber
complying with MS 672.
2.4
3.
Cast Iron Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes

2.4.1
Where shown or stated in the Drawings, 100mm diameter cast iron soil and vent
pipes internally coated with anti corrosive bituminous coating shall be provided,
fixed and connected to the fittings and sanitary system. The pipe shall be jointed
with an approved resin with molten lead and well caulked. All necessary bends,
branches, offsets, inspection pieces, hopper heads, holder bats shall be provided
where necessary.
Vertical stacks shall terminate 600mm above roof level with open ends and
provided with approved galvanised balloon grating.
2.4.2
Where shown or stated in the Drawings, 50mm diameter anti siphonage pipes of
similar quality as above shall be provided and fixed.
2.4.3
Galvanised wrought iron waste pipes of the same diameter as the outlet served
shall be provided and fixed to fittings complete with all necessary bends, tees,
sockets, plugs, etc. The waste pipes shall be carried through walls and angled to
flow into concrete surface drains or if from upper floors connected to the waste or
soil stack as shown in the Drawings. Cast iron waste pipes shall be as specified
hereinbefore for soil pipes and shall be of an adequate diameter unless
otherwise detailed in the Drawings.
Rain Water Goods

3.1
Flashing
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all flashing shall be of aluminium sheet, free
from cracks, dross, scales, excess blisters and any other defects which might be
detrimental to its wearing or working properties. Sheets shall be reasonably flat before
forming and cutting. All aluminium sheets used for flashing shall be at least 1.2mm thick.
Flashing shall have a minimum depth of 180mm with the upper edge turned into the wall
and pointed in cement. Where nails or screws are used for fixing, they shall be of the
heavily galvanised type. The flashing work shall be performed by skilled workmen.
3.2
Gutters
3.2.1
General
3.2.1.1 Where gutters are to be provided they shall conform to the shape,
dimensions and materials shown in the Drawings. All gutters shall be
provided and fixed complete with all necessary angles, squares and
obtuse, stop end, outlets and other necessary gutter fittings.
3.2.1.2 Gutter outlets shall be located at the position shown in the Drawings and
each provided with a galvanised iron wire balloon grating.
3.2.1.3 All gutters other than those of reinforced concrete shall be properly fixed
and adequately supported and all necessary brackets shall be provided.
Brackets shall be of the type and pattern that will conform to the profile
of the gutter and unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, shall
be of galvanised steel screwed to the fascia.
3.2.1.4 Unless otherwise shown or stated in the Drawings, all gutters shall be
laid to a minimum fall of 12mm in 1m with properly constructed laps or
K/11
joints laid in the direction of flow.

3.2.2
Aluminium Gutters
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all gutter linings, valley and eaves
gutter shall be of aluminium and shall conform to the following weights and sizes:
Gutter lining:
1.2mm thick, 225mm minimum depth against walls, 330mm minimum width
under roofing, to a fall of 50mm in 3m.
Valley gutter:
1.2mm thick, turned under roofing 330mm minimum each side.
Eaves gutter:
1.2mm thick jointed using soldered seams neatly and accurately executed.
Gutter linings and valley gutters shall be laid on 25mm thick close timber
boarding adequately supported.
3.2.3
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Gutters

Where shown, approved uPVC gutters to BS 4576 shall be provided and fixed.
The gutters shall be jointed using approved solvent cement used in accordance
3.3
Rainwater Downpipes
3.3.1
General
Where rainwater downpipes are to be provided, they shall conform to the shape,
dimensions and materials shown in the Drawings and fixed in the position
indicated therein to receive the gutter outlets.
All downpipes shall be provided complete with all necessary fittings including
rainwater heads, rainwater shoes, radius, bends, offsets and everything else
required. Outlets in flat roof and balcony connected to downpipe shall be
provided with an approved uPVC or stainless steel grating.
All downpipes and fittings shall be properly installed and adequately secured into
position using necessary clamps, brackets or holderbats. Unless otherwise
shown in the Drawings, clamps, brackets or holderbats shall be secured using
approved galvanised nails or screws driven not less than 8mm into hardwood
plug or other approved plugs in walls or columns.
3.3.2
Aluminium Downpipes
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, all downpipes shall be fabricated from
aluminium sheets of 1.2 mm thick. Joints shall be formed using slot-in joint
neatly and accurately executed.
3.3.3
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (uPVC) Downpipes

Where shown, approved uPVC downpipes complying with MS 1063 shall be
provided and fixed. The pipes shall be jointed with approved solvent cement in
K/12
Appendix K/1
(Ref.Cl. 2.1.1)
SCHEDULE OF SANITARY FITTINGS
TYPE
1. Wash Basins(a)
2. Vanity Tops
3. Sink
4. Water Closet
5. Urinals
6. Cistern for
water closet
DESCRIPTION
560mm x 410mm wash basin in approved colour vitreous china complete with
chromium plated tap, blank tap hole stopper, 30mm p or s trap with
40mm seal, waste fittings, plug with chain and painted bracket supports.
(b)
Ditto, but with two chromium plated tap, marked hot and cold (for cold
and hot water supply only).
(a)
Vanity top as specified, with integrated sink as shown in the Drawings,

complete with chromium-plated tap, blank tap hole stopper, 30mm p
or s trap with 40mm seal, waste fittings and plug with chain.
(b)
Vanity top as specified, but with holes pre-punched to receive an

under-counter vanity basin and tap respectively, as shown in the
Drawings, complete with 555mm x 415mm under-counter vanity basin in
vitreous china, complete with chromium-plated tap, 30mm p or s trap
with 40mm seal, waste fittings and plug with chain, and painted
bracket supports.
(a)
600mm x 400mm x 200mm earthenware plain edge sink in white fireclay

complete with chromium plated tap, 40mm p or s trap with 40mm seal,
waste fittings, plug with chain and painted cast iron brackets.
(b)
Metal sinks in stainless steel to size and shape as shown in the

Drawings, complete with chromium plated tap as required, 40mm p or
s trap with 40mm seal, waste fittings, plug with chain and painted cast
iron supports.
(a)
Pedestal closet in white vitreous china conforming to MS 1522:2001 or

JKR Standard Specification 20200-0110-01 complete with pedestal pan,
p trap and ventilation outlet, plastic hinged seat and rubber buffers.
(b)
Squatting closet in white vitreous china conforming to MS 1522:2001 or

JKR Standard Specification 20200-0110-01 complete with pair of raised
foot treads in white fire clay with p trap and 40mm diameter uPVC flush
pipe.
(a)
Single urinal bowl in white vitreous china conforming to JKR Standard

Specification 20200-0131-01 or AS 3982:1996 complete with back
inlets, hangers and steadying brackets, 40mm outlet with hinged
gratings and 50mm uPVC waste pipe.
(b)
Urinal range of 2 or more bowls as (a) but with white vitreous china
division between bowls.
(a)
All W/C Cisterns shall be low pressure or Type B flushing cisterns

conforming to JKR Standard Specification 20200-0160-03.
Note:
Type B flushing cistern flushing cistern complete with low pressure inlet valve that at
34.5Kpa (5psi) static pressure and 0.1 litre /sec flow rate, the time taken for refilling 6 litre
of water through the inlet valve into the cistern shall be within 60 secs after flushing. The
dynamic pressure at the inlet of the inlet valve shall be not less than 31.8 kpa.
(b)
Single flush 6 litres or dual-flush 6 / 3 liters low level vitreous china

K/13
cistern conforming to JKR Standard Specification 20200-0160-03 with

40mm flush pipe, low pressure water inlet valve, 20mm diameter
overflow for discharge externally and chrome flushing lever handle.
(c)
6 litres high level vitreous china cistern conforming to JKR Standard

Specification 20200-0160-03 with 40mm flush pipe, water inlet valve,
20mm diameter overflow for discharge externally and chromed lever
handle.
(d)
Each flush cistern for w/c shall be tested as stipulated in the

requirements of JKR Standard Specification 20200-0160-03.
7. Cistern for urinal
(a)
Single flush 2.5 litres urinal flushing cistern in white vitreous china
conforming to JKR Standard Specification 20200-0136-02 complete with
chromium plated flushing inlet pipe, 20mm diameter overflow for
discharge externally and chrome lever handle.
8. Flush valve for

water closet
(a)
W/C flush valve shall be low pressure single flush 6 litres gravity flush
valve. It shall have a non-hold-open feature or an automatic shut-off
system. Vacuum Breaker is optional, only applicable to w/c flush valves
intended to be connected to direct potable water mains. Its performance
requires proper match of valve and w/c pan conforming to MS 1522:01.
Note
Low pressure gravity flush valve shall, at 34.5Kpa (5psi) static pressure, flush 6 litres of
water and pass all the tests stipulated in MS 1522:01. The dynamic pressure at the inlet of
flush valve shall be not less than 32.5 kpa.
9. Flush valve for

urinal
(b)
Each flush valve shall be made of metal (preferably copper alloy) and
corrosion resistant. All exposed surfaces to the users shall be chromed
plated or made of stainless steel.
(c)
Each water closet flush valve used shall comply fully with ASSE
1037:1990, performance requirements for Pressurized Flushing Devices
(Flush meters) for Plumbing Fixtures. Testing and certification by other
approved testing body may be allowed with the S.Os approval. Each
flush valve together with w/c shall pass all the tests listed below:
i)
Endurance test;
ii)
Hydraulic test;
iii)
Performance tests according to test methods stipulated in MS
1522:01
a)
Newspaper test;
b)
Simulating solid test;
c)
Sawdust test and
d)
Ball test
(a)
Urinal flush valve shall be Single flush 2.5 litres gravity flush valve.
It shall have a non-hold-open feature or an automatic shut-off system.
(b)
Each urinal flush valve shall be made of metal (preferably copper alloy)
and corrosion resistant. All exposed surfaces to the users shall be
chromed plated or made of stainless steel.
(c)
Each urinal flush valve shall be tested as stipulated in the requirements

of JKR Standard Specification 20200-0131-01 or AS 3982:1996.
(OTHERS: state if required)
K/14
Appendix K/2-1
(Ref. cl 1.7.3)
K/15
Appendix K/2-2
(Ref. cl 1.7.3)
Pressure Test Log Sheet

for water services installations JKR Malaysia
Project:
(A)
____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
For Plastic Pipes ( uPVC pipes, PE pipes, ABS pipes, PB pipes, PP-R Type 3 pipes etc)
I.
Preliminary Test
Test begin at ____________(at least 15 bar)
(a) _____________ bar
Pressure after 30 minutes
(b) _____________ bar

*1 - shall not be more than 0.6 bar after 30 minutes
(c) _____________ bar*1
Leakage
II.
9 yes
9 no
Main Test
Start after preliminary test completed _________
*2 - shall not be more than 0.2 bar
Leakage
(B)
9 yes
(c) _____________ bar

(d) _____________ bar*2
9 no
For Metal Pipes ( stainless steel pipes, copper pipes etc)

Test begin at __________( at least 15 bar)
(a) _____________ bar
(b) _____________ bar
Leakage
9 yes
9 no
Installer/Company:
Date: _______________
Completed by: ________
K/16
Appendix K/3
TYPICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF INTERNAL PLUMBING FOR LOW PRESSURE FLUSH
VALVES FOR A FOUR-STOREY BUILDING (in accordance with 2.2.1)
Note: separate system for top floor
Appendix K/4
K/17
TYPICAL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF INTERNAL PLUMBING FOR LOW PRESSURE FLUSHING

CISTERNS, WASH BASIN TAPS AND W/C TAPS FOR A FOUR-STOREY BUILDING
(In accordance with 2.2.2)
Note: separate system for top floor
K/18
SECTION L - GLAZING WORK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Glass
1.1
All glass shall conform to MS 1135 and shall be free from bubbles, specks and other
defects. Samples shall be submitted for the approval of the S.O.
1.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the type and thickness of glass and sealants
shall be as stated in the Schedule of Glass in APPENDIX L/1.
Sealants
2.1
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, sealant shall be silicone, polysulphide or other
approved type applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
2.2
The putty for glazing shall be of an approved type and shall comply with BS 544.
Glazing
3.1
All doors, windows, etc. except louvred windows shall be glazed as shown in the
Drawings or as scheduled. All glass shall be cut to size with 2mm clearance all round the
rebates. All exposed edges of glass panes shall be rounded off.
3.2
All glazing works shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
3.3
Figured or textured glass surface for windows shall be installed facing the interior.
Glazing to Timber Windows

4.1
The grooves or rebates to be glazed shall first be cleaned, primed with wood primer,
painted with one coat of oil paint and allowed to dry, followed by the application of a thin
bed of glazing putty or sealant.
4.2
The glass panes shall then be properly placed and secured in the grooves or rebates with
timber beading as detailed in the Drawings.
4.3
Where the glass pane is to be secured with putty or sealant, the glass shall be placed
and held in the grooves or rebates with approved sprigs driven at intervals of not
exceeding 300mm centres. The glass shall then be finally secured with back-putty or
sealant finished true to profile and as detailed in the Drawings.
Glazing to Metal Windows

5.1
The grooves or rebates to be glazed shall first be cleaned of rust and primed with an
approved metal primer and allowed to dry, followed by the application of a thin bed of
glazing putty or sealant. The glass panes shall then be properly placed and secured in
the grooves or rebates with metal beadings or neoprene rubber in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions or as detailed in the Drawings.
5.2
Where the glass panes are to be secured with putty, the panes shall be placed and held
in the grooves or rebates with spring clips set in holes in the frame. The glass shall then
be finally secured with back-putty or sealant finished true to profile or as detailed in the
Drawings.
L/1
Glazing Work
6.
7.
Glazing to Louvred Windows

6.1
The glass blades for fixed louvred windows shall be properly housed in the grooves of the
timber frames and secured in position with timber beadings as shown in the Drawings.
6.2
In the case of adjustable louvred windows, the louvred frames shall be fixed on to the
vertical members of the window frame and secured with 20mm long dome-headed
galvanized screws fixed at 200mm centres. The louvre blades shall then be inserted and
secured in the flanged clips, all in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Glazing to Patented Windows, Doors, Panels, Sky Lights, etc.

7.1
8.
Fixing of Glass Blocks

8.1
9.
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the installation and glazing of patented
windows, doors, roof-lights, etc., shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Glass blocks shall be laid butt-jointed in cement and sand mortar (1:4) by volume. Before
the first course is laid, the base to receive the glass blocks shall be coated with an
approved bitumen emulsion or similar material. Each panel of the glass blocks shall have
a clearance of 13mm at sides and top with the surrounding structure. The clearance shall
be filled with non hardening compound and finished as detailed in the Drawings or as
approved by the S.O. Approved expanded metal reinforcement shall be provided at every
fourth course. Unless otherwise shown or specified in the Drawings, all joints between
the blocks shall be pointed with white cement and the exposed areas of the non
hardening compound shall be painted to match the surrounding structure.
Cleaning on completion
10.1
On completion, all glass shall be cleaned both inside and outside and any broken,
cracked or defective panes shall be replaced to the approval of the S.O.
L/2
Glazing Work
APPENDIX L/1
SCHEDULE OF GLASS
No.
Type of Glass
Thickness
(mm)
Application
1.
Clear Float Glass
External use on windows and doors

Interior framed glass screens, partitions
Display windows, showcases, display shelves
Furniture :table-tops
2.
Tinted Float Glass
External use on windows and doors

Interior framed glass screens, partitions
Display windows, showcases, display shelves
Furniture :table-tops
3.
Clear Figured (obscured) Glass
4.
Grey / Tinted Figured Glass
5.
Toughened / Tempered Glass
Furniture & interior decorations, table tops,

showcases, partitions and the like
6.
Laminated Glass
Skylights, glass roofs and the like

Animal observatory windows & aquariums
High security places eg. Burglar-resistant
showcases and the like
Places where safety is necessary eg.
Verandah side panels and the like
7.
Wired Glass
Places where safety and security are

importance.
Windows
Furniture, display bases, house fittings,
partitions etc.
Decoration eg.front doors, display etc.
Windows
Furniture, display bases, house fittings,
partitions etc.
Decoration eg.front doors, display etc.
i) Clear & Polished

ii) Figured & Translucent
8.
Lead Glass
Minimum total thickness of

9mm laminated crystal clear
glass with minimum 2mm
thick lead sheeting
sandwiched in between
9.
Glass Block
190mm x 190mm x 80mm
X-ray rooms
L/3
Glazing Work
SECTION M - PAINTING WORK

1.
General
1.1
All paints to be used shall be those supplied by approved manufacturers. The quality of
paints shall comply with MS 125 in respect of oil/ enamel paints and MS 134 in respect of
emulsion paints/acrylic paint.
1.2
Prior to commencement of the painting work, the Contractor shall submit the following to
the S.O:
i)
Name of the paint manufacturer and the manufacturers certification that the
paint conform to the relevant standard as specified in clause 1.1 hereof together
with the proof that such certification have been verified by tests carried out by
SIRIM or KISB in the last three (3) years.
ii)
A copy of method statement including procedure for the painting works in

accordance with this Specification and manufacturers instruction.
1.3
Paints shall be delivered to the Site in the manufacturer's original sealed containers
unopened and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1.4
Paints shall not be adulterated and any paint that has deteriorated shall not be used and
shall be removed from the Site forthwith.
1.5
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the types of paints to be used for the work on
exposed surfaces shall be as stated in the "Schedule of Paint Finish" attached
hereinafter.
1.6
The colours and tints of paints shall be selected by the S.O. and the priming, undercoats
and finishing coats shall be of approved differing tints and shall be obtained from the
same manufacturer.
1.7
No painting shall be done under conditions which may jeopardize the quality of finished
paintwork.
1.8
During painting, care shall be taken to prevent stain or damage to other works.
1.9
Surfaces to be painted shall be dry, free from dirt, oil, grease, old loose paint and other
deleterious matter. All cracks shall be raked out and stopped and all holes and dents
shall be filled.
1.10
Unless otherwise specified in the manufacturer's instructions, each coat of paint applied
on timber or metal surfaces shall be allowed to dry and subsequently rubbed down lightly
with sandpaper before the next coat is applied. Any dirt or dust shall be removed from
preceding coats immediately before proceeding with application of the next coat.
1.11
All priming to shop fabricated components shall be done at the shop.
1.12
All prime surfaces shall be inspected and approved by the S.O. before commencement of
painting works.
1.13
Finished surfaces shall be uniform in finish and colour and be free from brush marks or
other defects.
1.14
Sample areas showing all tints of paints to be used shall be prepared by the Contractor
as and when required by the S.O.
M/1
Painting Work
2.
Painting to Timberwork
2.1
2.2
Painting to New Timberwork

2.1.1
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, all exposed wrot surfaces of timber
shall be painted as specified hereinafter.
2.1.2
Before painting to new timberwork, all knots shall be covered with knotting and
all nail holes, cracks, etc. shall be stopped with white lead and putty (1:3) and
shall be primed with aluminium wood primer well brushed in. The prepared
surface shall be painted with one undercoat and unless otherwise specified, shall
be finished with two coats of gloss enamel paint. Each preceding coat shall be
allowed to dry thoroughly and rubbed down lightly with fine sand paper and
thoroughly cleaned before applying the next coat.
2.1.3
All timber surfaces abutting concrete or brickwork shall be primed before fixing or
assembling.
2.1.4
All ironmongeries except hinges shall be removed before painting begins and
shall be carefully refixed.
Repainting Existing Timberwork

2.2.1
3.
Where repainting to existing timber work is specified, the following procedure

shall be adhered to. If the surface is intact, it shall be rubbed down with fine sand
paper to the approval of the S.O. Then one coat of undercoat shall be applied
followed by two coats of gloss enamel paint unless otherwise specified. Where
cracking and flaking have occurred, the entire existing paint shall be removed by
burning off or by use of paint remover as approved by the S.O. The surface shall
then be thoroughly cleaned and shall be applied with one coat aluminium wood
primer followed by one undercoat and unless otherwise stated in the Drawings,
shall be finished with two coats of gloss enamel paint.
Painting to Metalwork
3.1
Painting New Steel and Ironwork

3.1.1
3.2
The areas to be painted shall be cleaned down and be free from rust, scale, oil,
grease, dirt and dust. One coat of approved metallic primer shall be applied
followed by one undercoat and unless otherwise specified, shall be finished with
two coats of gloss enamel paint. Soil and vent pipes shall be primed as above
and given two coats of approved bituminous paint.
Repainting Existing Steel and Ironwork

3.2.1
Where repainting to existing steel or ironwork is stated in the Drawings, the

following procedure shall be adhered to. Where a firm surface exists, it shall be
scuffed with fine sand paper to the approval of the S.O. and spot primed if
necessary before the application of one undercoat and unless otherwise
specified, shall be finished with two coats of gloss enamel paint.
If the old paint is in a bad, deteriorated condition the whole paint shall be
removed by the use of approved paint remover or by scraping as approved by
the S.O. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and shall be applied with one
coat approved metallic primer, one undercoat and unless otherwise specified,
shall be finished with two coats of gloss enamel paint.
M/2
Painting Work
3.3
Painting New Galvanized Ironwork

3.3.1
3.4
Repainting Existing Galvanized Ironwork

3.4.1
4.
Where painting to new galvanized ironwork is specified, the surfaces shall be

applied with one coat of approved self-etching quick drying metallic primer
followed by one undercoat and unless otherwise specified, shall be finished with
two coats of gloss enamel paint.
Where repainting to existing galvanized ironwork is specified, the following

procedure shall be adhered to. If the surface is not corroded, it shall be slightly
sanded and all dirts, oil, and grease removed by washing with an approved
solvent and applied with one coat approved metallic primer followed with one
undercoat and unless otherwise specified, shall be finished with one coat of
gloss enamel paint. If the surface has corroded, the whole paint shall be
removed by the use of approved paint remover or by scraping as approved by
S.O. When the surface is completely clean, it shall be applied with one coat
approved metallic primer, one undercoat and unless otherwise specified, shall be
finished with two coats of gloss enamel paint.
Painting to Masonry Work

4.1
Painting New Plastered/Masonry Surfaces

4.1.1
4.2
Repainting Existing Plastered or Masonry Surfaces

4.2.1
4.3
The new plastered or masonry surfaces shall be allowed to dry completely and
shall be cleaned down to remove dust, dirt, plaster splashes, and the like. In
case of old unpainted walls, all fungus, mosses, lichens and vegetative growth
shall also be removed. The cleaned surfaces shall then be applied with one coat
approved alkali resisting primer sealer and, unless otherwise stated in the
Drawings, followed with two coats of emulsion paint.
Where repainting to existing plastered or the masonry surface is specified, the

following procedure shall be adhered to. If existing paintwork is still intact, the
surfaces shall be washed down and applied with two coats of emulsion paint. If
the existing paintwork is loose or chalky, the paint shall be removed by scraping
and the surface shall be washed. All cracks and other imperfections shall be
made good and the surface allowed to dry completely. The surface shall then be
applied with one coat approved alkali resisting primer sealer and, unless
otherwise stated in the Drawings, followed with two coats of emulsion paint.
Where shown in the Drawings, acrylic paint to MS 134 shall be applied on new or existing
surfaces such as brickwork, plaster and cement rendering in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Acrylic painting work shall be carried out by painting
applicator approved by approved manufacturer. Prior to commencement of the painting
work, the Contractor shall submit to the S.O the following:
i)
The paints performance warranty by the manufacturer to the Government on

the performance of the paint against any peeling, cracking, fungus/ algae growth
and discoloration which may arise during a period of three (3) years from the
date of practical completion due to insufficiency in material or workmanship. The
terms and conditions of the warranty shall be as stipulated in APPENDIX M/1.
ii)
Name of the painting applicator approved by the manufacturer including written

evidence of the current approval.
M/3
Painting Work
5.
Treatment to Fair Surfaces

5.1
6.
Surfaces that are to be left bare such as for fair-face brickwork, fair-face concrete or
stones and the like shall be thoroughly clean, dry and free from grease, dust and loose or
flaking materials. The surfaces shall then be treated with an approved colourless siliconbased water repellant liquid to BS 6477 applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions. The solution shall be applied in two coats over the entire area and crevices
by brushing.
Painting to Timber-Based Products

6.1
Chipboard Surfaces
Before painting, all nail holes, crevices and the like shall be stopped with white lead and
putty (1:3). The surface shall then be smoothened by rubbing down with fine sand paper
and finally cleaned to remove dust. Where the board is to be finished with enamel paint,
one undercoat and two finishing coats of gloss enamel paint shall be applied. If the board
is to be finished with emulsion paint, two coats of emulsion paint shall be applied. Where
repainting to existing enamel paint finished chipboard is required, the following procedure
shall be adhered to. If the paintwork is still intact, it shall be rubbed down with fine sand
paper to the approval of the S.O. Then one coat of undercoat shall be applied followed
by one coat of gloss enamel paint. Where cracking and flaking has occurred, the entire
existing paint shall be removed by burning off, as approved by the S.O. The surface shall
then be thoroughly cleaned and shall be applied with one undercoat and finished with two
coats of gloss enamel paint. Where repainting to existing emulsion paint finished
chipboard is required, the surface shall then be thoroughly cleaned and applied with two
coats of emulsion paint.
6.2
Hardboard Surfaces
Before painting to hardboard, all nail holes, crevices and the like shall be filled with
approved putty. The surface shall then be applied with two coats of emulsion paint unless
otherwise specified.
6.3
Wood Cement Board Surfaces

Before painting to wood cement board, all nail holes, crevices and the like shall be filled
with approved filling compound of alkali resistant type. The surface shall then be lightly
sanded and any dust should be removed from the surface with a piece of clean, coarse
cloth. The surface shall then be applied with two coats of emulsion paint unless otherwise
specified.
7.
Painting to Gypsum Board and The Like

7.1
8.
Before painting the surfaces shall be clean and free from dirt. The surfaces shall then be
applied with two coats of emulsion paint. Similar procedure shall be followed where
repainting to existing painted surfaces is required.
Painting to Laboratory Bench Tops

8.1
Timber tops of benches in laboratories that are required to be painted shall be prepared
as described hereinbefore for timberwork. The surfaces shall then be applied with one
coat aluminium wood primer followed by one coat approved chemical resistant primer
and finished with two coats of approved chemical resistant gloss enamel paint in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Where repainting to existing timber tops
laboratory benches is required, the surfaces shall be rubbed down lightly with fine sand
paper. The surfaces shall then be thoroughly cleaned and shall be applied with one coat
M/4
Painting Work
of approved chemical resistant primer followed by one coat of approved chemical

resistant gloss enamel paint.
9.
Varnishing
9.1
Varnishing to New Timberwork

9.1.1
9.2
Revarnishing to Existing Timberwork

9.2.1
10.
The surfaces to be varnished shall be smoothened with fine sand paper and all
crevices, holes and the like, if any, shall be filled with approved whiting. It shall
be clean, dry, free from dust, dirt and wax before the application of varnish.
Unless otherwise approved by the S.O, the surfaces shall be applied with two
coats of approved varnishing mixture used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Where non patented products are allowed to be
used, the varnishing mixture shall consists of methylated spirit, shellac and
approved stain forming the first coat followed by one coat of an approved mixture
consisting of thinner and lacquer. The mixtures shall be of uniform consistency
throughout. Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the finish shall be gloss.
Where revarnishing to timberwork is stated in the Drawings or described in the

Bills of Quantities, the surface shall first be thoroughly scuffed to remove the
existing varnish. The surface shall then be smoothened with fine sand paper,
cleaned, dried and free from dust, dirt and wax. It shall then be varnished as
described hereinbefore for new timberwork.
Completion of Painting Work

10.1
On completion of paintwork, all paint marks inadvertently left on glass, floors, tiles and
other surfaces shall be removed. Any stain or marking on finished paintwork shall be
removed and touched up to the approval of the S.O.
M/5
Painting Work
SCHEDULE OF PAINT FINISH - (Ref. Cl.1.6)
Surfaces to be painted
1.0
Masonry
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
Plastered surfaces
1.1.1 Internally
1.1.2 Externally
Concrete blockwalls and grillwork
1.2.1 Internally
1.2.2 Externally
Fair-faced brickwork (externally)
Fair-faced concrete and other self-finished
plastered surfaces such as Shanghai plaster,
terrazzo, etc. (externally)
Stonework (externally)
Emulsion
Weather resistant acrylic
Emulsion
Weather resistant acrylic
Water repellant solution
Timberwork
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.0
Type of paint
Wrot timber surfaces including plywood

(other than 2.2 and 2.3)
Timber ceiling
Joinery fittings
Enamel
Stain and varnish
Stain and varnish
Timber-based products
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
Chipboard ceiling
Chipboard panelling
Hardboard
Other timber boards
Emulsion
Enamel
Emulsion
Emulsion
4.0
Gypsumboard and the like
Emulsion
5.0
Steel and Metalwork
Enamel
M/6
Painting Work
APPENDIX M/1
WEATHER RESISTANT ACRYLIC PAINT PERFORMANCE WARRANTY
1.0
Coverage of Performance Warranty

We .................................. the paint Manufacturer hereby warrants that for a period of three (3)
years from the date of Practical Completion, the paint system shall not be affected by the following
defects:
Peeling
This condition is manifested when the paint film peels away or detaches from the
substrate
Cracking
This condition is manifested by any visible cracking on the paint film other than that
caused by plastering cracks and structural defects.
Fungus/Algae Growth
This condition is established when there is growth of micro organisms on the surface of
paint films which results in the marring of the appearance of the paint film through
discoloration.
Discoloration
This condition occurs when the coating loses its original color in patches and excessive
discoloration appears.
In the event of the occurrence of any defects covered under this warranty the Manufacturer shall
take rectification action at his own cost.
2.0
Exclusion of Performance Warranty

This warranty is subject to the following conditions:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
The applicator is to be approved by the Manufacturer

The Manufacturer reserves the right to inspect and test the paintwork as and when
necessary.
The substrate must not be affected by seepage and constant dampness in the wall.
If the walls are persistently damp with a moisture content above 15% as per reading of
protimeter, this warranty, is not valid. Such high levels of moisture will cause the paint to
fail and exhibit watermarks, discoloration, peeling or flaking which are not covered by this
warranty. The onus is on the paint Manufacturer to substantiate the evidence.
This warranty does not cover any defect, damage or deterioration of the paint system
arising from the structural defects, mechanical / electrical causes, physical knocks, job
damage, accumulation of atmospheric dirt, stains on the paint system or repair work by
others without notification to the Manufacturer.
Claims for incidental or consequential damages resulting from a breach of this warranty
are specifically excluded.
M/7
Painting Work
3.0
Procedure for Claims

i)
Any defect claims shall be made in writing and delivered by post or by hand to the
Manufacturer.
ii)
A technical team from the Manufacturer will be despatched to evaluate the nature of the
claim. Should their findings conclude the defects as within the scope of warranty, then
the Manufacturer shall make good such defects.
iii)
Should the Manufacturers technical team conclude that the defect falls under the
Exclusion of Performance Warranty or other factors alien to the scope of warranty, the
Manufacturer will not be held responsible for the claim.
iv)
Should the Government disagree with the conclusion of the technical team pertaining to
the defects in particular, then an independent third party competent in such technical
evaluation shall be appointed to investigate the disputed defects.
The appointment must seek prior mutual agreement between the Government and the
Manufacturer.
The findings of the independent third party shall be conclusive and
by the Government and the Manufacturer.
mutually accepted
v)
If the finding of the independent third party are within the coverage of this performance
warranty, all cost shall be borne by the manufacturer; otherwise such cost shall be borne
by the Contractor.
vi)
All claims for the defects must be received by the Manufacturer not later than 14 days
from the expiry of the warranty period.
Manufacturer
------------------------------------------------Company Stamp
------------------------------------------------Signature
------------------------------------------------Name
Date
-------------------------------------------------
Witness
------------------------------------------------Company Stamp
------------------------------------------------Signature
------------------------------------------------Name
Date
------------------------------------------------M/8
Painting Work
SECTION N - EXTERNAL WORKS
SECTION N.1 - ROADS AND HARDSTANDING
1.
General
1.1
2.
The construction of roads and hardstanding shall generally be carried out only after
completion of all drainage systems, services and ducts which may affect the Works,
unless otherwise agreed by the S.O.
Subgrade
2.1
Material for the top 300mm of subgrade shall have a minimum soaked laboratory
California Bearing Ratio (CBR) of 5% when compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5 kg Heavy Rammed Method).
2.2
Throughout the top 300mm of subgrade, the materials shall be compacted to not less
than 95% of the maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5
kg Heavy Rammed Method).
2.3
In cut area, the top 300mm of the subgrade shall be scarified and recompacted to 95% of
the maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5 kg Heavy
Rammed Method). If the S.O. is fully satisfied that the subgrade in its natural state
possesses a density exceeding the requirements, then the surface of the subgrade shall
be trimmed and rolled to obtain a smooth finish.
2.4
Where the material in cut area is found to be unsuitable for use in the top 300mm of
subgrade or to a suitable level to be determined by the S.O., it shall be removed and
replaced with suitable material which shall be compacted as indicated above.
Alternatively, stabilizing agent may be used subjected to the S.O. approval.
2.5
The subgrade shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner, and the widths of
embankments and cuts shall be everywhere at least of those specified or shown in the
Drawings on both sides of the centreline. The top surface of the subgrade shall have the
required shape, superelevation, levels and grades and shall be finished everywhere to
within + 10mm and - 30mm of the required level.
i.
Where rock surfaces extend over the whole width of the formation:
The rock surface shall be trimmed to a free draining profile, at or below formation
levels. No high spot shall protrude above the formation level.
Any voids or cavities more than 0.5 metres below the formation level shall be
filled up with approved lean concrete having 7-day cube strength greater than 7
N/sq.mm. The rock surface shall then be brought up to the formation levels with
approved crushed rock or gravel, regulated and blinded.
ii.
Where rock outcrop occurs over part of the formation only: The rock outcrop shall be cut down to at least the formation level.
3.
Lower Subbase
3.1
Where shown or stated in the Drawings, this work shall consist of furnishing, placing,
compacting and shaping lower subbase material on a prepared and accepted subgrade
N/1
External Works
in accordance with this Specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and crosssections shown in the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
3.2
The lower subbase material shall be of inorganic soil, sand, gravel, weathered or
fragmented rock, or a mixture of any of these materials, essentially free from vegetative
and other organic matter.
3.3
Prior to placing any lower subbase material, the underlying subgrade (particularly the top
300mm of the subgrade) shall have been shaped and compacted in accordance with the
provisions of subsection 2. Notwithstanding any earlier approval of finished subgrade,
any damage to or deterioration of the subgrade shall be made good to the satisfaction of
the S.O. before the lower subbase is constructed.
The lower subbase shall be placed over the full width of the formation to the required
thickness as shown in the Drawings or directed by the S.O. in one layer or more, each
layer not exceeding 200mm compacted thickness. Where two or more layers are
required, they shall be of approximately equal thickness and none shall be less than
100mm compacted thickness.
Each layer of lower subbase shall be processed as necessary to bring its moisture
content to a uniform level throughout the material suitable for compaction, and shall then
be compacted using suitable compaction equipment approved by the S.O. to not less
than 95% of the maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5
kg Heavy Rammer Method). Compaction shall be carried out in a longitudinal direction
along the formation and shall generally begin at the outer edge and progress uniformly
toward the crown on each side in such a manner that each section receives equal
compactive effort, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
The lower subbase shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner, and its average
thickness over any 100-metre length shall not be less than the required thickness. The
top surface of the lower subbase shall have the required shaped, superelevation, levels
and grades and shall be everywhere within the tolerances specified in subsection 8.
4.
Subbase
4.1
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, compacting and shaping subbase material
on a prepared and accepted subgrade or lower subbase in accordance with this
Specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown in the
Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
4.2
The subbase material shall be of a natural or prepared aggregate comprising crushed

rock, weathered or fragmented rock, gravel or crushed gravel, sand, or a mixture of any
of these materials. The gradation of the material shall conform to one of the envelopes
shown in Table 1.
N/2
External Works
TABLE 1 - GRADATION LIMITS FOR SUBBASE MATERIAL

BS Sieve
Size
50.0 mm
25.0 mm
9.5 mm
4.75 mm
2.0 mm
425 m
75 m
4.3
% Passing by Weight
A
100
30-65
25-55
15-40
8-20
2-8
100
79-95
40-75
30-60
20-45
15-30
5-20
100
50-85
35-65
25-50
15-30
5-20
100
60-100
50-85
40-70
25-45
5-20
100
55-100
40-100
20-50
6-20
100
70-100
55-100
30-70
8-25
Prior to placing of any subbase material, the underlying subgrade (particularly the top
300mm of the subgrade) or lower subbase shall have been shaped and compacted in
accordance with the provisions of subsection 2 or subsection 3.3 as appropriate.
Notwithstanding any earlier approval or finished subgrade or lower subbase, any damage
to or deterioration of the subgrade or lower subbase shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the S.O. before the subbase is constructed.
The subbase shall be placed with an equipment approved by the S.O. over the full width
of the formation to the required thickness as shown in the Drawings or directed by the
S.O. in one layer or more, each layer not exceeding 200mm compacted thickness. Where
two or more layers are required, they shall be of approximately equal thickness and none
shall be less than 100 mm compacted thickness.
Compaction shall be carried out in a longitudinal direction along the formation and shall
generally begin at the outer edge and progress uniformly toward the centre on each side,
except on superelevated curves where rolling shall begin at the lower edge and progress
uniformly toward the higher edge. In all cases, compaction shall be carried out in such a
manner that each section receives equal compactive effort, all to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
Throughout the placing, adjustment of moisture content and compaction of subbase
material, care shall be taken to maintain a uniform gradation of the material and prevent
its separation into coarse and fine parts, all to the satisfaction of the S.O.
The subbase shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner; its width shall be
everywhere at least of that specified or shown in the Drawings on both sides of the
centreline; and its average thickness over any 100-metre length shall not be less than the
required thickness. The top surface of the subbase shall have the required shape,
superelevation, levels and grades, and shall be everywhere within the tolerances
specified in subsection 8.
5.
Crushed Aggregate Base Course

5.1
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, compacting and shaping crushed aggregate
base course material on a prepared and accepted subgrade or lower subbase or subbase
in accordance with this Specification and the lines, levels, grades, dimensions and crosssections shown in the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
5.2
The crushed aggregate base course material shall be of crushed rock, or crushed gravel,
or a mixture of crushed and natural aggregate, which is hard, durable, clean and
N/3
External Works
essentially free from clay and other deleterious materials.

The material shall conform to the following physical and mechanical quality requirement: i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
The plasticity index shall not be more than 6;

The aggregate crushing value when tested in accordance with MS 30 shall be
not more than 30;
The flakiness index when tested in accordance with MS 30 shall be not more
than 30;
The gradation shall comply with the envelope shown in Table 2 for the type
specified.
TABLE 2
GRADATION LIMITS FOR

CRUSHED AGGREGATE ROAD BASE
BS Sieve
Size
% Passing by Weight
50.0mm
37.5mm
28.0mm
20.0mm
10.0mm
5.0mm
2.36mm
2.00mm
600m
425m
75m
5.3
Type 1
Type 11
100
95 - 100
60 - 80
40 - 60
25 - 40
15 - 30
8 - 22
0-8
100
85 - 100
70 - 100
60 - 90
40 - 65
30 - 55
20 - 40
10 - 25
2 - 10
Prior to the placing of any crushed aggregate base course material, the underlying
subgrade or lower subbase or subbase shall have been shaped and compacted in
accordance with the provisions of the appropriate section of this Specification.
Notwithstanding any earlier approval of finished subgrade or lower subbase or subbase,
any damage to or deterioration of the subgrade or lower subbase or subbase shall be
made good to the satisfaction of the S.O. before crushed aggregate base course is
constructed.
The crushed aggregate base course shall be placed to the required width and thickness
as shown in the Drawings or directed by the S.O. in one layer or more, each layer not
exceeding 200mm compacted thickness. Where two or more layers are required, they
shall be of approximately equal thickness and none shall be less than 100mm compacted
thickness. Spreading shall be done by a mechanical spreader approved by the S.O. or, if
approved by the S.O., by a motor grader.
Prior to spreading, crushed aggregate base course shall be processed as necessary to
bring its moisture content to a uniform level throughout the material suitable for
compaction. Spread material shall be maintained at the correct moisture content for
proper compaction by sprinkling with water or drying as may be necessary, and shall be
compacted using suitable compaction equipment approved by the S.O. to not less than
95% of the maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5 kg
Heavy Rammer Method).
Compaction shall be carried out in a longitudinal direction along the carriageway, and
shall generally begin at the outer edge and progress uniformly toward the centre of each
side, except on superelevated curves where rolling shall begin at the lower edge and
N/4
External Works
progress uniformly toward the higher edge. In all cases, compaction shall be carried out
in such a manner that each section receives equal compactive effort, all to the
satisfaction of the S.O.
Throughout the placing, adjustment of moisture content and compaction of crushed
aggregate road base material, care shall be taken to maintain a uniform gradation of the
material and prevent its separation into coarse and fine parts, all to the satisfaction of the
S.O.
The material shall have a CBR value of not less than 80 when compacted to 95% of the
maximum dry density determined in the BS 1377 Compaction Test (4.5 kg Heavy
Rammer Method) and soaked for 4 days under a surcharge of 4.5 kg.
The crushed aggregate base course shall be finished in a neat and workmanlike manner;
its width shall be everywhere at least of that specified or shown in the Drawings on both
sides of the centrelines; and its average thickness over any 100-metre length shall not be
less than the required thickness. The top surface of the crushed aggregate base course
shall have the required shape, superelevation, levels and grades and shall be
everywhere within the tolerances specified in subsection 7.2.
6.
Binder and Wearing Course

6.1
Asphaltic Concrete
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, this work shall consist of furnishing, placing,
shaping and compacting asphaltic concrete wearing course on a prepared and accepted
bituminous or bitumen primed pavement courses immediately after the application of a
tack coat. The materials shall be supplied in accordance with JKR Specification No.JKR
20401-0029-97 and laid in accordance with the Guidelines for The Laying of Asphaltic
Concrete as described in the same Specification, and to the lines, levels, grades,
dimensions and cross-sections shown in the Drawings and/or as required by the S.O.
6.2
Bituminous Macadam
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, this work shall consist of furnishing, placing,
shaping and compacting bituminous Macadam wearing course on a prepared and
accepted bituminous or bitumen primed pavement course immediately after the
application of a tack coat. The materials shall be supplied in accordance with JKR
Specification No.JKR 20401-0030-97 and laid in accordance with the Guidelines for The
Laying of Bituminous Macadam as described in the same Specification, and to the lines,
levels, grades, dimensions and cross-sections shown in the Drawings and/or as required
by the S.O.
7.
Horizontal Alignment, Surface Levels and Surface Regularity of Pavement Courses

7.1
Horizontal Alignment
The horizontal alignment shall be determined from the centreline of the pavement surface
shown in the Drawings. The edges of the pavement as constructed and all other parallel
construction lines shall be correct within a tolerance of + 50mm and - 0mm from the
centreline. Kerbs, channel blocks and edge lines shall be laid with a smooth alignment
within a tolerance of + 25mm and - 0mm from the centreline.
7.2
Surface Levels of Pavement Courses

The design levels of pavement courses shall be calculated from the vertical profile, cross
fall and pavement course thickness shown in the Drawings. The level of any point on the
N/5
External Works
constructed surface of a pavement course shall be the design level subject to the
appropriate tolerances given in Table 3.
TABLE 3 - TOLERANCES IN SURFACE LEVELS OF PAVEMENT COURSES
Pavement Course
Tolerance
Wearing Course
5mm
Binder
5mm
Road base
+ 0mm
- 20mm
Subbase and Lower Subbase
+ 10mm
- 20mm
The combination of permitted tolerances in the levels of different pavement courses shall
not result in a pavement thickness less than that shown in the Drawings. Each pavement
course shall have an average thickness not less than that shown in the Drawings.
N/6
External Works
SECTION N.2 -SURFACE WATER DRAINAGE AND CULVERTS
1.
Excavation
1.1
Excavation Generally
1.1.1
1.2
Hard Materials/ Rock Excavation

1.2.1
2.
Unless otherwise specified hereunder, all excavation work in this Section shall
be as specified in SECTION C: EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK. Excavation
for all surface water drains and culverts shall be carried out so as not to cause
any danger or obstruction to the traffic or public. It shall be carried out to the
dimensions and levels as shown in the Drawings or as approved by the S.O. All
excavation shall be inspected and approved by the S.O. prior to further work
being carried out. The trench shall first be excavated to a depth of 150mm less
than the depths intended or shown in the Drawings. The remaining excavation
shall be carried out immediately prior to the placing of blinding materials. Should
the bottom of the trench be inadvertently excavated below the specified level, it
shall be brought back at Contractor's expense to the correct level with good
selected earth or sand, carefully rammed into place.
Where hard materials/ rock is encountered in the trench excavation, it shall be

removed to the approval of the S.O. Where layer of rock is encountered along
the bottom of the excavation, it shall be cut and trimmed to the required level. All
voids formed at bottom of the trench by the removal of rocks shall be backfilled to
the required level with 1:3:6-20mm concrete or other suitable materials well
rammed and compacted all to the approval of the S.O. Jagged surfaces of rocks
at the bottom of the excavation due to the trimming shall be levelled and
smoothened with sand blinding to the approval of the S.O.
Surface Water Drains

2.1
Precast Concrete Drains

All precast drain units shall be of concrete (1:2:4-19mm max. aggregate) and shall be of a
dense and impermeable type, free from air holes and other defects and to the approval of
the S.O. The precast drain units shall be cured for seven days before being laid. The unit
shall be in 600mm lengths, true to shape, sizes and dimensions as stated and shall have
smooth internal faces. Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the units shall be laid on
1:3:6-20mm concrete base, 75mm thick, to the proper falls and jointed straight, true to
lines and levels. The joints shall be cement grouted.
2.2
Cascade Drains
Cascade drains shall be constructed from precast concrete drain units and laid stepping
on a 150mm thick bed of mass concrete (1:3:6-20mm) as detailed in the Drawings or as
3.
Culverts
3.1
Pipe Culverts
3.1.1
Pipes
Pipes for culverts shall be of spun reinforced concrete of approved manufacture
complying with MS 881 or any equivalent alternative acceptable and approved by
N/7
External Works
the S.O. with spun concrete collars or spigot and socket type as shown in the
Drawings. On each section of the pipe the following markings shall be clearly
shown: (i)
(ii)
The date of manufacture

The name and trade mark of the manufacturer
The S.O. reserves the right to request for test certificates and to request for tests
to be carried out on samples, all at the Contractor's own cost.
Individual sections of pipes may be rejected due to any of the following: -
3.1.2
(i)
Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except for a single end
crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint.
(ii)
Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning, mixing and moulding.
(iii)
Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
(iv)
Damaged ends where such damage would prevent making a

satisfactory joint.
Laying of pipes
The pipes shall be laid with collars or spigot and socket ends true to lines and
grades as shown in the Drawings or as approved by the S.O. The laying of pipes
and concreting for bedding and haunching shall be carried out strictly in
Unless otherwise specified, the ends of the pipes shall be butts and the collar
centred about the joint using wedges or other approved means. The annular gap
shall then be filled with cement sand mortar (1:3) with only sufficient water added
to ensure adequate workability and the wedges removed before finally fairing the
joint. Special care shall be taken to see that any excess of cement mortar, etc. is
neatly cleaned off while each joint is being made and any earth, cement or other
material thoroughly cleaned out of the pipes by drawing a tight fitting wad
through them as the work proceeds, or by any other approved means.
3.1.3
Haunching and Surround to Pipes

Bedding and haunching of pipes shall be of concrete (1:2:4-19mm) and be
constructed as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall pack the concrete
under and around the pipes to ensure an even bedding and solidity in the
concrete. The concrete shall not be thrown directly onto the pipes. The upper
surfaces of concrete shall be struck off with a wooden screed or template and
neatly finished off.
3.1.4
3.2
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, concrete surrounds shall be carried up

from the bed to a square section with a minimum thickness of 150mm all round
the barrel of the pipes.
Box Culvert
3.2.1
Concrete Boxes
Reinforced concrete box culverts shall be of precast concrete of approved
manufacture complying with MS 1293 or any equivalent alternative acceptable
and approved by the S.O. Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the box shall
be capable of withstanding a proof load test of 112.5 kN applied over an area of
N/8
External Works
320mm x 320mm at any position on the cover slab. The S.O. reserves the right
to call for test certificates on the concrete boxes supplied.
3.2.2
Individual sections of the box may be rejected because of such defects specified
hereinbefore for pipe culverts.
3.2.3
Laying of Concrete Boxes

Box culvert units shall be laid as close as possible and the maximum gap in
between shall not be more than 13mm and the difference in level, not more than
3mm. The gap shall be filled with cement mortar (1:3) and finished smooth. To
ensure uniform bearing, a layer of cement grout shall be spread along the top of
the walls of the invert where the lid will sit.
4.
Backfilling of Trench
4.1
Backfilling of trenches shall be carried out immediately after completion of drain laying or
installation of culverts and as soon as the S.O. has inspected and given his approval.
4.2
In backfilling the trenches for drains, approved fill materials shall be placed evenly in
layers not exceeding 150mm. To provide uniform support, loosed thickness of fill
materials on both sides of the drain shall be thoroughly compacted with mechanical
rammers. This procedure shall be followed for the whole depth of drain section.
4.3
In backfilling of trenches for culverts, heavy earth moving and compacting equipments
shall not operate closer than 2 metres to the culvert until covered to at least one fourth of
the depth of the culvert, but in no case less than 600mm. Light weight equipments may
be operated within the above limitation after the embankment has been placed and
compacted to give a minimum cover of 300mm over the top of the culvert.
N/9
External Works
SECTION N.3 - FENCE AND GATES
1.
2.
3.
General
1.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, fencing shall be of chain link type as specified
hereunder.
1.2
Unless otherwise stated in the Drawings, the height of the fence shall be 1500mm from
the ground up to the full height of the chain link.
1.3
The fence shall be erected to the extent and location as shown in the site plan. Where
fencing is to be located on the boundary of the Site, the Contractor shall ensure that its
construction shall not infringe the adjoining properties.
Mild Steel Post and Bracings

2.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, mild steel angle posts and bracings shall be of
size 57mm x 57mm x 6mm. All steel members for fencing and gates shall be free from
rust, scales and other defects and shall be to the approval of the S.O. Previously used
steel members shall not be used in the construction of new fencing and gates. Before
delivery to the Site, the steel members for fencing and gates shall be precut and
assembled at the Contractor's workshop and painted with one coat of approved metallic
primer.
2.2
Where three strands of barbed wires are required, a mild steel angle arm 430mm long, of
the same cross sectional dimension as the post shall be welded at the top of the post at
45 degrees inclination. Where six strands of barbed wires are required, two pieces of
mild steel angle arms as specified hereinbefore shall be welded to the top of each post
forming the shape 'Y' with each arm having three strands of barbed wires. The welding
used shall be of continuous fillet welds. Necessary holes shall be made in the posts,
arms and bracings for insertions of fixing bolts and clips.
Chain Link Mesh, Straining

3.1
4.
Chain link mesh, straining wires and barbed wires shall be made of galvanized steel and
of approved quality. The mesh shall be of size 64mm made up of 3.25mm (10 gauge)
diameter wire. Straining wires shall be of 4.06mm (8 gauge) diameters and barbed wires
shall be of 2.64mm (12 gauge) diameters.
Fencing
4.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, the mild steel angle posts shall be erected at
3000mm centres commencing from the gate post and the posts shall be embedded
plumb in 1:3:6-25mm concrete footings of size 250mm x 250mm x 600mm deep. Mild
steel angle bracings of the same cross sectional dimensions as the post shall be fixed at
all corners, bends, junctions, gate posts and at every five bays of straight fencing.
4.2
The bracings shall be fixed at an inclination of 45 degrees to the horizontal with top end
bolted to the post, 300mm below the top of the post and the bottom end encased in
concrete footing as described hereinbefore.
4.3
The chain link mesh shall be stretched across the posts and secured in place using
approved fencing clips. The end of chain link fencing abutting mild steel gate posts shall
be fixed by means of 19mm x 3mm mild steel flat straps drawn through the mesh and
bolted using 10mm diameter mild steel bolts to 25mm x 25mm x 6mm mild steel plates
N/10
External Works
welded to the posts at equal intervals of 300mm. Where gate posts are non metal, the
termination of the fencing at the gate shall be by means of another mild steel angle post
fixed to one side of the gate post and strengthened by bracing as described hereinbefore.
The chain link mesh shall then be strained by three strands of 4.06mm (8 gauge)
diameter galvanized steel straining wires threaded through the mesh and fixed to the
posts.
4.4
5.
Gates
5.1
6.
Where shown in the Drawings, the bottom of the chain link mesh shall be buried in
continuous 1:3:6-25mm concrete curbs. Unless otherwise detailed in the Drawings, the
cross-sectional dimension of curbs shall be 125mm wide x 375mm high with 150mm
protruding above the ground. The portion of the curb above the ground shall be rendered
with 13mm thick 1:6 cement render to a wood float finish.
The gates shall be constructed as detailed in the Drawings.
Painting of Fence and Gates

6.1
The metallic primer previously applied to the steelwork at the workshop shall be touched
up where necessary. Unless otherwise specified, the posts, bracings and gates shall be
finished with two coats of approved aluminium paint.
N/11
External Works
SECTION N.4 - LANDSCAPING AND TURFING
1.
2.
General
1.1
All landscaping works shall be as shown in the Drawings. All turfing and tree planting
shall be carried out in such a manner as to minimise risks of damage to turfs and plants,
and stunted growth. Turfing on all slopes shall be carried out immediately after slopes are
formed. Tree planting shall be carried out as soon as practicable.
1.2
All landscaping works shall start as early as possible so that trees and plants are well
grown, and fully adapted to the new environment when the project concerned is handed
over upon completion.
1.3
All landscaping works shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor as
specified herein, or as shown in the Drawings, using the best horticultural management,
giving special attention to planting practices, soil mixtures, and application of agricultural
chemicals.
Classifications and Characteristics of Plants

2.1
2.2
3.
Plants shall mean trees, palms, shrubs, ground covers, and plants of other descriptions
to be provided by the Contractor, as shown in the Drawings or listed in the plant
schedules.
2.1.1
Each tree shall possess characteristics of its variety and growth typical to such
tree. All trees shall be well-branched, with straight trunks characteristic of the
species, with well-shaped top and intact leader. The height shall be measured
from the stem's earth line to the top of the tree.
2.1.2
Palms shall have vigorous root system, crown of new leaves, proper colour of
leaves of adult palms, and sufficient hardlines. The height of palms shall be
measured from the stem's earth line to the base of the first frond.
2.1.3
Shrubs and vines shall possess characteristics and growth habits typical of their
species. All shrubs shall be well-shaped and bushy, with well-spaced branches,
and not skinny. The height of shrubs or vines shall be measured from the stem's
earth line to the top branches.
2.1.4
Ground cover is defined as any plant or groups of plant, other than grasses,
which shall satisfactorily cover the ground, forming a compact and attractive
cover.
All plants shall be in healthy growth condition, free from pests and diseases, and shall be
representatives of their normal species or variety. All plants shall have well-branched
heads and vigorous root systems, and shall be injury-free. Unless otherwise shown or
specified in the Drawings, only nursery-grown plants shall be used. Plants which are
potted or plastic-bag-grown shall not be root-bound.
Size of Plants
3.1
The size of plants refers to plantable size i.e. the size that is required for planting out on
sites. All plants shall have the following sizes:3.1.1
Ground Covers
Ground cover plants can be supplied in plastic bags. If supplied in 150mm-size
N/12
External Works
bags, they shall have at least nine (9) cuttings per bag, and not less than 150mm
long.
3.1.2
Shrubs
Height of shrubs shall range between 150mm and 1000mm.
3.1.3
Trees
Trees shall be either container-grown, or grown on the open ground. They shall
be of the following three types:i.
Tree Saplings
Tree saplings shall mean trees grown from seedlings or cuttings. They
shall have straight main stems of not less than 1200mm in height from
the soil level to the lowest branch, and a stem diameter of 12mm, and a
well-branching system.
ii.
Rooted Stump Cuttings

These refer to plants which can be easily grown from stem cuttings
instead of from seeds. They shall have straight main stems of 2400mm
to 3000mm in height, with a diameter ranging from 37mm to 50mm.
iii.
Instant Trees
An instant tree is generally referred to the semi-mature tree with a
minimum trunk height of 2000mm for palms (measured from earth line to
first frond), and 3000mm for other trees which shall have well-spread
branches.
3.1.4
Palms
Palms shall be either container-grown or grown on the open ground, and shall be
of two types:i.
Single-Stem Palms
These refer to palms with single main trunk. Their trunk height shall be
not less than 1200mm measured from the earth line to the base of the
first frond.
ii.
Cluster Palms
The palms referred to are those which grow in clusters. They shall have
a minimum of three (3) palms clustered together, measuring 750mm to
1000mm from the earth line to the base of the first frond.
4.
Handling and Transplanting

4.1
Handling
Plants shall be transported, handled and stored in such a manner as to prevent
deterioration, damage or contamination. All plant materials shall be carefully protected
and, if necessary, wrapped with hessian or gunny cloth during lifting, transportation,
unloading and storage on site.
N/13
External Works
4.2
Transplanting
4.2.1
Pits
Generally all pits for palms and trees shall not be less than 1000mm x 1000mm x
1000mm OR 1/3 size bigger than the root ball, spaced at intervals as shown in
the Drawings or approved by the S.O.
For shrubs, the pit size may be reduced to 500mm x 500mm x 500mm deep (for
big shrubs), or 300mm x 300mm x 300mm deep (for medium shrubs).
Alternatively, continuous trench 500mm or 300mm deep respectively, shall be
formed where required.
The bottom of all pits and trenches shall be forked loose to a depth of 300mm
prior to backfilling with approved soil mixture before transplanting. All pits and
trenches shall be soaked with water before planting.
Flower beds or trenches shall be made to the size as shown in the Drawings,
and to a depth not exceeding 200mm.
4.2.2
Transplanting
Transplanting shall not be carried out in very hot, dry weather conditions which
may result in initial drying out of the root system and / or scorching of leaves.
Immediately before transplanting, the plants shall be carefully removed from the
nursery bags or pots. The plants shall be placed into the pits and the surround
filled with approved black earth making sure that the roots are not excessively
disturbed. The earth around the base of the stems shall be recessed slightly to
facilitate watering.
4.2.3
Plant Supports
All newly planted plants shall be supported either by staking, tying or guying.
Stakes shall be of wood, steel or plastic of an approved type, driven into the
ground before planting so as not to damage the root ball or aerial parts of plants.
Stakes shall be long enough to penetrate the undug soil to come flush with the
lower branches of the plants and to be released during maintenance. Ties shall
be nailed to the stakes, not the plants, with one (1) tie per stake set 150mm from
the bottom.
5.
Soil Mixture, Soil Conditioners and Chemical Fertilisers

5.1
Soil Mixture
Soil mixture for ground planting and backfill shall be in the ratio of 1:3, i.e. 1 part of soil
conditioner or organic materials to 3 parts of black earth.
Planter box soil mixture shall be in the ratio of 1:2:3, i.e. 1 part of sand to 2 parts soil
conditioner or organic materials to 3 parts black earth.
5.2
Black Earth
Black earth shall consist of fertile and friable topsoil obtained from a well-drained floodfree site. It shall be of medium texture and without admixture of stones, lumps, plants or
roots, and other extraneous matter. It shall be delivered or used in a damp state.
N/14
External Works
5.3
Soil Conditioners
Soil conditioners shall be organic materials such as composted coconut fibre, peat or
other approved materials which shall be composted in a stable condition, free from toxic
impurities and containing no substance injurious to plants. The organic matter with 45%55% moisture content and with Ph adjusted to 5.5 - 6.5 shall be used.
5.4
Chemical Fertilisers
Chemical fertilisers shall be granular slow release compound fertilisers with a minimum
four (4) month release period at 32 degrees Celsius. They shall be stored in waterproof
sealed bags and kept under shelter. The Contractor shall submit manufacturers technical
data on the proposed fertiliser for the S.O.s approval prior to the application of the
fertiliser.
6.
Turfing
6.1
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, turfing shall be provided to all exposed earth
surfaces throughout the site. All surfaces to be turfed shall be completely cleared of all
incidental Contractor's debris, stone and other obstructions.
6.2
The ground to be turfed shall be graded to fall towards surface water discharge line as
shown in the Drawings, or approved by the S.O.
On level ground, minimum gradient of 1:60 shall be provided to eliminate ponding
hollows. Any undesirable vegetation, debris, stumps or roots shall be grubbed up and
removed from the site.
6.3
50mm black earth shall be provided on a prepared surface, and compacted to provide a
suitable tilt for the growth of the turf.
6.4
All turfs shall be of good, healthy, dense indigenous cow grass (Axonopus Compressus)
from an approved source. The grass shall be of even density, vigorous growth and green
in colour, forming a turf sufficiently fibrous to hold together when installed. They shall be
free from lalang, mimosa, weeds or other foreign vegetation.
Each turf shall be approximately 300mm x 300mm x 50mm thick with roots still attached
to the soil. They shall be kept moist and in shade, and shall be planted within 24 hours of
lifting. Samples of turfs to be used shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval before any
turfs are brought in for use. The sources of material shall be stated by the Contractor.
6.5
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, close turfing shall be provided to slopes, and
extending two (2) metres of the platform at the top and bottom of the slope, one (1) metre
to the sides of all drains, and two (2) metres wide of road shoulders, so that they cover
the whole area without any space/gap between them.
Each sod shall be pegged in place with wooden/bamboo pegs 12mm diameter and
200mm long through the sod and into the soil base. These pegs shall be removed after
the turfs have firmly established. On steep slopes, netting shall be laid onto the turfed
areas for protection.
6.6
Unless otherwise shown in the Drawings, spot turfing shall be carried out on all level
ground. The turf shall be laid at 450mm centres, embedded 25mm in the black earth.
6.7
Turfs shall be fertilised with approved slow release fertilisers high in Nitrogen content,
one (1) month after planting at the rate of 60gm/sq.metre area, and evenly spread over
the whole area. The turfs shall be well watered after each fertiliser application which shall
be done once in every three months after grass cutting.
N/15
External Works
6.8
7.
Grass cutting shall be done every three weeks after one (1) month growth/establishment
by grass cutter/mower as often as is required to give a well trimmed sod not more than
25mm in height for flat surfaces and not less than 50mm on slope. All clippings shall be
removed from the site before watering is carried out.
Football and Playing Fields

7.1
General
Unless otherwise specified hereinafter, turfing for football and playing fields shall be as
specified hereinbefore. Turfing works shall start as soon as possible and shall be
completed and fully established not later than three (3) months before the date of
completion of the Works. The supply and installation of subsoil drains shall be as
specified hereinafter at the locations and in accordance with the lines, levels and grades
shown in the Drawings and/ or as directed by the S.O.
7.2
Materials
7.2.1
Sub-soil Drain Pipes

Subsoil drain pipes shall be of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) peforated
corrugated drainage pipe to DIN 16961 PT 1&2:1989 or equivalent, or Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) pipes for subsoil drains complying with Australian Standard
Specification 2439.1 or BS 3656 or equivalent, of diameter and lengths of pipe as
shown in the Drawings.
7.2.2
Filter Materials
Filter materials shall consist of an angular, clean, hard and durable crush rock
with uniformly sized particle of 14mm, free from lumps of clay or organic matter.
7.2.3
Geotextile Fabric
Geotextile fabric shall be of non-woven type thermally bonded with minimum
weight of 100g/m2, or equivalent and shall be of approved manufacture.
7.3
Site Preparation
The site area shall be completely cleared of all debris, large stones, discarded gravel and
other unacceptable materials. The site shall then be graded to form a crown at the centre
of the field with a minimum gradient of 1:300. The soil shall be of good texture and
structure with the majority of the crumbs of size 1mm to 2mm and not contaminated with
seeds, stolon or rhizomes of noxious weeds.
7.4
Trenching For Sub-soil Drain Pipes

Trenches shall be excavated and trimmed clean true to grade and alignment and the
geotextile fabric shall be laid as shown in the Drawings. The fabric shall overlap the full
width of the trench at the top. Where the fabric requires jointing along the trench, it shall
overlap a minimum of 500mm at the joint.
7.5
Laying and Jointing Subsoil Drain Pipe

Subsoil pipe shall be laid and bedded as detailed in the Drawings. Subsoil drain pipe
shall be jointed according to the manufacturers recommendations.
N/16
External Works
7.6
Backfilling
The trench shall be backfilled with the filter material in layers not exceeding 150mm loose
thickness and uniformly compacted by suitable method approved by the SO to the level
as shown in the Drawings. Care shall be taken that the pipe is not damaged or displaced.
7.7
Outlets
Outlets shall be constructed as shown in the Drawings.
7.8
Laying of Sand and Turf Mixture

The prepared surface of the field shall be laid with a first layer of 100mm thick river sand
or other suitable course grained granular materials, and a second layer of 100mm thick
turf mixture before receiving the turf.
The Contractor shall carry out final gradient check prior to the turfing works.
Before turfing works commence, the Contractor shall submit samples of the turf mixture
for the approval of the S.O. The turf mixture shall be laid to the required formation level
and gradient.
The turf mixture shall have the following composition by weight of 4% - 5% organic
matter, 12% - 15% clay and 81% - 85% river sand. The PH value for the root zone
medium shall be 5 to 7.5.
7.9
Inspections
The Contractor shall give not less than twenty-four (24) hour notice prior to the
commencement and upon completion of the under mentioned works. The Contractor
shall not proceed with the next succeeding operation until specific approval has been
given for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
7.10
Trench excavation.
Trench lining with geotextile fabric and laying of subsoil drain pipe.
Filter material backfill.
Sand laying.
Turf mixture.
Turfing works.
Levelling of Field
The turf shall be compacted with a roller weighing not more than one (1) tonne once a
month. The roller shall be of sufficient weight to press the roots firmly into the soil to
produce a close, well knit surface without over-compaction and binding of the soil.
7.11
Watering
The Contractor shall water the turf at least twice a day or as instructed by the S.O.
The rate of application and frequency of watering shall be sufficient to maintain the turf
mixture in a moist condition to ensure proper and healthy growth of the turf even during
the dry weather.
Water shall be applied as fine spray by means of suitable pumps and hose or sprinkler or
any other method approved by the S.O so as not to disturb the turf mixture.
N/17
External Works
7.12
Weed Control
Weeding shall be carried out on the newly turfed area about ten (10) days after planting
to get rid of foreign species and maintain a pure culture of Axonopus Compressus (Cow
Grass). Weeding on a continuous basis shall be carried out to prevent weeds from
growing.
7.13
Fertilisation
The first fertilisation shall be carried out two (2) weeks after planting, using mechanical
spreader. Subsequently, the fertiliser shall be applied at three (3) weeks interval.
7.14
Mowing
Mowing shall be carried out using properly sharpened and adjusted machine tools so that
the turf is cut cleanly and no tearing takes place.
The first cut shall be carried out when the turf reaches 50mm - 70mm in height. The turf
shall be cut to 25mm - 30mm in height. Subsequently, mowing shall be done at least
once in every two (2) weeks.
7.15
Top Dressing
The Contractor shall, from time to time or whenever directed by the S.O, check the
flatness of the field and if found uneven, rectify by top dressing with turf mixture and
followed by proper compaction.
7.16
Maintenance During Defect Liability Period

The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out full-time intensive maintenance of
the turfing works for the entire duration of the Defect Liability Period of the Works.
The maintenance includes watering, weed control, fertilisation, moving and top dressing,
all as specified hereinbefore.
7.17
Handing Over of The Works

On handing over of the works, the field shall be in good playable condition with all the full
line markings to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings.
8.
Relocation and Protection of Existing Trees

8.1
Relocation of Trees
Where shown in the Drawings or if directed by the S.O, all existing trees having girth of
300mm and below identified and marked for relocation, shall not be cut, but shall be dug
up, prepared for, and relocated by the Contractor to other areas within, or in the vicinity of
the site. In the event of any such trees being accidentally cut or damaged, the same shall
be replaced with trees of equivalent size and species by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall protect and maintain the relocated trees by fencing to a height of 1.2meter, watering,
manuring, pruning, and other necessary treatments throughout the contract period
(including the Defects Liability Period) until satisfactory growth is established. Any
relocated trees which are accidentally damaged, or fail to re-grow satisfactorily within the
Defect Liability Period, shall be replaced accordingly at the Contractors own cost.
8.2
Protection of Trees Retained On Site

All existing trees having girth of 800mm and above identified and marked by the S.O to
N/18
External Works
be retained on site, shall be protected and maintained by fencing to a height of 1.2meter,

watering, manuring, pruning, and other necessary treatments throughout the contract
(including the Defects Liability Period)so as not to jeopardise their growth. The ground
around the tree spread shall be protected to prevent contamination from materials and
chemicals detrimental to plant growth. Method of protection shall be to the approval of
the S.O. In the event of any such trees being accidentally or otherwise cut or damaged,
the same shall be replaced by the Contractor with trees of equivalent size and species at
his own cost.
9.
Maintenance of Plant and Turf

9.1
9.2
General
9.1.1
After planting and prior to the onset of the maintenance period, the Contractor
shall be responsible for carrying out all necessary measures to ensure that all
plant materials and turfing thrive and become established, and that the
landscaped areas are kept in a clean and tidy condition.
9.1.2
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the plants and turfing from any
damage and destruction, by way of watering, manuring and tilling, and by staking
and fencing, where necessary, to support and protect the plants, until the end of
the Defects Liability Period. All plants and turfs which are defective and / or fail
to grow within the Defects Liability Period, shall be replaced and / or replanted
accordingly, at the Contractor's own cost.
Weeding and Hoeing

9.2.1
9.3
Weeding and hoeing shall be done frequently, depending on weed growth or

whenever directed to do so by the S.O. The Contractor shall be responsible for
maintaining areas close to the base of trees or shrubs. Weeding shall be done
manually by hoeing (cangkul) or forking at least once a month, with care taken
not to wound plant stems.
Fertilisers and Application Rate

9.3.1
Feeding to plants shall be done with an approved organic manure or slow

release fertilisers at regular intervals to maintain healthy growth. The S.O.
reserves the right to request the Contractor to use any kind of fertiliser, let it be
straight mixture, complex or slow release fertiliser, at the Contractors own cost.
9.3.2
Six (6) applications shall be required during the maintenance period. The first
shall be carried out during the second (2nd) month after planting. The second
and subsequent applications shall be worked into the soil above the roots, and
lightly watered in. The fertiliser shall be applied, preferably, when the plants are
in their active stage of growth.
9.3.3
Slow release fertilisers shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturers directions and recommendations.
9.3.4
The Contractor shall take note that plant feeding shall be carried out only after all
other maintenance works like weeding, hoeing and trimming or pruning have
been carried out.
N/19
External Works
LIST OF STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

REFERRED TO IN THIS SPECIFICATION
REFERENCE
TITLE
MALAYSIAN STANDARDS (MS)
MS 26
Pt.1:1991
Methods of testing concrete - Pt.1: Methods of sampling fresh concrete
Pt 2:1991
Methods of testing concrete - Pt.2: Methods of testing hardened concrete
Pt.3:1992
Methods of testing concrete - Pt.3: Recommendations for use of non-destructive testing of concrete
MS 27:1996
Specification for precast concrete masonry units
MS 28:1985
Specification for test for water for making concrete (First revision)
MS 29:1995
Specification for aggregates from natural sources for concrete (First revision)
MS 30:1971
Methods of sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, sands and fillers
MS 30
Pt.1:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 1: General requirements for apparatus and calibration
Pt.2:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 2: Guide to sampling and testing aggregates.
Pt.3:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 3: Methods for sampling.
Pt.4:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 4: Methods for determinations of particle size distribution (First revision).
Pt.5:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 5: Methods for determinations of particle shape (First revision).
Pt.6:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 6: Methods for determinations of shell content in course aggregates.
Pt.7:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 7: Methods for determinations of moisture content (First revision).
Pt.8:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 8: Methods for determinations of aggregates crushing value (ACV)(First
revision).
Pt.9:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 9: Methods for determinations of ten per cent fines value (TFV).
Pt.10:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 10: Methods for determinations of aggregates impact value (AIV).
Pt.11:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 11: Methods for determinations of resistance to degradation or course
aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles machine (First revision).
Pt.12:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 12: Methods for determinations of polished-stone value (First revision).
Pt.13:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 13: Methods for determinations of water soluble chloride salts.
Pt.14:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 14: Methods for determinations of sulphate content.
Pt.15:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 15: Methods for determinations of acid-soluble material in fine aggregates.
Pt.16:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 16: Methods for testing and classifying shrinkage of aggregates in
concrete.
Pt.17:1995
Methods of testing aggregates - Part 17: Methods for determinations of soundness.
MS 76:1972
Specification for bricks and blocks of fired brick-earth clay or shale
MS 125:1995
Specification for gloss enamel paint
MS 134:1989
Specification for latex emulsion paint for exterior and interior use
MS 144:1987
Specification for cold reduced mild steel wire for the reinforcement of concrete (First revision)
MS 145:1987
Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete (First revision)
MS 146:1988
Specification for hot rolled steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete (First revision)
MS 159:1994
Specification for cut-back bitumen for use in the construction and/or maintenance of pavement (First revision)
REFERENCE
TITLE
MS 161:1994
Specification for cationic bitumen emulsions for use in pavement application
MS 228:1991
Specification for plywood
MS 360:1991
Specification for treatment of timber with copper chrome/arsenic preservatives
MS 522
Pt.1:1989
Specification for portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) Pt.1: Standard specification
Pt.2:1989
Specification for portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) Pt.2: Physical tests
Pt.3:1989
Specification for portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening) Pt.3: Chemical analysis
Pt.4:1989
Specification for portland cement (ordinary and rapid hardening Pt.4: Spectropphotometric analysis of cement.
Pt.1:1993
Specification for concrete, including ready-mixed concrete Pt.1: Guide to specifying concrete
Pt.2:1993
Specification for concrete, including ready-mixed concrete Pt.2: Methods for specifying concrete mixes
Pt.3:1993
Specification for concrete, including ready-mixed concrete Pt.3: Procedures to be used in producing and
transporting concrete
MS 523
Pt.4:1993
Specification for concrete, including ready-mixed concrete Pt.3: Procedures to be used in sampling, testing and
assessing compliance of concrete
MS 544:1978
Code of practice for the structural use of timber
MS 544: Pt. 4:Sec. 1

Sec. 2
Sec. 3
Code of practice for structural use of timber

Permissible stress design of solid timber (first revision)
Permissible stress design of glued laminated timber
Pt. 6
Workmanship, inspection and maintenance (first revision)
MS 602:1979
Specification for flexible, unsupported thick PVC sheeting
MS 622:1986
Specification for vitrified clay pipes and fittings with rigid joints (first revision)
MS 628:1982
Specification for unplasticised PVC pipe for cold water services
MS 628:1999 Pt.1
2.1, 2.2 &
Specification for unplasticised PVC (uPVC) pipe for water supply
MS 672:1999
Specification for elastomeric seals for water works purposes
MS 701
Specification for commercial sand
MS 733:1992
Specification for copper/chrome/arsenic wood preservatives (first revision)
MS 734:1981
Specification for wood preservation by means of pressure creosoting
MS 740:1981
Specification for hot-dip galvanised coatings on iron and steel articles
MS 794
:1982
Specification for masonry cement
MS 797
Pt.1:1982
Specification for concrete interlocking roofing tiles
Pt.2:1982
Code of recommended practice for the installation of concrete interlocking roofing tiles
MS 832:1984
Specification for aluminium alloy windows
MS 837:1995
Method for the determination of moisture content for timber
MS 858:1983
Specification for glazed ceramic tiles for internal walls
MS 881
Pt.1:1991
Specification for precast concrete pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage Pt.1: Specification for pipes and
fittings with flexible joints and manholes
Pt.2:1991
Specification for precast pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage: Part 2: Specification for Inspection
Chambers and gullies
Pt.3:1991
Specification for precast concrete pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage Pt.3: Specification for pipes and
fittings with ogee joints
Pt.1:1984
Specification for concrete admixture Pt.1: Accelerating admixtures, retarding admixtures and water reducing
admixtures
MS 922
REFERENCE
TITLE
MS 934:1986
Specification for wood cement board
MS 978:1985
Specification for plastics waste pipe and fittings
MS 979
Specification for unplasticised pvc under ground, sewerage pipe and fittings Pt.1: Pipes of diameter 100
millimeter and 155 millimeter
Pt.1:1985
MS 979 Pt.2
Specification for unplasticised pvc under ground, sewerage pipe and fittings Pt.2: Pipes of diameter 200
millimeter and above
MS 1020:1986
Specification for mineral fibre thermal insulation material
MS 1022:1986
Specification for stop valves for water services (screw down pattern)
MS 1036:1986
Specification for wood chipboard and method of test for particle board
MS 1037
Specification for sulphate-resisting portland cement
MS 1058
Specification for polyethelene (PE) piping system for water supply
MS 1059:1986
Specification for asbestos cement sewer pipes joints and fitting
MS 1061
Specification for vitrified clay pipes and fittings and pipe joints for drains and sewers
MS 1063:1986
Specification for unplasticised PVC soil and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories
MS 1088:1987
Specification for dust pressed ceramic floor tiles
MS 1089:1987
Specification for extruded ceramic floor tiles
MS 1090:1987
Method of sampling ceramic tiles
MS 1091 Pt.1-12:1987
Methods of test for ceramic tiles
MS 1123:1988
Specification for blockboard and laminboard
MS 1135:1989
Specification for float and polished plate glasses
MS 119
Pt.1:1991
Code of practice for structural use of concrete. Pt.1: Design and construction
Pt.2:1991
Code of practice for structural use of concrete. Pt.2: Special circumstances
Pt.3:1991
Code of practice for structural use of concrete. Pt.3: Design charts for singly reinforced beams, doubly
reinforced beam and rectangular columns
MS 1225:1991
Specification for cold water storage and feed expansions cistern (Polyolefin and olefin copolymer) and cistern
lids
MS 1226 Pt.1:1991
Pulverised-fuel Ash Pt.1: Specification for pulverised-fuel ash for use as cementitious in structural concrete.
MS 1227:1991
Specification for portland pulverised-fuel ash cement.
MS 1228:1991
Code of practice for design and insulation of sewerage system
MS 1241:1991
Specification for fibreglass water tanks - effective capacity of less than 2000 litres
MS 1293 Pt.1:1992
Specification for precast concrete box culverts Pt.1: Small culverts.
MS 1304 Pt.1:1993
Specification for treatment of construction timber components with copper/chrome/ arsenic preservatives .Part
1: Timber for roof and ceiling construction
MS 1314 Pt.1:1993
Specification for precast concrete piles Pt.1: Standard design precast concrete pipes.
MS 1302:1993
Specification for light organic solvent preservative treatment of timber
MS 1387:1995
Specification for ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use with portland cement.
MS 1389
Specification for portland blastfurnace cement
MS 1390:1995
Specification for glass reinforced polyester panels and panel water tanks.
MS 1419: Pt.1, 2, 3 & 4
Specification for acrylonitrile butadiene (ABS) pipes and fittings for pressure application
REFERENCE
TITLE
MS 1506:2000
Specification for wooden door
MS 1522:2001
Specification for vitreous china water closet pans (first revision)
JKR SPECIFICATION
JKR-20709-0539-95
Standard specification for precast concrete piles smaller than 200mm for building projects
No.2-95(BN) JKR 20709-0347-95
Standard specification for prepainted galvanised steel sheets for roofing and wall cladding
JKR 20401-0029-97
Standard specification for asphaltic concrete for road pavement
JKR 20401-0030-97
Standard specification for bituminous macadam for road pavement
JKR 20600-0020-99
Standard specification for prefabricated timber roof truss
JKR 20600-0019-99
Standard specification for structural steel work
JKR 20600-0022-2001
Standard specification for prefabricated cold formed steel roof trusses
JKR 20200-0110-01
Standard specification for vitreous china water closet pan
JKR 20200-0041-99
Standard specification for stainless steel water tanks
JKR 20200-0083-00
Standard specification for ductile iron type 3 gate valves for water works purposes (DN 50 to DN
600)
JKR 20200-0114-01
Standard specification for ductile iron automatic control values for water works purposes (DN 15 to
DN 1000)
JKR 20200-0131-01
Standard specification for urinals
JKR 20200-0160-03
Standard specification for WC flushing systems (including (dual flushing system) and flush pipes
(revised edition 2003)
JKR 20200-0136-02
Standard specification for flushing cistern for water closets and urinals
BRITISH STANDARDS (BS)
BS 4
Structural steel section
BS 4 Pt.1:1993
Specification for hot rolled sections
BS 78
Specification for cast iron spigot and socket pipes (vertically cast) and spigot and socket fitting
BS 143
Specification for malleable cast iron and cast copper alloy threaded pipe fittings
BS 402
Clay roofing tiles and fittings
BS 410
Specification for test sieves
BS 416
Discharged and ventilating pipes and fittings, sand-cast or spun in cast iron
BS 417 Pt.2:1987
Metric units
BS 437:1978
Specification for cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes and fittings
BS 476
Fire test on building materials and structures
BS 544:1969 (1994)
Specification for linseed oil putty for use in wooden frame
BS 638
Arc welding power sources, equipment and accessories
BS 638
Pt.4:1996
Specification for welding cables
Pt.7:1984
Specification for safety requirements for installation and use
BS 709:1983
Methods of destructive testing fusion welded joints and weld metal in steel
REFERENCE
TITLE
BS 864 Pt.2:1983
Specification for capillary and compression fittings for copper tubes
BS 1052:1980(1986)
Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes
BS 1091:1963(1980)
Specification for pressed steel gutters, rain water pipes, fittings and accessories
BS 1142:1989
Specification for fibre building board
BS 1191
Specification for gypsum building plaster
BS 1212
Float operated valves
BS 1224:1970
British standard specification for electroplated coating of nickel and chromium
BS 1230 Pt.1:1985
(1994)
Specification for plasterboard excluding materials submitted to secondary operations
BS 1305
Specification for batch type concrete mixers
BS 1369
Steel lathing for internal plastering and external rendering
BS 1370:1979
Specification for low heat portland cement
BS 1377
Methods of test for soil for civil engineering purposes
BS 1387:1985 (1990)
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for
welding or for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
BS 1449 Pt.2:1983
Specification for stainless and heat-resisting steel plate, sheet and strip
BS 1452:1990
Specification for flake graphite cast iron
BS 1474:1987
Specification for wrot aluminium and aluminium alloys for general purposes: bars, extruded round tubes and
sections
BS 1552:1995
Specification for open bottomed taper plug valves for 1 , 2 and 3 family gases up to 200 mbar
BS 1564:1975(1983)
Specification for pressed steel sectional rectangular tanks
BS 1615:1987(1994)
Method for specifying anodic oxidation coatings on aluminium
BS 1881 Pt.101:1983
Method of sampling fresh concrete on site
st
nd
rd
Pt.102:1983
Method of determination of slump
Pt.103:1983
Method of determination of compacting factor
Pt.104:1983
Method of determination of vebe time
Pt.106:1983
Method of determination of air content of fresh concrete
Pt.107:1983
Method of determination of density of compacted fresh water
Pt.108:1983
Method for making test cubes from fresh concrete
Pt.111:1983
Method of normal curing test specimen (20C)
Pt.116:1983
Method of determination of compressive strength of concrete cube
Pt.124:1988
Methods for analysis of hardened concrete
Pt.125:1986
Method of mixing and sampling fresh concrete in the laboratory
Pt.201:1986
Guide to the use of non-destructive methods of test for hardened concrete
BS 2494:1990
Specification for elastomeric seals for joints in pipework and pipelines
BS 2499
Hot-applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements
BS 2499 Pt.1:1993
Specification for joint sealants.
Pt.2:1992
Code of practice for the application and use of joint sealants.
REFERENCE
TITLE
BS 2600
Radiographic examination of fusion welded butt joints in steel
BS 2872:1989
British standard specification for copper and copper alloy forging stock and forgings
BS 2874:1986
British standard specification for copper and copper alloy rods and sections (other than forging stock)
BS 2910:1986
Methods for radiographic examination of fusion welded circumferential butt joints in steel pipes
BS 2989:1991
Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and iron-zinc alloy coated steel of structural qualities: wide
strip, sheet/plate and slit wide strip
BS 3100:1991
Specification for steel casting for general engineering purposes
BS 3260:1969(1996)
Specification for semi-flexible PVC floor
BS 3416:1991
Specification for bitumen-based coating for cold application suitable for use in contact with portable water
BS 3923 Pt.1:1986
Method for manual examination of fusion welds in ferritic steels
Pt.2:1972
Automatic examination of fusion welded butt joints in ferritic steels
BS 3987:1991(1997)
Specification for anodic oxidation coatings on wrought aluminium for external architectural applications
BS 4027:1996
Specification for sulphate-resisting portland cement
BS 4127:1994
Specification for light gauge stainless steel tubes, primarily for water application
BS 4190
Specification for ISO Metric Black Hexagon Bolts, Screws & Nuts
BS 4254:1983(1991)
Specification for two part polysulphide-based sealants
BS 4320:1968
Specification for metal washers for general engineering purposes, Metric series
BS 4360:1986
Specification for weldable structural steel
BS 4368 Pt.4:1984
Specification for compression coupling for tubes Pt.4: Specification for type test requirements
BS 4395
Specification for high strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers for structural engineering
BS 4449:1988
Specification for carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4461
Specification for cold worked steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete
BS 4466:1989
Specification for scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel reinforcement for concrete
BS 4570:1985
Specification for fusion welding of steel castings
BS 4576 Pt.1:1970
Specification for unplasticised pvc rain water goods Pt.1: Half round gutters and circular pipe
BS 4604
Specification for the use of high strength friction grip bolts in structural steelwork. Metric series
BS 4848
Hot-rolled structural steel sections
BS 4848 Pt.2:1991
Specification for hot-finish hollow sections
BS 4872 Pt.1:1982
Specification for approval testing of welders when welding procedure approval is not
BS 5082:1993
Specification for water-borne priming paints for woodwork
BS 5135:1984
Specification for arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels
BS 5154:1983
Specification for copper alloy globe, globe stop and check, check and gate valves
BS 5268
Specification for structural use of timber
BS 5268 Pt.2:1991
Code of practice for permissible stress, design, materials and workmanship
Pt.3:1985
Code of practice for trussed rafter roofs
BS 5292
Specification for jointing materials and compounds for installation using water, low pressure steam or 1 2 & 3
family gases
BS 5328 Pt.1:1990
Guide to specifying concrete
(1995) required
st
REFERENCE
TITLE
Pt.2:1990
Methods for specifying concrete mixes.
Pt.3:1990
Specification for the procedures to be use in producing and transporting concrete.
Pt.4:1990
Specification for the procedures to be use in sampling, testing and assessing compliance of concrete.
BS 5358:1993
Specification for solvent-borne priming paint for woodwork
BS 5606:1978
Code of practice for accuracy in building.
BS 5606:1990
Guide to accuracy in building
BS 5629 Pt.2:1979
Test methods
Pt.3:1979
Method for specifying requirements for individual materials
BS 5950
Structural use of steelwork in building
BS 5950 Pt.1:1990
Codes of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: hot rolled sections
Pt.2:1992
Pt.3: Section 3.1:1990
Specification for materials, fabrication and erection: hot rolled section

Code of practice for design of simple and continuous composite beams
Pt.4:1994
Code of practice for design of composite slab with profiled steel sheeting
Pt.5:1987
Code of practice for design of cold formed sections
Pt.6:1995
Code of practice for design of light gauge profiled steel sheeting
Pt.7:1992
Specification for materials and workmanship: cold formed section
Pt.8:1990
Code of practice for fire resistant design
Pt.9:1994
Code of practice for stressed skin design
BS 5975
Code of practice for falsework
BS 5979:1993
Code of practice for remote centres for alarm systems
BS 6089:1981
Guide to assessment of concrete strength in existing structures
BS 6363:1983
Specification for welded cold formed steel structural hollow sections
BS 6431
Ceramic floor and wall tiles
BS 6477:1992
Specification for water repellents for masonry surfaces
BS 6510:1984
Specification for steel windows, sills, window boards and doors
BS 6675:1986
Specification for servicing valves (copper alloy) for water services
BS 6699:1992
Specification for ground granulated blast-furnace slug for use with portland cement
BS 6920
Suitability of non-metallic product for use in contact with water intended for human consumption with regard to
their effect on the quality of water
BS 7668:1994
Specification for weldable structural steel. Hot finished structural hollow section in weather resistant steels
BS 8004:1986
Code of practice for foundation
BS 8007:1987
Code of practice for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids
BS 8110
Structural use of concrete
BS 8110 Pt.1:1985
Code of practice for design and construction
BS 8215:1991
Code of practice for design and installation of damp-proof courses in masonry construction
BS EN 499:1995
Welding consumables. covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of non alloy and fine grain steels.
Classification
BS EN 875:1995
Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Impact tests. Test specimen location, notch orientation and
examination
REFERENCE
TITLE
BS EN 876:1995
Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Longitudinal tensile test on weld metal in fusion welded joints
BS EN 895:1995
Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Transverse tensile test
BS EN 910:1996
Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Bend tests
BS EN 10029
Specification for tolerances on dimensions, shape and mass for hot rolled steel plates 3mm thick or above
BS EN 10143
Continuously hot-dip metal coated steel sheet and strip. Tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 10147
Continuously hot-dip zinc coated structural steel sheet and strip-technical delivery conditions
BS EN 1043-1:1996
Hardness test on arc welded joints
BS EN 10051:1992
Specification for continuously hot-rolled un-coated plate. sheet and strip of non-alloy and alloy and alloy steels.
Tolerances on dimensions and shape
BS EN 1057:1996
Specification for copper pipes
BS EN 10025:1995
Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steel. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10113:1991
Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels
Pt.1:1993
General delivery condition
Pt.2:1993
Delivery conditions for normalized/normalized rolled steels
Pt.3:1993
Delivery conditions for thermomechanical rolled steels
BS EN 10137-1:1996
-2:1996
-3:1996
General delivery conditions

Delivery conditions for quenched and tempered steels
Delivery conditions for precipitation hardened steels
BS EN 10155:1993
Structural steel with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical delivery conditions
BS EN 10210-1:1994
Technical delivery requirements
BS EN 50078:1994
Torches and guns for arc welding
BS EN 60974-11:1996
Electrode holders
EN 10113
Hot-rolled products in weldable fine grain structural steels.
EN 10155
Structural steels with improved atmospheric corrosion resistance. Technical delivery conditions
EN 12201
Specification for polyethelene (PE) piping system for water supply
EN 12319 Pt.1, 2, 3
,5&7
Specification for plastic piping systems for hot and cold water - polybutylene (PB)
EN 15493
Specification for acrylonitrile butadiene (ABS) pipes and fittings for pressure application
REFERENCE
TITLE
OTHER STANDARDS
American Standard
ASTM A 312/A312M-87a
Standard specification for seamless and welded austenitic stainless steel pipe
ASTM A 351/A351M-86
Standard specification for steel casting austenitic for high temperature service
ASTM A 403/A403M-86
Standard specification for wrought austenitic stainless steel piping fittings
ASTM C88
Test method for soundness of aggregates by use of sodium sulfate or magnesium sulfate
ASTM A 312
Standard specification for seamless and welded austenitic stainless steel pipes
ASTM A351/A351M-86
Standard specification for steel castings, austenitic for high temperatures service
AS 3982:1996
Australian/New Zealand Standard for urinals
Japanese Standard
JIS 304
Specification for the properties of hot-rolled stainless steel sheets
JIS G3192
Dimensions, mass and permissible variation of hot-rolled steel section year 2000
JIS A5526
Japanese Industrial Standard Steel H Piles
Australian / New Zealand Standard

AS/NZS2642 Pt.1, 2 & 3
Specification for plastic piping systems for hot and cold water - polybutylene (PB)
ASSE 1037:1990
Performance requirements for pressurized flushing devices (flush meters) for plumbing fixtures
China Standard
CNS 9443:1982
China National Standard (Taiwan) specification for stainless steel tank
AWWA C210
Specification for liquid epoxy coating systems for the interior and exterior of steel water pipelines
AWWA C210-84
AWWA C210:1994
DIN 8077:1997
Polypropylene (PP) pipes (Dimension)
DIN 8078:1996
Types 1, 2 and 3 Polypropylene (PP) pipes (General quality requirements & testing)
DIN 16962 Pt.5 8
Pipe joint assemblies & fittings for polypropylene (PP) pipes
DIN 16962 Pt.5 - 9
Pipe joint assemblies & fittings for Polypropylene (PP) pipes
AMENDMENT
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
The tenderer shall submit a full description including catalogues of items of equipment.
Where separate entries of technical data are required,the tenderer shall photostate the
schedule and duly fill in the details.
PARTICULAR & GUARANTEE

No
Particulars
Technical Data
1 LV MAIN-SWITCHBOARD
(a)
Manufacturer
..
(b)
Country of Manufacture
..
(c)
Switchboard Type
(d)
Short-time withstand
current for 1 second (A)
(e)
(f)
Copper Busbars :
* Normal Rated Current (A)
* Cross Section Area (mm2)
Switchboard Dimensions and

Weight Thickness of Plates (SWG)
..
Thickness of Plate (SWG)
Length Width Height

(mm)
(mm) (mm)
MSB .
Total weight including all auxiliary equipment (kg)
..
(g)
Switchboard Finishing
(h)
Type tested (Yes/No),Form (1/2/3)
Company's Stamp
Signature
No
Particulars
Technical Data
2 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER

(a)
Manufacturer
(b)
(c) Circuit Breaker Type
(d)
Number of Poles
(e)
Short-time Withstand Current

for 1 second (KA)
3 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

(a)
Manufacturer
(b)
(c) Circuit Breaker Type
..
(d)
Number of Poles
(e)

for 1 second (KA)
4 CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR AND PROTECTION

Protection
Measurement
(a)
Manufacturer
..
(b)
Country of Maufacture
..
(c)
Class of Accuracy
..
(d)
Rated Output (VA)
..
Company's Stamp .
Signature
No
Particulars
Technical Data
5 PROTECTION RELAY
(a)
Manufacturer
(b)
Country of Manufacturer
..
(c)
Overcurrent type
(d)
Earth Fault Type
..
(e)
Characteristic of Relays
IDMTL
(F)
Current Setting Range of:

* Overcurrent Relay (%)
..
* Earth Fault Relay (%)
(f)
Flag indication (Yes/No)
(g)
Flush/Surface Mounting
6 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS-AMMETER
(a)
Manufacturer/Model
(b)
..
Class Of Accuracy
..
MEASURING INSTRUMENT-VOLTMETER
(a)
Manufacturer /Model
..
(b)
..
(c) Class of Accuracy

8
..
MEASURING INSTRUMENT-POWER FACTOR METER

(a)
Manufacturer/Model
(b)
(c)
Class of Accuracy
..
Company's Stamp .
Signature
No
9
10
11
12
Particulars
Technical Data
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

(a)
Make/Type
(b)
..
(c)
Number Of Poles
(d)

for 1 second (KA)
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR

(a)
Make
..
(b)
..
(C)
Testing authority
..
ISOLATOR
(a)
Make
..
(b)
(c)
Breaking capacity (KA)
(d)
Rated voltage (V)
..
H.R.C. FUSE LINK

(a)
Make/Type
(b)
(c)
Rated Voltage
(d)
Time/Current Characteristic shall

be submitted
Company's Stamp .
Signature
No
Particulars
13
DISTRIBUTION-BOARD
14
15
16
Technical Data
(a)
Manufacturer
(b)
Thickness of Plates (SWG)
(c)
Panel Finishing
EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

(a)
Make
(b)
(c)
Testing authority
TIME SWITCH
(a)
Make/Type
(b)
(c)
Rated Current (A)
(d)
Spring Working Reserve (Hours)
EARTHING
(a)
Make
(b)
Copper tape size (mm x mm)
(c)
Clamp make ..
Company's Stamp .
Signature
No
Particulars
17
CABLE LADDER/TRUNKING (EPOXY)

(a)
18
19
20
21
22
Make
(b) Country of Manufacturer

AMMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
(a)
Make
(b)
(c)
Rated voltage
VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
(a)
Make
(b)
(c) Rated voltage

MICC CABLE
(a)
Make
(b)
Rated voltage
PVC & PVC/PVC CABLE
(a)
Make
(b)
(C) Rated voltage

PVC/SWA/PVC/CABLE
(a)
Make
(b)
(c)
Rated voltage
X ( x0 X O) x Particulars
23
Technical Data
Technical Data
FLUORESCENT TUBE
(a)
Make
..
(b)
..
(c)
Rated working life (hour)
Company's Stamp ..
Signature ..
No
Particulars
24
BALLAST
25
26
27
28
Technical Data
(a)
Make
..
(b)
Country Of Manufacturer
..
(c)
Testing authority
FLUORESCENT STARTER
(a)
Make
..
(b)
..
(c)
Testing authority
LIGHTING SWITCHES
(a)
Make
..
(b)
..
(c)
Testing authority
GRID SWITCHES
(a)
Make
..
(b)
..
(c)
Testing authority
SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS

(a)
Make
(b)
(c)
Testing authority
Company's Stamp ..
Signature ..
No
Particulars
29
PHOTOCELL UNIT
(a)
Make
(b)
30
Technical Data
Testing authority
LIGHT FITTINGS
Make
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
Hibay Light
Compound L'ting
Poles
Downlights
KELUAR Signboard
Emergency Light
..
..
..
..
Country of
Manufacturer
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
Company's Stamp ..
Model No.
Signature ..
31 TELEPHONE/LAN INSTALLATION
The tenderer must complete the schedule of technical data as set out bellow.
Where requipment,separate sheet of same shall be used.All equipment offered must be
supported by manufacturer's published catalogue and technical data.
Make
Model No.
Country of
Manufacturer
a.
Main distribution
frame
..
..
b.
TDP box unit
..
..
c.
Wiring Block
..
..
d.
Under floor junction

box
..
..
Under floor Telephone

outlet
..
..
f.
Telephone cables
..
..
g.
Under floor PVC

trunking
..
..
e.
Company's Stamp
Signature
1.0
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
1.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENT
1.1.1
OPERATING CONDITION
Portable extinguishers shall be maintained in a fully charged and operational

conditions and installed as shown on the drawings.
1.1.2
LOCATION
Extinguishers shall be conspicuously located where they will be readily

accessible and immediately available in the event of fire. They shall be
located along normal paths of travel as shown on the drawings.
1.1.3
MARKING OF LOCATION
Extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. In large rooms

and in certain locations where visual obstruction cannot be completely
avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations and intended use
of extinguishers conspicuously.
1.1.4
MOUNTING OF EXTINGUISHERS
Extinguishers shall be installed with hangers or in brackets supplied, mounted

in cabinets or set on shelves unless the extinguishers are of the wheeled
type.
1.1.5
HEIGHT OF MOUNTING
Extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 1.8 kg shall be installed

so that the top of the extinguisher is not more than 1.5 m above the floor
level. Extinguisher having a gross weight of greater than 1.8 kg (except
wheel types) shall be so installed that the top of the extinguisher is not more
than 1 m above the floor level.
C/1
1.2
FEATURE OF CONSTRUCTION
The portable fire extinguishers shall be supplied and installed complete with
container, releasing device, nozzle and all accessories and shall be suitable for the
duty specified.
1.3
INSPECTION, MAINTAINANCE & HYDROSTATIC TEST
a) The tenderer shall be responsible for proper maintenance of the extinguishers

which shall be inspected monthly or more frequently when circumstances require
to ensure that they have not been actuated or tampered with and to detect any
obvious physical damage, corrosion or other impairments.
b) Any extinguishers showing defects shall be given a complete maintenance check
at the Fire Station.
1.4
TYPE, MATERIAL AND CONSTRUCTION
The type and location of potable fire extinguishers shall be
as shown on the
drawings. The casing shall be of steel.

1.5
SPECIAL REQUIREMENT
The portable fire extinguisher shall be to CIFS and the S.O.'s approval. The
certificate of approval shall be submitted to the S.O.
C/2
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION II PART B
MEASUREMENT OF AMPLIFICATION AND PRICING FACTOR

1.
PREAMBLE TO ALL TRADES

1.1
The requirement of all items contained in this section are to be taken into account
when pricing these Bills of Quantities.
1.2
The term approved shall mean approved by the Superintending Officer.
Abbreviations
1.3
Throughout these Bills of Quantities, the following abbreviations have been used :(i)
(ii)
General
(a)
B.S.
The latest standard for a particular building

materials or component issued by the British
Standards Institution
(b)
CP(B.S.)
The latest British Code of Practice issued by the

Council of Codes of Practice, the British
Standard Institution
(c)
CP(CE)
The latest Civil Engineering Code of Practice,

issued by the Institution of Civil Engineers,
United Kingdom
(d)
Gauge
Imperial standard wire gauge
(e)
S.W.G.
Ditto
(f)
NO
Number
(g)
PRS
Pairs
(h)
S.O.
Superintending Officer
(i)
S.O.R.
S.O. Representative(s)
Metric Unit
(a)
M3
Metre cube
(b)
M2
Metre Superficial
(c)
MR
Metre linear
(d)
Metre
(e)
CM
Centimetre
(f)
MM
Milimetre
(g)
KG
Kilogram
(h)
KN
Kilonewton
- III/B/1 -

1.
PREAMBLE TO ALL TRADES

(iii)
(Contd)
Imperial Units
(a)
YC
Yard cube
(b)
YS
Yard superficial
(c)
YR
Yard linear
(d)
Ton
Imperial tonne
(e)
LBS
Pound
(f)
OZ
Ounce
Construction Plant, Equipment, Vehicles And Machinery

1.4
The costs of providing piling equipment, constructional plant, equipment, vehicles

and machinery for use directly in connection with the construction and completion of
the Works are to be priced in the Preliminary Section of these Bills of Quantities.
However, the costs of operating the same are to be included in the prices and rates of
the relevant items Bills of Quantities.
Curved Or Circular Work

1.5
Work described in these Bills of Quantities as curved or circular shall be deemed to

include all junctions between straight and curved work.
New And Old Work

1.6
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of making good at junction between new and old
works shall be included in the prices and rates of the new works.
Items/Works Measured As Lump Sum Items

1.7
Prices rates for items/works measured as Lump Sum shall be deemed to cover for
providing everything necessary for the proper execution and completion of the
items/works according to the true intent and meaning of the Contract Documents
taken together the same may or may not particularly shown or described provided the
same is reasonably inferred therein.
Pricing Of Bills Of Quantities

1.8
All items in these Bills of Quantities shall be priced by the Contractor. Should the
Contractor fail to price any item, the value thereof shall be deemed to be included in
the prices and rates of other items therein.
- III/B/2 -

2.
DEMOLITION AND ALTERATIONS

Definitions
In respect of demolitions and alterations the following words or expressions shall have the
meaning hereunder assigned to them :(a)
Shoring
Shoring including erecting, cutting holes in the structure,

maintaining, clearing away and making good all works
disturbed.
(b)
Demolishing
Disconnecting all services, demolishing and removing

incidental debris.
(c)
Making good
Making good in its fullest sense to match existing work

and through, around, into, over and up to new items,
openings and the like and the proper jointing to existing.
(d)
Overhauling
Cleaning, renewing parts and all incidentals and leaving

in proper working order.
(e)
Setting Aside
Setting aside for re-use including handling, cleaning,

temporarily casing up, covering, protecting and the like,
moving about the site and if required removing from and
returning to site.
(f)
Making Good
Structure
Making good structure and cutting, toothing and bonding,

pinning up, levelling and preparing, filling and facing up.
(g)
Making Good
Finishings
Making good finishings (including dubbing out) to

ceilings and soffits, walls and floors and making good
skirtings, architraves and joinery
(h)
Making Good
Decorations
Making good as previously defined all decoration to

ceilings and soffits, walls, floors, skirtings, architraves
and joinery including preparing, priming and bringing
forward to the full number of existing coasts and matching
in texture and colour
(i)
Cutting Openings
Cutting openings including quoining up jambs, forming

recessed reveals, cutting, toothing and bonding, levelling
and preparing bottom of openings, cutting and pinning
lintals and the like and pinning up over.
(j)
Blocking Up
Openings
Blocking up openings including cutting toothing and

bonding, pinning up and leveling and preparing bottom of
openings.
- III/B/3 -

2.
(Contd)
(k)
Overhauling and
Repairing Door
and Frame
Piecing out repairing damaged portions of door frame and

lining; repairing and refixing frame architraves including
renewing as necessary; refixing frame and lining; hacking
out defective putties and reputtying; hacking out broken
glass and reglazing; raking out and repointing frames;
overhauling; oiling and adjusting ironmongery; easing and
adjusting door; taking out door and shooting bottom to
clear new floor finish and rehanging.
(l)
Overhauling and
Repairing
Window
Piecing out and repairing damaged portions of window

frame and lining; repairing and refixing architraves
including renewing as necessary; refixing frame and lining;
hacking out defective putties and reputtying; hacking out
broken glass and reglazing; raking out and repointing
frames; overhauling; oiling and adjusting ironmongery;
easing and adjusting window.
(m)
Taking Out Door

and Frame
Taking off door; taking out frame; lining; architraves and

all associated joinery; taking out thereshold and any steps;
taking out pelmet and curtain rails; taking up floor springs;
preparing opening to receive new work.
(n)
Taking Out
Window and
Frame
Taking out window; taking out frame; lining; architraves;

shutters; shutter boxes and all associated joinery; taking out
internal and external sills; taking out pelmet and curtain
rails; preparing opening to receive new work.
(o)
Taking Out
Sanitary Fittings
Taking out sanitary fittings complete with brackets, bearers,

backboards, drainers and the like; disconnecting wastes and
services; stopping off pipes out of sight and making good.
- III/B/4 -

2.

2.1
2.2
(Contd)
Materials
a)
Unless otherwise described in the Bills of Quantities, all materials arising out of
the demolitions and alteration work shall become the property of the Contractor
who shall allow credit for the full value to him of all materials salvaged.
b)
Where provision is made in the Bills of Quantities for the value of credits to be
shown separately, the Government shall be entitled to purchase salvaged
materials from the Contractor upon payment to the Contractor of the credit
value (if any) shown in the Bills.
Workmanship
Demolitions are to be carried out in such a manner and sequence as to cause the least
impossible disturbance to those parts of the work which are to remain.
2.3
Protection
The Contractor shall be responsible for the full protection of those parts of the
building which are to remain including the provision of temporary dust-proof screens,
tarpaulins, dust sheets and the like.
2.4
Dimensions
Dimensions of building and other structures to be demolished, where given in the
description of work, are approximate and are for guidance only.
2.5
Rates To Include
The rates shall include for :(i)
Any temporary shoring, needling, strutting, scaffolding, screens and the like
and other temporary works.
(ii)
Cleaning and stacking materials which the Contractor may require for making
good.
(iii)
Removing all debris from site.
(iv)
Executing the whole of the demolitions and alterations in phases as may be

directed by the S.O.
- III/B/5 -

3.
PILING WORKS PREFORMED (PRECAST CONCRETE PILES)

3.1
3.2
3.3
Method of Measurement
a.
The quantities for supply of piles shall be measured and paid based on the
actual pitched lengths of piles. Piles delivered to the site for the purpose of the
work, but which subsequently not pitched and driven, shall not be paid.
b.
Initial and extension piles are separately described.
Contrary to SMM
a.
The level of the ground surface in relation to high and low water mark of
nearby rivers or underground water, and records of high flood water levels are
not given in the Bills of Quantities. The Contractor is responsible for
ascertaining such information prior submitting a tender.
b.
Driving of piles singly or in clusters are not stated.
c.
Heads are not separately measured and are deemed included.
d.
Steel reinforcement in precast concrete piles are not separately measured.
Payable Lengths for Driving

a.
3.4
Driving of precast concrete piles shall be measured and paid for linear metres
measured from shoe point when pitched to the shoe point when driven.
Piling Area
a.
The rates for piles and piling shall include for :i.
All labour and materials for the complete pile installation inclusive of
wastage.
ii.
All necessary excavation works incidental to piling.
iii.
Driving piles singly or in clusters.
iv.
Redriving of upheaved piles if any.
v.
Replacement of damaged piles and any pile which fail under tests.
- III/B/6 -

3.
PILING WORKS PREFORMED (PRECAST CONCRETE PILES)

3.4
Piling Area
a.
4.
(Contd)
(Contd)
The rates for piles and piling shall include for :vi.
Filling up with approved fill materials any gap appearing between pile
and ground due to displacement of ground completion of piling.
vii.
Normal wet weather delays.
viii
.
Standing time for equipment and labour due to all the foregoing
circumstances.
ix.
Staging and platform for the installation of piles on embankments and

slopes.
EXCAVATIONS AND EARTH WORKS

4.1
Unless otherwise stated, depths of excavations are measured from the general
formation levels of the bottom of the excavations.
4.2
The depths of the trench excavations are given in 1.50M stages.
4.3
Quantities of each fill are measured nett (i.e. including volumes occupied by a
permanent part of the Work to be, executed under the Contract).
4.4
Prices for excavation are shall include for :(i)
Excavating in whatever type of material excluding rock as defined in the

Specification, met with on the surface of or in the excavations
(ii)
Getting the material out of the excavations
(iii)
Removing of loose boulders of size not exceeding 0.17 MC if in general

excavation or size not exceeding 0.08 MC if in excavation for trenches and
foundation pit
(iv)
Keeping the excavation free of water
(v)
Upholding and maintaining sides of the excavations by whatever means

necessary including the use of bentonite and any special shoring or sheet piling
etc., as any be necessary but which do not form a permanent part of the Works
to be executed, but excluding any planking and strutting to be left in or any
sheet piling etc. which forms a permanent part of the Works to be executed
(vi)
Backing of selected excavated materials into the excavations and compacting

the same methods and in the manner as specified in the Specification
- III/B/7 -

4.
EXCAVATIONS AND EARTH WORKS

4.5
5.
(Contd)
Prices for earth fill shall include for :(i)
Settlement or displacement of fill over soft areas
(ii)
Levelling surface of the platform and forming the necessary slopes
(iii)
Keeping the platforms and slopes free at water or damage
(iv)
Multiple handling and transporting about the site
4.6
Prices and rates for trench excavations shall include for surface and basement
trenches. No distinction shall be made between surface and basement trenches.
4.7
Prices and rates for earth, sand, quarry dust and the like material in fillings, bed and
blinding, etc. shall include for levelling surfaces of the same on grading surfaces of
the same to falls or cambers, trimming sides of the same to form vertical, battering or
sloping surface, and any temporary retaining boards as may be required.
4.8
Prices and rates for hardcore, crusher run and like material in filling and beds etc.
shall include for handpacking the same to form vertical, battering or sloping surfaces
and any temporary retaining boards as may required.
4.9
Prices and rates for hardcore, crusher run and the like material in fillings and beds etc.
to receive concrete or paving shall include for blinding the same with sand or quarry
dust and levelling surfaces of the same or grading surfaces of the same to falls or
cambers and well watered.
CONCRETE WORK
Concrete
5.1
Prices and rates for concrete shall include for :(i)
All hoisting and placing in required positions
(ii)
Working between and around reinforcement
(iii)
Tamping and/or vibrating to give through compaction
(iv)
Forming or cutting
(a)
Grooves
(b)
Chases
(c)
Mortices
(d)
Holes and other sundry like items, including all making good
- III/B/8 -

5.
CONCRETE WORK
(Contd)
Reinforcement
5.2
Prices and rates for reinforcement shall include for :

(i)
Cutting to lengths
(ii)
Hooked ends
(iii)
Bends
(iv)
Placing in position prior to casting
(v)
Tying, tying wire spacer bar and distance blocks
(vi)
Allowance for laps and framing notches around obstructions in case of fabric
reinforcement
The weight of rod reinforcement given in the Bills excludes both the weight
of tying wire and any allowance for rolling margin and prices and rates
shall include for these item.
Note :
Formwork
5.3
Prices and rates for formwork shall include for :(i)
Splayed edges
(ii)
Notchings
(iii)
Allowance for overlaps and passing at angles
(iv)
Battens
(v)
Strutting any height when required
(vi)
Bolting and edging
(vii)
Basing, striking and removal
Left In Formwork
5.4
Left in formwork as specified in these Bills of Quantities shall mean formwork which
will form a permanent part of the Work.
Precast Concrete
5.5
All work in precast concrete shall be deemed to be in concrete (1:2:4-20MM)

as described later in these Bills of Quantities. Prices shall include for all casting,
formwork, handling, hoisting, placing in position and setting, bedding and pointing in
cement mortar (1:3) unless otherwise particularly specified.
- III/B/9 -

6.
BRICKWORK
6.1
7.
Prices and rates for brickwork and blockwork shall include for :
(i)
All rough and fair cutting
(ii)
Oversailing and receding courses
(iii)
Rough relieving and discharging arches
(iv)
Wedging and pinning
(v)
Raking out joints for and pointing flashing
(vi)
Bedding plates
(vii)
Bedding and pointing frame
(viii)
Parging and coring flues
(ix)
Plumbing angles
(x)
Labour eaves
(xi)
Forming square and rebated reveals, cut squints or birdmouths and notches
(xii)
Cutting or forming chases, holes and mortices
(xiii)
Cutting and pinning and/or building in
(xiv)
Making good
(xv)
Sundry like items
DRAINS
7.1
The items given under the various Trades of Excavation and Earthworks, Concrete
Works, Brickwork, etc. which are deemed included in the prices and rates of drains,
shall apply accordingly.
7.2
Prices and rates for cast iron and salt glazed ware pipes shall include for short lengths,
sockets, jointing, fixing and the like.
- III/B/10 -

8.
SCREED, PAVINGS AND TILING WORKS

General
8.1
8.2
Prices and rates for screed, pavings and tiling shall include for :
(i)
Narrow widths and small quantities
(ii)
Temporary rules
(iii)
Arrises and rounded angles
(iv)
Working into channels and for fittings and making good up to reveals, steps,
around columns, balusters, pipes, gratings, fittings and the like.
Where the thickness of floor screed and pavings are stated as average, these are
required to be laid to falls and currents and the Contractor shall be deemed to have
included for this in his prices and rates.
Tiling
8.3
Prices and rates for tiling shall include for :

(i)
Preparation of surface to receive tiles
(ii)
Laying to falls and current as instructed
(iii)
Rounded edges of projecting tiles
(iv)
Protecting, cleaning off and polishing on completion
Skirting Risers And Other Lineal Items

8.4
9.
Prices and rates for skirting, risers, channels and like shall include for all short
lengths, formed cut and purpose-made angles, junctions, ends, etc. and making good
and any other sundry items of a like nature. In the case of mosaic tiling, the prices are
also to include for cove tiles and tiles set in at 45 degrees to the horizontal.
CARPENTRY WORK
Carpentry Timber
9.1
Prices and rates for all carpentry timber shall include for pressure treating as described
later and all labour in notchings, boring, halvings, morticing, tenoning and wedging,
scarfing, dovetailings, sinkings, for heads of bolts and nuts, trimming for opening and
properly spiking as required.
- III/B/11 -

9.
CARPENTRY WORK
(Contd)
All Work Deemed To Be Sawn

9.2
All carpenters work shall be deemed to be left with a sawn surface except where
particularly described to be wrot and prices are to include for this.
Plugging And Fixing Woodwork Etc.

9.3
10.
Where work is described as plugged, it shall include for shot fired fixings where
approved or casting in or morticing for and inserting fibrous or other approved fixing
materials and fixing with suitable nails screws to any wall or concrete surface.
JOINERY WORK
Joinery Timber
10.1
Prices and rates for all joinery timber shall include for :(i)
Pressure treated as later described
(ii)
Wrought finish (unless an item is expressly stated to be sawn)
(iii)
All cutting, notching, holes, housed ends, mitres, ends, shaped ends, angles,
junctions, heading joist and short lengths.
(iv)
Planting on with nails or brads etc. punched in
(v)
Any either items of a like nature
10.2
Concrete platforms, floor and wall finishes and sanitary fittings related with joinery
fittings are measured separately.
10.3
Subject to paragraph 9.2 above, prices for joinery fittings which are measured in
numbers are deemed to include for providing everything necessary for the proper
execution and completion of the items as shown in the drawings, specified in the
Specification and/or in these Bills of Quantities.
- III/B/12 -

11.
12.
SUSPENDED CEILING
11.1
Suspended ceilings are measured in metre superficial. Rates per metre superficial of
suspended ceilings are deemed to include for providing everything necessary for the
proper execution and completion of the items as shown in the drawings and/or
specified in these Bills of Quantities.
11.2
Prices and rates for suspended ceilings are also to include for :Narrow widths and shall small quantities
(ii)
Temporary rules
(iii)
Mitres, edges trims and fair cutting to ceiling boards and tiles at margins and
borders, level and even surface
(iv)
All making good and any sundry items of like nature
IRONMONGERY
12.1
13.
(i)
Prices and rates for ironmongery are to include for fixing with screws of the same
finish as fitting and for all cutting, sinking, boring and morticing as required, oiling,
easing and adjusting all moving parts, taking off refixing after painting where
necessary and leaving in perfect working order including handing the keys properly
labelled to the Superintending Officer satisfaction on completion.
STEEL AND IRONWORK

Rolling Margin
14.
13.1
No allowance has been made in the weight of steel for rolling margin.
13.2
Prices and rates for steel and ironwork shall include for :(i)
Allowance for rolling margin
(ii)
All labour in cutting to lengths, drilling holes
(iii)
Rivets, if necessary
(iv)
Additional cost involved in using members which are larger than the
manufacturers standard stock size if required
(v)
Working with members of various sizes and lengths
PLASTERING WORK
Plastering
14.1
Prices and rates for plastering, etc. shall be held to include for :(i)
Narrow widths and small quantities
(ii)
Temporary rules
- III/B/13 -
14.
PLASTERING WORK (Contd)

Plastering (Contd)
15.
(iii)
Joints between different types of plastering
(iv)
Internal angle, arrises and quirks
(v)
Rounded coves and external angles not exceeding 25 radius
(vi)
Mitres, stop, etc. on all the foregoing and to comices, mouldings,

enrichments, coves, grooves, skirting, gutters and strings
(vii)
Raking out joints or hacking any surfaces to form key
(viii)
All making good and nay sundry items of a like nature
PLUMBING INSTALLATION
General
15.1
Prices and rates for pipe for pipeworks shall include for short lengths, and joints in the
running length including fixing and the like, and all perforations, chases, etc. in
brickwork, blockwork, concrete, etc. and for all making good.
Galvanised Mild Steel Or Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride Tubings

15.2
All tubings have been measured the nett lengths as fixed, measured over bends,
junction, etc.
15.3
Prices and rates for fittings to all tubings described as extra for should be the cost of
the fittings extra only over the length of tubings.
15.4
Prices and rates for mild steel or unplasticised polyvinyl chloride tubings shall
include for :(i)
All short runnings length
(ii)
Sockets
(iii)
Connectors
(iv)
Backnuts
(v)
Elbows and bends
(vi)
Fire-bends
(vii)
Tees
(viii)
Diminishing pieces
(ix)
Plugs
(x)
Other items of a like nature
- III/B/14 -

15.
PLUMBING INSTALLATION
(Contd)
Copper Tubing
15.5
16.
(i)
All short running lengths
(ii)
Made bends
(iii)
Running joints
(iv)
Other items of a like nature
GLAZING WORK
16.1
17.
Prices and rates for copper tubings shall include for :
Price and rates for glass shall include for all necessary additional costs involved in
using sheets which are large than the manufacturers standard stock sizes if required.
PAINTING WORK
17.1
Price and rates for all painting works shall include for preparation of surfaces for
painting as described, painting in any colour or tint (including mixing of paints to
drive any tint or colour required), all necessary scaffolding and and temporary
platform.
17.2
Prices and rates for painting on steel structures shall include for painting on brackets,
cleats. rivets, bolts, etc.
17.3
Prices and rates for painting on piles shall include for painting on fittings, clips,
brackets, etc.
- III/B/15 -

18.
SOFT LANDSCAPING WORKS

A.
General
All trees, palms, bamboo, shrubs, ferns, ground cover and etc., supplied under this
Contract must be sound and healthy and to the approval of the Superintending Officer
who will have the authority to reject any that are in their opinion unsuitable for use in
this Contract. The position and placement of the plants shall be shown in the Drawing.
All trees, shrubs and ground covers shall be of specified sizes and shape. There should
be no persistent weeds in root balls and the roots shall be in good condition.
All trees, palms, bamboo, ferns ground cover and etc., supplied under this Contract
for transplanting are to be as far as possible, not too young or too old, so that when
planted the landscape works will present a finished appearance.
All planting must be carried out by experienced horticulturalist with the least damage
to the plants.
B.
Prices
Prices are to include for transportation and planting of all trees, palms, bamboo, ferns,
shrubs, ground covers and etc. This Contract includes their correct positioning,
excavating and preparing the ground prior to planting, supplying suitable, back-fill
material, watering, tending and treating with fertilizer until well established,
providing supporting timber stakes and protective fences where the plants and shrubs
are less than 1.5m high and all other necessary works. Their maintenance pruning,
trimming, tending, watering and fertilizing have to be throughout the two (2) years
maintenance period.
All plants failing to take root over the maintenance period or have become diseased,
or in any way failed must be removed and replaced at no extra cost during the
maintenance period. It is anticipated that some adjustment in the positioning of plants
will be inevitable and the Tenderer must include in his prices for any multiple
handling incurred in moving plants after they have been planted from one position to
another and all associated works. Prices are also to include treatment with fungicide
or insecticide as and when necessary during the period of the Contract and
Maintenance period. In the process of adjustment were the number of quantities is less
than the number stipulated by the Contract adjustment in prices will me made.
- III/B/16 -

18.
SOFT LANSCAPING WORKS (Contd)

B.
Prices
(Contd)
Throughout these Bills of Quantities
19.
20.
a.
Height of trees shall mean the overall height measured from the topmost of
the crown to the base of the tree trunk at the ground level.
b.
Thrunk height of trees shall mean the height from the lowest branch to the
ground level.
c.
Trunk height of palms shall mean the height from the petiole of the lowest
leaf to the ground level.
d.
Height of bamboos shall mean the height from the top must sheath to the
ground level unless otherwise specified.
e.
Heights of shrubs, ferns, containers grown plants etc., shall mean the overall
height from the topmost of the crown to the ground level, producing a
diameter 2/3 of the height specified.
f.
All ground covers, creepers and climbers must have a minimum 450mm
length stems unless otherwise specified.
TRANSPLANTING
A.
All transplanted trees and palm must be sound and healthy and to the approval of the
Superintending Officer.
B.
The cost for transplanting must be included in the prices and rates of the supply
and/or planting items in this Bills of Quantities. The prices are to include for irrigation
system or manually water the procured stock, fertilizer, excavating, under root cutting
of the ball by hand, lifting, transportation, etc., and all other related works.
MAINTENANCE WORKS
A.
Maintenance work in this contract shall commence immediately after the practical
completion of the works. The Contractor shall carry out the maintenance work until
the end of the period of maintenance.
B.
Planting maintenance shall include all necessary watering, cultivation, weeding

pruning, wound dressing, disease and pest control, protective spraying, replacement of
unacceptable material, straightening plants which lean or sag, adjustment of plant
which settle or are planted too low and any other procedure consistent with good
horticultural practice necessary to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all
work under this contract.
- III/B/17 -

20.
MAINTENANCE WORKS (Contd)

C.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of all materials, labour and equipment,
and any injury to plant materials caused by such materials, labour and equipment shall
be corrected and repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
D.
Rates
The rates for maintenance of plant include for the following :
(i)
Watering and fertilising of all plant material
(ii)
Weeding, pruning, cutting and repair
(iii)
Cleaning up planting area
(iv)
Replacement of dead plant
(v)
Other necessary works
- III/B/18 -
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION II PART C
SCHEDULE OF DAYWORK RATES

Daywork rates will be use as a basis for payment when the rates in the Bills of
Quantities are not applicable or where work cannot be properly measured or valued.
No work shall be carried out on Daywork basis except when ordered in writing by the
S.O.
When work is so ordered, the contractor shall be paid Daywork Price plus 15%,
which shall includes for the use of all ordinary plant, tools, scaffolding, supervision,
establishment charges and profit. Daywork price shall be taken to mean the actual
prime cost to the Contractor of this materials, transport and labour for the work
concerned.
The Contractor shall produce for verification to the S.O vouchers specifying the times
and materials employed on the work. If required, the contractor shall also produce his
receipted bills and wages books in support of his accounts.
When special mechanical plant is required for use on Daywork, the cost to be paid to
the Contractor shall be subject to agreement by the S.O.
The cost of any materials supplied by the Government for use on Daywork shall not
be taken into account when calculating the amount on which the 15% addition is
based.
Only time on work actually done will be allowed. A Day is considered to be normal
working day of 8 hours. Fractions of a day will be paid for pro-rata.
Rates for power-driven tools are not included in labour rates but charges for hand
tools shall be deemed to be included.
LABOUR RATES
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
Q
R
S
DESCRIPTION
Rates for day
General labour
Concrete Leveller or Screeder
Drainlayer
Mason
Bricklayer
Carpenter or Joiner
Steel Bar Bender or Fixer
Welder
Plumber
Painter
Roofer
Glazier
Iron or Steel Worker
Aluminum Worker
Pavior or Plasterer
Tile fixer
General Filter
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
Others not included above

T
U
V
W
X
Y
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
RM../ 8 hr day
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION II PART D
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT,
SECTION III
A - PRELIMINARIES
B - SITE CLEARANCE
C - PILING WORKS
D - UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
E - UPGRADING LUBE OIL / CHEMICAL STORAGE
F - OPEN STORAGE SHED
G - RECTIFICATION WORKS
H - ELECTRICAL WORKS
J - MECHANICAL WORKS
K - MISCELLANEOUS
L - PROVISIONAL SUM
LIST OF DRAWINGS USED IN THE PREPARATION OF BILLS OF
QUANTITIES
CONFIDENTIAL
THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG
BIN POWER PLANT, JALAN TANJUNG BIN, KUKUP, JOHOR DARUL TAKZIM - FLOOR UPGRADE
WORKS, OTHER RECTIFICATION WORKS AND OPEN STORAGE SHED
FINAL SUMMARY
DESCRIPTION
PART
PAGE
A/79
AMOUNT (RM)
PRELIMINARIES
SITE CLEARANCE
SUMM/B/1
9,000.00
PILING WORKS
SUMM/C/1
1,291,320.00
UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
SUMM/D/1
1,322,006.30
UPGRADING LUBE OIL & CHEMICAL STORAGE
SUMM/E/1
289,206.10
OPEN STORAGE SHED
SUMM/F/1
RECTIFICATION WORKS
SUMM/G/1
45,000.00
ELECTRICAL WORKS
SUMM/H/1
25,060.00
MECHANICAL WORKS
SUMM/J/1
800.00
MISCELLANEOUS
SUMM/K/1
8,000.00
PROVISIONAL SUMS
SUMM/L/1
80,000.00
TOTAL CARRIED TO FORM OF TENDER (RM)
3,070,392.40
Ringgit Malaysia :
Contractor's Chop
Signature of Witness :.
Name in Full:
Name in Full:
Occupation:.
Duly Authorised to sign tender:
Address:.
IC No.:
IC No.:
Date:..
Date:..
FS/1
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART A
PRELIMINARIES
PART A - PRELIMINARIES
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
PRELIMINARIES
PRELIMINARIES PARTICULARS
General Information
Notes:
The amounts inserted by the Contractor for such Preliminary Items shall be deemed to
apply to the whole of the Works carried out under this Contract.
Each Preliminary items or Clause shall be individually price. Bulk pricing for sections,
trades, groups or pages of Preliminary Items or Clauses shall not be accepted and no
subsequent claims for loss or expenses and/or profit shall be entertained for failure to
comply with this clause.
Where any Preliminary Items or Clause is left unpriced, it shall be deemed that the cost
of such Preliminary Items or Clauses have been allowed for elsewhere within these
Tender Documents. No subsequent claims arising out of expenses and/or loss incurred
against such unprices Preliminary Items or Clauses shall be entertained.
Not withstanding the above the above clauses, the S.O reserves the right to request
from the contractor the detailed breakdown of the pricing for Preliminary Items or
Clauses or the rates in the Bills of Quantities for examination and approval. The
approved detailed breakdown pricing shall then be used as a basis for the
administration of the Contract.
Headings are not comprehensive and do not modify the meaning of the items or clauses
in the Preliminary Items and Bills of Quantities.
Where Preliminary Items or Clauses or Items in the Bills of Quantities are period but
have not been executed on site by the Contractor, the cost of such priced items or
clauses or items in the Bills of Quantities shall accordingly be deducted from the
Contract Sum when so instructed by the S.O..
B
Preliminary Item
The Preliminary items as set out hereunder are deemed to apply to the whole of the
works all as shown on the drawings and/or described in this Bills of Quantities and the
Contractor shall allow for complying with same and for any cost incurred in connection
therewith. The Contractor shall note that any clause or items listed in this section which
has not been priced, it shall be deemed that the cost of such clause or items has been
included elsewhere in this section or in the Bills of Quantities section and those unpriced
clause or items shall be considered as free of charge and no claim will be entertained.
TO COLLECTION :
JPMSB/MALAKOFF/UPGRADING WAREHOUSE /2014
A/1
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
PRELIMINARIES (CONT'D)
Generally (cont'd)
Definitions
In the Contract Documents, the following words and expressions shall have the
meanings assigned to them, except where the context otherwise requires :
Allow
Whenever the word 'allow' occurs in the Bills of Quantities, the cost
of item shall be entirely at the risk of the Contractor.
Approved
Shall mean approved in writing by the S.O., including subsequent

written confirmation of previous verbal approval. Approval means
approval in writing including as aforesaid.
Engineers
Shall mean the Engineers designed as such in the Contract

Document.
As Required
And/Or As
Described
Shall means as required or as described in the Contract Documents

or as required to carry out work in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
As Shown
Shall means as shown in the Drawings.
Contract or
Contract
Documents
Shall means the Articles of Agreement and Conditions of Contract,

Contract Drawings and Contract Bills.
Contract Documents
Shall be documented which comprises of :
Instruction to Tenderers
Form of Tender and Conditions of Tendering
Form and Conditions
of Contract
Addendum
and Special
Provisions to the Conditions of
Contract
Preliminaries
Bill of Quantities
Specifications
List of Drawings
Appendices
TO COLLECTION :
A/2
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Definitions (cont'd)
Contract
Drawing
Shall mean the drawings listed in the Articles of Agreement and set
out in the Appendix to the Contract Document.
Contractors
Shall mean the person, firm or company, named in the Letter of
Acceptance whose tender has been accepted by the Government.
Day
Shall mean calender day unless otherwise distincly stated.
Directed
Shall means directed in writing by the Superintending Officer.
Engineers
Shall means the Civil, Structural, Mechanical or Electrical Engineer

relevant as the case may be and designated as such in the Contract
Documents.
Quantity
Surveyors
Shall mean the Quantity Surveyors designated as such in the

Contract Document.
His
Shall also mean 'her' or 'their' and the world 'he' may also mean 'she'
or 'they'
Instructed
Shall mean as instructed by means of drawings, correspondence or

other documents issued by the S.O.
Manufacturer's
Instructions
Shall mean all instructions, recommendations and advice issue by

the manufacturers or their agents and subject to approval from the
S.O.
Month
Shall mean calendar month.
Week
Shall mean calendar week.
Satisfactory
Shall mean to the reasonable satisfaction of the Superintending

Officer and/or Superintending Officer Representative.
Singular and
Plural
Words importing the singular only also included the plural and vise
versa where the context is required.
TO COLLECTION :
A/3
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Site
Shall mean the site designated as such in the Articles of Areement

and included the land or other places on, under, in or through which
the works are to be executed.
Owner /
Superintending
Officer / S.O
Shall mean The Project Manager, Tanjung Bin Power Sdn. Bhd.
or his authorised representative.
Works
Shall mean the works referred to in the Articles of Agreement and is
the whole of the materials, labour, plant and other things necessary
and requisite for the proper execution and completion of the Contract
as shown in the Contract Drawings and described by or referred to in
the Contract Bills and the Conditions.
B
Name And Addresses

Owner /
Superintending
Officer / S.O
Project Manager,
Level 10, Block 4, Plaza Sentral
Jalan Steven Sentral 5
50470 Kuala Lumpur.
Civil & Structural,

Architectural,
Mechanical &
Electrical,
Quantity Surveyor
Jurutera Perunding Madani Sdn. Bhd

55-01, Jalan Susur Larkin Perdana 1,
Taman Larkin Perdana,
80350 Johor Bahru,
Johor Darul Takzim.
TO COLLECTION :
A/4
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Payment For preliminaries Items

Preliminary items will be paid in accordance to the Measurement Application and Pricing
Factor section or in installments as the work proceeds. They may also be paid in the
proportion of the value of work executed to the total value of works. However, at the
disrection of the S.O interim payment in excess of this proportionate value may be made
for any item if the amount expended in respect of such item can be reasonably
ascertained.
Scope Of Contract/ General Description of Works
The Contract to be entered into is for the proper execution and completion of the whole
works which includes providing all labour, materials plant, tools, temporary works,
transport, water, lighting, etc. in connection with the works all in accordance with the
Architects' and Engineers' Drawings, Specifications, Articles of Agreement and
Conditions of Contract for the execution and completion of the works.
C
Contract Document
TO COLLECTION :
A/5
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Scope Of Works
The works which are to be executed, completed and maintained under this Contract are
briefly described below :
1) Upgrading of Warehouse
a)
Piling Work By Using Hydraulic Injection Method
b)
Pile Cap
c)
Ground Slab
d)
Bakau Pile, Apron & Perimeter Drain
2) Upgrading of Lube Oil & Chemical Storage
a)
b)
Pile Cap
c)
Ground Slab
d)
3) Open Storage Shed
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)

Pile Cap
Slab
Steel Structure & Roof
Fencing
Electrical Works
Earthworks and related Civil Works
4) Other Rectification Works at

5) Miscellaneous
a)
Take down and reinstallation of existing rack at Warehouse

Building & Lube Oil/Chemical Storage Building
5) Provisional Sums
The Contractors shall take into consideration that the site may be shared with other
contractors engaged by the Owner and shall take all necessary precaution to program
his works in such way that this has been planned for and included in the pricing of his
tender.
B
Location and Access To Site

The site is situated at Tanjung Bin Power Plant, Jalan Tanjung Bin, Kukup, Johor
Darul Takzim as shown on Engineer's Site/Location Plan drawing no.
JPMSB/AD/5/132/MALAKOFF/SP/01
TO COLLECTION :
A/6
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Site Survey
Before commencement of the works, the Contractor shall carry out a joint site survey
with the S.O's representative to verity the existing ground levels and all formation levels
for the purpose of determining the actual volume of earthwork involved. For this purpose
the Contractor shall employ a licensed surveyor but also to shall not only carry out a
joint survey but also to provide all the necessary as built drawings for the earthwork
involved prior commencement of the work until the final completion of the work. The
drawings shall be submitted progressively as when the work is being done to enable
progress payment to made to the Contractor.
Failing to comply with this shall render the levels taken by the S.O reprentative to be
taken as correct and payment will be made accordingly and no claim in this respect shall
be allowed.
The Contractor to include for the assistance of a Licensed Surveyor to carry out a Site
Survey before work commence, and to assist in establishing boundaries and setting out
the Works, if required by the Superintending Officer.
The Contractor shall submit to the Superitending Officer two copies of as built drawings
layout and the Site Plan, prepared and signed by a Licensed Surveyor, including all
finshed levels, to a grid as directed by the S.O within one month after practical
completion.
The Contractor to provide permanent setting out marks and bench marks in positions
required by the S.O.
(a) Order Of Work
The work will be proceeded with as expeditiously as possible and in such sections and
at such times as may be ordered by the Superintending Officer, or in the absence of
such instructions, in the most workman like manner.
TO COLLECTION :
A/7
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Examination Of Tender Documents and Visit To Site

The Contractor is deemed to have fully examined the Tender Documents and had full
opportunity to consider the details therein and make every investigation in relation
thereto.
Any discrepancies in the Tender Documents shall be referred in writing, as soon as
possible and before submitting the tender to the S.O who shall, if necessary, amend or
clarity the matter by means of the formal Addendum to the Tender Document. A copy of
the Addendum will be issued to every Tenderer and shall become part of the Tender
Documents. Receipt of the Addendum must be acknowledged on the form issued with
the Addendum.
The Contractor is deemed to have visited the site while preparing the tender to ascertain
for himself the extent of the work involved and the nature of the working conditions and
make himself throughly acquainted with any site restriction and all other details
appertaining there to including :
a) Means of access to site and the accommodation he may require.
b) The nature, character and conditions of the site and the sub-soil upon which the
works are to be carried out.
c) Local conditions including climatic.
d) Tidal flood and local drainage problems.
e) The extent of working space available.
f) Conditions affecting labour, materials and availability of same, the storage of
materials, positioning of sheds, stores, site offices and Plant.
g) The location of existing services.
h) The nearest point which temporary electricity and water can be connected.
i) Local Authorities requirements and compliance.
j) Any other information as to risks, contigencies and all other circumstances which may
effect his tender.
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that no extra payment, extension
of time, right to damages or any other concession consequant upon
misinterpretation or lack of knowledge will be considered.
TO COLLECTION :
A/8
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Generally (cont'd)
Site Possession
The Contractor shall be given possession of the site on a day to be fixed by the S.O.
Upon taking possession of the site, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Site
and all materials, plants, equipments and/or goods stored within the site including all
eventualities arising of the site.
The Contractor is to note that the site to be handed shall be the existing condition at the
time of possession of the site and such anticipated conditions shall be deemed to have
been assessed and anticipated by the Contractor from his site visit or from other site
evaluations at the time of tendering.
In the event of any delay in giving possession of the site, the Contractor shall not be
entitled to any claims for any loss or damage caused by the such want of possession.
B
Responsibility For The Works
The Contractor will be held responsible for keeping all persons including those
employed by sub-contractors, hauliers and merchants under proper control, and to
confine their operations within the boundaries of the Site. He will provide all personnel
with proper identification badges and will be held responsible for any damage or theft to
adjoining structures, services and through fares caused by reason of the execution of
this work or by those employed on the Works.
The Contractor will also be held responsible for the care of the Works generally and
adjoining structures until its completion and handling over including all work executed
and materials and goods deposited on the Site by himself or sub-contractor and
suppliers, together with all risks arising from carelessness of operatives, damages or
loss by theft, fraud, fire or any other cause, and the Contractor is to make good all such
damage or loss.
The contractor shall be submit and prepare of Site Dilapidation Report on the existing
warehouse and lube oil / chemical storage building
5,000.00
TO COLLECTION :
5,000.00
A/9
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENTATION
Tendering Procedure
These conditions are supplementary to or amplify those stated in the Instruction to
Tendereres and on the Form of Tender.
The Bills of Quantitites are numbered in sequence and the Contractor shall check his
copy. He shall notify the S.O / Quantity Surveyor in writing and at once of any mistakes
and have them rectified. No claim for loss consequant upon failure to comply with this
clause will be later entertained.
No alteration shall be made by the Contractor to the Tender Documents. The printed
text shall be rigidly adhered to except where expressly stated, any offers of alternatives
will render the tender liable to disqualification.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have fully understood the work to be carried out
under the Contract. Refer any query, in writing to the S.O / Quantity Surveyor and have
it clarified prior to the submission of the tender. No consideration will be given to any
query raised by the contractor after closing date of tender owing to lack of
comprehension of the work to be done on the part of the Contractor.
B
Tendering Particulars
Tenders on the form supplied and duly filled in and signed must be delivered within the
time and to the place specified on the published notification.
The lowest or any tender will not necessarily be accepted and in no case will any
expenses incurred in the preparation of their be allowed.
Bills Of Quantities
The Quantities in these Bills, which form part of the Contract, is a firm quantity unless
specified as PROVISIONAL which will be subjected to remeasurement and valued in
accordance with the Conditions of Contract. The Government will not be liable for any
cost incurred by the Contractor in connection with the measurement of Works etc.
extras or omissions and variations from the Contract or in adjustment and settlement of
accounts.
TO COLLECTION :
A/10
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
DOCUMENTATION (CONT'D)
Bills Of Quantities (cont'd)

Provisional Sums shall be used as directed by the S.O and deducted wholly or in part if
not required and no loss or profit shall be entertained.
An error or omission in the rates and calculations of the Contractor in the Bills of
Quantities submitted by him shall, before the signing here of, be so rectified and
adjusted that, when correctly calculated, the total amount shall represent the same
amount as that tendered by the Contractor.
The nett aggregate amount of errors in moneying out items in the Bills of Quantities
whether a nett deduction or nett addition will be calculated as a percentage of the
corrected total of the Bills of Quantities and all unit rates throughout the Bills of
Quantities shall be subject to such percentage discount or premium as the case may be,
provided always that Provisional and Prime Cost Sums shall be excluded from the
calculations and shall not be subject to such percentage discount or premium.
Materials and workmanship throughout the Works shall be the best of their respective
kinds and by 'best' shall be understood that no superior class of specified materials or
workmanship is available in Malaysia.
B
Pricing of Bills Of Quantities
The Bills of Quantities are to be priced in INK and the sum of the amounts of all items of
the Bills of Quantities priced by the tenderer shall truly represent the amount shown in
his tender. The rates set down by the tenderer against each item in the Bills of
Quantities shall be the full inclusive rates and prices for the finished work (unless
expressly provided to be contrary) and shall be held to include providing and delivering
all materials, unloading, cutting and waste on materials, storage, packing carriage and
cartage, hoisting all labour, setting, fitting and fixing in position, use of plant, providing
suspension, establishment charges, profit and all other labour and everthing else
necessary for the due and proper completion of each item.
The rates shall be also inclusive of all ancillary work and expenditure whether
separately or specifically mentioned or described in the Contract Document or not,
which are either indispensably necessary to carry out and bring to completion the
Works, or which may contingently become necessary to overcome difficulties before
completion.
Items shall be realistically priced, The Contractor shall substantiate any rates required
by the S.O, prior to the signing of the Contract. Failing which, he will be considered not
to have submitted a bona-fide tender and shall be liable to have his tender deposit
forfeited.
TO COLLECTION :
A/11
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Pricing of Bills Of Quantities (cont'd)
All alike items shall be priced at the same rate, in valuing variations the lowest rate for
any individual item will be applied if unit rates vary from Bill to Bill or Section to Section.
The value of any items unpriced (or with a dash against it) either in the
Preliminaries or Bills of Quantities shall be deemed to be included in the prices or
rates of other items therein.
No unauthorised alteration, addition or note entered in these Bills of Quantities shall
modify the printed text.
Headings are not comprehensive and do not modify the meaning of the clause and
items in these Bills of Quantities.
Any rates found to be overpriced, inconsistently priced, under priced or erroneously
priced shall be subjected to adjustment and rectification before the signing of the
Contract and the authority to fix a reasonble rate shall be with the S.O and the amended
rates shall be used for computing the various monthly progress payments and the
measuring of variations.
B
Adjusment Of Errors etc.
Any error or omission in rates and / or calculations in the Contractor's priced Bills of
Quantities discovered before the signing of the Contract shall be so rectified and
adjusted that, when correctly calculated, the total amount represents the amount stated
on the form of tender submitted by the Contractor.
The nett aggregate amount of errors shall be calculated as a percentage adjustment in
the Summary of Tender of Tender General.
C
Method Of Measurement
The Bills of Quantities have been prepared generally in accordance with the Malaysian
Standard Method of Measurement for Building Works by the Institute Surveyor of
Malaysia and this method of measurement shall be adopted for the preparation of any
variations or remeasurement.
TO COLLECTION :
A/12
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Method Of Measurement (cont'd)

Departures from the Standard Method of Measurement have however been adopted in
certain measurements and in the detail compilation of the Bills of Quantities and such
departures, which the Contractor shall be deemed to have noted, shall be accepted by
the Contractor for this particular Bills of Quantities.The Contractor shall allow here for
any cost in connection with this matter. Any such departures shall not vitiate the
Contract.
Specification
The rate for each items of measured work in the Bills of Quantities shall include for
complying with the Specification contained in the Contract Document. No claim for
extra payment in this respect shall be later entertained.
Discrepancy in Tender / Contract Document
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the documents issued to him and if he
finds any discrepancy between any two or more of the contract documents, he shall,
before proceeding with the works, inform the S.O of such discrepancies.
No claims by the Contractor for any extra cost incurred as a result of the discrepencies
will be entertained if he fails to inform the S.O. of such discrepencies before proceeding
with the works.
D
Time For Completion

The time for completion stated on the Tender Form is the available for completion of the
Works including all reasonable allowances for anticipated delays through dificulties in
obtaining labour or materials, transport problems, unsuitable weather conditions and
statutory and other holidays.
Before granting any extension of time, the S.O must be satisfied that the Contractor has
shown due diligence and taken all reasonable steps to avoid or reduce the delay.
TO COLLECTION :
A/13
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Tender Drawings
Drawings issued with these Tender Documents are only intended to show the general
arrangement, character, shape and disposition of the Works.
Contract Drawings
The complete set of drawings used in the preparation of the Bills of Quantities and
forming part of the Contract Documents are listed in Section III, Part C - List of
Drawings.
The Contractor shall refer to all the relevant drawings to construct each items of the
work to ensure that due allowance has been made to receive all related items shown on
all the design drawings.
Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall allow for the preparation of any shop drawings required by the
Contract Document. Allow for the completion of all such drawings, for checking and
inspection by the S.O and any comments made by the S.O will not relieve the contractor
of responsibility for compliance with contract requirements. Shop drawings shall include
sufficient information and data to permit a detailed study of the product or system
submitted.
Before any installation work commences, dimensioned drawings showing all details of
the plant and materials to be used including sectional views, shall be submitted to the
S.O review. Five (5) sets of the above drawing shall be submitted.
If the Contractor requires early review of any drawing to avoid delay in the delivery of
the Contract Work, he shall advise the S.O to such effect when submitting the drawings.
Review of drawings by the S.O does not exonerate the Contractor from any
responsibilty under the Contract terms and conditions.
D
Submitals
(i) Manufacturer's Data
Submit for approval as requested by the Superintending Officer, manufacturer's
specification, installation instruction, general recommendation for the work, including
certified laboratory test reports and other data required to shown in compliance with
these Specifications.
TO COLLECTION :
A/14
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Submitals (cont'd)
(ii) Samples for approval as required by the Superintending Officer, samples(s) and / or
Sample panel(s) of the materials proposed prior to ordering of the materials.
(iii) Mock-Up(s)
Prepare sample installations as required to match specified work(s) in all respects

before proceeding with works. Mock-up units approved and accepted by the
Superintending Officer will be issued as the Standard of comparison for the work.
B
Specification To All Trades
Tenderers are are advised to read carefully the Specification to all trades. No claim
whatsoever, will be allowed in respect of errors in pricing due to brevity of descriptions,
which are fully described when read in conjuction with the relevant Specification.
C
Unit of Measurement
The units of measurement are according to British Metric Weights and Measures. The
following is a key to abbreviations employed :
Meter Cube
Meter Square
Centimetre
Pairs
Meter Linear
Kilogramme
Tonnes
Numbers
Milimetre
Imperial Standard
British Standard
Sirim Standard
M3
M2
CM
Prs
M
KG
Metric Ton
NO
MM
S.W.G
B.S.
M.S.
TO COLLECTION :
A/15
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Definitions Of Terms
The following Conventions shall be adopted for these documents:Wherever the terms "Employer" or "Superintending Officer" appears in the Contract
Documents, it shall mean "Project Manager, Tanjung Bin Power Sdn. Bhd." in the
Conditions of Contract and vise versa.
Wherever the terms "approved", "directed" or "selected" appears in the Contract
Documents will mean the approval, direction or selection by the Superintending Officer.
Wherever the term "allowed" appears in the Contract Documents, excepts with
reference to P.C. or Provisional Sums or quantities, the cost of the items will be at the
risk of the Contractor.
Wherever the phrase "as" directed or "under" the direction of the "Superintending
Officer" appears in the Contract Documents, it shall means as the Contractor shall
propose and as the Superintending Officer shall approved".
Wherever the Contractor is required under the terms of this Contract to maintain
temporary works including providing measures, facilities and buildings, such
maintenance will apply from Date Possession until the issue of the Certificate of
Practical Completion of the Works or when directed by the Superintending Officer that
such maintenance is no longer the resposibility of the Contractor, the date for such
decision not being unreasonable.
The terms "Current Issue" will mean the latest issue or edition at the date of Tender.
The Term "The Authorities" will be held to include for all Government, QuasiGovernment, Local Authorities or Departments and utility companies which has
jurisdiction over any section of the works.
Wherever the phrase "in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions" appears in
the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be held to have consulted the said
manufacturer's latest publications and to have allowed in his, the Contractor's Tender
for complying with all instructions, directions and recommendation contained therein.
TO COLLECTION :
A/16
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Definitions Of Terms (cont"d)

Wherever the terms "making good" appear in the Contract Documents, such making
good will be at the Contractor's expense and is the to be executed to the entire
satisfaction of the Superintending Officer.
Whrever the phrase "cart (carting) (remove) off the Site " appears in the Contract
Documents, such carting etc., will be held to include for carting materials and goods to
dumps to be found by the Contractor, depositing materials and goods there on, and for
paying all charges.
The works "as described" and "as specified" where used in these Bills of Quantities
mean as described and specified in detail the Specification.
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations appearing in these Bills of Quantities and all documents,
have their meanings as assigned against them :B.S
C.P
British Standards Specification as issued by the British

Standard House, London, (The latest amendment)
British Standard Code of Practice issued by the Council for

Code of Practice in Great Britain (The latest amendment)
M.S
Malaysian Standard as issued by the Standard & Industrial

Research Institute of Malaysia (The latest amendment)
S.O.
Superintending Officer
JKR/PWD
Jabatan Kerja Raya/ Public Works Department
Form Of Contract
The form of Contract into which the Contractor will be required to enter in connection
with this contract shall be the Standard form of Contract.
The Conditions of the Contract are to be read in conjuction with the Bills of Quantiities.
TO COLLECTION :
A/17
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
FORM AND CONDITION OF CONTRACT
Form Of Contract
The form of Contract to be used shall be the Standard Form of Contract where
Quantities Form Part of the Contract. The conditions of contract shall be read conjointly
with the Bills of Quantities.
Conditions Of Contract
The Contractor shall refer to the Standard Form of Contract for full information and the
number and titles of the Clauses together with any additional information are given
below and the Contractor is to allow here or in his rates for all expenses involved in
complying with the terms of these Clauses.
Clause No.1
Scope and Application
Clause No.2
Interpretations and Definitions
Clause No.3
Employer's Project Manager and Employer's Engineer
Clause No.4
Contract Documents
Clause No.5
Site
Refer also to Clause 5.3(a), 5.3(b) and 5.3(c) in the APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS
OF CONTRACT
Clause No.6
Equipment Specifications
Clause No.7
Documentation
Clause No.8
Design Responsibility
Clause No.9
Employer's Obligations
Clause No.10
Date of Completion
Clause No.11
Contractor's Personnel
Clause No.12
Setting Out At Site and Closed-Out
Refer also to Clause 12 in the APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the reference points stated above for setting
out but shall be solely responsible for:
TO COLLECTION :
A/18
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
FORM AND CONDITION OF CONTRACT (CONT'D)
Conditions Of Contract (cont'd)
(i) The accurate setting out of the Works;

(i) The correctness of the position, levels, dimensions and alignment of all parts
of the Works; and
(iii) The provision of all necessary instruments, equipment, apparatus and labour
in connection with the setting out at Site.
The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall entirely at its own cost amend any
errors arising from its own inaccurate setting out.
Clause No.13
Quality Assurance
Clause No.14
Environmental Matters, Dangerous Goods and Occupational

Safety and Health and Antiquities and Fossils
Refer also to Clause 14.1, 14.2, 14.3 and 14.4

Clause No.15
in the APPENDIX TO THE
Programme
Refer also to Clauses 15 in the APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Clause No.16
Provisional Acceptance Testing
Clause No.17
Payment Terms
Refer also to Clause 17.1, 17.2, 17.3, 17.4 and 17.5 in the APPENDIX TO THE
Clause No.18
The Contractor's Obligation and Warranties
Clause No.19
Technical Advice And Support Service Centre
Clause No.20
Intelectual Property Rights
Clause No.21
Right Of Use
Clause No.22
Performance Guarantee
Clause No.23
Guarantee And Guarantee Period
Clause No.24
Taxes And Duties
Clause No.25
Spare Parts
Clause No.26
Injury To Persons And Damage To Property
Clause No.27
Insurance (Contractor All Risk, Walkman Conversation,

RM5,000,000.00 damage on existing building)
TO COLLECTION :
A/19
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION

Clause No.28
Power Plant Operation
Clause No.29
Test And Inspection
Clause No.30
Rejection
Clause No.31
Extension Of Time
Clause No.32
Variation
Clause No.33
Loss And Expense
Clause No.34
Amendment To Contract Documents
Clause No.35
Liquidated Damages
Clause No.36
Deduction Of Payment Due
Clause No.37
Contractor's Equipment, Machinery And Material
Clause No.38
Termination Of Contract For Cause
Clause No.39
Termination Of Contract Without Cause
Clause No.40
Stamp Duty And Documentation Cost
Clause No.41
Language
Clause No.42
Statutory Requirements
Clause No.43
Force Majuere
Clause No.44
Assignment And Subletting
Clause No.45
Entire Agreement And Severability
Clause No.46
Waiver
Clause No.47
Dispute Resolution And Governing Law
Clause No.48
Confidentiality, Public Announcements And Press
Clause No.49
Notices
TO COLLECTION :
A/20
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION

Clause No.50
Relationship Of Parties
Clause No.51
Titles And Headings
Clause No.52
Successors Bound
TO COLLECTION :
A/21
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
LAW, REGULATION AND REQUIREMENTS
Laws And Jurisdiction

The Contract is sublect to the laws in force in Malaysia and the Contractor hereby
submits to the jurisdiction of the Malaysia courts to hear and determine any actions or
proceedings arising out of the Contract the Contractor shall accept as final in all
respects within his country of domicile or elsewhere any decision or award of an
arbitrator or judgment in any Malaysian court in relation to any dispute between parties
between the parties under the Contract.
The Contractor shall comply to Part VIII of the Lembaga Pembangunan Industri
Pembinaan Malaysia Act 1994 and allow 0.125% of total contract sum for the
construction industry (lLevy Collection) Regulation 1996.
Statutory Obligations, Notices, Fees And Charges

The Contractor shall comply with and give all notices required by an Act of Parliament
Instrument Rule or Order made under any Act of Parliament or any Regulation or ByeLaw of any Statutory Undertaking which has any jurisdiction or authorization with regard
to the Works.
The Contractor also shall pay and indemnify the Government against liability in respect
of any fees or charges ( including any rates or taxes) legally demandable under any of
the above. Statutory requirements and these shall be deemed to have been considered
and included herein this Tender.
TO COLLECTION :
A/22
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
LAW, REGULATION AND REQUIREMENTS (CONT"D)
Import Duties, Taxation and Custom Regulations
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the Custom Regulations including
all restrictions, prohibitions, import and excise duties, taxes, levels, insurances, freight
and storage charges, transportation cost, etc. and shall deemed to have allowed in his
Tender for all such financial contigencies . No claims wiil be entertained or quotas or
increase in duties, tariff, taxes etc., that may arise during the duration of the Contract.
The Contractor shall ascertain for himself in respect of any ban or prohibition on
imported materials and goods which may be imposed on any imported materials or
goods intended for use on the Works, the Contractor shall obtain the supply of such
materials or goods locally and any increased costs arising there from are not
recoverable from the Government.
B
Factory And Machinery Act

The Contractor is to comply with all Factory and Machinery Act and provide all
necessary safety precautions, safety helmets, safety belts, devices and accessories,
etc. for workmen carrying out the works and any other special precautions necessary for
the safety of the public and adjoining owners.
The above shall apply for all vehicles, machinery, plant, equipment, tools and temporary
works used on and/ or off the Site by the Contractor, his Nominated Sub-Contractors
and Suppliers. Construction of scaffoldings and gantries including the use of plant,
vehicle and machinery shall be checked regulary and maintain in proper and safe
conditions as required by any Code of Practice, Bye-Law Regulations and Authorities
concerned.
Safety, Health And Welfare Of Workpeople
20,000.00
The Contractor shall allow for and complying with the Statutory Rules and Regulations
concerning the safety, health and welfare of workmen, by the Department of
Occupational Safety & Health Malaysian including workmen employed by Nominated
Sub-Contractors and Supplier.
The contractor shall allow for and complying with the safety and machineries guideline
by Tanjung Bin Power (refer Attachment A1)
The contractor shall allow and complying with the NIOSH Regulations and standard
course shall be attended by workmen employed
TO COLLECTION :
A/23
20,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Police Regulations
The Contractor is to obtain from the Police and other Authorities regarding particulars of
any restriction on loading and unloading of vehicles, use of streets and pavements
access onto and egress from the Site, carriage of any materials, protective coverings,
warning displays, traffic sign etc., and for complying therewith and paying all charges
and fees.
The Contractor is to observe for any restricted hours for entry within the City Limits of
transport for loading and/or unloading, diversion of road or access including all other
matters which may affect the progress of Works for the duration of the Contract. Any
fines, summon or claims for failure to observe such regulations shall be borne entirely
by the Contractor.
Patent Rights And Royalties
The Contractor shall indemnify from and against all claims and proceeding for an
account of infringement of any patent rights, design, trademark or name or other
protected rights in respect of any plant, machine work or materials used for or in
connection with the Works and against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages,
lost, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.
C
Information To The Public

The Contractor shall not be permitted to divulge any information relating to the Contract
to the general public. All request for information, photography, and/or press statement
by the public by the press or any other persons or bodies whether private, public or
Government, must be referred the S.O.
Any information, photography and/or statement released wihout prior knowledge and
written approval of the S.O. may render the Contractor liable to be sued.
The Contractor is to note that all information, data and design as contained in the
Tender and Contract Document including document and correspondence that will be
issued as the Works progress shall be restricted to use by only personnel involved in
theWorks. He shall ensure that such informations do not fall into the possession of
others who are not involved directly with the Works.
D
Advertising
The sole right of advertising upon or adjacent to the Works is reserved to the
Government and the Contractor shall not allow any advertisement to be displayed
without the written consent of the S.O.
TO COLLECTION :
A/24
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Existing Road Etc.
The Contractor shall not unnecessarily obstruct any existing streets and road by reason
of carriying out of the Works. He shall ascertain and comply with any restrictions or
limitations on the free passage of vehicles, plants or workmen to or from the Site and
other areas in which Works will be executed. He shall clean streets, roads, etc. effected
by the carrying out of the Works and shall keep them free from surplus materials, mud,
dirt or rubbish. Suitable 'wheel washing' arrangement to the approval of the S.O. shall
be provided if necessary for all traffic leaving the site.
B
Traffic Control
No streets or roads shall be temporarily or permanently closed expect for which the
Government has obtained the necessary permision or instructions from relevant
Authorities. The Contractor shall be responsible in obtaining all necessary written
approval and permit from the relevant Authorities and provide adequate notices to the
public and/or others regarding such traffic diversions. Provide maintain and remove on
completion all necessary traffic control such as guide rails, fences, signs, warning lights,
flagmen, barriers, etc. for safety of all pedestrion to maintain traffic flow. Diversions shall
be suitable for the type of traffic to be expected and shall be properly reinstate on
completion of the Works to the satisfaction of the S.O. and Local Authorities.
Control of Noise And Vibration

All reasonable means shall be used to avoid inconveniencing to adjoining owners,
occupiers and/or Contractors working on the adjoining sites. The contractor shall allow
for and ensure that all noise and vibration produced or emitted from the Works are kept
to an absolute minimum oras required under or by virtue of any Enactment or
Regulation.
The Contractor are required to fix noise suppressors to all plant and equipment where
recommended by the manufacturer to prevent nuisance of noise. He shall take into
consideration in his completion period with regards to complaints from adjacent owners
etc. and consequential stoppages of Works resulting therefore and he shall be held
liable for any claims or legal proceedings arising from such complaints.
TO COLLECTION :
A/25
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Control Of Dust, Smoke and Pollution

The Contractor shall allow for and ensure that all measures to control dust and smoke
emitting from the Works are kept to an absolute minimum or as required under or by
virtual of any Enactment or Regulation.
Waste and debris arising from the Works are to be sprinkled with water to prevent dust
arising and all proper screens, dust sheet, coves, etc. shall be install. Ensure that all
emission of black smoke, fumes or other abnoxious gases from his vehicles, plants and
machineries used on site are kept to the required minimum level.
The Contractor shall maintain and keep all drains, streams and waterways on or
adjacent to the site free from mud, silt and any other obstruction or pollutions caused by
the Works and make good where necessary. Prevent entry of oil, paint or other
watercourse. Should any drainage system or water course be fouled by such materials
the Contractor shall be solely liable for any claims or legal proceeding arising from any
of the above occurence.
B
Use Of Public Road For Transport Of Spoil
The Contractor shall make necessary provision for loading of lorries or other means of
conveyance of the spoin and shall be directly responsible for ensuring that :
a)
The heaped spoil shall not be overloaded.
b)
A daily list of name of driven and the vehicle registration

number be maintained on Site.
c)
Sufficient workmen are employed to continously clean all
roads where spoil is spilled from Contractor's lorries.
d)
Ensure that the wheels of all vehicles whether coming to or
going from Site be adequately covered with tarpaulin or
other approved protective material to prevent spillage of
loaded materials, goods and/ or debris.
TO COLLECTION :
A/26
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Tipping Area
The Contractor shall be responsible for preventing excavated materials, rubbish, rubble,
surplus materials etc., arising from the works being dump any where at the site other
than on a recognised tip lawfully so used. He shall be held resonsible for cleaning away
such deposits at his own cost and ensuring that they are placed in a recognised tip.
The Contractor shall be deemed to have allowed in his Tender for all charges and fees
incurred for the use of such recognised tipping areas.
B
Mosquito Breeding Prevention
1,000.00
The Contractor must restrain from dumping on site any rubbish, spoil, unused materials
or empty containers, bottles or cans which may affort breading places for mosquitoes.
Water shall not be allowed to accumulate and stagnate on the site. The site shall be
kept dry by pumping, bailing out, temporary drainage or by any other methods. All drains
temporary or permanent sumps and the like shall be periodically swept and cleared of
debris etc. to prevent water from stagning.
Allow for taking such precautions as may be deemed necessary by the S.O. and/or
Local Authorities for the preventions of mosquitoes breeding any pay all charges in
connection with any anti malaria/dengue measures taken by the Local Authorities.
C
Press Statements
The Contractor, his workmen or agents shall not be permitted to make any public or
press statements of any from or description which are exasperative and detrimental to
the interests of the Government and the Consultants connected with this Contract or
shall they divulge any information to the public concerning this contract before or after
the completion of the Works.
TO COLLECTION :
A/27
1,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
LABOUR AND CONDITIONS OF EMPLOYMENT (CONT'D)
Employment Of Non-Malaysian Citizen
The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for the engagement of all Labour
required to complete the Works satisfactorily and within the time stipulated. He shall
employ in the execution of this Contract only Malaysian Citizen as workmen to every
extent possible in cases where Malaysian Citizen are not available or there is
insufficient numbers in any particular trade or skill that are required to complete the
Works in time, the Contractor shall apply for written approval from the S.O. and satisfy
the appropriate Authorities that the problem exist prior to employing Non-Malaysian
Citizen as his workmen. Where approval is given, the Contractor shall be required to
obtain all the necessary employment clearances passes or work permits necessary from
the appropriate Authorities concerned and paying all fees and charges with regards to
the employment.
No claims for loss of profit, expenses and/or extension of time arising from refusal or
rejection of such employment by the S.O. or the appropriate Authorities or the refusal or
rejection of such employment clearances, passes or work permits by the appropriate
Authorities concerned shall be entertained.
Notwithstanding the approval to the Contractor to employ Non-Malaysian Citizen for the
Contract, the Contractor shall be held liable for and shall indemnify the Government in
respect of any claims or proceedings arising out of neglect or non-fulfilment of the
above clauses. Similarly, he shall be fully responsible for the conduct of all NonMalaysian Citizen employed by him for the Contract.
B
Withholding Tax
In accordance with the Income Tax Act, the Contractor shall required to withhold twenty
percent (20%) of the "service portion" of any payment made or issued to any NonResident person and/or company employed by the Contractor and such withholdments
shall be remitted to the Director General of the Department of inland Revenue of
Malaysia in favour of tax account in the Non-Resident person and/or company employed
by the Contractor.
Such matter shall be dealt with between the Contractor, Non-Resident person and/or
company concerned and the Director General of the Inland Revenue of Malaysia. All
actions, costs and expenses arising from failure by the Contractor to comply with
this requirements shall remain his entire responsibility.
TO COLLECTION :
A/28
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Registration And List Of Workmen

The Contractor shall register and furnish to the S.O.A full list and particulars of all
workmen employed on the Site including those employed by his Sub-Contractors and
Nominated Sub-Contractor, in compliance with the Internal Security (Registration of
Labour) Regulation 1960.
The record book of his workmen shall at alltimes be maintained and kept on site in a
safe place and shall be made available at any time for inspection by the S.O.or other
authorised Law enforcement officer.
LABOUR AND CONDITIONS OF EMPLOYMENT
Misconduct of Workmen
The Contractor shall on request of the S.O., immediately dismiss from the site any
person employed thereon by him or any Sub-Contractor who may in the opinion of the
S.O. be incompetent or misconduct himself. Such person shall not again be employed
on the Works without prior permision of the S.O. No claims shall be entertained for
inconveniences and/or delays caused due to such matters arising thereof.
C
Emoluments And Expenses
The Contractor is to allow for all emoluments and expenses with regards to Employees'
Provident Fund Contribution, Workman's Compensation Insurance Policies, Employees'
Social Security Scheme and any other provision by Statute, Tort or Common Law or
amendment or replacement of existing legislation concerning the employment of labour,
including any extra payment made for bonus scheme, accommodations, travelling time
and fares, etc.
D
Working Days And Hours

No work shall be done on the weekly date, of rest or any recognised nubile holiday in
the District where this Contract's being executed or between the hours of six (6) in the
evening and six (6) in the following morning unless written permission from the S.O.
and/or Authorities is acquired before hand.
If permission granted, the Contractor shall make adequate security arrangement and
indemnify the Government against any claims by third parties caused by working
outside normal working hours. No claims for extra remuneration on account of
working outside normal working hours shall be entertained.
TO COLLECTION :
A/29
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Working Overtime
The whole of the Works are to be completed by the time stated in the Contract and no
extra claims will be allowed in respect of overtime paid to achieves this. If in the opinion
of the S.O. the progress of the works is falling behind schedule for other titan those
which entitle the Contractor to an extension of time, then the Contractor if so instructed
by the S.O., arrange at no extra cost to the Government to increase its plant and labour
force or working beyond normal working hours including nightswork on the site untill
such time as progress on the site is in accordance with the programme. The Contractor
shall give proper advance notice to the S.O., for overtime works. No overtime work shall
be allowed unless the S.O.'s written approval is received. Proper records of overtime
hours incurred by every Contractor's workmen including vehicle, plant and equipment
involved in the overtime work shall be endorsed by the Contractor and Clerk of Works.
In the respect the Contractor is to make allowance in his Tender and shall bear the extra
cost for carrying out parts of the works outside normal working hours and at weekends
where he deems it necessary to keep up with the progress of the Works.
Reimbursement Of Overtime Expenses Incurred By Site Supervisory Staff
The normal working hours of the Resident Engineer/Architect, Clerk of Works and other
Site Supervisory Staff are as follows:
Monday to Friday
8.30 am to 5.30 pm
with one (1) hour break for lunch
Saturday
8.30 am to 1.00 pm
with one (1) hour break for lunch
Should any works requires the supervision of the Site Supervisory Staff beyond the
stipulated normal working hours, prior written permision of the S.O. shall be obtained. If
permisssion is granted for overtime work, the Contractor shall reimburse all overtime
supervision expenses incurred by the Government on its Site Supervisory Staffs for
working outside normal working hours. A minimum of fourty eight (48) hours prior
arrangements and notifications shall be made by the Contractor to the S.O., failing
which the Contractor shall be held entirely responsible forany consequences arising
thereof and no claims whatsoever shall be entertained.
TO COLLECTION :
A/30
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Working Overtime (cont'd)

The overtime rates per hour for Site Supervisory Staff shall be as follows :DAY
WORKING TIME
MULTIPLYING FACTOR
Monday - Friday
6pm - 10pm
10pm - 6am
1 1/8
1 1/4
Saturday & Sunday
6am - 10pm
10pm - 6am
1 1/4
1 1/2
Public Holiday
6am - 10pm
10pm - 6am
1 3/4
2
The calculation of the hourly rate for the Site Supervisory Staff shall be as follows :
Basic Monthly Salary x 12 x Multiplying Factor = Basic Hourly Rate
313 x 8
Payment for the overtime supervising cost shall be made monthly through the
Government and/or the respective Consultant. Should the Contractor fail to make
payment thereto the Government reserves the right to deduct from money due or to
become to the Contractor and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly.
TO COLLECTION :
A/31
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
SITE MANAGEMENT, ADMINISTRATION AND PROCEDURES
Generally
The Contractors is responsible for the coordination, supervision and administration of
the Works, including all his Sub-Contract Works. He shall arrange and monitor a
programme with each Sub-Contractor, Supplier, Local Authority, Statutory Undertaker,
etc. obtain and supply informations as necessary for the proper coordination and
completion of the Works.
He, shall provide all on and of site management and supervison including Site Agent
and all necessary clerical and supporting personnel and to submit to the S.O. within two
(2) weeks from the date of notification of acceptance of Tender a list of site
management personnel together with their resume who will be directly involved and
responsible for the project.
Time For Completion
The time for completion as stated in the Tender Form is the gross time available to the
Contractor for the proper completion the Works including all reasonable allowances for
anticipated delas through difficulaties in obtaining labour or materials, transport problem,
inclement weather conditions, statutory and other holidays.
The completion time shall include any extension of time that may be granted and shall
be calculated on the basis of a complete calendar day (24 hours) ending at twelwe (12)
midnight and shall be held to include all weekly days of rests and public holidays.
Where the completion and/or extension of time is stated in weeks, each full week shall
be held to mean seven (7) complete calendar days at twelve (12) midnight of the
seventh calendar day of the week inclusive of weekly days of rest and public holidays.
C
Works Programme
1,500.00
Within two (2) weeks after receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the Contractor shall
submit to the S.O. for his approval four (4) copies of a fully detailed Works Programme
and subsequent revision from time to time be required in application of the tentative
programme submitted earlier with his Tender.
TO COLLECTION :
A/32
1,500.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
SITE MANAGEMENT, ADMINISTRATION AND PROCEDURES (CONT'D)
Works Programme (cont'd)
The work programme too must be in of derivative bar chart with weightage based on
time factor and critical path method (CPM) programme type, unless agreed otherwise.
The programme should shown the order and method in which the Contractor proposes
to carry out the Works and the anticipated time for the completion of each Works. The
programme shall be accompanied by all necessary schedules, programme dates for
commencement and completion of the Works in sequence.
The programme should indicate the date of ordering materials, date of submisssion of
shop drawings, weightage factor, no of days allocated, etc.. It shall also include
nightwork and/or overtime work schedule and shall also indicate the proposed sequance
and order to Nominated Sub-Contractors' Works including the delivery of all Nominated
Suppliers' goods or materials which the Contractor feels are in conformity with the
overall Work Programme.
The Contractor shall furnish the S.O., with details and particulars of the Contractor's
arrangements for carrying out the Works, Site layout organisation, labour, plant,
equipment and temporary works and buildings which the Contractor intends to supply,
use or construct as the case may be. Any work which require 'standing' supervision e.g.
concreting, piling, mixing of cement and sand for plastering or screeding, mixing paint,
etc. shall be organised and programe in such a way so as to carrry out these Works
within the stipulated working hours for the Site Supervisory Staffs.
The Contractor shall be required to adhere to the approved strictly to the approved
works Programme and shall not depart from it without written approval of the Work
Programme, the Contractor is in no way relieve from his duties and responsiblities to
complete the Works by the date of completion or any extension of time granted.
One enlarge copy of the approved programme shall be pasted at the Office for
monitoring and updating. If at any time it appear to the S.O. that the progress of the
works behind and does not conform to the approved programme, the Contractor shall
produce for approval when instructed by the S.O., a revised Work Programmme,
showing the modifications to the programme of the Works in order to ensure the proper
and satisfactorily completion of the Works.
TO COLLECTION :
A/33
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Sequance Of Works
Notwithstanding the scope and general description of the Works, the location and
orientation of the proposed buildings as described, the Contractor shall be required to
carry out the Works in such sections, order and/or manner to the complete saticfaction
of the S.O. and the execute the Works in conformity with the approved Works
Programme submitted.
The S.O. at his discretion reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out the
Works in such section, manner and/ or as he thinks where in his opinion, the progress of
the Works will he or behind schedule. No claims with respects to that instructions will be
entertained.
Progress Photographs
1,000.00
Before commencement of any Works, the Contractor shall extend to the S.O. a
complete record of the site conditions, which shall be in the form of colored photographs
taken at least at six (6) difference angles and views, at the Contractor's own expense.
Submit five (5) sets of such photo to the S.O. for record and distribution.
The Contractor shall also extend photographs on the progress of the Works at site. A
total five (5) sets of the progress photographs in '3R' sized print shall be submitted
together with the progress report and claims, to the S.O. and the Consultant at monthly
intervals throughtout the duration of the Contract or as take position number and
description. It shall be properly identified and endorsed by the Contractors and to be
complied into a bound booklet. The photographs shall be taken from various positions or
as directed by the S.O.
C
Progress Report
2,000.00
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the S.O. and Consultants within first week of
every month, five (5) copies of report on the progress of the Works at site. The report
shall be by Sections and/or Trades and to include theworks of Nominated subContractors. It should also stated the number and deployment of workmen employed,
materials and goods delivered, extent and type of plant used, site instructions, weather
conditions, visitors and other information relevant to the Works.
TO COLLECTION :
A/34
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Progress Report (cont'd)

Such report shall indicate cumulative progress towards schedule completion of all items
shown in the approved Works Programme and to include a summary of the progress
achieved through every phase of the Contract. It shall relate to key date achievement
and to indicate the degree ofcriticality on each activity. Any delays or potential delays
should be clearly identified and statement given as to measure to be taken to maintain
the keys dates. The monthly progress report report shall be in a format approved by the
S.O.
Daily Site Record
1,000.00
The Contractor shall keep proper daily records or diaries on site and the details shall be
counter-signed by the Site Supervisory Staff, and submit two (2) copies of such records
to the S.O. in every site meeting. These records should elaborate on daily activities at
the site such as records on work done, weather conditions category of workmen
employed, materials delivered to site materials tested, plant and equipment used,
instructions, visitors and other relevant information pertaining to the daily activities and
progress of Works. On completion of the project the records shall be forwarded to S.O.
for retention.
C
Site Meeting
2,000.00
The Contractors shall make arrangements and allow for all necessary facilities and
attendances for weekly, fortnightly and/or montly site meetings to be held at the
Contractors's site office or elsewhere as directed by the S.O.
The Contractors shall attend all site meetings as required by the S.O. His director,
authorised representatives, Site Agent and foreman including those of
Nominated/Domestic Sub-Contractors and/or Suppliers shall have the authority to
commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon at the meeting.
The S.O. shall chair these meetings, record the proceedings and distribute copies of the
minutes of meetings to all parties concerned whether they were present or absent at the
meeeting. The minutes is to reach them at least one (1) week before the scheduled date
of the next site meeting.
Similarly, site meetings shall also be held between the Contractor and all Nominated
Sub-Contractors and Suppliers as and when necessary or as when directed by the S.O.
in order to coordinate and ensure that the Works Programme is strictly adhere to
minutes of such meetings shall be recorded, typed written, reproduced and sent to all
parties concerned incliding the S.O. and all the Consultant for recording and references.
TO COLLECTION :
A/35
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Resident Enginer and/or Clerk of Works

The Government are entitled to appoint Resident Engineer and/or Clerk of Works at site
whose duty shall be act solely as inspector on behalf of the Government and the S.O.
under the directions of the S.O. The Contractor shall afford every reasonable access
and facilities for the performance of that duties by the Resident Engineer and/or Clerk
Of Works.
If any direction is given to the Contractor or to hisforeman upon the works, by the
Resident Engineer and/or Clerk of Works the same shall be of no effect unless given in
regard to a matter in respect of which the S.O. is expressly empowered by these
conditions to issue instructions.
Contractor's Supervisory Staffs
20,000.00
The Contractor is to employ constantly on the site during the duration and execution of
the Works and as long as the S.O. may require, such experienced and/or suitably
trained site management and supervisory staffs with assistants for the proper
coordination, supervision and administration of the Works. All necessary clerical and
other supporting personnel shall be provided also by the Contractor, at their own cost.
C
Site Agent
30,000.00
The Contractor shall allow for an experienced and competent Site Agent to the approval
of the S.O. together with the necessary assistants to solely and constantly in charge of
the whole Works and to respresent the Contractor and liasing with the S.O. and other
Consultants. The Site Agent shall provide superintendence over the wholesiteoperation
for the full duration of the Contract and as long thereafter as the S.O. may consider
necessary. The Site Agent must be competent in conversing in both English and
Bahasa Malaysia. He shall be a degree holder of a relevant practice i.e. Engineer,
Architect, or Quantitiy Surveyor and having a comprehensive theoritical background,
qualifications and experience relevant for the nature of condition of the Works, with
minimum experiences of 5 years.
The Site Agent shall be constantly on the Works and shall devote his time to the
superintendance of the same. Once appointed and approval, the Agent shall not be
changed without prior apprroval of the S.O. Should the S.O. find that the Site Agent is
unsuitable for any reason whatsoever, the Contractor shall as soon it is practicable after
receiving such written notice from the S.O. remove Site Agent from the site and shall
thereafter employ another to the approval of the S.O.
TO COLLECTION :
A/36
50,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Safety Officer
The Contractor is to employ a qualified Safety Officer to the approval of the S.O. Safety
officer must registered with OSH and experienced with requlation regarding
occupational safety and Health, Construction safety Regulation and others related act
(to construction safety).
Employment of safety officer are provide during the full duration of the contract plus any
extension of time.
Variations, Provisional And Prime Cost Sums
Notwithstanding Clause 24 & 34 of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractornis to note

that no measurement, valuation and/or payment shalll bemade for the execution of the
Works which involves variotions and/or Works under Provisional Sum or Prime Cost
Sums unless and until the Quantitiy Surveyor has received the official endorsed
variation order or written instruction from the S.O. and/or the Consultant concerned. The
Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that all verbal instructions are confirmed
writing by the S.O. or the Consultant concerned as noclaims whatsoever shall be
entertained for failure to comply with this requirements.
The Contractor shal be required to submit all necessary quotation and/or rate to the
S.O. and Quantitiy Surveyor for approval prior to the commencement of such works
included in the Works Contract as a Provisional Sum or Prime Cost Sums. Such works
carried out without prior submissions and approval of the Contractor's quotation and/or
rates, unless otherwise directed by the S.O., shall be performed at the Contractor's own
risk.
C
Remesurement Of Provisional Quantities

Notwithstanding that all provisional quantities shall be remeasured by the Quantity
Surveyor on completion of the Works, the Contractor shall nevertheless required to
submit their remeasured quantities of the Works to substantiate claims including those
of interim proggress payments.
The costs and expenses of which shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the
Tender. Any delay in verification of claims and/or issuance of interim valuations and
progress payment shall be at the entire risk of the Contractor and no claims whatsoever
arising therof non-compliance with this requirement shall be entertained.
TO COLLECTION :
A/37
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Interim Valuation And Certificates
Interim valuations on site shall be carried out on a monthly basic or at other intervals
agreed, the date and time shall be arranged by Quantitiy Surveyor. The Contractor shall
required to submit to the S.O. priced detail statement in support of his claim for interim
payments with copy to the Quantity Surveyor for verification and checking. The claims
shall be submit not later than seven (7) days before each site valuation is due. The S.O.
and the Consultants shall not be responsible for any delay in the issuance of interim
valuation certificates arising due to late submission or failure to submit in aforesaid time.
Such detailed statement in support of the interim claims shall include the following :a)
A statement of quantities of the Works relating in detail to the

items and the value of the Woks executed, set out by
elements or trades.
b)
A statement of quantities and the total value of unfixed
materials delivered to site (premature and materials lying
untidily about or all over the site shall not be be valued) to be
sign by the Foreman-In-Charge and countersigned by the
Clerk-of-Works/Resident Engineer.
c)
A statement of the value of Works completed by Nominated

Sub-Contractors and of goods or materials supplied by
Nominated Supplier relating in detail to their respective
accepted estimates and showing the approximate quantities,
itemised prices of theWorks and/or goods or materials
concern.
d)
Similar statements as (a) and (b) in respect of Nominated SubContractors and Supplier's claims, if any. For M & E
Nominated Sub-Contract Works, such claims shall be
accompanied with the M & E Engineer's certificates.
e)
Receipts of payment from Nominated Sub-Contractor and/ or

Suppliers of amounts paid in previous interim certificate where
applicable.
f)
All necessary vouchers, delivery order's, receipts and/or

documentary proofs required for the verification of the
Contractor's statement of claims.
TO COLLECTION :
A/38
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Interim Valuation And Certificates (cont'd)

g)
All approved variations orders, overtime and/or daywork
claim,if any, together with substantiating details breakdowns
and documents, all of which are to have been endorsed by the
Contractor, Clerk-of-Works/Resident Engineer and the S.O.
With regards to interim valuation and payments of Nominated Sub-Contractors and/or
Nominated Suppliers, the Contractors shall liaise with them on the dates for submission
of their interim claims to the Contractor such that the claims for the whole of the Works
including those of Nominated Sub-Contractors and Suppliers could be submitted at the
same time to the Quantity Surveyor.
The Contractor is to note that the valuation and/or payment of preliminaries that may be
incurred due to authorised extension of time as provided by the Contract shall be valued
and paid on the basis of actual expenses incurred subject nevertheless to vouchers and
receipt being submitted as required herein to substantiate the claims made, failing which
no claims related thereto shall be entertained.
B
Prime Costs (P.C.) Unit Rates
The S.O. shall at his discreation, invite quotations for the SUPPLY, DELIVERED TO
SITE ONLY of the materials or goods for which P.C. unit rates items have been
provided in the BQ. The Contractor shall be deemed to have included in his unit rates
for ordering, unloading, storing, protecting, taking from store, placing in position,
hoisting, assembling and fixing, wastage, breakages, insurances, returning of all
chargeable packings, carriage, profits establishment charges etc. thereto in ariving at
the overall unit rate for that particular item inclusive of the P.C. unit rate, necessary for
the proper execution of the Works.
Upon approval and acceptance of a Supplier's quotation and samples of the materials or
goods, the P.C. unit rate shall be adjusted the actual cost of the materials or goods
supplied and delivered to site by the Nominated Supplier. The same percentage addition
as allowed for the Contractor in pricing of each item will be added back to the actual
cost for each item of materials supplied. The above percentage addition shall be
deemed to include profit and attendance.
TO COLLECTION :
A/39
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Prime Costs (P.C.) Unit Rates (cont'd)
The Contractor shall place orders with the Nominated Suppliers at the prices agreed
between the S.O. and the Suppliers. The quantities given in these B.Q. are measured
nett from the drawings and payment shall be made on nett quantities as laid or installed.
In the event of any disrepancy between the Contractor's overall rate item in different
sections or parts of the B.Q., then the lowest rate shall be used for adjusments of P.C.
unit rate items in the final account.
B
Shop Drawings, Calculations Etc.
5,000.00
The Contractor shall allow for the preparation and shall cause his Sub-Contactors or
Suppliers to prepare and complete sufficient shop drawings, calculations etc. for all M &
E services ( ie. : sub DBs shop drawing and layout drawing c/w circuit numbering),
aluminium and glazing works and all other Specialist Works or Services. Unless
otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit four (4) copies of each shop drawings to
the S.O. for comments, approval and reference.
Such drawings shall be submitted in ample time for checking and for resubmission for
any amendments described so as not in any way to jeopardise the completion time of
the Contract. Shop drawings shall include sufficient informations and data to permit a
detail study of the product or system submitted. No works shall be carried out until the
relevant shop drawings have approved by the S.O. thus will not relieve the Contractor of
his responsibility for compliance with the Contract requirements.
C
Application For Daywork
Daywork prices are allowed where the work cannot be propely measured or valued. No
work shall be carried out on daywork basis unless ordered in writing by the S.O.. Where
special mechanical plant is required for use on daywork, the cost to be paid to the
Contractor shall be agreed prior to commencement of any work. Notwithstanding Clause
25.2 of the conditions of Contract where works are carried out on daywork basis or
where works are carried out on daywork basis or where the Contractor contemplates
submiting claims for any on a daywork basis, the full and complete details labour, goods
and material and any other things used in the saidworks shall be recorded on proper
daywork sheets for Contractor and countersigned by the Clerk-of-Works/Resident
Engineer. The daywork sheets claim together with the substantiating documents shall
be submitted progressively, not later than the end of the week following which the
daywork has been executed to the S.O. for verification and endorsement.
TO COLLECTION :
A/40
5,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Application For Daywork (cont'd)

The endorsement of the daywork sheets and any substantiating documents by the Clerkof-Works/Resident Engineer and/or the S.O. shall only imply that the labours, good
materials, machinery, plant, equipment and the like used in the Works and as recorded
on the Daywork sheets are considered to be correct but shall but not imply that such
Works constitute a variation nor that they will be valued and/or paid on a daywork basis.
These being matters to be decided and determined at the discretion of the Quantitiy
Surveyor.
Application For Extension Of Time
Notwithstanding Clause 31 of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall note that
whenever it is reasonably apparent during the course of the Works that the progress of
the Works may possibly be delay beyond the Date of Completion or beyond any
extended time approved by the S.O., the Contractor shall forthwith give written notices
of the causes of or reasons for the possible delays. The notices written to reach the S.O.
not later than thirty (30) days after the occurance of each event which in the opinion of
the Contractor may be the cause or reason for the possible delays.
Notices submitted later than thirty (30) days after the occurance of each and every event
that may be the cause of or lesson for the possible delays shall not be considered as
valid notices or application for extension of time under Clause 43 of the Conditions of
Contract.
Notwithstanding the submissions of the said written notices and if no replies are made
or extension of time granted to those said notices by the S.O., the Contractor shall
resubmit the written notices as aforesaid with references made to the earlier notices
submitted and such notices shall reach the S.O. not later than extended time that have
been previously fixed by the S.O.
Notwithstanding any notices being submitted, the Contractor shall take all practicable
steps and use his best endeavours to prevent or avoid delays to ensure that the Works
is within the Date Of Completion or extended time approved. The Contractors shall also
ensure that all his Nominated Sub-Contractors and/or Suppliers comply with all the
Conditions, Procedures and requirements relating to extension of time and/or delays. No
extension of time shall given in respect of normal rainy days, the Contractor shall be
deemed to have taken this into consideration in his Tender.
TO COLLECTION :
A/41
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
Generally
The description of materials and workmanship in these B.Q. are to be read in conjuction
with the Materials," Workmanship and Preambles to All Trades". The whole materials,
goods and workmanship throughtout the Works shall be the Best of their respective kind
and by "best" shall be understood that no other superior class of specified materials or
workmanship is available in Malaysia. All materials, goods and workmanship are to
conform to the latest Malaysian or British Standards or other approved standard and the
Codes of Practices wherever applicable and shall be approved by the S.O.
Any materials or goods specified shall be considered as being the minimum standard
acceptance and the Contractor shall not alter or amend any of the descriptions of
materials in the B.Q. and his prices or rates shall be the quality and type specified. All
materials and goods used shall be new and as far as possible or where applicable be of
malaysian origin. Under no circumstances shall the Contractor be permitted to use
imported materials unless the S.O. is satisfied that certain materials listed are either
unvailable or sub-standard specification.
Works shall be carried out by or under close supervision of experienced tradesmen,

skilled in the particular types of work. Where stated in the Specification, Works shall be
executed by Specialists approved by the manufacturer/supplier of that particular
material. The Contractor shall be responsible for all errors or defects in materials goods
or workmanship, whether executed by his workmen, or by the workmen of his SubContractors. Such errors or defects are to be remedied to the satisfaction of the S.O. at
the Contractor's own expense.
B
Availability of Materials
Prior to the submission of Tender, the Contractor shall be deemed to have ascertained
the availability of all materials or goods asspecifiedin the Contract Document. The
Contractor shall place orders for materials or goods as specified, in such way that the
materialsare readliy available and such that the Works may be completed within the
stipulated time. He shall make every effort to ensure that there are no shortageof
materials or goods during the progress of the Works.
TO COLLECTION :
A/42
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP (CONT'D)
Availability of Materials (cont'd)
If the Contractor fails for any reason to supply any materials or goods specified or if he
fails to supply any such materials in sufficient time or quantity to enable the Contract to
be completed on time, then the Government may if requested by the Contractor or if he
so desires, supply any portion or all, of such materials or goods on behalf of the
Contractor. The cost of such materials or goods supplied shall be borne by the
COntractor and it shall be EITHER the current market rates OR the actual cost to the
Government at the date of supply, including overheads and any other charges,
WHICHEVER IS THE GREATER.
The Government's failure on refusal to supply any portion or all of such materials or
goods on behalf of the Contractor shall not entitled the Contractor to any claims or any
extension of time, loss and expenses nor release the Contractor from his obligation to
supply such materials or goods for the Works.
Materials or goods which require the approval of the S.O. shall not be ordred until
approved. The Contractor must submit samples in good time for consideration and allow
reasonable time for the S.O.'s review and approval.
B
Substitute Materials
Where the availability of such specified materials or goods are out of stock or are
anticipated to cause delays to the Works, the Contractor shall notify the S.O. in writing,
who may then issue written instructions to the Contractor for alternative materials or
goods to be used. Alternative materials or goods may be considered for acceptance
provided always that they comply in all respects in regards to appearance quality and
performance specification and are approved by the S.O. Where alternative goods or
materials are proposed by the Contractor for the S.O. approval, such proposal shall
be made in writing to the S.O.
Notwithstanding the S.O.'s instruction to use alternative materials or goods, no claims
for loss and expense or extension of time shall be entertained unless the Contractor can
show that he had placed his orders within reasonable time and every effort made in
obtaining the supply of such materials or goods and provided that he had given
sufficient notice within reasonable time to the S.O. for an instruction to be issued such
that the ordering of such alternative goods or materials do not delay the Works. In the
event that the S.O. allows the substitutation of any materials or goods during the course
of construction, an appropriate price reduction shall be made in respect of decrease in
quality or value, but no price addition shall be made resect of increase in quality or
value.
TO COLLECTION :
A/43
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Substitute Materials (cont'd)
The S.O. approval or disapproval of any alternative materials or goods proposed by the
Contractor for use in the Works shall in no way relieve the Contractor from his
responsibility of completing the Works within the time stipulated. No claims whatsoever
arising from S.O.'s disapproval of alternative materials or goods shall be entertained.
B
Manufacturer's References And Catalogue
Manufacturer's names and references quoted in the Contract Documents are indicative
of type and quality only. Other manufacturer's products may be considered provided
they are equal in all respects to those specified and are approved by the S.O. Full
details of any proposed substitute shall be submitted for S.O.'s review. Where possible
however, the specified proprietary materials or goods shall be used.
The Contractor shall also provide and submit all necessary and relevant catalogues,
trade literatures, etc., pertaining to the materials or materials offered for used in the
works. Such trade literatures, etc., shall be in the English Language.
C
Proprietary Products
Proprietary Products shall be handled, stored, prepared and used or fixed in accordance
with the manufacturer's printed recommendations and/or instructions. Submit copies of
recommendation and/or instructions as and when required by the S.O.. Where
necessary in the opinion of the S.O., the Contractor shall arrange for the attendance of
the manufacturer's technical respresentatives during the installation of the proprietary
items.
Single Source
Where a choice of manufacturer or source of supply is allowed for any particular

products, materials or goods, the whole quantity required to complete the works must be
of the same type, manufacturer and/or source unless otherwise directed by the S.O..
Produce written evidence of source of supply when requested by the S.O.
TO COLLECTION :
A/44
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Imported Materials
When materials or goods as specified in the Contract Document cannot be purchased in

the local market, the Contractor shall immediately upon notification of acceptance of
Tender, place order for such materials or goods with firm delivery dates from the
suppliers to comply with the Work Programme. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
have all materials or goods on the site for embodying into the works as and when
required. Copies of the Contractor's official requsitions for such material or goods
together with the Supplier's firm delivery dates are to be submitted to the S.O.
Materials and goods imported by the Contractor in connection with the Works are liable
to import duties, tariffs, taxes, import licenses etc. as provided for in the Custom
Regulation. Such duties, tariffs, taxes, etc. shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.
Failure to make proper arrangements may result in delays or additional costs for which
the Contractor will be entirely responsible.
B
Basis Of Ordering Materials
The B.Q. are not to be used as the basis for the ordering of materials but rather, its aim
is to provide a uniform system of measurement so that a common basis of tendering
achieved. The Contractor must not order from the quantities and sizes as stated in the
B.Q. but must calculate and order from the drawings. All dimensions must be checked
and verified by the Contractor on site before ordering any materials.The Contractor to
provide/prepare finishes schedule and material ordering schedule before
ordering/purchasing materials for S.O. approval.
C
Control Samples and Mock-Ups

Samples of proposed materials, goods, workmanship, fittings, etc. required shall be
submitted to the S.O. for approval by the Contractor before ordering in bulk or as and
when directed by the S.O. Approved samples will indicate the standard to be maintained
in the execution of the Works and shall be so marked, labelled and retained on site.
Where samples are rejected, further samples must be submitted until approval is
obtained.
Should the Contractor proposed an alternative manufacturer samples, both the original
specified item and the proposed substitute shall be submitted. Retain approved mockups/samples on site for comparison with the Works. The cost of all mock-up, samples of
goods, materials or workmanship including all necessary panels and/or mounting board
shall beborne by the Contractor.
TO COLLECTION :
A/45
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Covering Up
No work shall be covered up until it has been examined and approved by the S.O.. In
the case of Works executed against provisional items or quantities (and therefore
subject to remeasurement) the Contractor shall notify the Quantity Surveyor for
remesurement before proceeding to cover up the Works. The Contractor is to ensure
that his reprentatives is on site to jointly carry out any remeasurement works. Where
necessary such remeasurement shall be endorsed by both parties and to be used by the
Quantitiy Surveyor for valuations and final account purposes.
If the Contractor considers that the Works has been executed in accordance with the
S.O.'s instruction and which could not normally have been remeasured, he shall notify
the Quantity Surveyor with at least fourty eight (48) hours notice in writing before
covering up such Works.
All work to be covered must be substantiated by photographic proof. Failing in doing so,
the Contractor to open up at his own cost whether the works are in order or otherwise.
Opening Up
The Contractor shall at the request of the S.O. open up for inspection any Works which
have been covered up. Should the Contractor refused or fail to comply with such
request, the S.O. may employ other workmen to open up the same. If such works have
been covered in contraventation of the S.O.'s instruction and if on being opened up, it
was found to be not in accordance either with the drawings specification or the S.O.
Instruction, the expenses of opening and covering up against including all remedial
works shall be recoverable from the Contractor or may be deducted as aforesaid.
TO COLLECTION :
A/46
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Ironmongery, Sanitary Appliances and Paint (refer Schedule of Finishes)
The ironmongery, sanitary appliances and type of paints to be used shall obtained from
approved manufacturers. The Contractor shall submit together with his tender, details of
the brand, trades names and model references, together with all relevant techanical
manufacturer of the type of paint proposed by the Contractor.
The brand and model of ironmongery, sanitary appliance and type of paints proposed by
the Contravtor to be used shall not be substituted without the prior written consent of the
S.O. In the event of the S.O. allowing the substitution of any of the brand and/or model
of ironmongery, sanitary appliances and types of paint proposed, such substitution shall
be accompanied by a Corresponding deduction in cost unless the Contractor can show
to the satisfaction of the S.O. that the brand and/or model of ironmongery, sanitary
appliances and type of paint substituted cost less than the substitute.
B
Inspection and Testing
2,000.00
All materials beforebeing in corporated into the works shall be subjected to inspection
and testing as provided for in the conditions of the contract and elsewhere in these Bills
of Quantities. Unless otherwise stated, the cost of all test required by these Bills of
Quantities or the relevant British or other approved standards shall be deemed to be
included in the contract rate.
C
Warranty
2,000.00
On any materials or good supplied under this Contract where a warranty or guarantee is
given by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall secure such warranty or guarantee and
assign same to the Government. Any materials not accomponied with
suppliers/manufacturer's warranty guarantee shall only be paid up to the limit of 80%.
The Contractor shall provide the Guarantee as specified under the various trades. As
soon as possible before Practical Completion, the Contractor shall procure such
Guarantees and effectively transfer them in favour of the Government so that thereafter
the guarantor shall be directly responsible to the Government.
TO COLLECTION :
A/47
4,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Warranty (cont'd)
Unless otherwise stated, each Guarantee shall state workmanships materials and
installation are guaranteed for the period specified starting from the date of the
Certificate Practical Completion and any defects that may arise during the guaranteed
period shall be made good any work in orders trades resulting from such making good
upon written notice from the Architect/S.O. to do so. The guarantee shall be in a from
TEMPORARY WORKS AND SERVICES ETC.
B
Generally
Temporary works and services shall comply with the relevant Local Authorities
regulation and requirements. The Contractor shall give all notices and pay all fees in
respect of such works and services. He shall provide, maintain, alter, adopt as and
when required and move as necessary all temporary works and services, and shall clear
away when no longer required and make good on completion.
The Contractor shall inform the S.O. of the extended sitting of all spoil heaps, temporary
works and services, plants etc. and obtain approval before commencing the works. He
shall allow for any cost involved in depositing with the Local Authorities a Banker's
Guarantee for the maintenance and repairs of the maintenance and repairs of the public
roads affected by the Works etc.
C
Temporary Hoarding, Fencing, etc.
8,000.00
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary temporary hoarding, fencing,
gates, guardrails, plank footways, gantries, sreens, tarpaulins, dustsheets and the like to
the approval of the S.O. along the perimeter of the site or at strategic locations for
protection of the Works from damages, theft, dust, inclement weather, etc. and for the
protection of workmen, the public and the adjoining properties.
TO COLLECTION :
A/48
8,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
TEMPORARY WORKS AND SERVICES ETC. (CONT'D)
Temporary Hoarding, Fencing, etc. (cont'd)
The Contractor shall supply, erect and maintain for as long as is considered necessary
adequate metal hoarding with minimum 2.10m high from ground level covered the site
boundary, warning lamps as shown on drawings and such other precautionary
measures necessary to ensure the safety of the public and others who may be on or
within the vicinity of the site. Wherever required, these precautionary measures shall be
done in accordance with the relevant local by-laws. The Contractor will be held solely
responsible for all accidents arising from any negligence in this respect.
The metal hoarding consisting of colour bond spandek steel wall cladding all to
manufacturer's detail complete with 50mm x 50mm x 4mm angle iron post prime and
painted beige cast into 600mm x 600mm concrete stump in 2000mm centres all as per
Engineer's detail drawing.
On completion of the Contract, within one (1) week of the S.O. so instructing, the entire
hoarding is to be removed from the site.
Provide all temporary switchboards, main/sub-main, reticulation cables, distribution

boards, wiring, fittings, matering, protection, housing of TNB's equipment, switchgears,
transformers, etc. Temporary lighting shall be adequate with reasonable illuminations
level to the satisfaction of the S.O. Provide adequate external lighting at vulnerable
security points such as corners and slopes of te site, perimeter etc., to facilitate
watching, security and safety purposes.
B
Temporary Scaffolding and Staging
50,000.00
Provide all tubular scaffolding, staging, nets, ladders and catwalks necessary for the
proper execution of the works . Scaffolding shall be erected by qualified and competent
scaffolder. The contractor shall submit details of scaffolder to S.O for approval.
Scaffolding shall be inspected and maintained by competent scaffolder.
The contractor shall liase with all Nominated Sub-contractor and Local Authorities to
ensure that all their works requiring the use of scaffolding are completed before
dismantling the same.
If the contractor should strike any of his scaffolding before ascertained whether it is
required by any Sub-Contractor or Public Undertaking, he must re-erect it if so at his
own expences.
TO COLLECTION :
A/49
50,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Temporary Power And Lighting
10,000.00
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary artificial lighting and electricity or
other power supply required for the Works together with their fuel, gases etc. The supply
shall comply with the requirements of the Tenaga Nasional Berhad (TNB) and their
written approval must be obtained for the proper and adequate supply. The supply shall
have sufficient capacity to meet the power requirements for the whole of the Works
including for testing and commissioning of M & E equipments installation.
Provide all temporary switcboards, main/sub-main, reticulation cables, distribution

boards, wiring, fittings, metering, protection, housing of TNB's equipment, switchgears,
transformers, etc. Temporary lighting shall be adequate with reasonable illuminations
level to the satisfastion of the S.O. Provide adequate external lighting at vulnerable
security points such as corners and slopes of the site, perimeter etc., to facilitate
watching, security and safety purposes.
The Contractor is to allow for any notices, applications, submissions of plans for
charges and costs connected therewith and clear away apparatus and make good on
completion. Any proceeding, summons or claims taken against the Contractor by the
Authorities for illegal connection or tempering of meters, etc., shall remain the sole
responsibility of the Contractor.
B
Temporary Water Supply
10,000.00
The Contractor shall provide all water supply required for use in the Works. He shall
allow for all costs involved including paying all fees and charges, notices,
applications,temporary plumbing, pipes connection, fittings, pumps, storage tanks,
meters, shiftings and adapting where required by the S.O. and upon completion of the
Works to properly disconnet, stop-off, make good and remove of site.
The Contractor may use existing facilities (if any) or obtain water from other available
sources only on approval of the S.O.. All water shall be fresh, clean and pure.
TO COLLECTION :
A/50
20,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Temporary Telephone
2,000.00
The Contractor shall provide all telephone facilities his own use, and that of his SubContractors and Suppliers. Provide also separate telephone facilities for the sole use of
the Government's representatives in connection with the Works. The telephone facilities
for the S.O's representative shall comprise of two (2) telephone lines including all
necessary equipment. The Contractor shall pay all costs in regard to application fees,
installation, rental and calls made during the duration of the Contract. The above
telephone lines should include separate line for e-mail.
Upon completion of the Works, the Contractor shall terminate the services of transfer
the telephone line to the Government without any charges after ensuring that all
outstanding bills have been paid for.
B
Temporary Roads, Gangways Etc.
3,500.00
The Contractor is to allow for the provision and maintaining of temporary roads,
diversions, tracks, bridges, crossings, hardstanding, walkways, paltform and the like
necessary within the site for the proper execution of the Works including those required
for Nominated Sub-Contractor's works.
The Contractor is to allow proper access road to the site with proper earth filling and
crusher-run with properly maintain throught out the contract period and can be use by
any type of vehicles. The Contractor is required to make allowance in the work
programme to construct the access road before any other permanent construction is
carried out.
The position of temporary road etc., shall be decided with the approval of the S.O..
Temporary bridges, hardstanding, platform and like shall be structurally adequate safe
and properly maintain throughout the duration of the work. Demolish and clear away on
completion and make good all damage done.
C
Temporary Water Trough And Earth Trap
3,000.00
The Contractor is to provide and maintain on site for the duration of the Contract
temporary 'water trough' and earth trap of suitable dimension and size which shall be
located at the existing of the site as to ensure that the wheels of all vehicles leaving the
site area clean and free from earth.
The 'water trough' and earth trap may be equipped with proper and adequate
automatically operated water-jets spray for proper cleaning of wheels or otherwise such
cleaning shall be done manually.
TO COLLECTION :
A/51
8,500.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Temporary Sumps, Culverts, Drains And Silt Traps
3,000.00
The Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary sumps, culverts, drainage and silt
traps within and around site to adequately keep the site free water including flood water
such drains shall be constructed so as their discharge shall not be dirty contaminate or
pollute the adjoining properties, water courses, roadways, etc. In this regard, the
Contractor shall not entitle to any claim for extension of time due to the stoppage of
work by the Local Authorities concerned due to the Contractor contravention of
Regulations and Bye Laws. The Contractor shall also ascertain for himself any tidal
flood and local drainage problem associated with the site.
Temporary Buildings
The Contractor's is to provide and maintain all temporary buildings such as workshop,
shed, stores etc. for use during the execution of the Contract, either on site or elsewhere
to the approval of the S.O. The Contractor is to pay all charges and fees in connection
therewith.
All temporary buildings together with its contents shall be maintain in a clean and orderly
condition and in a good state of repair. The buildings shall be erected to the S.O.
approval within two (2) weeks from the date of possession of site and shall be
dismantled upon completion of the Works or as and when directed by the S.O. and
removed from site as the Contractor's own property at his own cost.
C
Temporary Workmen's Accommodation

The Contractor is not allowed to provide temporary accommodation for workmen within
the site.
The Contractor shall provide an alternative means of accommodation facilities off site
for his workmen if so required for the purpose of the Works, Dismantle, remove off site
and make good upon completion of the Contract to the satisfaction of the S.O. The costs
and expenses of the above shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the Tender.
TO COLLECTION :
A/52
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Temporary Conveniences
The Contractor shall provide all requisite temporary sanitary conveniences for the
workmen and all persons employed on site and shall provide a special lock up sanitary
convenience for the use of the S.O's Site personnel. All temporary toilets shall be
adequately lighted, ventilated, maintain and kept clean daily throughout the Contract and
shall be demolish and remove off site and make good on completion. All such
conveniences are to be erected in positions to be approved by the S.O. The sanitary
arrangements shall be in conformity with the requirements of the Local Authorities
concerned, subjected to S.O.'s approval.
Permanent Electric Power Supply
Notwithstanding the provision of temporary electric power supply, the Contractor is to

note that should and where permanent electrical power supply becomes available and
have been commissioned by TNB, the Contractor shall be required to continue payment
for such electricity bills and/or minimum charges incurred for the duration up to and
including the date of formal handing over of the Works to the S.O. The Contractor shall
be responsible to arrange with TNB to have the TNB meters read on the day of handing
over of the Works, failing which the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for all
consequences arising thereof.
When permanent electricity supply is made available upon its commissioning by TNB,
the Contractor shall allow the use of such supply for the testing and balancing of
mechanical and electrical services where instructed by S.O. or as may be required by
the respective Nominated Sub-Contractors. All power consumed by the Nominated SubContractors shall be properly metered, recorded and charged according to the TNB
tariffs to the Nominated Sub-Contractors concerned.
TO COLLECTION :
A/53
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
5,000.00
Signboard
The Contractor shall allow for and erect a signboard to be placed at positions to be
selected by the S.O. and maintain it throughout the period of the Contract. It shall be
constructed in accordance with the design, requirements and approval of the S.O. in
Bahasa Malaysia and shall be painted with a minimum of three (3) coats of oil based
paint prior to fixing and including all necessary sign writing, lighting fixtures and writing.
No other names board or advertisement will be permitted to be displayed on or around
the site unless with written permission from the S.O. Extend, adapt, sign write, repaint,
from time to time as and when required by the S.O. and Local Authorities and pay all
fees and charges in connection therewith. Dismantle and remove signboard from site on
completion of the Works.
Office Equipment and Machine for the S.O.
15,000.00
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the following for use of the S.O. and S.O.
Representative and their staff from Date Of Possession of the Site until the issuance of
Certificate of Practical Completion. All these equipment will become Contractor's
property.
i)
One (1) unit of desktop computer with all specifications and complete
accessories all to S.O.'s approval. (refer Appendix to Preliminaries Appendix 'A2')
ii)
Printing System - one (1) unit 3in1 (Copy, Scan & Print) Laser
Jet/Colour Printer complete with accessories and all specifications all
to S.O.'s approval.(refer Appendix to Preliminaries - Appendix 'A2')
iii)
Digital Camera - one (1) unit with minimum 10 Megapixel Optical

Zoom Digital Camera or equivalent to S.O. approval. (refer Appendix
to Preliminaries - Appendix 'A2')
iv)
S.O. Telephone - provide two (2) units of cellular phone for the sole
uses of the S.O., including pay all fees and charges for connection
and disconnection. The Contractor shall pay for rental and call
charges until the issuance of Certificate of Practical Completion.
vi)
Two (2) nos. Thumb Drive, one ( 1 ) no. of External Drive, ten (10)
reams A4 (80gms) and three (3) reams A3 (80gms) per month.
TO COLLECTION :
A/54
20,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE, PROTECTION AND SITE SAFETY
Existing, Overhead And Underground Services

Before commencing any Works at site, the Contractor shall check with various Local
Authorities whether any overheads lines, cables or underground cables, watermains,
sewers or other services present at the site. If so, he shall make arrangements for the
protection of, temporary disconnection, removal, diversion or relocation of such services
and pay all necessary cost and fees/charge in connection herewith.
If during pipes excavation, the Contractor uncover any underground cables, pipes, etc.,
he shall stop work immediately and inform the S.O. who shall issue the necessary
instructions and directions. He shall be held responsible for making good all damage to
cables, pipes etc. at his own expense and shall indemnify the Government againts any
claims as a result of such damage.
B
Protection of the Works
8,000.00
The Contractor shall protect, cover up, and take all reasonable precautions to prevent
loss or damage by weather, accident, theft or any other causes to the Works including
those of Nominated Sub-Contractors Works. All finishing, floors, sanitary fittings,
glazing, tiles, paving and the like shall be adequately and properly protected from
damage to the S.O.'s approval.
All damaged fittings or surfaces shall be make good or replaced by the Contractor at his
own expense to the satisfaction of the S.O.. A clean first class finish required and any
dirty stained, indented or scratched fittings or finishes will be rejected and to be replaced
at the Contractor's own cost.
C
Keeping The Site Dry
Upon taking possession of the site, the Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the
whole of the Works well drained and free from all water (including rain, storm, spring,
running water and water below the water table levels) at all times to ensure that so far
as practicable, the Works is carried out in a 'dry' condition.
The Contractor shall employ whatever means that may be necessary to keep the site
including baling, pumping, temporary earth drains, drainage pits, water courses and any
other means to the approval of the S.O.
TO COLLECTION :
A/55
8,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
MAINTENANCE, PROTECTION AND SITE SAFETY (CONT'D)
Preservation Of Slopes Etc, Including Riverbanks And Lake Edges (cont'd)
5,000.00
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to preserve all earth slopes
including both existing at site and those formed and constructed under this contract.
The Contractor shall construct adequate temporary water courses, silt traps, cover
slopes with approved sheeting or take other necessary steps to prevent damage or
soiling of surrounding areas, etc. due to earthslips or erosion and/or silting of water
courses, etc. Should this occur due to the Contractor's neglect to provide adequate
measures to prevent such from occuring, he shall at his own expense, rectify and make
good the damage and carry out preventive measures to the satisfaction of the S.O. and
the Local Authority.
B
Periodical Cleaning
The Contractor shall keep the site and the completed Works in a reasonable clean and
tidy condition during the carrying out of the Works particularly around the site canteen
and the workmen quarters. The site shall be periodically clean and free from all
unneccessary or obstructions.
In addition, from time to time and on the completion of any area Works or as directed by
the S.O., remove all rubbish, contruction plant, surplus materials, or any other
construction debris including that from Nominated Sub-Contractor's work from such
areas and generally leave them in a satisfactory condition, to the approval of the S.O. All
rubbish and construction debris shall be taken out of the site and disposed off at
authorized dump sites at the Contractor's own cost.
C
Pest Control
5,000.00
Before any work commences, the Contractor shall check the site throughly to determine
the presence of pests such as termites, wood borers, cockroaches, rats, etc. and shall
be responsible in carry out pest control works by engaging a licensed pest control
company for that purpose. Such treatment shall be borne entirely by the Contractor.
The method of treatment, certificates of approval, guarantee letter and technical

broshures, etc. shall be submitted to the S.O. for approval and before commencement
of the Works. The treatment is to be carried out in accordance with the
recommendations by the pest control company and to the approval of the S.O.
The Contractor shall also secure a guarantee for a period of five (5) years from the pest
control company for the treatment done otherwise the Contractor shall be responsible
for the works done.
TO COLLECTION :
A/56
10,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Safety Measures
The Contractor is responsible for the adequacy for safety provisions throughout the
Contract period and shall ensure that all tools, tackles, gears, staging, scaffolding,
ladders, equipment, etc. used in connection with the Works are adequate and safe for
use. Provide and install all necessary protective safety netting or other safety measures
to the buildings as works progresses for the safety of all workmen and the protection of
the public from all risks of injury throughout all the stages of construction to the approval
of the S.O. and complying with the latest guideline issued by the Department of
Occupational safety and Health (DOSH), the City Hall Planning, Building Control
Department and other related Local Authorities.
Define, mark and maintain safe passages throughout the Works for all workmen, visitors
and Consultant to gain access to any and every part of the Works safely. The safe
passage shall have adequate headroom and lighting, free of all obstruction and shall be
properly enclosed againts falling objects. Provide timber barricades and platform covers
to openings at lift cores, ducts, edges or unenclosed floors etc. at positions where
deemed necessary by the S.O.
The Contractor also have to provide proper and presentable safety signboard in nos.
proportional to the site conditions all in accordance to S.O. approval.
The S.O. approval of any safety measures shall not relieve the Contractor from his
responsibility to ensure the safety of his own and Sub-Contractors workmen, Consultant,
Site Supervisory Staffs and the public from all risks of injury.
B
Security Of Works And Site
3,000.00
The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate security on site through the
duration of the Contract. He shall take record of all personnel and/or vehicle entering
and/or leaving the site including machinery, plant, equipment, materials and the like
delivered to or removed from the site, Security on site shall also include regular
patrolling of the site and the Works to prevent from trespassing, theft and damage. The
Contractor shall provide watchmen, protective lighting, warning lamps etc. as necessary
for the security of the Works and site to the approval of the S.O., and to prevent injury to
persons and properties including the Works, the workmen and the public. He shall be
solely resonsible for the safety of all materials and goods, including his Sub-Contractors
materials and all materials supplied by the Government. Notwithstanding the provision
of security on site, the Contractor shall remain fully responsible for all incidents,
trespass, loss and/or damage arising there of and should it deems necessary, the
Contractor is to purchase insurance to cover againts such incidents.
TO COLLECTION :
A/57
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Security Of Works And Site (cont'd)

The cost and expenses of the security requirements including the provision,
maintenance and subsequent removal from site of temporary guard houses and the like
shall be deemed to have been included in the Tender, if any.
Site Fire Prevention
The Contractor shall be responsible for fire prevention procedures and the fire fighting
facilities on the site and shall ensure that proper precaution are taken to reduce the risk
of the fire while the building is under construction. Building debris shall be removed
periodically and inflammable materials and such adhesive, paints, fuel, etc., are properly
stored in non-combustible stores. Proper instruction must be given to workmen using
pass cutting and welding equipment to ensure minimum lire risks. Provide all temporary
fire fighting equipment to conform with the requirements of the Fire Department and
maintain them in good working condition throughout the duration of the Contract.
Provide also a temporary water tank of adequate capacity for use as a reserve water for
fire fighting purpose.
Safety Regulations
5,000.00
The Contractor shall initiate and enforce to comply with all safety measures for workmen
and public as stipulated by :i)
Factories and Machinery (Fencing of Machinery and Safety)

Regulations, 1970
ii)
Factories and Machinery (Safety, Health and Welfare) Regulations,

1970 and
iii)
All other relevant safety-at-work Legislations and Regulations.
The Contractor is to serve any notice required not later than seven (7) days before the
commencement of Works.
D
First Aid Kit
500.00
The Contractor shall be required to provide a complete set of First Aid Kit which shall be
kept and properly maintain at the Contractor's Site Office. He shall ensure that the First
Aid Kit facilities are available when required and without delay at all times when work is
in progress.
TO COLLECTION :
A/58
5,500.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Protective Helmets, Boots, Etc.
8,000.00
The Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary protective and safety helmets,
rubber boots, safety shoes, equipment etc. for all the workmen, Contractor's Site Staff,
Site Supervisory Staffs, Consultants and their representative and all authorized visitor to
Site along the construction period.
Provide the Site Supervisory Staffs with the following :
i) Safety helmets
ii) Rubber boots
iii) Safety shoes
10 Nos Blue Colour (SIRIM approved)

10 Pairs (various sizes)
10 Pairs (Red Wing or other approved equivalent of various
size)
Loading In Excess Of Design Load

The Contractor shall be responsible for the stability and structural integrity of the Works
during construction and shall bear the additional costs in providing all the necessary
support and to prevent overloading.
No load in excess of the design load shall be placed on any portion of the structure
without written permission of the S.O. If such permission is granted, all structural
members subject to excess loading shall be strengthen and supported to the satisfaction
of the S.O.
Notwithstanding the written permission of the S.O. the Contractor shall bear all costs
arising out of the making good of any damage structure caused by the excess loading.
Adjoining Property
Where the building adjoining the site is in constant use by the Government/adjoining
owners and occupiers, the Contractor shall arrange and carry out the Works so as to
cause the minimum interference or interruption to the use of adjoining building including
road, footpaths, other access and any existing services thereto. He shall comply with all
instructions or directions given by the S.O. in these matters.
The Contractor shall protect, uphold and maintain the existing building and services
during the execution of the Works. Any damage caused by his Sub-Contractor's
workmen shall be borne by him.
TO COLLECTION :
A/59
8,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION PLANT AND MACHINERY
Generally
The Contractor shall provide, erect, maintain and remove from site upon completion all
requisite piling equipments, testing equipment/instruments, scaffolding (the Contractor
to have a scaffolding supervisor qualified and certified by approved Authority eg:
DOSH), cranes, hoists, lifts, tackle, tools, apparatus etc. as required by all trades and
necessary for the proper and efficient execution of the Works. They must be safe for
use, in good working condition, of a type and size suitable for the Works and the site
conditions. The Contractor is to allow for blinding the site with quarry dust, hardcore or
other suitable materials to facilities movement of plants, equipment and machinery
within the site including excavated areas.
Obtain the written approval and certificates from the relevant Authorities for all plants
and equipments used on site and ensure that the validity of such certificates is
maintained throughtout the period of use. Copies of all such certificates shall be
submitted to the S.O. Provide the S.O. from time to time with up to date 1st of all the
plants and equipments on site. A maintenance and inspection schedule shall be
implemented for any major plants and equipments operating on the site. Such
schedules are to be adhered to in respect of periodic maintenance at all times.
If in the opinion of the S.O., the plants and equipments used is not suitable for the
Works, the Contractor may be requested to change the plants/equipment used or the
method of executing the Works. The Contractors shall have no claims againts the
Government for complying with the S.O.'s instructions on this matter.
B
Cranes And Hoists
40,000.00
The Contractor shall provide sufficient lifting equipment for workmen, materials/goods
etc. in the form of cranes, hoists and the like to meet a significant ligting demand in
order to archieve the required completion date. Day and night time hoisting may be
required and it is the Contractor's responsibility to organise the hoisting programme, to
the satisfaction of the S.O. The Contractor shall also provide for all necessary hoisting
requirements for all Nominated Sub-Contractors at all times at his own expenses. No
claim for extras for hoisting will be entertained.
TO COLLECTION :
A/60
40,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
CONSTRUCTION PLANT AND MACHINERY (CONT'D)
Cranes And Hoists (cont'd)

All cranes, hoists etc. are to be manned by an exsperienced operators and be attended
by at least one ground attendant at all time who shall be in constant contact with the
crane or hoist operator. There must be sufficient number of cranes of adequate capacity
and boom lenght for hoisting facilities, etc. Passenger hoist shall be of approved
capacity to facilities vertical transportation with electrical call buttons at each floor. At
each handing adequately designed handrails with wire mesh safety netting are to be
provided for the safety of persons entering the hoists.
Plants Attached To Building

If the Contractor proposed to use tower cranes, lift or any other type of construction
plants which places loading on the structure or is attached to the structure, he must
furnish full details of such constructional plants to the S.O. for approval before the plants
are installed or placed.
If necessary and structuraly acceptable, the structure shall be strengthened to carry

such loads and the Contractor will be responsible for any resulting extra expense. The
Contractor shall be responsible for making good any damage to the permanent structure
which may be caused by his plants, to the satisfaction at the S.O.
C
Debris Chutes
For the purpose of removing debris and superfluous materials from the upper leaves of
the Works, the Contractor shall provide sufficient number of debris chutes at location to
be approved by the S.O. He is also required to undertake all necessary precautionary
measures to ensure that the discharge of rubbish and superfluous materials from the
debris chutes does no cause any misance to the public and owners of the adjoining
buildings.
Surveying Instrument On Site
5,000.00
The Contractor shall allow and provide for the Site Supervisory, Staff surveying
instruments such as theodolite (or dumpy level), leveling staffs, measuring tapes and
such other instruments for their sole use during the duration of the Contract. The
instruments shall be to the approval of the S.O. and shall be maintain in good condition
on site by the Contractor throughout the contract. The Contractor shall supply all
necessary ranging poles, pegs, paint, folding rules, survey books, waterproofed
clothings and such similar items as may be required by the S.O. for the purpose of the
survey work. The costs of which shall be deemed to have been allowed for in the
Tender.
TO COLLECTION :
A/61
5,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS (N.S.C.)
Generally
Under Clause 59, 60, 61 and 62 of the Conditions of Contract, the Prime Costs (P.C.)
Sums in respect of Works executed by the N.S.C. are at the complete disposal of the
S.O. who may deduct wholly or in part from the Contract Sum and nominate such
persons as the Employer selects to execute the Works to which these P.C. Sums apply.
The Contractor is to add to such items where indicated for profit inclusive for profit
inclusive of establishment charges and for attendance as described.
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the works and performance of all the
N.S.C. and any delay or damage thereby occasioned. He shall be responsible for the
supervision, administration and coordination of all Sub-Contracts Works. He shall be
required to arrange a working programme with each of the N.S.C. and to submit such
working programme for the approval of the N.S.C. He shall also organise and chair
regular site meetings among all his Sub-Contractors.
B
Attendance By Contractor
The Contractor shall allow in his Tender for general attendance upon the N.S.C. where
stated in the Bills of Quantities. General attendance for N.S.C. shall include the following
:a)
b)
c)
Entering into an agreement with the N.S.C. based on the Conditions

of the Main Contract and Sub-Contract and ensuring that the N.S.C.
is fully aware of and complies with the Conditions of the Main
Contract. Stamped copies of the same shall be supplied to the S.O.
and the Consultants for reference and perusal.
Coordinating with the N.S.C. and providing all necessary dimensions

including setting-out informations, data levels etc., to the N.S.C. to
enable their Works to be executed accurately and correctly and
taking full responsibilities for such dimensions, informations and data
provided.
Coordinating and ascertaining from the N.S.C. particulars relating to

their Works with regard to the dimensions and positions in which
recesses, chases, holes, mortices casting of sleeves and similar
items/Works are required to be provided, formed or left.
TO COLLECTION :
A/62
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS (N.S.C.)(CONT'D)
Attendance By Contractor (cont'd)

d)
e)
Liasing with the relevant Supply/Service Authorities for the

expeditions installation of the connections for permanent water and
electricity supplies for the Works and making.
Available such supplied to the N.S.C. Paying on behalf of the
Government all fees and charges for such installation including
deposits for such supply/services. All such payments made, shall be
reimbursed to the Contractor on production of receipted bills.
f)
Providing a competent personnel in compliance with the Electrical

Inspectorate Regulations 1984 to take responsibility for the operation
of the electrical installation from the time the permanent electricity
supply is made available until testing, commissioning and handing
over of the Works.
g)
Arranging and providing fee and fit use of SITE SPACE ONLY for the
N.S.C. temporary office, workshops, workmen's accommodation and
storage of materials, tools, plants and equipment which are not for
incorporation into the Works and not requiring protection againts
weather or deterioration.
h)
i)
Affording free and full use of storage accommodation for materials,

plant and equipment which are for incorporation into the Works and
require protection againts weather and deterioration.
Affording free and full use of standing scaffolding, lifting equipment

and hoisting for materials, goods and workmen while remain erected
at site including the use of mess rooms, sanitary accommodation,
welfare facilities, temporary roads, hardstanding etc. to the N.S.C.
j)
Providing free use of water required for the execution of the N.S.C.'s
Works.
k)
Providing free use of artificial lighting with adequate lighting points

and fittings, bulbs, spotlamps and the like.
TO COLLECTION :
A/63
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
NOMINATED SUB-CONTRACTORS (N.S.C) (CONT'D)
Attendance By Contractor (cont'd)

l)
m)
Providing temporary electrical power supply with sufficient power

points to avoid waiting time by N.S.C. for want of water. Arrange for
any special power supplies required by N.S.C.
Clearing away all rubbish and debris including the N.S.C.'s from site
including cleaning the Works internally and externally.
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for covering and protecting againts all losses
or damages to all executed and part executed N.S.C.'s Works and all unfixed materials
and goods properly brought on site for inclusion in the N.S.C.'s Works. Where any
special attendance, additional to that described above, is required in connection with
any Sub-Contract Works contained in this Bills of Quantities, such is to be separately
priced where indicated.
B
Inclusions By Nominated Sub-Contractor

It is deemed that the N.S.C. will include in their Sub-Contract Sum, inter alia, the costs
in connection with the following :a)
b)
c)
d)
Unloading, getting in storing and all handling and hoisting of his

materials, plants and tools into the required positions.
The provision, erection, maintenance and removal of completion, all
his temporary office, workshop, workmen's and storage
accommodation including paying all fees and other charges.
Connecting to temporary water and power supplies, made available

by the Main Contractor for the Works including supplying and
running distribution pipes, fittings, accessories, hoses, cables, leads,
electrical gear etc. but EXCLUDING payment for water and electricity
consumed.
Provision of all fuel, gas, steam, water, electricity supplies

instruments, apparatus, gen-set, paying for all current consumed and
all other services that may be required for the testing, running,
balancing and commissioning of the Sub-Contract Works.
TO COLLECTION :
A/64
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Inclusions By Nominated Sub-Contractor (cont'd)

e)
f)
The free use of the Main Contractor's scaffolding, hoisting and lifting
equipment shall only be available to the N.S.C. for as long as they
are STANDING and in use on site by the Main Contractor after which
the N.S.C. shall be responsible to provide his own or arrange with
and pay the Main Contractor for their use.
The provision of any special scaffolding, lifting or hoisting equipment

and/or gondola if required by the N.S.C. for his own work.
g)
Provision of all necessary sleeves, bolts, brackets, etc., required for

their Works for casting in, etc., into the concrete structure by the
Main Contractor.
h)
Taking full responsibility for any loss or damage to his own plants,
tools, equipment and other property on site including Works installed
or done but not officially handed over to and taken over by the Main
Contractor.
i)
Coordinating and providing the Main Contractor whenever requested,
or whenever the N.S.C. deems urgent and necessary, all particulars
relating to both the Main Contractors and N.S.C. Works including
Authorities requirements with regard to the dimensions and positions
in which recesses, chases, holes, mortices, casting of sleeves and
items of similar nature are required to be provided, formed or left.
j)
k)
Keeping his work areas from accumulation of debris at all times and
moving debris to collection points as directed by the Main Contractor.
Effecting relevant insurances policies as required under the
Conditions of Contract except insurance against loss or damage by
fire or their executed Works, materials or goods on site which is the
responsibility of the Main Contractor.
TO COLLECTION :
A/65
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Inclusions By Nominated Sub-Contractor (cont'd)

l)
Upon completion of the Sub-Contract Works, the Main Contractor

shall be responsible for loss or damage to the Sub-Contract Works
properly completed and handed over except for any loss or damage
caused there to by the N.S.C. himself, his servant or agents.
Any dispute which may rise between the Contractor and the N.S.C. in regard to delays,
defects, contra accounts and the like shall be matters for settlement between
themselves, neither of whom shall have any claim in respect of same againts the
Government.
B
Paying Of Profit And Attendance

The Main Contractor is to note that that where a "percentage" (%) has been indicated
for the pricing of "Profit" and/or "Attendance", then payment for this shall be based
accordingly in the percentage of the final Sub-Contract Sum of the Works concerned.
However, where a "Lump Sum" (L.S) has been indicated for the pricing of "Profit" and/or
"Attendance", then payment for them shall be based on the Lump Sum amount as
priced by the Contractor regardless of the final Sub-Contract Sum of the Works
concerned.
TO COLLECTION :
A/66
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
S.O.'s Site Office
12,000.00
The Contractor shall allow for a new Site Office for the sole use of the S.O.'s
representative and its Site Supervisory Staff (allocation of five (5) staffs. The Site Office
(40'x12'x2.4m) complete with 2 nos 2Hp air conditioners,shall be accommodate for
meeting room and conference room for 15 persons (complete with meeting table, chairs,
(4'x8') white board, 2 nos (4'x8') soft boards) and approved by the S.O.. It shall be
erected by the Contractor and approved by the S.O. within four (4) weeks after Issuance
of Letter of Acceptance of Tender.
The Site Office shall be lockable, partitioned up for Clerk Of Works or/and Resident
Engineer and complete with sanitary and plumbing installation, 2 nos 2Hp air
conditioners, light fitting and electrical installation including adequate furniture, white
board and metal cabinets.
The Contractor shall provide the equipment for Site Office use e.g. spirit level, hammer,
measuring tape (30m) etc. as well stationeries, ruler, scale rulers, paper pay all photo
stating bill relating to the project, etc. The Contractor shall also make proper
arrangement for and pay all the charges in connection with photo stating, reprinting the
drawing, redeveloping the films, etc. All the equipment and services shall be adequate
and sufficient for the use of Site Supervisory Staff. All the above items shall be to the
All fittings and Site Office shall be properly secured. Lockset shall be adequately
provided and handed to the Site Supervisory Staff.
The Contractor shall deemed to have allowed in his Tender for the payment of all fees,
charges and permits including maintenance and running cost of the Site Office
throughout the Works. On completion of the Works, unless otherwise stated, the Site
Office shall be dismantle with all furniture and fittings shall become the property of the
Contractor and be removed from the site. Make good the space previously occupied by
the Site Office.
B
Quality Assurance Team
10,000.00
Provide a Quality Assurance Team full time on Site for the institution, administration and
maintenance of the Quality Assurance Plan and the preparation and submission of all
Quality Assurance Report as specified, throughout the duration of the contract.
TO COLLECTION :
A/67
22,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Transportation Service For The S.O. And His Staff/Consultant

Within thirty (30) days from the Letter of Acceptance of Tender, the Contractor shall
provide the transport for the use of the S.O. and/or his staff and consultants for the
entire duration of the Contract :i) One (1) unit brand new four wheel drive (4WD) not less than 2000cc (brand and
model to be approved by the S.O.)
ii) One (1) unit brand new motorcycle 110cc KRISS Modenas or other approved
equivalent.
The transports provided for the facilities shall be new and the place of delivery shall be
as directed by the S.O. The Contractor or his appointed agent throughout the contract
period until the issuance of the Certificate of Practical Completion and shall maintain the
transport provided. Maintenance shall include all necessary monthly servicing according
to manufacturers specification and supply of accessories and fuel, pay roadtax,
insurances (comprehensive cover with passenger liability cover) and repairing
expenses.
In the event that the vehicles is lost, destroyed or damaged beyond repair or become
unavailable for use, the Contractor shall within seven (7) days of occurrence of such an
event promptly replace the vehicle with another equivalent vehicle.
When the Contractor requires the vehicle for maintenance or repair for more than two
(2) consecutive days, he shall provide the S.O. with an alternative vehicle until the
original vehicle is return for use by the S.O.
The transport shall be in the custody of the Contractor at all times. Upon the issuance of
the Certificate of Practical Completion, the vehicle shall be reverted to the Contractor
and shall remove the transport from its location.
If the Contractor fails to provide or maintain the transport for the facilities as listed
hereunder, the Government shall have the right to procure the equipment(s) from other
sources or maintain it and all expenses arising shall be borne by the Contractor and an
appropriate adjustment shall be made to the Contract Sum.
TO COLLECTION :
A/68
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
ON COMPLETION OF THE WORKS
Cleaning The Works, Etc.
10,000.00
On completion of the Works and before the issuance of the Certificates of Practical
Completion, the Contractor shall carry out final cleaning and commissioning of the
Works to the entire satisfaction of the S.O. Such operation shall include but not be
limited to the following :
a)
Throughly wash, clean, dry and polish all floor finishes (in addition to
any previous polishing required under the Specification).
b)
Remove any temporary markings, protective coverings, tapes,

casings and clean exposed surfaces.
c)
Clean all exposed concrete, brick and timber surfaces.
d)
Cut out cracks in plaster etc., and make good.
e)
Touch up all minor faults in paint finishes or repaint and make good
badly marked areas. Remove all paint spots from floors, walls,
hardware, glass, etc.
f)
Leave all roofs and gutters watertight and clean. All sanitary fittings
and equipments are cleaned, adjusted and in proper working order.
g)
Ease all doors, windows, cupboard doors, drawers etc. and leave
them free to move.
h)
Check, oil and adjust all ironmongeries. Leave the Works secure with
all accesses locked. Handover all keys with identifying tags and
identifying schedule to the S.O.
i)
Clean and polish all glass (inside and outside), glazed tiles, stainless
steel surfaces etc.
j)
k)
All existing roads, pavements, roadside drains bounding the site are
clear from any obstructions, building debris, earth, etc.
Ensure that all services and equipment are tested, commissioned
and functioning efficiently.
TO COLLECTION :
A/69
10,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
ON COMPLETION OF THE WORKS (CONT'D)
Cleaning The Works, Etc. (cont'd)

l)
m)
Reinstate to original condition any area distributed by sheds,

materials, access roads, diversion roads, etc. not subsequently
covered up by the Works.
Clear and remove from building and site all rubbish, waste and
superflous materials including any caused by his Sub-Contractors
and leave the Works clean tidy and ready for immediate occupation.
Clearing Away Equipments, Building, Etc.
2,000.00
On completion of the Works, all construction plants, apparatus or equipments, etc. are
to be clear away and remove from site at the sole expense of the Contractor. All holes,
trenches, excavations, etc. in connection with the plant, etc. are to be filled in a proper
manner, leveled off and the site left in a clean and orderly condition with the Works
unless otherwise instructed by the S.O. are to be disconnected, dismantled, take down
and removed upon receipt of instructions from the S.O.
In the event the Contractor do not clear away all the above-mentioned materials and
plants, temporary services and buildings, etc. as instructed within the stipulated time,
the Government shall be empowered to perform such work, either by employing a third
party or dealing with such directly. The cost of which shall be deducted from the
Contractor's final account. The Government shall not be held responsible for Loss
and/or damage of any materials or plants left upon the Site by the Contractor after
taking over of the buildings by the Government.
On Commencement of The Works

Preparation of the Delapidation Report, to carry out joint survey between contractor /
consultant / S.O on the existing condition of the Warehouse/ Lube Oil Building. All
cracks, damages if any etc shall be recorded; all good conditions of the existing
structure shall be recorded so that the same condition is maintained at the end. Any
changes of such good conditions shall be repaired by contractors.
TO COLLECTION :
A/70
2,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Survey On Completion
3,000.00
The contractor shall carry out any additional surveys necessary for the purpose of
establishing the positions, levels and quantities of any works executed to intermediates
stages.
Immediately on completion and before handing over of the Works, the Contractor shall
engage the services of a Registered License Land Surveyor to carry out of a site survey
and to produce as-built survey drawings.
These as-built survey drawings shall show the formation and platform levels, position of
building, fencing, roads, trees, etc. Such drawings are to be submitted to the S.O. for
verification. In setting out the building lines, the Contractor shall denote all grid lines,
beam lines, column lines and wall lines at every floor level. The lines shall be marked in
different colours (to be approved by the S.O.). After verifications, four (4) copies of such
drawings as endorsed by the Registered Land Surveyor shall be submitted to the S.O.
for reference for perusal within thirty (30) days after the issuance of the Certificates of
Practical Completion.
TO COLLECTION :
A/71
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
As Built Drawings
3,000.00
The Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings as required under the Contract. The
drawings shall contain all necessary information from approved shop drawings, working
drawings, as-built records, etc. and shall provide a complete and accurate record of the
whole Works as-built or as installed. Such drawings shall be prepared and presented in
a format approved by the S.O.
Nominated Sub-Contract Documents will stipulate that each Sub-Contractor shall be
responsible for recording and producing their own as-built drawings. The Contractor
shall ensure that these requirements are observed. For electrical and mechanical
Works, the drawings shall also include diagram, schedule and particulars of all items of
equipment including wiring diagrams as may be necessary in the opinion of the S.O. to
allow further maintenance of the equipment provided under the Contract to be carried
out.
Within thirty (30) days after the issuances of Certificates of Practical Completion, the
Contractor shall submit four (4) bound complete sets of as-built drawings including the
original tracing in plastic films and compact disc (CD). Should the Contractor fail to
supply the as-built drawings within the stated time, or in the opinion of the S.O. be
unable to supply the satisfactory drawings within the stated time, the S.O. may employ
other to do the drawings and charge the expenses incurred to the Contractor.
Similarly, submit two sets of any operating and maintenance instruction or manuals
provided by Manufacturers, Suppliers or Sub-Contractors (1 original and 1 copy).
B
Handing Over
Prior the Works being offered for hand-over to the Government, the Contractor shall
carry out a handing-over joint-inspection with the S.O. and the Consultants to ensure
that they are completely finished in every respect.
TO COLLECTION :
A/72
3,000.00
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
General
The following regulation shall apply to all work carried out at work sites of Government
projects.
All contractor awarded a project shall acquainted with the following regulation and their
agreement to abide shall be essential condition of their authority to work at the work site.
Government / Superintending Officer / Project Manager reserves the right to stop the
work if and agreed regulations are voilated by contractor or their sub-contractor.
B
References
All work carried out at work site shall be an accordance but no limited to :- Occupational Safety and Health Act 1994 (Act 514) and its Regulation
- Factories and Machinery Act 1967 (Act 139)
- Factories and Machinery (Building Operations and Works of Engineering Construction)
- Environments Quality Act 1974 (Act 127)
- Others standard and Code of Practice set forth by a Local or Federal Government
Duties and Responsibilities of Contractor

Every contractor who undertaking project with more than five (5) employees shall
prepare a written statement of his general policy with respect to the safety and health at
work of his / her employees and bring the statement to the notice of all of his / her
employees.
The Contractor shall register the project site with the Department of Occupational Safety
and Health.
Providing his / her employees and any person other than their employees who involved
in the project (S.O. Consultant, Architect etc.) with proper and approved Personal
Protective Equipment (PPE) i.e. safety shoes/boots, safety helmets etc. Additional PPE
shall be provided and used as necessary to meet the requirements of specific work.
Ensuring that all machineries, equipments and vehicles, etc. brought on site is in safe
condition with a valid certificate of fitness (PMA, PMT) and shall be operated only by
competent person or authorized person.
TO COLLECTION :
A/73
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Duties and Responsibilities of Contractor (cont'd)

The Contractor shalll employ a competent safety and health officer where the total
contract price of the project exceeds RM 20 million and for the project less then RM 20
million, they shall appoint a site safety supervisor.
The Contractor will ensure that he / she and all his / her workers at site hold a valid
CIDB green card.
The Contractor shall establish a safety and health committee at the project site. Minutes
of safety committee meetings shall be forwarded to the S.O. not later than ten (10) days
after the date of the meeting.
All incidents and accidents occurring on site must be recorded and whenever accidents
causes loss of life or bodily injury to any person so that the person is prevented from
following his / her normal occupational for more than four days shall be reported to the
nearest Dept of Occupational Safety and Health.
The Contractor shall conduct safety induction training for every worker and set up Tool
Box Talks with the workforce. The S.O. or representative will require a written records of
induction training, tool box talks held, who conducts and the topics raised.
The Contractor shall submit a monthly safety and health report to S.O. or representative
on the last Friday of each month. The report shall comprise on safety activities, total
number of employees on site, accident statistic and training record.
TO COLLECTION :
A/74
ITEM
AMOUNT
(RM)
DESCRIPTION
Miscellaneous Preliminaries
Where other items of costs involvement or items of monetary value related to this
Contract have not been allowed for in the Preliminaries and General Conditions of this
Contract, the Contractor shall list such items below together with their monetary values
extended accordingly in the monetary columns and carried to collection. No subsequent
claims of such items in this Bill no. 1 shall be entertained should the Contractor decided
not to or fail to list such other items of costs involvement or items of monetary value
related to the Contract.
List of Other Costs Involvements
a) _____________________________________________________________
b) _____________________________________________________________
c) _____________________________________________________________
d) _____________________________________________________________
e) _____________________________________________________________
f) _____________________________________________________________
g) _____________________________________________________________
h) _____________________________________________________________
i) _____________________________________________________________
j) _____________________________________________________________
TO COLLECTION :
A/75
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
(RM)
COLLECTION :
From Page No. 1
From Page No. 2
From Page No. 3
From Page No. 4
From Page No. 5
From Page No. 6
From Page No. 7
From Page No. 8
From Page No. 9
5,000.00
From Page No. 10
From Page No. 11
From Page No. 12
From Page No. 13
From Page No. 14
From Page No. 15
From Page No. 16
From Page No. 17
From Page No. 18
#REF!
From Page No. 19

From Page No. 20
From Page No. 21
From Page No. 22
#REF!
From Page No. 23
#REF!
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD (C/F) :
A/76
#REF!
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
(RM)
TOTAL BROUGHT FORWARD (B/F) :
#REF!
COLLECTION (CONT'D)
From Page No. 24
#REF!
From Page No. 25
#REF!
From Page No. 26
#REF!
From Page No. 27
#REF!
From Page No. 28
#REF!
From Page No. 29
#REF!
From Page No. 30
#REF!
From Page No. 31
#REF!
-
From Page No. 32

From Page No. 33
20,000.00
From Page No. 34
From Page No. 35
From Page No. 36
From Page No. 37
1,000.00
From Page No. 38
From Page No. 39
From Page No. 40
From Page No. 41
From Page No. 42
1,500.00
-
From Page No. 43

From Page No. 44
3,000.00
From Page No. 45
3,000.00
A/77
#REF!
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
(RM)
#REF!
COLLECTION (CONT'D)
50,000.00
From Page No. 46

From Page No. 47
From Page No. 48
From Page No. 49
From Page No. 50
5,000.00
From Page No. 51
From Page No. 52
From Page No. 53
From Page No. 54
From Page No. 55
From Page No. 56
From Page No. 57
4,000.00
From Page No. 58
8,000.00
From Page No. 59
50,000.00
From Page No. 60
20,000.00
From Page No. 61
8,500.00
From Page No. 62
3,000.00
From Page No. 63
From Page No. 64
20,000.00
From Page No. 65
8,000.00
From Page No. 66
10,000.00
From Page No. 67
3,000.00
A/78
#REF!
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
(RM)
#REF!
COLLECTION (CONT'D)
From Page No. 68
5,500.00
From Page No. 69
8,000.00
From Page No. 70
40,000.00
From Page No. 71
5,000.00
From Page No. 72
From Page No. 73
From Page No. 74
From Page No. 75
TOTAL CARRIED TO SUMMARY OF TENDER
A/79
#REF!
APPENDIX A1
APPENDIX A2
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART B
SITE CLEARANCE
PART B - SITE CLEARANCE

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Allow for carrying out a survey by a licensed land

surveyor as specified of the whole site as shown in the
drawing, prior to commencement of any work included in
this Contract and as per S.O.'s instruction.
ITEM
Ditto upon completion of all the works included in this

Contract.
ITEM
ELEMENT NO. 1 - SITE CLEARANCE WORKS (ALL

PROVISIONAL)
SITE SURVEY
The work included in this section comprises surveying
the whole of the site by a licensed land surveyor to the
Prior to the commencement of any work included in this

Contract and upon completion of the whole of the work
included in this Contract, the Contractor shall arrange
for the whole of the site to be surveyed by a licensed
land surveyor who shall submit six (6) copies of the
results to the Superintending Officer for his approval.
The licensed land surveyor to be employed shall be
subject to the Superintending Officer's approval.
Result of the survey to be carried out upon completion of

the work included in this Contract shall include a report
of the survey together with survey plans clearly showing,
amongst other relevent information, the exact sizes and
positions of all buildings and other structures, roads and
carparks, turfed areas whether flat or sloping, fencing
and gates, drains, culverts, sumps, manholes, etc. and
the types, sizes and positions of all overhead and
underground service pipes and cables, including
dimensions and quantities as the Superintending Officer
may require of all works included and executed under
this Section.
Results of the survey as aforesaid shall subject to the
approval of the Superintending Officer, from the basis of
calculating/determining the quantities of work executed
under this Section.
A
TO COLLECTION :
JPMSB/MALAKOFF/UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
/2014
B/1/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Provision of all other temporary works required for the

carrying out of the works such as cut-off drains, bunds,
stock pile and all other precautionary measures,
dewatering including temporary waterway crossing, silt
fencing, check dam, etc. and including make good land
slips erosions and subsidences as may be required as
directed by the S.O. incidental or deemed necessary for
the proper execution of the whole contract works and
maintain same for the duration of the contract and
removal including making good all existing works
disturbed at the end of the contract period.
ITEM
Allow for the protection and maintenance of all existing

service pipes, ducts, sewer, manhole, mains,
underground and overhead cables, street lights, etc.
during the execution of the works.
ITEM

PROVISIONAL) (Cont'd)
GENERALLY
Allow for providing all necessary temporary works

required for the complete execution of the works which
include but both limited to the complete construction,
maintenance and regular desilting of silt trap, earth dyke,
earth drain, wash platform, earth road, culvert crossing,
etc and all necessary temporary measured to slopes,
excavation, gabion, cages, hardwood timber struts and
backfill to original condition all as directed by and to the
approval of the Local Authorities.
A
TO COLLECTION :
/2014
B/1/2
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
From page : B/1/1
From page : B/1/2

PROVISIONAL) (Cont'd)
COLLECTION :
ELEMENT NO. 1 - SITE CLEARANCE WORKS

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
/2014
B/1/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
PART B - SITE CLEARANCE DEMOLITION WORKS

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY : SITE CLEARANCE & DEMOLITION WORKS

1
SITE CLEARANCE WORKS
B/1/3
PART B - SITE CLEARANCE & DEMOLITION WORKS

JPMSB/PPNJ/WAREHOUSE-SRI GADING
(FASA 1)/2011
SUMM/B/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART C
PILING WORKS
PART C - PILING WORKS

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE SPUN PILE

ELEMENT NO. 1 - GENERALLY
A
All piles shall be approved prestressed spun piles.

Payable length for supply, and drive of pile shall be
measured from toe to cut-off level
Piles shall be driven to the required set or otherwise

directed by the S.O. only by hydraulic INJECTION
equipment for Piling Works in Warehouse up to 1300kN
(130 Tonne)
Allow for the protection, maintenance and removal of all

existing services, walls, pipes, underground and
overhead cables, street lights etc. during the execution
of the Works.
Allow for the provision of all necessary piling equipment,

plant, tools and ancillaries, assembling and erecting and
dismantling and removal off site upon completion
Allow for moving and handling piling equipment, plant,
tools and ancillaries as often and whenever necessary
for the whole operation including any necessary
excavation or filling required for movement of the piling
equipment and plant including idling time
ITEM
ITEM
ITEM
PILING RECORDS
F
Allow for the submission of piling results as described

duly signed by the Contractor and S.O.'s representatives
and delivering same to the S.O. as work proceeds. The
Contractor should submit one set of as-built tracings on
polyester film on piling completion including of as built
works on AutoCAD diskette when directed by the S.O
Allow for the submission of piling setting out drawings as
described duly signed by licensed surveyor before
proceeding with other works. (4 sets in A1 size)
ITEM
ITEM
As-Built Plan Upon Completion

Allow for submission As-Built drawing duly signed by
License Surveyor upon completion for all piling works. (4
sets in A1 size, 1 Linen copy in A1 size)
TOTAL TO SUMMARY page SUMM/C/1 :
JPMSB/MALAKOFF/UPGRADING WAREHOUSE/
2014
C/1/1
ITEM
QTY
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
PILING WORKS (ALL PROVISIONAL) (Cont'd)

ELEMENT NO. 2 - WAREHOUSE AREA
A
Supply only 300mm diameter starter pile 9.0 meter long

complete with pile steel shoe to manufacturer's detail.
(252 nos)
2,268
Supply only 300mm diameter extension pile 9.0 meter long

(504 nos)
4,536
3,024
Ditto extension 6m meter long
(504 nos)
Handle, transport, pitch and drive precast reinforced

concrete piles to required set (INJECTION METHOD) :Drive (initial /extension) 300mm precast concrete spun
pile and to the required and approved by the S.O. to the
required friction/end bearing depth all as approved by
the Engineer.
Not exceeding 10.00m deep
2,520
Exceeding 10.00m and not exceeding 13.00m deep
756
756
756
756
756
756
756
756
756
756
No
1,008
Pile connection
Q
Labour and material for connecting in position driven

pile with extension pile by continous butt weld aloy the
circumferental groove of mildsteel plate
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD (to page C/2/2) :
2014
C/2/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

ELEMENT NO. 2 - WAREHOUSE AREA (Cont'd)
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE SPUN PILE (Cont'd)
Pile cut-off level
A
Cut-off 300mm diameter precast concrete spun pile head

to required level including trimming, stripping, dressing for
keys and straightening and bending bars in position for pile
cap connection and remove all debris off site at
Contractor's own tip
No
252
Provide 6T16 (1000mm depth length) welded to a 4mm

mild steel plate acting as a plug to cover the void inner
diameter of pile as per detail. drawing
No
252
SUB-TOTAL
BROUGHT FORWARD FROM PAGE C/2/1 :
2014
C/2/2
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

ELEMENT NO.3 - LUBE OIL AREA
A

(48 nos)
288

(288 nos)
1,728

concrete piles to required set (INJECTION METHOD) :Drive (initial /extension) 300mm precast concrete spun pile
and to the required and approved by the S.O. to the required
friction/end bearing depth all as approved by the Engineer.
D
480
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
144
No
288
Pile connection
R

2014
C/3/1[ADD 1]
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

ELEMENT NO.3 - LUBE OIL AREA (Cont'd)
Pile cut-off level
A

No
48
No
48
SUB-TOTAL
2014
C/3/2[ADD 1]
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

ELEMENT NO.4 - OPEN STORAGE SHED
(10 nos)
90

(30 nos)
270
Ditto extension 6m meter long
60
100
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
No
40
(10 nos)

concrete piles to required set (INJECTION METHOD) :Drive (initial /extension) 300mm precast concrete spun pile
and to the required and approved by the S.O. to the required
friction/end bearing depth all as approved by the Engineer.
Pile connection
2014
C/4/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

ELEMENT NO.4 - OPEN STORAGE SHED (Cont'd)
Pile cut-off level
No
10
No
10
Nos
576
BAKAU PILE
E
Supply and drive between 125mm-150mm Diameter

Bakau Pile at 300mm c/c, 5.0 meter length under floor
slab
as
per
detail
drawing
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/OS/ST/01 :(Dolly/temporary pile shall be used to drive the top of
pile to the finish cut-off level of the pad footing)
SUB-TOTAL
2014
C/4/2
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY : PILING WORKS

1
GENERAL FOR PILING WORKS
C/1/1
WAREHOUSE AREA
C/2/2
LUBE OIL AREA
C/3/2
OPEN STORAGE SHED
C/4/2

2014
SUMM/C/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART D
UPGRADING WAREHOUSE
PART D - UPGRADING WAREHOUSE

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 1 - WORK BELOW LOWEST FLOOR

FINISH
WAREHOUSE AREA
A
Excavate, break up, hack existing slab before start

piling works
M2
2,100
Excavate commencing from formation levels and get

out, part return, fill in and ram and deposit and spread
in making up levels where directed and remainder load
and cart away from site :B
Pit for Pile cap not exceeding 2.0m deep.
M3
550
Trench for ground beam not exceeding 1.00m deep.

__________________________
M3
450
50mm Thick blinding spread and levelled under under

pile cap.
M3
14
Ditto under ground beam.
M3
23
Lean concrete Grade 15 as described :D
Vibrated reinforced concrete Grade 35 as described in

:F
Pile cap.
M3
275
Column stump (provisional).
M3
31

:H
300mm x 900mm Ground beam
M3
243
M3
108
300mm Thick ground slab.
M3
133
M3
251
TO COLLECTION :
2014
D/1/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

FINISH (Cont'd)
WAREHOUSE AREA (Cont'd)
High tensile rod reinforcement to B.S 4449 as
described :In pile cap
A
20mm Diameter rod.
KG
43,903
In column stump (provisional).

C
25mm Diameter rod.

.
In ground beam.
KG
14,356
25mm Diameter rod.
KG
40,866
20mm Ditto.
KG
5,038
16mm Ditto.
KG
6,386
12mm Ditto.
KG
5,438
KG
32,287
KG
2,794
KG
3,836
In ground slab
J
12mm Diameter rod.
Mild steel rod reinforcement to B.S 4449 as described :In pile cap
L
12mm Diameter rod as ties.

10mm Diameter rod as links.

In ground beam.
12mm Diameter rod as stirrups.
KG
4,234
KG
11,716
TO COLLECTION :
2014
D/1/2
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

FINISH (Cont'd)
WAREHOUSE AREA (Cont'd)
Sawn formwork as described :A
To sides of pile cap.
M2
602
Ditto of column stump (provisional).
M2
324
Ditto of ground beam.
M2
2,672
A layer of 0.25mm thick heavy duty polythene sheet

damp proof membrane laid under concrete bed
(measured separately).
M2
2,100
20mm Thick approved expansion joint correct with

bituminous compound or other equal as described to
ground slab (Provisional).
840
Allow for preparing and applying "2 Stage"

preconstruction anti-termite treatment to be carried out
by an approved soil treatment specialist including
preparation of surface to receive treatment, working
progressively to accommodate to construction works or
in section all in accordance with approved practice and
to satisfaction of the Superintending Officer.
ITEM
TO COLLECTION :
2014
D/1/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. D/1/1
Page No. D/1/2
Page No. D/1/3

FINISH (Cont'd)
COLLECTION :

FINISH
CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
D/1/4
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 2 - APRON AND PERIMETER DRAIN

(ALL PROVISIONAL)
and cart away from site :-
Excavate, break up, hack existing apron before start

piling works
__________________________
Supply and drive between 125mm-150mm Diameter
Bakau Pile at 500mm c/c, 2.5 meter long along apron
slab, perimeter drain and ramp as per detail drawing
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/WH/ST/01 :-
M2
389
NO
1,201
M2
389
M3
19
M3
58
M2
389
485
150mm Thick bed of hardcore consisting of hard dry,

broken bricks or stone, spread and levelled, well
rammed, consolidated and to be compacted to receive
sand blinding (measured separately).
50mm Thick blinding concrete spread and levelled

under drain base.
Reinforced concrete Grade 30 as described in :-
150mm Thick apron slab.

_________________________
Single layer of steel fabric reinforcement to B.S. 4483

(BRC Ref. No. A10 - weighing not less than
6.16kg/m2) as described well lapped at joints and
embedded in apron slab (measured nett - no
allowance made for laps).
Sawn formwork as described :-
To edge of apron slab exceeding 200mm but not

exceeding 300mm high.
TO COLLECTION :
2014
D/2/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

(ALL PROVISIONAL)(Cont'd)
230mm Wide half round concrete drain in straight,

curved, bend etc as specified cast in suitable length,
finished fair on exposed surfaces bedded, jointed and
pointed in cement mortar (1:3) on and including
265mm thick plain concrete grade 20 as specified bed
with a layer of BRC A10 and infill between drain laid on
50mm thick lean concrete and 150mm thick compacted
hardcore laid compacted subbase, raised both side
with half brickwall bothsides in cement mortar (1:3)
rendered on exposed surfaces with 20mm thick
cement and sand (1:6) trowelled finish and including all
necessary excavation, formwork and reinforcement,
junction, angle end and remove surplus excavated
material
all
as
per
detail
drawing
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/WH/ST/03 :A
Average 300mm deep perimeter drain discharge to

nearest monsoon drain.
_____________________________
TO COLLECTION :
2014
D/2/2
260
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. D/2/1
Page No. D/2/2

COLLECTION :

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
D/2/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 3 - RAMP

:A
In 150mm Thick (average) in ramp slab.
M3
11
To edge of concrete exceeding 100mm but not

70

(BMC Ref. No. A10 - weighing not less than
embedded in concrete bed (measured nett - no
M2
71
EXTRA OVER for forming groove lines.
M2
71
Sawn formwork as described :B

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
D/3/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 4 - INTERNAL FLOOR FINISHES

WAREHOUSE AREA
Cement and sand (1:3) as described :A
25mm Thick paving to floor to factory trowelled smooth
with power float including floor hardener all to
specialist detail and to S.O's approval.

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
D/4/1
M2
2,100
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
WORK BELOW LOWEST FLOOR FINISH
D/1/4
APRON AND PERIMETER DRAIN
D/2/3
RAMP
D/3/1
INTERNAL FLOOR FINISHES
D/4/1

2014
SUMM/D/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART E
PART E - UPGRADING LUBE OIL/CHEMICAL STORAGE

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

FINISH
LUBE OIL AREA
A
Excavate, break up, hack existing slab before start

piling works
M2
482

and cart away from site :B
M3
68
M3
140
50mm Thick blinding spread and levelled under under

pile cap.
M3
M3
__________________________

:F
Pile cap.
M3
31
M3

:H
300mm x 900mm Ground beam.
M3
61
200mm x 600mm Ground beam.
M3
23
M3
86
TO COLLECTION :
JPMSB/MALAKOFF/UPGRADING LUBE OIL/

2014
E/1/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

FINISH (Cont'd)
LUBE OIL AREA (Cont'd)
A
25mm Diameter rod.
KG
3,167
20mm Diameter rod.
KG
3,522
KG
2,127

C
25mm Diameter rod.
.
In ground beam.
D
25mm Diameter rod.
KG
10,308
20mm Ditto.
KG
1,141
16mm Ditto.
KG
1,216
12mm Ditto.
KG
1,198
KG
6,078
KG
437
KG
651
In ground slab
H
12mm Diameter rod.
J


In ground beam.
KG
1,210
KG
2,128
TO COLLECTION :
2014
E/1/2
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

FINISH (Cont'd)
LUBE OIL AREA (Cont'd)
To sides of pile cap.
M2
120
M2
93
Ditto of ground beam.
M2
618

M2
450
20mm Thick approved expension joint correct with

bituminous compound or other equal as described to
ground slab (Provisional).
180

ITEM
TO COLLECTION :

2014
E/1/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. E/1/1
Page No. E/1/2
Page No. E/1/3

FINISH (Cont'd)
COLLECTION :

FINISH
CARRIED TO SUMMARY

2014
E/1/4
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

(ALL PROVISIONAL)
and cart away from site :-
Excavate, break up, hack existing apron before start

piling works
__________________________
Supply and drive between 125mm to 150mm Diameter
Bakau Pile at 500mm c/c, 2.5 meter long along apron
slab, perimeter drain and ramp as per detail drawing
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/LB/ST/01 :-

M2
144
NO
373
M2
144
M3
M3
23
M2
144
192
50mm Thick blinding concrete spread and levelled

under drain base.
Reinforced concrete Grade 30 as described in :-
150mm Thick apron slab.

_________________________

(BRC Ref. No. A10 - weighing not less than
embedded in apron slab (measured nett - no
Sawn formwork as described :-
To edge of apron slab exceeding 200mm but not

TO COLLECTION :
2014
E/2/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY

230mm Wide half round concrete drain in straight,

curved, bend etc as specified cast in suitable length,
finished fair on exposed surfaces bedded, jointed and
pointed in cement mortar (1:3) on and including
265mm thick plain concrete grade 20 as specified bed
with a layer of BRC A10 and infill between drain laid on
50mm thick lean concrete and 150mm thick compacted
hardcore laid compacted subbase, raised both side
with half brickwall bothsides in cement mortar (1:3)
rendered on exposed surfaces with 20mm thick
cement and sand (1:6) trowelled finish and including all
necessary excavation, formwork and reinforcement,
junction, angle end and remove surplus excavated
material
all
as
per
detail
drawing
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/LB/ST/02:A
Average 300mm deep perimeter drain discharge to

nearest monsoon drain.
_____________________________
TO COLLECTION :
2014
E/2/2
102
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. E/2/1
Page No. E/2/2

COLLECTION :

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
E/2/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

:A
In 150mm Thick (average) in ramp slab.
M3
To edge of concrete exceeding 100mm but not

35

(BMC Ref. No. A10 - weighing not less than
embedded in concrete bed (measured nett - no
M2
36
EXTRA OVER for forming groove lines.
M2
36
Sawn formwork as described :B

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
E/3/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Cement and sand (1:3) as described :-
25mm Thick paving to floor to factory trowelled smooth

with power float including floor hardened all to
specialist detail and to S.O's approval.
M2
450
190
Other Works :-
EXTRA OVER for scupper drain to fall size 75mm x

100mm wide at edge of floor slab area . (Provisional)
Painting of Grease Trap Cover

To paint with anti-rust and final layer enamel paint to
SO approval onto the existing grease trap steel cover.

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
E/4/1
ITEM
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
E/1/4
APRON AND PERIMETER DRAIN
E/2/3
RAMP
E/3/1
E/4/1


2014
SUMM/E/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
CHEMICAL STORAGE AT TANJUNG BIN POWER PLANT,
SECTION III PART F
OPEN STORAGE SHED
PART F - OPEN STORAGE SHED

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

FINISH
OPEN STORAGE SHED
and cart away from site :A
Oversite to reduce level 300mm average depth.
M2
480
M3
17
M3
Trench for slab haunching not exceeding 400mm

deep.
__________________________
M3
27
Filling to arising platform level with import material

(earth) and compacted over 800mm thick (Provisional)
M3
2,000
50mm Thick sand blinding, spread and levelled
M2
480

M2
480
Backfilling
E
Lean concrete Grade 15 as described :-
50mm Thick blinding spread and levelled under pile

cap.
M3
M3

:K
Pile cap.
M3
M3

:M
M3
200mm Thick ground slab including haunching
M3
123
TO COLLECTION :
2014
F/1/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

FINISH (Cont'd)
OPEN STORAGE SHED (Cont'd)
A
16mm Diameter rod.
KG
541
12mm Ditto.
KG
248
KG
163

C
16mm Diameter rod.
In ground beam.
D
20mm Diameter rod.
KG
37
16mm Ditto.
KG
120
12mm Ditto.
KG
116
In ground slab
G
16mm Diameter rod
KG
2,698
12mm Ditto
KG
8,417
KG
72
KG
48
KG
161
J


In ground beam.
TO COLLECTION :
2014
F/1/2
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

FINISH (Cont'd)
OPEN STORAGE SHED (Cont'd)
To sides of pile cap
M2
60
M2
12
Approved layer of non-woven geotextile laid under

hardcore
M2
480

M2
480

ITEM
TO COLLECTION :
2014
F/1/3
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. F/1/1
Page No. F/1/2
Page No. F/1/3

FINISH (Cont'd)
COLLECTION :

FINISH
CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
F/1/4
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 2 - FRAME

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORKS
Mild steel to BS 4360 as specified including all
necessary final painting, cutting, filleting, anti-rust
painting and welding, bolting, etc. to comply with BS
5133 as specified
200mm x 200mm x 49kg universal column as stanchion
ELEMENT NO. 2 - FRAME

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
/2014
F/2/1
KG
3,430
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE
ELEMENT NO. 3 - ROOF

ROOF STRUCTURE
ROOF TRUSSES
The following in 5 nos 'Type T1' steel roof trusses as a
tie, approximately 23,742mm long span x 900mm rise,
fabricated out of mild steel rectengular hollow section
all framed and welded together including all necessary
cutting, welding, painting, transportation, handling and
hoisting approximately 7,000mm high above ground
level.
A
125mm x 75mm x 6mm Thick x 17.20kg/m RHS top

chord
KG
2013
125mm x 75mm x 6mm Thick x 17.20kg/m RHS bottom

chord
KG
1798
125mm x 75mm x 6mm Thick x 17.20kg/m RHS vertical

strut
KG
447
125mm x 75mm x 6mm Thick x 17.20kg/m RHS

inclined strut
KG
230
75mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick x 10.10kg/m RHS inclined

strut
KG
2423
(End of 5 Nos 'Type T1' roof trusses)

The following in 12 nos 'Type T2' steel roof trusses as
a tie, approximately 6,000mm long span x 400mm rise,
fabricated out of mild steel rectengular hollow section
all framed and welded together including all necessary
cutting, welding, painting, transportation, handling and
hoisting approximately 7,000mm high above ground
level.
F
100mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick x 12.78kg/m RHS top

chord
KG
890
100mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick x 12.78kg/m RHS bottom

chord
KG
890
75mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick x 10.10kg/m RHS vertical

strut
KG
723
75mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick x 10.10kg/m RHS inclined

strut
KG
1,088
(End of 12 Nos 'Type T2' roof trusses)
TO COLLECTION :
/2014
F/3/1
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE
ELEMENT NO. 3 - ROOF (Cont'd)

ROOF STRUCTURE (Cont'd)
ROOF TRUSSES (Cont'd)
Connection
A
350mm x 350mm x 20mm Thick mild steel base plate

bolted to R.C Base Foundation (measured separetely)
NO
20
75mm x 75mm x 20mm Thick triangle plate as stiffener

cut to shape welded to column and base plate (both
measured separately)
NO
80
20mm Diameter Hold Down J-Bolt approximately

600mm long anchored to R.C stump (measure
separately) complete with nut and washers
NO
80
200mm x 650mm x 10mm Thick mild steel plate welded

to end of roof trusses 'Type T1' and bolted to 200mm x
200mm x 49mm SHS Column (measure separately)
NO
40
16mm Diameter high tensile bolt complete with bolt,

nuts and washers
NO
128
60.3mm x 4mm x 8.38 kg/m CHS wind bracing
KG
966
300mm x 200mm x 10mm Thick mild steel plate cut to

shape welded to rafter (measure separately)
NO
32
150mm x 40mm x 12mm x 2.4mm Thick x 5.70kg/m

mild steel lipped channel purlins
KG
2,709
70mm x 70mm x 6mm Thick mild steel angle plate

welded to portal frame and bolted to mild steel purlin
complete with 12mm Diameter high tensile bolt, nuts
and washers
NO
85
16mm Diameter Anti-sag rod approximately 1300mm

long both end bolted to lipped channel (measure
separately) including nut and washers
NO
136
TO COLLECTION :
/2014
F/3/2
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE

Roof Finishes And Coverings
A
Approved metal decking roofing sheet laid and fixed to

steel trusses all to S.O.'s approval in accordance to the
specialist detail and recommendation.
M2
632
27
M2
632
100mm Diameter rainwater downpipe fixed to steel

column
70
Ditto embedded in concrete bed.
15
Extra over for bend.
NO
10
Extra over for swan neck.
NO
10
Extra over for forming opening to perimeter drain to

discharge rainwater pipe.
NO
10
Approved 100mm diameter UPVC grating and setting

on top of rainwater downpipe (measured separately).
NO
10
48
Approved ridge capping to match roof covering with

and including requisite connectors and screws, all to
S.O.'s approval in accordance to the manufacturer's
detail and recommendation.
A layer of approved double sided 50mm thick fibre
glass insulation paper (sisalation or other equal and
approved) laid on and including PVC chicken wire
mesh and fixed on top of trusses (measured
separately), well lapped at joints (measured nett - no
Roof Drainage (All Provisional)
Approved heavy duty unplasticised polyvinyl chloride
(uPVC) pipework and fitting including jointing in
accordance with manufacturer's instruction :-
Gutter systems
K
190mm girth galvanised iron continous rolled guttering

system joints in the running length complete with all
necessary hidden galvanised steel brackets and
supports at average 1000mm centres and fittings; push
fit connectors joints; gutterwork and support self
coloured grey as specified fixed with galvanised screws
to roof trusses to S.O approval
Extra for stopped ends.
NO
Extra for running outlets.
NO
10
TO COLLECTION :
/2014
F/3/3
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT

Collection :
From Page No. F/3/1
From Page No. F/3/2
From Page No. F/3/3
ELEMENT NO.3 - ROOF

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
/2014
F/3/4
QTY
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
RATE
Cement and sand (1:3) as described :A
25mm Thick paving to floor trowelled smooth with

power float including floor hardener all to specialist
detail and to S.O's approval.

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
F/4/1
M2
480
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT NO.
PROVISIONAL)
UNIT
EXTENAL
WORK
QTY
(ALL
ROAD WORKS
A
Excavate oversite to reduce level average depth not

exceeding 750mm deep and get out, part return, fill in
and ram, deposit, spread in making up levels where
directed within the site and remainder load and cart away
M3
132
Trim, level and compact formation surfaces to required

gradients, chamber, falls and cross falls as described to
receive sub-base.
M2
175
150mm thick bed of approved unwashed sand sub-base

(CBR > 20%) spread and levelledto falls and chamber,
well rammed and consolidated as described
M2
175
450mm (compacted) thick crusher run as road base as

base course (CBR > 80%) to be laid in 2 course, spread
and levelled to falls and chamber, well rammed and
consolidated as described
M2
175
Supply and apply prime coat at the rate of 0.5 litre/sq.m

on the surface of binder course as described
M2
175
65mm thick of asphaltic binder course spread and

levelled to falls and chamber, well rammed and
consolidated as described
M2
175
Supply and apply prime coat at the rate of 0.5 litre/sq.m

on the surface of wearing course as described
M2
175
45mm (finished) thick of asphaltic wearing course to be

obtained from an approved source spread and levelled to
falls and chamber, well rammed and consolidated as
described
M2
175
Allow for jointing of new road to existing road including

providing all necessary tappering etc. and all paying all
fees etc. all as per S.O's satisfactions.
TO COLLECTION :
2014
F/5/1
ITEM
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
88
To excavate and, supply and lay 225mm diameter

perforated HDPE sub-soil drainage to be wrapped with
non-woven geotextile filter media and lay to gradient,
complete with 20mm aggregate encased all round as
shown in drawing
NO:JPMSB/AD/5/132/MALAKOFF/OS/ST-02 and
discharge to nearest existing drain
90
Provide brick sumps for the subsoil drainage
No
20
ELEMENT NO. 5 PROVISIONAL) (Cont'd)
EXTENAL
WORK
(ALL
CHAINLINK FENCING AND GATES

A
PVC coated galvanised mild steel chain link fencing

2400mm high consisting of 50mm x 50mm x 6mm Thick
mild steel angle post 3.32 long at 2.6m interval with one
end embedded in and including 305mm x 305mm x
610mm deep concrete Grade 15 footing and other end
bend to 60 degree, 65mm x 65mm mesh no. 10 SWG
chain link fence and 3 nos. strand no.9 SWG straining
wire between bays, 5 ply no. 12 SWG galvanised steel
wire with 4 points barb spaced at 150mm apart, 300mm x
150mm Thick concrete kerb gate 15 along perimeter
fencing including all excavation, formwork and painting
with approved paint all as per drawing no.
JPMSB/AD/132/MALAKOFF/OS/ST/05
OTHER WORKS :SUB-SOIL DRAINAGE
TURFING
D
To plant closed turf grass to SO approval at slope surface
m2
To plant spot turf grass to SO approval at flat surface
EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN (ESCP)

F
To provide complete ESCP precaution measure

throughout the construction period on all related civil
work according to drawing No : JPMSB/AD/5/132/
MALAKOFF/ESCP-01 strickly to the local authority
requirements.
TO COLLECTION :
2014
F/5/2
220
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Page No. F/5/1
Page No. F/5/2
ELEMENT NO. 5 PROVISIONAL) (Cont'd)
EXTENAL
WORK
(ALL
COLLECTION :
ELEMENT NO.5 - EXTERNAL WORK (ALL

PROVISIONAL)
CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
F/5/3
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
F/1/4
FRAME
F/2/1
ROOF
F/3/4
F/4/1
EXTERNAL WORK (ALL PROVISIONAL)
F/5/3

2014
SUMM/F/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART G
RECTIFICATION WORKS
PART G - RECTIFICATION WORKS
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
To make good existing 2 point of cracked

brickwall/column at Inside Building (approximately 1
meter long crack)
ITEM
To make good existing 2 point of horizontal cracked

brickwall/column at the corner side of the office
ITEM
To make good existing gap between wall/column at the

side of office room
ITEM
To make good existing crack at upper side
ITEM
To
make
good existing
brickwall/column along lab store
ITEM
To make good existing gap between wall and steel

column. (approximately 5mm gap)
ITEM
To make good existing horizontal cracked brickwall at

testing lab room
ITEM
To make good existing cracked wall at upper side of

access door and provide lintol as per detail drawing
ITEM
ITEM
To make good existing cracked wall at meeting room.

To make sure door can be closed properly.
(approximately 2 meters long crack)
ITEM
To make good existing cracked wall at surau and

pantry
ITEM
ITEM
ITEM
ELEMENT NO. 1 - RECTIFICATION WORKS

Based on determination on site condition during the
Site Visit, the Tenderer shall :Supply material, labour, locate, excavate, break-up,
hack, repair and make good the work all in accordance
with the Engineer's instruction and to the satisfaction of
the
S.O.
all
as
per
detail
no.
JPMSB/AD/5/132/MALAKOFF/WS/ST/01 and refer to
Appendix G1 :Inside Building
A
horizontal
cracked
To make good existing horizontal cracked wall at

female toilet entrance. To make sure door can be
closed properly
To make good existing vertical cracked wall at meeting

room
To make good existing gap between wall and steel

column at toilet (outside area) and make good existing
crack at apron slab
TO COLLECTION :
2014
G/1/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
To make good existing 2 point of horizontal cracked

wall at lab office (outside area).
ITEM
To upgrade existing perimeter drain at outside building
ITEM
To make good existing floor tiles cracked at office

(Inside Warehouse Building Area)
ITEM
L.S.
L.S.
L.S.
Page No. G/1/1
Page No. G/1/2
ELEMENT NO. 1 - RECTIFICATION WORKS (Cont'd)

Based on determination on site condition during the
Site Visit, the Tenderer shall :Supply material, labour, locate, excavate, break-up,
hack, repair and make good the work all in accordance
with the Engineer's instruction and to the satisfaction of
the
S.O.
all
as
per
detail
no.
JPMSB/AD/5/132/MALAKOFF/WS/ST/01 and refer to
Appendix G1 :A
Other Works
C
Make good work which are not described above but

shown on the drawings and are deemed necessary for
the proper completion of the rectification works (to be
detailed up by the Tenderer)
i)
ii)
iii)
TO COLLECTION :
COLLECTION :
ELEMENT NO. 1 - RECTIFICATION WORKS

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
G/1/2
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
RECTIFICATION WORK
G/1/2

2014
SUMM/G/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
APPENDIX G1
RECTIFICATION
WORKS
11
10
12
13
14
15
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART H
ELECTRICAL WORKS
PART H - ELECTRICAL WORKS

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
To supply and install wall mounted metal clad DB as

per drawing
i. DB-WH consist of
- 60A, MCCB, TPN, 25kA, c/w shunt trip coil
- ELR c/w ZCT
- MCB, 32A, 3P - 4 nos
- MCB, 20A, 1P, 4 nos
- MCB, 20A, 1P, 4 nos
- MCB, 10A, 1P 1 no
- c/w internal wiring, labelling, phase indications lights
SET
Supply and install copper tape 25mmx3mm from Sub DB

to earth chamber complete with exorthermic welding to
the earth rod. The earth resistance shall be less than
1.0 ohm
LOT
Supply and install copper earth rod 16mm dia. X 1600mm

complete with accessories
LOT
Supply and install concrete earth chamber 300mm x

300mm complete with backfilled and make good the
surface
ELEMENT NO. 1 - SUB-DB

A) The switch boards, DB shall be with min
thickness 2.0mm m/s sheet antirust primer, under
coat, labeling, grey colour, danger sign, ifting bar
and earthing system.
B) Panel maker shall JKR registered switchboard
maker.
A
ELEMENT NO. 1 - SUB-DB

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
H/1/1
LOT
MATERIAL
INSTALL
UNIT RATE UNIT PRICE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
150
LOT
ELEMENT NO. 2 - SUB MAIN CABLING

(Note: Method of Installation of cables and
conductors shall be complied with IEE Regulation)
To complete supply, install of under ground sub-main Cu
cable in 4" dia Corrugated HDPE pipe 3' depth complete
with excavation of earth trenching sand, brick, cable
warning sign, backfilling compaction and making good
of excavated trench from main MSB c/w termination,
cable lug sleeves, glands and labelling with :A
i. 4C x 35 mm sq PVC/SWA/PVC from existing to SubDB
Supply and install LV cable Marker for u/ground cable

direction. The cable marker shall be (100x100)mm top
and (150x150)mm bottom with 400m height shall be
located every 15 meters
ELEMENT NO. 2 - SUB MAIN CABLING

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
H/2/1
MATERIAL
INSTALL
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Hibay Lighting point using 2 x 2.5mmsq PVC cable and

protective conductor in GI Conduit c/w 10A single pole 1
way switch and accessories (GI flexible conduit, adaptor,
etc)
Nos
12
Emergency lighting point using 2x1.5mmsq PVC cable

and protective conductor in G.I conduit
Nos
Power point using 2 x 2.5sqmm cable and protective

conductor in G.I conduit
Nos
Power point using 3 x 4.0sqmm cable and protective

conductor in GI conduit
Nos
ELEMENT NO. 3 - LIGHTING AND POWER

A
ELEMENT NO. 3 - LIGHTING AND POWER

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
H/3/1
MATERIAL
INSTALL
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
ELEMENT NO. 4 - SUPPLY AND INSTALL

(Note : All Luminaires shall be complete set with
control gears lamp, bulb or tubes. Flourescent fitting
shall be equipped with 8.5W low loss Coke)
A
150W MH Hibay Lights
Nos
12
8W Emergency Light
Nos
Weatherproof switched socket outlet, 3 pin, 13A, PVC
Nos
Wall mounted 16A, 5 P + E, Female socket outlet
Nos
6 gang switch center complete with metal enclosure and

other accessories for hibay light
Nos
Testing and Commissioning
Nos
Any other work not mentioned above for the complete

installation ( to be stated by tenderer)
i.
__________________________________________
ii.
__________________________________________
iii.
_________________________________________
iv.
__________________________________________
ELEMENT NO. 4 - SUPPLY AND INSTALL

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
H/4/1
MATERIAL
INSTALL
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
SUB - DB
H/1/1
SUB MAIN CABLING
H/2/1
LIGHTING AND POWER
H/3/1
SUPPLY AND INSTALL
H/4/1

2014
SUMM/H/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART J
MECHANICAL WORKS
PART J - MECHANICAL WORKS

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
QTY
Nos
ELEMENT NO. 1 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ALL

PROVISIONAL)
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Portable fire extinguisher complete with mounting
accessories as specified:A
9kg ABC dry powder portable fire extingusher c/w

bracket. At Open Storage Shed
OTHER WORKS
Other item not described in the above but shown in the
drawing or described in the specification or required by
authority or obviously necessary for fully functional
of the system. If none, please write `NIL', otherwise full
details to be given. Please specify:
a) .
b) .
c) .
d) .
ELEMENT NO. 1 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ALL

PROVISIONAL)
CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
J/1/1
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)

ELEMENT
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY : MECHANICAL WORKS

1
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM (ALL PROVISIONAL)

2014
SUMM/J/1
J/1/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART K
MISCELLANEOUS
PART K - MISCELLANEOUS
CONFIDENTIAL
ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
ELEMENT NO. 1 - MISCELLANEOUS

A
Allow for general workers to assist the owner to dismantle

and reinstall the existing racks, shifting of stocks at
Warehouse and Lube Oil/Chemical Storage in two (2)
stages. The existing operation of the warehouse and Lube
Oil/Chemical Storage shall not be disturbed.
ITEM
Allow for general works to :

i) Dismantle the existing roller shutter in order to mobilise
hydraulic piling machine and upon completion of piling
works, to reinstate and make good of the existing roller
shutter
ITEM
ii)
Dismantle and reinstate all roof structure and related
existing services such as electrical, fire figthing system
etc. in order to allow for clear working area for the hyraulic
piling machine to maneuver for piling works.
ELEMENT NO. 1 - MISCELLANEOUS

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
K/1/1[ADD 1]
QTY
RATE
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
ITEM
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
MISCELLANEOUS
K/1/1
2014
SUMM/K/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III PART L
PROVISIONAL SUMS
PART L - PROVISIONAL SUMS

ITEM
NO.
DESCRIPTION
AMOUNT
(RM/SEN)
UNIT
QTY
RATE
20,000.00
60,000.00
ELEMENT NO. 1 - PROVISIONAL SUMS

A
Provide the Provisional Sum of Ringgit Malaysia : Twenty

Thousand Only (RM 20,000.00) for Protection and/or
Relocation of Existing Utilities Services to be used as
directed by the Superintending Officer or to be deducted in
whole or in part if not required.
Provide the Provisional Sum of Ringgit Malaysia : Fifty
Thousand Only (RM 60,000.00) for Contingencies Sum
to be used as directed by the Superintending Officer or to
be deducted in whole or in part if not required.
ELEMENT NO. 1 - PROVISIONAL SUMS

CARRIED TO SUMMARY
2014
80,000.00
L/1/1

ITEM
NO.
ELEMENT
FROM
PAGE NO.
SUMMARY
1
PROVISIONAL SUMS
L/1/1

2014
SUMM/L/1
AMOUNT
(RM)
TanjungBin Power
TENDER DOCUMENT
FOR
SECTION III
LIST OF DRAWINGS

Tender Document Warehouse (Financial)

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Tender Document Warehouse (Financial)

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

KEWANGAN

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND

TANJUNG BIN POWER

JURUTERA PERUNDING MADANI SDN. BHD.

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL

FORM OF TENDER JKR 203B (Pind. 5/2008)

LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE OF TENDER JKR 203D (Pind. 8/2008)

APPENDIX TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

2. SPECIAL PROVISIONS TO THE CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

BANK GUARANTEE FORM FOR PERFORMANCE BOND

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL

1) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDING WORKS

2) STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS

MEASUREMENT OF AMPLICATION AND PRICING FACTOR

SCHEDULES OF DAYWORK RATES

SOIL INVESTIGATION REPORT

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL

UPGRADING LUBE OIL / CHEMICAL STORAGE

OPEN STORAGE SHED

TENDER DOCUMENT AND FEES

One (1) copy of Tender Document comprising of Instruction to

One (1) set of Tender Drawings.

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

TENDER DEPOSIT/VALIDITY PERIOD

For the first default his registration as a Contractor will be suspended

For third default his registration will be cancelled.

TENDER TABLE DOCUMENTS

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

SPECIAL PROVISION FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT

Bank/Insurance Guarantee Bond which is equivalent to five percent

Performance Guarantee Sum where the Tenderer shall allow

Tenderer will be required to choose which type of Performance Bond will be

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

INTERPRETATION OF TENDER DOCUMENT

NO ALTERATION, CONDITION OR QUALIFILICATION ALLOWED

MULTILATED OR DETACHED TENDER DOCUMENTS

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

CONFIDENTIALITY OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

SCRUTINY OF TENDER TABLE DOCUMENTS

MAXIMUM COMPLETION PERIOD

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

The Form of Tenderer, including appendices there to

INSTRUCTION TO TENDERER (Contd)

ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF TENDER

COMPLIANCE WITH CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

(J.K.R. 203B-Pind. 5/2008)

mengikut Pelan-Pelan No ..................................................................................................................................

* Pentender dikehendaki memotong yang tidak berkenaan.

Bertarikh pada................ haribulan......... 20....

3. Jika mana-mana pentender:

Tender-tender dan dokumen-dokumen berhubung dengannya yang dinyatakan dalam

6. Jika sekiranya atas permintaannya, seseorang pentender diberikan salinan-salinan sesuatu

Bon Pelaksanaan (jika pentender memilih kaedah Jaminan Bank/Bank Islam/BPIMB/Insurans/

Nombor pendaftaran di bawah Skim Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja (PERKESO);

(J.K.R 203D Pind. 8/2008)

TANJUNG BIN POWER SDN BHD

THE PROPOSED UPGRADING OF WAREHOUSE, LUBE OIL AND CHEMICAL

Jaminan Bank / Bank Islam /Bank Pembangunan & Infrastruktur Malaysia

* Batalkan yang mana tidak berkenaan.

Jaminan Insurans/ Takaful

Polisi lnsurans Tanggungan Awam (iaitu insurans terhadap bencana kepada

Polisi Insurans Kerja: RM.

Nombor-nombor pendaftaran di bawah Skim Keselamatan Sosial Pekerja